GRAMMAR EBOOK K24ATC

"Only in grammar can you be more than perfect." - Willian

GRAMMAR

E-BOOK - K24ATC

FACULTY OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES

BANKING ACADEMY OF VIETNAM

ALL ABOUT

TENSES

SIMPLE PRESENT

GRAMMAR

Affirmative Statement

S + (often, usually, rarely,…) + V

Negative Statement

S + do/does + not V

Y/N question

Wh-question

Do/Does + S + V ?

Yes, it does

No, it doesn’t

Wh-word + do/does + S + V ?

GRAMMAR NOTES

a. Use the simple present to describe what regularly

happens

the simple present is used to talk about scientific facts

E.g: The earth goes round the sun.

b. Use the simple present with adverbs of frequency to

express how often something happens

Be careful!: Adverbs of frequency usually go before the

main verb, but they go after the verb be.

E.g: They never come late

They are never late

(continued)

Võ Thị Đức Mạnh

SIMPLE PRESENT

GRAMMAR NOTES

c. Use the simple present with most non-action verbs. Do not use the

present progressive even when the verb describes a situation that exists

at the moment of speaking.

Non-action verbs usually describe states or situations but not actions.

They are used to:

-Express emotions (hate, love, like, want, feel, fear, trust). “Feel” is

often used in the progressive form.

E.g: I love you

Rick feels homesick or

Rick is feeling homesick

-Describe mental states (know, remember, believe, think,

understand)

E.g: You don’t remember our wedding anniversary !?

I know a lot of U.S. customs now

-Show possession (have, own, possess, belong)

E.g: I have a lot of shoes

Some students own cars

-Describe senses and perceptions (hear, see, smell, taste, feel,

notice, seem, look, be , appear, sound)

E.g: She seems tired

I hear the telephone

Be careful!: Some verbs that describe senses and perceptions such as

taste, smell, feel, and look can have both a non-action and an action

meaning

E.g: The soup tastes good, try some (non-action)

She’s tasting the soup to see if it needs more salt (action)


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 1: Read this extract from a charity leaflet supporting Fairtrade. Match

each imperative with the rest of the sentence.

1. Don’t miss

2. Come

3.Listen

4. Learn

5.Take part in

6. Win

7. Buy

8. Make

a.some wonderful presents for yourself and

those you love .

b.lots of games and fun activities.

c.some great prizes in our raffle to raise funds

for Afghan women.

d.a real difference to many of the world's

poorest people.

e.how you can improve the lives of farmers in

developing countries.

f.to our guest speakers talking about Fairtrade

and development issues.

g.to our first Fairtrade market on 16 July at Cutty

Sark Gardens.

h.your chance to support Fairtrade.

Ex 2: Complete these FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) using the verbs in

brackets in the present simple.

Q: What 1 is …...(be) Skype?

A: Skype 2 ……...(be) a software programme that 3 ......(allow) users to make

telephone calls over the Internet

Q: 4 …………. (Skype have) any advantages over the usual telephone

providers?

A: Yes. Calls to other users of the service 5 ……………. (not cost) anything. It

also 6 ... ................... (include) other features that normal telephone

connections 7 .. .................... (not have).

Q: What other features 8 ………………(Skype have)?

A: Instant messaging, where one person 9 .. ............ (write) texts to

communicate with other people. And video conferencing, where people 10

...................... (talk) to each other on a headset with a video link-up.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 3: Put the verb into the correct form.

1 Julie doesn’t drink (not / drink) tea very often.

2 What time .................... (the banks / close) here?

3 I've got a car, but I ....................... (not / use) it much.

4 'Where ...........................(Ricardo / come) from?' 'From Cuba.'

5 ‘What............................ (you/do)?' 'Tm an electrician.'

6 It ........ ... (take) me an hour to get to work. How long ......................(it / take) you?

7 Look at this sentence. What ......................(this word / mean)?

8 David isn't very fit. He.......................... (not / do) any sport.

Ex 4: You ask Lisa questions about herself and her family. Write the

questions.

1 You know that Lisa plays tennis. You want to know how often. Ask her.

-> How often do you play tennis ?

2 Perhaps Lisa's sister plays tennis too. You want to know. Ask Lisa.

. . -> ...............................your sister............................................................................... ?

3 You know that Lisa reads a newspaper every day. You want to know which one.

Ask her.

-> ..................................................................................................................................... ?

4 You know that Lisa's brother works. You want to know what he does. Ask Lisa.

-> .................................................................................................................................... ?

5 You know that Lisa goes to the cinema a lot. You want to know how often. Ask her.

-> .......................................................................................................................................?

6 You don't know where Lisa's grandparents live. You want to know. Ask Lisa.

-> ....................................................................................................................................... ?


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 5: Use the following verbs to complete the sentences. Sometimes you

need the negative:

believe eat flow go grow make rise tell translate

1 The earth goes round the sun.

2 Rice doesn't grow in Britain.

3 The sun ................ in the east.

4 Bees..................honey.

5 Vegetarians.................... meat.

6 An atheist........................... in God.

7 An interpreter......................... from one language into

another.

8 Liars are people........................... who the truth.

9 The River Amazon...........................into the Atlantic Ocean.

Ex 6: Choose a job title from box A and a verb from box B. Describe what

people with these jobs do, making any necessary changes to the verbs. See

the example.

Personnel officers

An architect

A journalist

Venture capitalists

Management consultants

A stockbroker

An air steward

Auditors

invest

design

write

check

advise

look after

arrange

buy and sell

1 An air steward looks after passengers on a plane.

2 ....................................................................................stocks and shares.

3 ....................................................................................houses.

4 ....................................................................................in small, high-risk companies.

5 ....................................................................................the accounts of a company.

6 ....................................................................................companies on how they should be run.

7 ................................................................................... articles for a newspaper.

8 ....................................................................................interviews.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 7: Read this extract from some advice on giving presentations. Complete

the extract using the verbs in the box in the present simple or imperative.

be not forget help not like make need start suggest not tell think try warm up

Before your presentation, 1warm up your brain. Our brain, like our muscles, 2

....................... warming up to help it work. Before presentations, I often 3 .......................

of numbers between one and ten and then 4 ......... to remember a professional

athlete who wore each number.

A good beginning 5 ................... relax the audience, so 6 .................. by thanking your

audience for coming. Then 7 ....................... a nice comment about the town or area,

but 8 ....................... careful: audiences 9 .. .......... listening to this for too long.

Many people 1O....................... you start with a joke, but 11 . .... that humour can be

difficult. 12 ............ any jokes that could offend people.

Ex 8: Read this information about Nike and Adidas. If the verbs in italics are

correct, tick (X) them. If they are wrong, correct them.

Nike, Inc 1have its headquarters in the United States near

Beaverton, Oregon. It 2 is the world's leading supplier of athletic

shoes and sports equipment. The name Nike 3 come from Nike,

the Greek goddess of victory. Nike 4 does not market its products

only under its own brand. It also 5 sometimes uses names such as

Air Jordan and Team Starter. Because Nike 6 creates goods for a

wide range of, sports, 7 always it has competition from every

sports and sportsfashion brand.

Another global leader in the sporting goods industry 8 are the

Adidas Group. Products from the Adidas Group 9 are available in

virtually every country in the world. Its head offices 10 is not in

the US but in Herzogenaurach, Germany.

Adidas' various companies 11 produces much more than just

sports goods. The company also 12 operates design studios and

development departments at other locations around the world.

1 has

2 x

3.................

4.................

5.................

6.................

7.................

8.................

9.................

10..............

11..............

12...............


PRESENT PROGRESSIVE

GRAMMAR


S + be(am/is/are) + V(ing)

Negative Statement

S + be(am/is/are) + not + V(ing)

Y/N question Be(am/is/are) + S + V(ing) ?

Yes, S + be

No, S + be not

Wh-question Wh-word + be + S + V(ing) ?

We use the present continuous to:

1. To indicate an activity at the moment of speaking:

B: I'm writing a business plan.

2. To indicate an activity around the time of speaking:

The group is setting up a new Hong Kong office.

3. To indicate the temporary nature of an activity:

Growth prospects are driving exchange rates at the moment.

(but this is not always the situation).

4. To indicate a fixed arrangement in the future:

We are discussing further expansion of the programme at next month's

meeting.

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Present progressive

vs

Present Simple

Routine vs moment of speaking

1. Henry works for PDQ a business delivery company. Every day

he collects and delivers packages for local companies. (routine)

2. The man in the post room is packing some parcels. Henry is

waiting in reception. (moment of speaking)

General activities vs current projects

1. I work for a firm of recruitment consultants. We design

psychometric tests. (general activities)

2. At the moment we're working on new tests for the personnel

department of a large oil company. (current projects)

Permanent vs temporary situations

1. Peter deals with enquiries about our car fleet sales.

(permanent)

2. I am dealing with enquiries about fleet sales while Peter is

away on holiday. (temporary)

Facts vs slow changes

1. As a rule, cheap imports lead to greater competition. (facts)

2. Cheap imports are leading to the closure of a number of

inefficient factories. (slow changes)

Comparison:

S + always + V: diễn đạt một hành động mà ta

thường xuyên, luôn luôn làm. (present simple)

E.g: I always go to work at 7 A.M

S + be + always + V-ing: thể hiện ý than phiền, phàn

nàn về một việc gì đó mà mình hay người khác

thường hay làm, hay mắc phải. (present continuos)

E.g: He is always making mistakes on important

occasions.

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 1: Put the verbs in brackets into the present continous. See the

example.

1. Could I ring you back in a few minutes? I am talking (talk) to

someone on the other line.

2. Jamila is upstairs with Alexel and Roy. They __________ (have) a

meeting about the

products website.

3. What ___________ (you/do) here? I thought you had gone to the

airport.

4. Could you tell Mr Gaspaldi that Miss Lee is here? He ___________

(expect) me.

5. Oh no, the printer ___________ (not work). I'll call the IT Department.

6. This is a very bad line. _______________ (you/call) from your mobile?

7. I ________________ (phone) to say that I'll be home late this evening.

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 2: Read these extracts from an article about corporate environmental

responsibility. Complete the extracts using the verbs in the boxes in the

present continuous.

UK businesses 1.are resisting investing in green initiatives, according to a recent

survey. A fifth of businesses in London 2…….. enough to protect the environment,

it says. Only one-third of companies 3……… in environmental initiatives, such as

buying energy-saving office equipment. Supermarkets especially 4…….. customers

make green choices. ‘They 5………. a bit slow to offer green alternatives to plastic

bags’, said an environmental watchdog.

‘We decided in 1992 to make the organisation greener and we 1…………. on it

because it is a continuous process, but we feel we 2………. good progress. We

3……….. a huge amount of money into research and the vast majority of it 4……….

into conventional office technologies, but into new systems. We 5……… at the idea

of the paperless office and we 6.are also doing a lot of research into new systems’.

Hotels 1………...a range of green programmes, partly because their business

guests 2………. it, and also because hotels 3………… that going green saves money.

‘The industry 4……….. environmental issues very seriously’, said a spoken man of

the Business Travel Association.

Ex 3: Read this article about farming. Change the verbs in italics to the present

continuous to emphasise that the article is describing a current trend.

1.are going to

2.

3.

5.

6.

7.

9.

10.

11.

4.

8. 12.

Ex 4: Two friends are talking abounheir working conditions. Complete this

conversation using the verbs in brackets in the present simple or the

present continuous.

GEMMA: 1 Do you share (you share) an office?

RASHID: Well, I usually 2 ............. .............(have) my own office, but at the moment I

3................... ... .. (share) an office with two colleagues because they 4 .................

(redecorate) mine.

GEMMA: 5 ................. ........ (you like) sharing?

RASHID: No, actually I.6 .......(hate) it. It's impossible to concentrate because my

colleagues 7. ........... (always/talk) about their social lives. And the office

8................... (smell) terrible because one of them 9 .................. ....... (always/ eat) at

his desk.

GEMMA: What 10 …………. (he/ eat)?

RASHID: Oh, everything! And the other colleague, who 11 ................. (cycle) to work

every day,12 .. ... (not have) a shower when he 13 ...... (get) here. I 14 .....................

... (not want) to stay in this office any more!

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 5: Read these newspaper extracts about various projects that different

companies are currently involved in. Match the extracts in column A with the

extracts in column B. See the example.

1.China's Central Semiconductor

Manufacturing Corporation is planing a

big increase in output. b

a.At the moment it is carrying out

research into drugs to cure the

common cold.

2.The Hotel Sorrento in Seattle is

upgrading its rooms and facilities.

3.Biota is leading Australian

biotechnology company.

4.Microsoft is anticipating a downturn in

PC sales.

b.It is upgrading its manufacturing

plants to produce state-of-the-art

silicon.

c.It is planing to introduce the cartoon

character to children's TV shows in the

US.

d.It is selling songs online through

MusicNet and Pressplay.

5.Airbus is confident about the longterm

future of the airline industry.

6.EMI is looking at new ways of

distributing music.

7.Bloomsbury publishes fiction and

reference books.

e.It is developing a new double-decker

jumbo jet which will come into

production in a few years.

f.It is converting its 154 rooms into 76

luxury suites for business travellers,

each equipped with fax machines and

data ports.

g.It is currently nearing completion of a

new dictionary project.

8.HIT Entertainment has bought the

rights to Pingu.

h.It is developing new games consoles

and other products for the home to

compensate for this.

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 6: Complete the dialogue with am, is, or are and the -ing form of the verbs in

brackets.

Andy: Hi, Jemal. Andy here. l am calling (call) because we need some help down here.

Jemal: OK. What's the problem?

Andy: We(2)______________(try) to set up the exhibition, but there's only me and Bill

here. Can Selma or Fatih come down?

Jemal: I'm sorry, but Selma's busy. She (3)______________(help) Sedat today, and

Fatih(4)___________ (work) from home.

Andy: What about the two new people from Sales?

Jemal: No, they(5)______________ (meet) the Istanbul team at the moment. Look, I know.

I can come and help. I(6)____________(finish) a report at the moment, but I can be there

in twenty minutes. Is that OK?

Andy: Great - thanks a lot. See you soon.

Ex 7: In these picture there are 3 men (Pierre, Alain, Michel) and 4 women

(Anna, Marie, Gina, Laure). Make sentenses from the notes. Say who is who.

1. Anna/not talk/to Pierre. Anna is not talking to Pierre

2. Pierre/not talk/ to Alain or Michel. _____________________________________________

3. Alain/not hold/a glass of wine. _________________________________________________

4. Anna/not wear/a red dress. ____________________________________________________

5. Marie/not leave/the party. _____________________________________________________

6. Pierre/not talk/to Lauren or Marie. ____________________________________________

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 8: Listen and write questions using the verbs in the present continuous.

1. (you / enjoy) Are you enjoying your job at the moment? (it / go) .................... well?

2. (What projects / you / work)……………………………… on at the moment ?

3. (you / hope)………………………………………………………….. to get promoted soon ?

4. (your colleagues / learn) …………………………………………… English too ?

5. (anyone in your department / look) ………………………………………. for a new job ?

6. (How / your company / do)………………………………………………….. this year ?

7. (it I achieve) ................................................ its goals ?

8. (What / your company / invest)………………………………………………… in ?

9. (your boss / make) …………………………………………………… any major changes this year ?

10. (he or she / run) ……………………………........................................... your department well?

Ex 9: Read this student's journal. There are eleven mistakes in the use of the

present progressive or simple present.

Itâ'ŎsÛ 1į2İ:ń3ı0Į an«di I sÛitâ in« tâhen l£ibrÕarÕyă rÕightâ n«o³wý.Ŋ Myă cl£asÛsÛmªatâen arÕen enatâin«g l£uçn«ch

tâo³gentâhenrÕ,Ņ buçtâ I'Ŏmª n«o³tâ huçn«grÕyă yăentâ.Ŋ Atâ ho³mªen,Ņ wýen enatâ n«envüenrÕ tâhisÛ enarÕl£yă.Ŋ To³diayă

o³uçrÕ jo³uçrÕn«al£ tâo³pÒic isÛ cuçl£tâuçrÕen sÛho³ck .Ŋ Itâ'ŎsÛ a go³o³di tâo³pÒic fo³rÕ mªen rÕightâ n«o³wý bencauçsÛen

I'Ŏmª benin«g pÒrÕentâtâyă ho³mªensÛick .Ŋ I mªisÛsÛ mªyă o³l£di rÕo³uçtâin«en.Ŋ Atâ ho³mªen,Ņ wýen al£wýayăsÛ arÕen enatâin«g a

big mªenal£ atâ 2İ:ń0Į0Į in« tâhen aftâenrÕn«o³o³n«.Ŋ Thenn« wýen rÕensÛtâ.Ŋ Buçtâ henrÕen in« To³rÕo³n«tâo³

I'Ŏmª havüin«g a 3ı:ń0Į0Į co³n«vüenrÕsÛatâio³n« cl£asÛsÛ.Ŋ EvüenrÕyădiayă I al£mªo³sÛtâ fal£l£ asÛl£enenpÒ in« cl£asÛsÛ.Ŋ

EvüenrÕyă diayă I al£mªo³sÛtâ fal£l£ asÛl£enenpÒ in« cl£asÛsÛ,Ņ an«di mªyă tâenachenrÕ asÛk mªen,Ņ "ōArÕen yăo³uç bo³rÕendi?ŋ"ō.Ŋ

Of co³uçrÕsÛen I'Ŏmª n«o³tâ bo³rÕendi.Ŋ I juçsÛtâ n«enendi mªyă aftâenrÕn«o³o³n« n«apÒ!Ň ThisÛ cl£asÛsÛ al£wýayăsÛ isÛ fuçn«.Ŋ

ThisÛ sÛenmªensÛtâenrÕ wýen wýo³rÕk o³n« a pÒrÕo³jenctâ wýitâh vüidieno³ camªenrÕasÛ.Ŋ Myă tâenamª isÛ fil£mªin«g grÕo³uçpÒsÛ

o³f pÒeno³pÒl£en frÕo³mª diiffenrÕenn«tâ cuçl£tâuçrÕensÛ.Ŋ Wen arÕen an«al£yăzČen "ōsÛo³cial£ diisÛtâan«cen"ō.Ŋ Thatâ mªenan«sÛ

ho³wý cl£o³sÛen tâo³ enach o³tâhenrÕ tâhensÛen pÒeno³pÒl£en sÛtâan«di.Ŋ Acco³rÕdiin«g tâo³ mªyă n«enwý wýatâch,Ņ itâ'ŎsÛ 1į2İ:ń5ĳ5ĳ,Ņ

sÛo³ I l£enavüen n«o³wý fo³rÕ mªyă 1į:ń0Į0Į cl£asÛsÛ.Ŋ TenachenrÕ henrÕen rÕenal£l£yă arÕenn«'Ŏtâ l£ik in«g tâarÕdiin«ensÛsÛ!Ň

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 10: Decide if the speaker is talking about routine activities or activities going

on at the moment of speaking. Put the verbs into the present simple or the

present continuous. See the example.

Interviewer: "Do you usually organize (you/usually organize) the

delivery of milk to the factory?2...........(the farmers/bring) it here

themselves?

Bill: No,3.........................(we/always collect) the milk ourselves,

and the tankers 4................................(deliver) it to the

pasteurization plant twice a day.

Interviewer: What sort of quality control procedures 5.................

(you/have)?

Bill: As a rule we 6......................(test) samples of every

consignment, and then the milk 7.................. (pass) down

insulated pipes to the bottling plant, which 8................................

(operate) 24 hours a day. I'll show you round a bit later, but the

production line 9......................(not work) at the moment because

the employees 10 .................(change) shifts.

Ex 11:Choose the best answer.

1.Share prices ___ and the company is really happy about this change.

A.increase B.increases C.are increasing D. is increasing

2.We ____ a new marketing strategy.

A.develop B.are developing C.is developing D.develops

3.The delegation____ at the Hilton until Friday.

A.is staying B.stay C.stays D.are staying

4.The recent survey shows that our consumer base __________________________.

A.grow B.grows C.are growing D.is growing

5.I __________________________ it as we speak.

A.finish B.finishes C.am finishing D.are finishing

6.We are currently __________________________ several acquisitions.

A.considering B. consider C considers D.considdering

7.She __________________ a meeting at the moment.

A.has B.have C.is having D.are having

8.Look out! The company's building _____________ down.

A.crash B.is crashing C.are crashing D.crashes

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

SIMPLE PAST

GRAMMAR

SIMPLE PAST: BE

Affirmative: S + was/were +...

Negative: S + was/were + not +...

YES/NO Questions: Was/Were + S +...?

Short Answer:

- Yes, S + was/were.

-No, S + was/were + not.

WH-Question: Wh-word + was/were + S (+not) +....?

Answer: S + was/were (+not) +...

A

NOTES

S=I/He/She/It + was

S=We/You/They + were

was not=wasn't

were not=weren't

FOR EXAMPLE

(+) I was at my uncle's house yesterday afternoon.

(-) We weren't in the park last night.

(?) -Was he drink yesterday?

Yes, he was./No, he wasn't.

-Were they at work yesterday morning?

Yes, they were./No, they weren't.

-Why were you sad?

-What was the weather like yesterday?

Nguyễn Thị Hồng Ngọc

GRAMMAR

SIMPLE PAST: REGULAR

AND IRREGULAR VERBS

Affirmative: S + V2/V(ed) +...

Negative: S + did not + V +...

YES/NO Questions: Did + S + V +...?

Short Answer:

- Yes, S + did.

- No, S + did not.

WH-Questions: Wh-word + did + S

(+not) + V?

Answer: S + V2/V-ed...

NOTES

did not = didn't

V => V(ed)/V2 (affirmative)

V-inf (negative/questions)

Eg:

type => typed

smile => smiled

travel => travelled

study => studied

grow => grew

sing => sang

swim => swam....

(+) We visited Australia last summer.

FOR EXAMPLE

(-) She didn't show me how to open the computer.

(?) -Did Cristiano play for Manchester United?

=> Yes, he did./ No, he didn't.

-Why did she break up with him?

-What did you do last Sunday?

Signs to identify the past simple:

yesterday; last(month, year, summer,

week,...); ago; at, on, in + time in the past,...


GRAMMAR NOTES

To describe an action, event that happened at a specific time, or a period of

time in the past and ended completely in the past.

Eg: My children came home late last night.

To describe a repeated action in the past.

Eg: John visited his geandmather every weekend when he wasn't married.

To describe actions that happened consecutively in the past.

Eg: Ngoc came home, took a nap, then had lunch.

To describe an action that interrupted an action in progress in the past. NOTE:

The action in progress is divided into the past continuous, the action that

interrupted is divided into the simple past tense).

Eg: When Jane was cooking breakfast, the lights suddenly went out.

Used in conditional sentences type 2 (conditional sentences are not real in the

present).

Eg: If you were me, you would do it.

Used in unreal wishes.

Eg: I wish I was in England now.

The past simple is often used when there is "for + time in the past". If the

action happened in the past and ended in the past, we must use the past

simple. And if the action just started in the past, continues into the present

and continues into the future, or its results still affect the present, we use the

present perfect.

Eg: He worked in that bank for 5 years.

Used to describe a historical event.

Eg: the Chinese invented printing.

When the action happens explicitly at a certain time even if the time is not

mentioned.

Eg: The train was ten minutes late.

The past simple is used for actions that were completed in the past at a

certain time. Therefore it is used for a past action when it indicates the time

or when the time is asked.

Eg: When did you meet my brother?


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex1: Use the verbs in brackets to complete the sentenses

below in the past simple.

1. I (eat)___________ dinner at six o’clock yesterday.

2. A: ___________ Helen (drive)___________ to work? – B: Yes, she ___________.

3. My neighbor (buy)___________ a new car last week.

4. They (go)___________ to Italy on their last summer holiday.

5. ___________ they (swim)___________ at the beach? – B: No, they __________.

6. My family and I (see)___________ a comedy movie last night.

7. First, we (do)___________ exercise, and then we (drink)___________ some water.

8. Suddenly, the animal jumped and (bite)___________ my hand.

9. What time (do)___________ you (get up)___________ this morning?

10. The Wright brothers (fly)___________ the first airplane in 1903.

11. I think I (hear)___________ a strange sound outside the door one minute ago.

12. When I was ten years old, I (break)___________ my arm. It really (hurt) __________.

13. The police (catch)___________ all three of the bank robbers last week.

14. How many times (do)___________ you (read)___________ that book?

15. Unfortunately, I (forget)___________ to (bring)___________ my money.

Ex2: Use the verbs in brackets to complete the sentenses below

in the simple past tense. Notice the situation of the sentence.

1. It was warm, so I took off my coat. (take).

2. The film wasn’t very goor. I didn’t enjoy it very much. (enjoy)

3. I knew Sarah was very busy, so I ….. her (disturb)

4. I was very tired, so I ….. the party early. (leave)

5. The bed was very uncomfortable. I ….. very well (sleep)

6. The window was open and a bird ….. into the room (fly)

7. The hotel wasn’t very expensive. It ….. very much (cost)

8. I was in a hurry, so I ….. time to phone you (have).

9. It was hard carrying the bags. They ….. very heavy. (be)


FOCUSED

PRACTCE

Ex3: Read what Laure has to say about a typical workday. Then

complete the sentences below.

Laure: I usually get up at 7 o’clock and have a big breakfast. I walk to work, which

takes me about an hour. I start work at 8:45. I never have lunch. I finish work at 5

o’clock. I’m always tired when I get home. I usually cook a meal in the evening. I

don’t usually go out, I go to bed at about 11 o’clock and I always sleep well.

Yesterday was a typical working day for Laura. Write what she did ordidn’t do

yesterday.

She got up at 7 o’clock

1. She ….. a big breakfast

2. She …..

3. It ….. to get to work.

4. ….. at 8:45.

5. ….. lunch

6. ….. at 5 o’ clock

7. ….. tired when ….. home.

8. ….. a meal yesterday evening

9. ….. out yesrerday evening.

10. ….. at 11 o’ clock

11. ….. well last night.

Ex4: Rewrite the following sentences in the past simple.

1. It/ be/ cloudy/ yesterday.

2. In 1990/ we/ move/ to another city.

3. When/ you/ get/ the first gift?

4. She/ not/ go/ to the church/ five days ago.

5. How/ be/ he/ yesterday?

6. Mrs. James/ come back home/ and/ have/ lunch/ late/ last night?

7. They/ happy/ last holiday?

8. How/ you/ get there?

9. I/ play/ football/ last/ Sunday.

10. My/ mother/ make/ two/ cake/ four/ day/ ago.

11. Tyler/ visit/ his/ grandmother/ last/ month.

12. Joni/ go/ zoo/ five/ day/ ago.

13. We/ have/ fun/ yesterday.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex5: Choose the word below and fill in the correct form of the

word.

teach cook want spend ring

be sleep study go write

1. She…..out with her boyfriend last night.

2. Laura…..a meal yesterday afternoon.

3. Mozart…..more than 600 pieces of music.

4. I…..tired when I came home.

5. The bed was very comfortable so they…..very well.

6. Jamie passed the exam because he…..very hard.

7. My father…..the teenagers to drive when he was alive.

8. Dave…..to make a fire but there was no wood.

9. The little boy…..hours in his room making his toys.

10. The telephone…..several times and then stopped before I could answer it.

Ex6: Give the corect form of the verbs in brackets to complete the

story about Snow White.

Snow White was the daughter of a beautiful queen, who died when the girl (be)1

…… young. Her father (marry) 2………….again, but the girl’s stepmother was very

jealous of her because she was so beautiful.

The evil queen (order) 3…………. a hunter to kill Snow White but he couldn’t do it

because she was so lovely. He (chase) 4………….her away instead, and she (take)

5…………. refuge with seven dwarfs in their house in the forest. She (live)

6………….with the dwarfs and took care of them and they (love) 7………….her dearly.

Then one day the talking mirror (tell) 8………….the evil queen that Snow White was

still alive. She (change) 9………….herself into a witch and (make) 10………….a

poisoned apple. She (go) 11…………. to the dwarfs’ house disguised as an old

woman and tempted Snow White to eat the poisoned apple, which (put)

12………….her into an everlasting sleep.

Finally, a prince (find) 13………….her in the glass coffin where the dwarfs had put

her and woke her up with a kiss. Snow White and the prince (be)

14………….married and lived happily ever after.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex7:Look at the pictures and complete the sentences. Use the

correct form of the past simple .

Eg: I don’t want to go and see the film because I saw it last week.

1. I don’t need a football because ……………………………………………………….............

2. I know a lot about Paris because …………………………………………………….............

3. I don’t need to worry about my homework because ………………………………...

4. I haven’t got a PlayStation anymore because ……………………………………….......

5. Mum is angry with me because ………………………………………………………............

Ex8: Make the past simple, positive, negative or question.

1) Where _______________(she/ go) last summer holiday?

2) What ______________(you/ do) last month?

3) He ______________(work) in a factory.

4) You ______________(not/ call) your parents last night.

5) ______________(you/ wear) your pink dress?

6) He ______________(not/ read) that story.

7) ______________(you/ go) on Sunday morning?

8) ______________(she/ study) English last night?

9) ______________(we/ arrive) last night?

10) Who ______________(you/ meet) yesterday?

11) ______________(they/ come) to the birthday party?

12) She ______________(not/ meet) her relatives.

13) ______________(she/ go) to the cinema with you?


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex9: Find mistakes and corect them.

1. At present, I'm work as a teacher in a secondary school and I plan to work here

for 2 or 3 years before going to Australia to study.

2. Fire are one of the most important inventions in history.

3. Beyonce was now a very well-known all over the world and she has released

several albums in her singing career.

4. In the future, I came back to Indonesia to work after having a long vacation in

Japan.

5. They haven't seen each other since a long time.

6. The person I love the most is my elder brother, who are a very brave person.

7. Mr. Hung teaching us the subject "Applied Linguistics" when we were freshmen

in the university.

8. George Clooney, a famous actor, achieved many prizes in his acting career so

far.

9. It was a cloudy day in November, 2013 and I am having to take the last exam of

my student life.

10. Smartphone helped us a lot in our daily life.

Ex10: Listen and complete the following dialogue.

Peter: Hi Mary, what (1)......... you do last weekend?

Mary: I (2)......... a lot of things. On Saturday, I (3).......... shopping.

Peter: What did you (4)..........?

Mary: I (5)........... a new dress, I also (6).......... a movie at the cinema.

Peter: Which movie did you (7)...........?

Mary: Jurassic Park 3.

Peter: What did you (8)......... after?

Mary: Well, I (9).......... home, (10)........... a shower and then went out.

Peter: Did you (11)......... in a restaurant?

Mary: Yes, Tom and I (12).......... at The Green Steak.

Peter: Did you (13)........... your dinner?

Mary: Yes, we (14)........... our dinner very much. And you Peter, What did you do

last weekend?

Peter: Unfortunately, I (15)........... go out this weekend.

Mary: What did you do?

Peter: I had a cough and a fever, and I (16)............ home.

Mary: Poor you!


Past progressive

• Notes

a. Use the past progressive to describe an action that was in progress at a specific

time in the past. The action began before the specific time and may or may not

continue after the specific time.

E.g: My wife and I were eating at 6:00.

Be careful!: Non-action verbs are not usually used in the progressive.

E.g: She heard about the burglary

Not: she was hearing about the burglary

b. Use the past progressive with the simple past to talk about an action that was

interrupted by another action. You often use when, while, or as.

E.g: He was skiing when he fell.

Use while to introduce the past progressive action.

E.g: While he was skiing, he fell.

c. Use the past progressive with while to talk about two actions in progress at the

same time in the past. Use the past progressive in both clause.

E.g: My wife was talking on the phone while I was watching TV.

d. Notice that time clause ( the part of the sentence with when/while) can come at the

beginning of the end of the sentence.

E.g: When you called, I was eating.

e. Use a comma after the time clause when it comes at the beginning. Do not use a

comma when it comes at the end.

E.g: I was eating when you called.

Đặng Thúy Nga

Be careful! A sentence with both clauses in the simple past has a very different

meaning from a sentence with one clause in the simple past and one clause in

the past progressive.

a) Both clauses in the simple past:

When she saw the storm clouds, she drove home.

(First, she saw the storm clouds; then she drove home.)

b) One clause in the simple past, the other in the past progressive.

When she saw the storm clouds, she was driving home.

(First, she was driving home; then she saw the storm clouds.)

Use the past progressive to focus on the duration of action, not its completion.

Use the past simple to focus on the completion of an action.

Đặng Thúy Nga

Ex 1: Complete the following sentences with your ideas, using the

Past Continuous

1. At 8 o’clock yesterday evening,

.................................................................………………….......

2. At 5 o’clock last Monday,

........................................................................................................

3. At 7:45 yesterday evening

.......................................................................................

4. At 10.15 yesterday morning,

..................................................................................................

5. Matt phoned while

.........................................................................................................

6. The doorbell rang while I

........................................................................................................

7. We saw an accident while we

................................................................................................

8. Ann fell asleep while ....................................................

..........................................................

9. Half an hour ago,

.............................................................................................

10. My dad was always complaining about my room when

.............................................................................................

Đặng Thúy Nga

EX2: Each of these sentences has a mistake in it. Write the correct sentence.

► The hotel were very quiet.

The hotel was very quiet.

1. It was peaceful, and the birds were sing.

...................................................................................................................................................

2. I washed my hair when the phone rang.

................................................................................................................................................

3. You came not to the club last night.

...................................................................................................................................................

4. It taked ages to get home.

..................................................................................................................................................

5. We- tried to keep quiet because the baby sleeping.

..................................................................................................................................................

6. As I was watching him, the man was suddenly running aways.

.................................................................................................................................................

7. We pass a petrol station five-minutes ago.

..................................................................................................................................................

8. Everything was seeming OK.

................................................................................................................................................

9. Where bought you that bag?

...............................................................................................................................................

10. When I heard the alarm, I was leaving the room immediately.

...................................................................................................................................................

Đặng Thúy Nga

Ex 3: Complete each sentence in two ways. In a, use the past continuous to say

what was happening at the time. In b, use the past simple to say what

happened next. See the example.

1 When I got to the airport ...

a. The company driver was waiting for me.

b. I went straight to the meeting

2 When I got to work this morning

a.......................................................................................................................................................

b......................................................................................................................................................

3 When the accident happened

a......................................................................................................................................................

b......................................................................................................................................................

4 When they decided to close down the factory

a.......................................................................................................................................................

b.....................................................................................................................................................

Đặng Thúy Nga

Ex 4: Complete the text with the past simple or past continuous form of the

verbs in brackets. See the example.

Accidental discoveries and inventions

Although companies spend billions of dollars on research and development, new

products sometimes come about just by chance.

SAFETY CLASS - The idea of safety glass came to a French scientist, Edouard

Benedictus, in 1903. He 1 was working (work) in his laboratory one night when he

suddenly 2 .........................(knock) over a glass jar containing celluloid. The glass broke

but did not shatter because it stuck to the celluloid, and this led to the idea of safety

glass - two sheets of glass with a central sheet of celluloid.

TEFLON - Roy Plunkett 3.................(make)the first batch of Teflon while he 4.............

(work)for Du Pont. He 5.........................(carry) out research into coolant gases when he

6 ................(leave) one batch in a container overnight. He came back the next day to

find that the gas had turned into Teflon, the slipperiest substance in the world.

PFIZER'S LUCKY BREAK - Scientists at Pfizer's laboratory in England 7 .........................

(test) a new heart drug called Viagra when they 8.........................(realize) that, although

it was of little use in treating heart problems, it had some unexpected side-effects.

The result was a hugely successful new product that has probably done more to save

the rhinoceros than anything else in history.

Đặng Thúy Nga

FUTURE

GRAMMAR

· Grammar presentation

Be going to

will


S + be(am/is/are) + going to V

S + will + V

Negative Statement

S + be(am/is/are) + not + going to V

S + will not + V

Y/N question

Be(am/is/are) + S + going to +V ?

Yes, S + be going to

No, S + be not going to

Will + S + V ?

Yes, S + will

No, S + won’t

Wh-question

Wh-word+be+S+going to+V ? Wh-word + will + S + V ?

Nguyễn Thị Nga

FUTURE

For example

Be going to

will

She is going to be an actress soon


I will help you to deal with this.

Negative Statement

I am not going to the cinema tonight.

Are you going to go swimming with your

friends tomorrow afternoon?

Yes, I am

or No, I am

When are you going to leave?

Y/N question

Wh-question

I think She will not meet him

anymore

Will you please give me a

cup of coffee?

Yes, I will

or No, I won’t

What will we do tomorrow?

Dấu hiệu nhận biết

Tonight

Tomorrow

Next (day, week, month, year)

Later

Soon

In + 1 khoảng thời gian

Thời gian trong tương lai

Trong câu có những động từ chỉ quan

điểm như: think, believe, suppose,

perhaps, probably

Nguyễn Thị Nga

grammar

notes

There are several ways to talk about the future.You can use:

+) Be going to

+) Will

+) Present progressive

+) Simple present

E.g: They’re going to have a meeting.

I think I’ll go.

It’s taking place next week.

It starts at 9:00 A.M on Monday

To make predictions or guesses about the future ,use:

+) Be going to

+) Will

Ø Be careful!: Use be going to instead of will when

something in the present helps you make the prediction

about the future.

E.g: Look at those dark clouds! It’s going to rain.

To talk about future intentions or plans, use

+) Be going to

+) Will

+) Present progressive

We often use will when we decide something at the moment of

speaking. We often use the present progressive when we talk

about future plans that already arranged.

E.g : I’ll fly to Mars next week.

I’m flying to Mars next week

. To talk about scheduled future events( timetables,

programs,schedules), use simple present

Verbs such as start, leave and begin are often used this way.

E.g : The conference starts tomorrow morning.

Nguyễn Thị Nga

future tenses

Future tenses

Uses

Simple future

The simple future tense is used for an

action that will occur in the future.

Future progressive

The future progressive tense is used

for an ongoing action that will occur

in the future.

Future perfect

The future perfect tense is used to

describe an action that will have

been completed at some point in the

future.

Future perfect progressive

The future perfect tense is used to

describe an action that will have

been completed at some point in the

future

Nguyễn Thị Nga

Focused practice

exercise 1: Complete the sentences

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

The film __________ at 10:30 pm. ( end)

Taxes __________ next month. (increase)

I __________ your email address. (not/ remember)

Why __________ me your car? (you/not/lend)

__________ the window, please? I can’t reach. (you/ open)

The restaurant was terrible! I __________ there again. (not/

eat)

Jake __________ his teacher for help. (not/ ask)

I __________ to help you. (try)

Where is your ticket? The train __________ any minute. (

arrive)

While the cat’s away, the mice __________. ( play)

Exercise 2: Put the verbs in brackets according to

the appropriate tense

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

I (fly) …………….. by plane tomorrow.

Hi, what time (the train/pull out) …………….. this

evening?

(you/travel) …………….. to Paris tomorrow?

I …………….. (go) to the cinema tonight.

They always (have) …………….. breakfast at 7:30 am.

We (go) …………….. out this weekend.

What time (they/start) …………….. work?

The library (open) …………….. at 8:30 am and

…………….. (close) at 7:30 pm.

The parents (have) …………….. a meeting on

Saturday.

Nguyễn Thị Nga

Focused practice

Exercise 3: Choose the future. Two people are

travelling to a conference. Read their conversation

and circle the most appropriate future forms.

A: I just heard the weather report. 1 It’s raining/ It’s going to

rain tomorrow.

B: Oh no. I hate driving in the rain. And it’s a long drive to

the conference.

A: Wait! I have an idea.2 We’ll take/ We’re going to take the

train instead!

B: Good idea! Do you have a train schedule?

A: Yes, here’s one. There’s a train that 3 will leave/leaves at

7:00 A.M

B: What about lunch? Oh, I know.4 I’ll make/I’m making

some sandwiches for us.

A: OK. You know, it’s a long trip. What 5 are we doing/are

we going to do all those hours ?

B: Don’t worry. 6 We’ll think /we’re thinking of something.

A: You know, we have to get up really early. I think7 I’m

going/I’ll go home now.

B: OK. 8 I’m seeing you/I’ll see you tomorrow. Good night.

Exercise 4: Use the suggested words to

write complete sentences

correction

1. If/ you/ not/ study/ hard/,/ you/ not/ pass/

final/ exam

2. they / come/ tomorrow?

3. rains/ it/ he/ home/ if/ stay.

4. I’m/ she /able/ afraid/ to/ be/ come/ to/

party/ the/ not.

5.You/ look/ tired,/ so/ I/ bring/ you/

something/ eat

Nguyễn Thị Nga

Focused practice

Exercise 5: Rewrite the following questions with be going to

1. Where / we / eat tonight.

2. What / he / do tomorrow.

3. What / I / eat for lunch.

4. Who / carry the shopping for me.

5. What time / you / phone me.

6. When / you / give me a present.

7. How much longer / it / take.

8. Where / Paul / sleep.

9. Why / people / go there.

10. How much wine / they / drink.

Exercise 6: Complete the following sentences:

1.I'm afraid I _________________________ (not/ be) able to come tomorrow.

2. Because of the train strike, the meeting _________________________ (not/

take) place at 9 o'clock.

3. A: “Go and tidy your room.”

B: “I _________________________ (not/ do) it!”

4. If it rains, we _________________________ (not/ go) to the beach.

5. In my opinion, she _________________________ (not/ pass) the exam.

6. A: “I'm driving to the party, would you like a lift?”

B: “Okay, I _________________________ (not/ take) the bus, I'll come with you.”

7. He _________________________ (not/ buy) the car, if he can't afford it.

8. I've tried everything, but he _________________________ (not/ eat).

9. According to the weather forecast, it _________________________ (not/

snow) tomorrow.

10. A: “I'm really hungry.”

B: “In that case we _________________________ (not/ wait) for John.

Nguyễn Thị Nga

Focused practice

Exercise 7. Make the future simple

1) A: There's someone at the door.

B: I (get) it.

2) Joan thinks the Conservatives (win) the next election.

3) A: I'm moving house tomorrow.

B: I (come) and help you.

4) If she passes the exam, she (be) very happy.

5)I (be) there by four o'clock I promise.

6) A: I'm cold.

B: I (turn on) the fire.

7) A: She's late.

B: Don't worry. She (come).

8) The meeting (take) place at 6pm.

9) If you eat all of that cake, you (feel) sick.

10) They (be) home at 10 o'clock.

Exercise 8: Editing

Read the article about jobs of the future. There are seven mistakes in use of the future.

Find and correct them

Which business will create the most jobs?

Did you guess the space travel? If so, Professor Patrick Collin , a professor of

economics in Japan, agree with you. At a recent lecture he said, “It willn’t be long

before people will called their travel agents and books their flights to the Moon .

Imagine! Yes, there is room on tomorrow’s flight to the Moon . It is leaving at 9:00

A.M. It’s go to be full so please arrive early for check-in.

Of course, many people disagree with Collins. They think space travel cost too

much and not many people will travel. They also think that people won’t feel safe

enough to travel into space .But Collins’s research shows that the majority of

people think it will be worth saving their money to travel into space . He claims

that while it probably will start out as an activity for a few rich individuals, it will

grew very quickly-just like the aviation (airplane) industry grew in the last 100

years . After all, Collins reminds us, the Wright brothers flew their first plane in

1903.

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ALL ABOUT TENSES

FUTURE TIME CLAUSES

GRAMMAR

*) Future time clauses are introduced by conjunctions such as after, as soon as,

before, till, until, when, whenever, while or time expressions such as the

minute, the moment etc..

Example:

- When I was 10 years old, my family moved to New York.

- My mom was cooking while my dad was talking on the phone.

Grammar notes

*) Future time clauses can also be used in forms:

once, immediately, the moment, the minute, the day, by the time, while ...

Example:

- Tony will call the restaurant the moment he gets home.

- I'll contact you once I receive an estimate.

- You will be notified the minute your order arrives.

- It will be dark by the time we arrive home.

*) The time clause may come before or after the main clause with no change in

meaning:

Example:

- The moment I hear the doorbell I will put on my coat

- I will put on my coat the moment I hear the doorbell

Nguyễn Thị Yến Nhi - 24A7510104

*) When a sentence about future time has two clauses, the verb in the main

clasuse is often the future (will or be going to). But the verb in the time clauses

is often in the simple present.

*) Do not use will or be going to in a future time clause.

Example:

- She’ll look for a job when she graduates.

- He’s going to work after he graduates.


PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE

GRAMMAR

Defining

The present perfect progressive often shows that

something is unfinished. It started in the past and is

still continuing. The emphasis is on the continuation

of the action

Gramar

Presentation

Statement

Affirmative

Negative

Y/N Question

S + have/has + been + V-ing

S + haven’t/hasn’t + been + V-ing

Have/Has + S + been + V-ing ?

Yes, S + have/has

No, S + haven’t/hasn’t

Wh Question Wh-word + have/has + S + been +V-ing ?

·Notes

+) The present perfect progressive often shows that something is

unfinished. It started in the past and is still continuing. The

emphasis is on the continuation of the action.

Eg: I’ve been watching a film about mafia.( I still watching it)

+) We often use the present perfect progressive to talk about how

long something has been happening.

Eg: I’ve been watching film about affection for 2 weeks

Hồ Thị Quỳnh Như-24A7511754

·Cognitive

signature

Since + mốc thời gian ( không rõ ràng)

Eg: I’ve been swimming since childhood

For + thời gian xác định

Eg: I’ve been studying for 3 hours

All + khoảng thời gian

Eg: I’ve been watching film all night

( All day, all week, since, for, for a long time,

almost every day this week, recently, lately, in the past week,

up until now, and so far, at the moment)

Present perfect and Present perfect progressive

GRAMMAR

Present perfect

Present perfect progressive

Affimative S + have/has +V(PII) S + have/has +been + V(ing)

Negative S + have/has + not + V(PII) S + have/has + not + V(ing)

Yes/No

Questions

Have/Has + S + ( ever ) +

V(PII)?

Yes, S + have/has


Have/Has + S + been +

V(ing)?

Yes, S + have/has


Wh-

Questions

Wh- Word + have/has + S +

V(PII)?


been+ V(ing)?

use

·Often show that something is

finished . The emphasis is on

result of the action

Ex:-I’ve read a book about

elephants.

·Often use the present perfect

to talk about:

-how much someone has

done

-how many thing someone

has done

-how many times someone

has done something

Ex:- I have read a lot about it

-she ‘s written three articles

- I’ve read that book twice

·Often shows that something

is un finished.It started in the

past and is still

continuing.The emphasis is

on the continuation of the

action

·Often use the present perfect

progressive to talk about how

long something has been

happening

Ex:I have been reading books

about elephants for two

month.

Phần lí thuyết: Nguyễn Thị Hồng Nhung

·Some time you can use

either the present perfect

progressive or the present

perfect.

·The meaning is basically the

same .This is especially true

with verbs such as live

,study,teach and work with

for or since

·She ‘s been studying african

elephants for three year.

· She’s studied African

elephants for three year.

Usage note

We often use the present

ferfect to show that

something is permanent.

Ex:They’ve lived here since

they were children.They’ve

always lived here.

We often use the present

ferfect progressive to show

that something is temporary.

Ex:they ‘ve been living here

since 1995,but they are

moving next month.

Signal

Words

·For+N-quãng thời gian(for a

year,for a long time)

Since+N-mốc hoặc điểm thời

gian(since1990,since June)

·For+khoảng thời gian

Ex:They have been listening

to the radio for 3 hour.

·Since +mốc thời gian

Ex:She has been working

since the earlymorning.

·All+thời gian(all the moring

,all the afternoon, all day)

Ex: They have been working

in the field all the morning.


Present perfect and simple past

GRAMMAR

Present perfect

Simple pass

Affimative

S + have/has +V(PII)

(V): S + V(ed/PI)

(be):S + was/were + not +...

Negative

S + have/has + not + V(PII)

(V): S + did+ not + V(inf)

(be):S + was/were + not +...

Yes/No

Questions

Have/Has + S + ( ever ) +

V(PII)?

Yes, S + have/has


(V)Did + S + V(inf)+ V?

Yes, S + did

No, S + didn’t

(be):Was/were+s+… ?

Wh-

Questions


V(PII)?


been+ V(ing)?

use

·To talk about things that

started in the past, continue

up to the present, and may

continue into the future.

Ex: They have lived apart for

the past three year .To talk

about things that happened

at an indefinite time in the

past.

··Often use the Simple pass to

talk about things that

happened in the past and

have no connection to the

present.

Ex: they lived together in

detroit for three year.

·Often use the Simple pass to


happened at a specific time in

the past .The exact time is

known and sometime stated.


XX Do not use the present

perfect with a specific poin in

time . The only exception is

with since.

·I live in Detroit three times to

day

·I’ve lived in Detroit since 2002

Use

·To talk about things that

have happened in the time

period that is not finished

,such as today this morning

,this month , this year.

Ex: he ‘s called three times

today .

XX Sometime expressions

such as this morning ,this

month ,or this year can refer

to an unfinished or finished

time period. Use the present

perfect if the time period is

unfinish .use the simple past

if the time period is finished

·Often use the Simple pass to


happened in a time period

that is finished , such as

yesterday ,last month last

year.

Ex: he called three times

yesterday.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

1. Future time clauses.

Exercise 1:Match the column on the left with the column on the right to

best match the meaning using the future time clause

1. The operation will begin A. after it stops raining

2. She will go running B. while I am ironing.

3. Tom will turn off the lights C. your mother will be very happy

4.It will be dark

5.The day you graduate

D. by the time we arrive home.

E.when he leaves the office.

6.I will watch the match F. as soon asthe patient is ready

Practice 2: Complete the sentences with the words in the box

after until before when as soon as

1.You’ll definitely believe in what he said _______ you see it yourself.

2.I will check my phone for messages ________ I go home.

3.My mother will go to the supermarket ________ she goes to her

company today.

4.Will you wait for me ________I get back?

5.I will apply for the full-time teaching position at Jaxtina English Center

________ I graduate from the university.

Phần bài tập : Nguyễn Thị Hồng Nhung

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 1: Listen and fill in the blank

If you’re thinking of volunteering abroad, why not join us on one of our conservation trip

to Costa Rica this year? We take care of all your travel arrangements, so as soon as

1……. , one of our group leaders will meet you at the airport. Then, once 2……. Time to

relax, and after 3……. Everyone else in the group, we take you on the four-hour bus

journey to the coast. You’ll be working in the Tortuguero National Park on one of our

conservation projects – but when 4……. , there’s plenty of time to enjoy the beautiful

beaches, and while 5……. Here you could even learn a new language. We’re sure that by

the time 6……. You’ll have had an amazing experience!

Ex 2: Listen to the conversation, according on what you’ve heard, choose true

or false

John: hey Phoebe, let’s take an international test. How international are you?

Phoeboe: let’s find out!

John: let’s find out! Have you ever eaten Greek food?

Phoeboe: Greek food?.. Hmm, I’ve eaten fluffalo.

John: was that Greek?

Phoeboe: I think so?

John: okayyy?

Phoeboe: I’d had that, apart from that, I’ve never eaten Greek food, how about you?

John: I think I have? Like, I’ve eaten Greek yogurt. Does that count?

Phoebe: Yeah! That counts!

John: okayyy, then have you eaten Russian food?

Phoeboe: what’s Russian food?


John: I think Russian food is like, boorish, boorish is like the soup, the cabbage

soup?

Phoeboe: hmm, I’ve never eaten Russian food.

John: yeah, maybe, I haven’t eaten Russian food either. Okay, have you eaten

Vietnamese food?

Phoeboe: uhhh, I’ve seen it written down, is it Phở?

John: phở? The noodles?

Phoeboe: yeahh, I’ve eaten Pho before

John: yeah, I’ve been to Vietnam so I’ve eaten Vietnamese food quite a lot. And Pho, the

noodle, is really good though.

Phoeboe: yeah, it’s delicious.

John: okayyy, now, let’s talk about languages.

Phoeboe: okayy?

John: have you ever studied French?

Phoeboe: I have, I’ve studied French for 5 years.

John: Oh, can you still speak it?

Phoeboe: nope, not at all.

John: yeah, me too. I once studied French before but I haven’t spoken French for so

long, I can’t remember anything.

True or False?

1, Phoeboe has tried Greek food before

2, Both have eaten Russian food

3, The boy has been to Vietnam

4, Both have studied French and now speak very well

5, John studied French for 5 years


Ex 3: Listen to the conversation then fill in the blank:

Lucy: Hi marine! How are you? Where were you and your boyfriend last week?

Marie: Great, thanks! We 1….. from Japan! We stay in Tokyo for 2 weeks.

Lucy: Oh, I 2..... to Japan before, but I would love to go. 3.....you have a good time?

How was the weather? What did you do when you were there?

Marie: Yes, we 4…..! The weather 5…. fantastic and we 6…... everyday exploring the

place! Eating here and there and we also took tons of photos!

Lucy: Lucky you! That sounds like a blast!

Marie: It was! You should go if you had the chance to!

Lucy: Maybe I will in the future!

Ex 4: Read the conversation, choose True or False

Samantha: So, how was your trip to Egypt? You do travel a lot, don’t you?

July: It was really great, the pyramid and the temples were amazing. And I even got to

wrote a camel through the desert.

Samantha: You rode a camel? Wow, that is so cool. I could ride a horse pretty well but

I’m not so sure about camels. Have you ever ridden a horse?

July: Yes, I have. I’ve ridden a horse twice in my life.

Samantha: Did you like it?

July: Yes! I liked it's very much! Horses are so beautiful and Powerful, are my favorites

animals!

Samantha: Yes! They are amazing animals!

1, July went to Egypt to travel.

2, July has never ridden a horse before.

3, Samantha couldn’t ride a horse.

4, Horses are July’s favorite animals.


Ex 5: Listen to the conversation, according on what you’ve heard, choose true

or false

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cUbV5B8ieck

(From 00:00 to 1:32)

1, Sophie has forgotten where her mom is.

2, Sophie’s mom has been writing about architecture in Dubai for some time now.

3, Amy has no homework.

4, Sophie’s mum has won a lot of awards.

5, Oliver has been practicing cooking for a while now.


PRONOUNS

ANID

PHRASAL

VERBS

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

AND

RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS

Reflexive pronouns and reciprocal pronouns are related

to each other. Think of a mirror. Who do you see when you

look in the mirror? You see yourself, of course. You are the

looker, and your own image is reflected back to you. When

you use reflexive pronouns, the subject does the action, but

the action is reflected back to the subject. Reciprocal

pronouns mean that two or more people, things, or groups

are acting the same way toward each other at the same time

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

GRAMMAR

WHAT ARE REFLEXIVE

PRONOUNS?

Reflexive pronouns are words ending

in -self or -selves that are used when the

subject and the object of a sentence are

the same (ex: I believe in myself). They

can act as either objects or indirect

objects

Here is a list of the reflexivepronouns in English

personal pronoun

I

You

We

They

She

He

It

reflexive pronoun

Myself

Yourself / Yourselves

ourselves

Themselves

herself

himself

itself

Nguyễn Thị Quỳnh

How do we use reflexive

pronouns?

1. Use a reflexive pronoun when the

subject and object of a sentencee refer

to the same people or things.

For example:

He looked at himself in the mirror.

( "He" is the subject and object)

Here, there's only one person, but two figures, a

reflection, and an individual.

And not *He looked at him in the mirror.

Here, there would be two different people (two males –

let's say Tom and Tim): one of them was looking at the

reflection of the other.

When their mother went on vacation,they had to cook for

themselves.

"They" is the subject and object(They had to do their own

cooking.No one was there to cook for them.)

2. Reflexive pronoun to show independent actions.

You can use reflexive pronouns together with the

word "by" to mean "alone" or "without any help"

For example:

I stayed by myself for 3 weeks… It seemed quite long…

We finished the job by ourselves


3. Reflexive Pronouns as Direct or Indirect Objects

When a reflexive pronoun is a

direct object, it’s the same as the

subject and receives the action of

a transitive verb like:

I hurt myself cutting down the

bush

We have been preparing ourselves

for flu season

When a reflexive pronoun is an

indirect object, it demonstrates

why or for whom the action is

performed.

For example:

I bought myself a new car.

We will give ourselves a cheat

day.

4. However, "be + reflexive pronoun" means to act or

behave in an unusual manner.

See the following example sentence:

Just be yourself at your interview.

I'm sorry for getting angry. I guess I'm not myself today.

(The meaning here is that the speaker is not behaving

as he or she usually does.)

5. Reflexive pronouns are also used to

stress or emphasize a noun, in which case

they are most often placed immediately

after the noun

as in the following example sentences:

Money itself can't buy happiness.

I myself am not interested


Reflexive pronouns may be

used

in

idiomatic expression

Help yourself!

= Serve yourself, take

a portion of...

Behave yourself

= Be a good boy, or

girl!

Please yourself!

= Do what you like!

Make yourself at home!

= make yourself

comfortable!

Pull yourself together

=get over it or take

control of yourself

True to yourself

= behaving according to

your beliefs and doing

what you think is right


Common Errors with Reflexive Pronouns

The misuse of reflexive pronouns abounds in certain sectors.

The most common mistake of all is the incorrect use of reflexive

pronouns in compound subjects or compound objects in a sentence.

is an example of the former type of offense.

Here

Incorrect: Andrew and myself will conduct today’s meeting.

How do we know that myself does not belong as part of the compound

subject (Andrew and the speaker) in this sentence? Remove Andrew from the

equation to see if what remains functions correctly.

Incorrect:

Myself will conduct today’s meeting.

Clearly, myself does not work, but the subject pronoun I do.

Correct:

Correct:

I will conduct today’s meeting.

Andrew and I will conduct today’s meeting.

The improper use of reflexive pronouns as objects is just as prevalent in

today’s business world.

Incorrect: You may submit your expenses to Mr. Martin or myself before Friday.

The subject of this sentence is you, and the indirect objects are Mr. Martin and

the speaker. Taking Mr. Martin out of the sentence will reveal that myself will

not work.

Incorrect: You may submit your expenses to myself before Friday.

Rather, the sentence requires the object pronoun me.

Correct: You may submit your expenses to me before Friday.

Correct: You may submit your expenses to Mr. Martin or me before Friday.


RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS

GRAMMAR

What is a reciprocal pronoun?

A reciprocal pronoun is a pronoun which is used to

indicate that two or more people are carrying out or

have carried out an action of some type, with both

receiving the benefits or consequences of that action

simultaneously. Any time something is done or given in

return, reciprocal pronouns are used. The same is true

any time mutual action is expressed.

There are only two reciprocal pronouns. Both of

them allow you to make sentences simpler. They are

especially useful when you need to express the same

general idea more than once.

Personal pronoun

Reciprocal pronoun

We

You

They

Each other

One another

Be cautious of each other

The words each and other can be used by

themselves as indefinite pronouns. Additionally, the

word each can be used as an adjective or an adverb, and

the word other can be used as an adjective, adverb,

noun, or even a verb.

For example:


Each bird in the tree looks different from each other one

Uses each as an adverb and other as an adjective.)

How to use reciprocal pronouns ?

1.There is one important thing to know about reciprocal pronouns

that separates them from other pronouns. Unlike other pronouns,

reciprocal pronouns typically only make grammatical sense when they are

used as objects. This means that we usually do not put a reciprocal

pronoun as the subject of a sentence, clause, or phrase.

Correct: Barry and Mary are friends. They smiled at each other.

Incorrect: Barry and Mary are friends. Each other smiled at them.

2.Use a reciprocal pronoun when the subject and object of a

sentence

refer to the same people, and these people have a two-way

relationship.

Use "each other"

for two people.

e.x: Maria and Juan

gave each other gold

rings on their wedding

day.

Use "one another"

for more than two

people.

e.x : The students

congratulated one

another after giving

practice speeches..

Usage note:

many people use each other

and one another in the same

way.

Sara and Tom talked to each other.

Sara and Tom talked to one another


Be careful ! Reciprocal

pronouns and plural reflexive

pronouns have different

meanings.

It is also important to know that reciprocal

pronouns have different meanings than

reflexive pronouns. These two types of

pronouns usually cannot be used

interchangeably because the meaning of

the sentence will change.

Reflexive pronoun: Jenny and Kenny

hugged themselves.

(This sentence means that Jenny hugged

herself and Kenny hugged himself.)

Reciprocal pronoun: Jenny and Kenny hugged

each other.

(This sentence means Jenny hugged Kenny and

Kenny hugged Jenny.)

3.Reciprocal pronouns have possessive forms:

each other’s, one another’s.

For example:

He students looked over each other’s homework.

The countries agreed to respect one another’s


Can each other and one

another be used

interchangeably?

You may see some style guides state that

each other and one another have different

meanings. A common insistence is that each

other can only be used to refer to two

people/things and one another can only be used

to refer to more than two people/things.

In standard usage, this is not the

case.

In everyday writing and speech, it is

perfectly fine to use each other to refer

to more than two people/things and to

use one another to refer to two

people/things.

Every person in the room was

suspicious of each other.

David and Adrianna used

flashcards to quiz one another


REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 1:Circle the reflexive pronoun in each sentence. Draw a line back to

the subject it is reflecting.

1. I dressed myself this morning.

2. He made breakfast all by himself.

3. We had to cook for ourselves since mom didn’t want to make dinner.

4. When you go shopping for me, buy a present for yourself.

5. She created all the Christmas decorations by herself.

6. The new robotic toys can put themselves away.

7. They used to camera on the cell phone to take pictures of themselves.

8. The man talked to himself as he walked down the street.

9. The parrot admired itself in the mirror for several hours each day.

10. I used a video to teach myself how to knit.

Nguyễn Thị Thu Phương

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 2: Choose the correct pronoun to complete each of the sentences.

Choose the more natural-sounding response according to the context:

1. They are in love = They love _________.

a) each other b) themselves

2. They speak to _________ all the time.

a) themselves b) each other

3. He and his wife are very arrogant. They love _________.


4. John baked ________ a cake.

a) himself b) each other

5. We don’t need any help. We’ll do it _________.

a) each other b) ourselves

6. I understand my girlfriend and she understands me. = My girlfriend and I

understand _________ very well.

a) each other b) ourselves

7. My sister gets ________ in trouble all the time.

a) herself b) each other

8. They are at home by ________. No one else is there.


9. Mary doesn’t like Tom. Tom doesn’t like Mary. = Tom and Mary don’t like

________.


10. Mary doesn’t like herself. Tom doesn’t like himself. = Tom and Mary don’t like

_________.


Hồ Lan Phương

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 3: Fill in the sentences by using reflexive and reciprocal

pronouns.

1.Maria and Juan gave ________ gold rings on their wedding day.

2.He wanted to impress her, so he baked a cake _________.

3.The defendants blamed _________for the crime they were charged with.

4.Jennifer does chores _______ because she doesn’t trust others to do them

right.

5.That car is in a class all by_______.

6.We don’t have to go out; we can fix dinner ________.

7. Terry and Jack were talking to _________ in the hallway.

8. The kids spent the afternoon kicking the ball to ________.

9.You are too young to go out by _______.

10. The students congratulated ________after giving practice speeches.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 4: Complete these sentences. Use myself/ yourself … only where

necessary. Use the following verbs:

defend

concentrate

shave

wash

meet

relax

feel

dry

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Martin decided to grow a beard because he was fed up with shaving.

I wasn’t very well yesterday, but I _____much better today.

I climbed out of the swimming pool and _____with a towel.

I tried to study, but I couldn’t _____

If somebody attacks you, you need to be able to _____

I’m going out with Chris this evening. We’re_____ at 7.30.

You’re always rushing around. Why don’t you sit down and _____

There was no water, so we couldn’t______

Phạm Thị Phương

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 5: Complete these sentences using the words in the box. In

one sentence, you do not need to write anything.

by myself

by yourself

each other's

one another

myself

himself

ourselves

themselves

yourself

1.

I prefer traveling by myself on business.

2. It’s hard to relax …………………… when you have a busy work life.

3. My colleagues and I like …………….. so much that we often go out together

socially after work.

4. I’m quite shy and find it hard to introduce …………to new people.

5. In my company, the employees make a lot of the policy decisions…………

6. The two managers in my department always agree with………… proposals.

7. Do you prefer to work ……..…….or in a team?

8. The CEO ……………….attends all of our meetings.

9. We feel good about …………….. and the work we do in our company.

10. Do you think it’s quicker to delegate or do tasks……………..?

Hồ Lan Phương

Exercise 6:

Read this women’s diary.

@Nguyen Thi Quynh

Jan’s birthday was Wednesday. And I forgot to call him. I

reminded me all day, and then I forgot anyway! I felt terrible.

My sister Anna said, “ Don’t be so hard on yourselves” but I

didn’t believe her. She prides herself on remembering

everything. Then I remembered the article on self-talk. It said

that people can change the way they explain problems to

theirselves. Well, I listened to the way I talked to me, and it

sounded really insulting-like the way our high school math

teacher used to talk us. I thought, Jan and I are good friends,

and we treat each others well. In fact, he forgave myself for

my mistake right away. And I forgave him for forgetting our

dinner date two weeks ago. Friends can forgive themselves,

so I guess I can forgive myself.

There are seven

mistakes in the use

reflexive and reciprocal

pronouns.

Find and correct them.

1...........................

2.........................

4.........................

5........................

3........................

6.........................

7............................

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 7: Mark the letter A,B,C,D to show the underlined

part that needs correction

1.The boy swam the narrow canal in ten minutes to find him

A B C

in the base, out of danger.

D

2. We will always remember our dear friends who are no longer with ourselves,

A

B

but we tend to take them for granted when they are with us.

C

D

3.I tried to explain the whole idea to her, but it’s still difficult for

A B C

me to make me understood.

D

4.Though formally close friends, they have now been estranged from

A

B

each other due to some regrettable misunderstanding.

A

D

5.She had a bitter quarrel with her husband over some money three

A

B

years ago and they haven’t spoken to themselves since

C

D

6.When we were in London, we went to high school with ourselves.

A

B

I haven’t seen her for years, though.

C

D


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

7.My grandparents have been together for more than 50 years and they still love

A

B

one another as always.

C D

8.Hanna can’t stand her man any more, so she’ll divorce and get married to

A B C

one another.

D

9.The two students fought a duel with loaded pistols. I thought they were going to

A B

kill themselves but fortunately nothing happened in the end.

C

D

10.Through the network of social media, people can connect with the others all

A B C

over the world.

11. Harshly impoverished persons, by definition, are not capable of producing

A

B

enough material goods for themselves and their loved ones.

C

D


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 8: Listening and fill in the blank

1. She poured _____ some tea.

2. We bought _____ a van.

3. You must go by _____.

4. Peter builds _____ a hut.

5. Did you paint it _____?

6. I carried this box _____.

7. Alan was proud of _____.

8. The fire went out by _____.

9. They cooked it _____.

10. Fiona lives there by _____.

Exercise 9: Listening and fill in the blank

1. Mike and Bill know _____ quite well.

2. Sue and Lisa haven't seen _____ for ages.

3. Peggy and Jane made this delicious cake _____.

4. Grandpa constructed this desk _____.

5. Can we sell the things we made _____?

6. The little girl can already ride the tri-cycle _____.

7. Laura and Betty are helping _____ with their homework.

8. Some people only think of _____.

9. John and his girlfriend are still angry.

They are not talking to _____.

10. Does the laptop switch off _____ automatically?

Nguyễn Đức Hà Phi

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 10: Choose the best answer.

1:

A: The guys in Mark's department did a great job this year.

B: I know. They should be really proud of themselves/each other.

2:

A: What's wrong? You look upset.

B: I just heard Ed and Jeff talking. You know Ed blames him/himself for

everything.

3:

A: I hear you're going to Japan on vacation this year. Are you going by

yourself/yourselves or with a tour?

B: Oh, with a tour.

4:

A: Jennifer looks happy tonight. Did Megan give her the promotion?

B: No, not yet. Megan keeps asking herself/her if she can do the job.

5:

A: How do you like the new computer system?

B: I'm not sure. In our department, we're still teaching each other/ourselves

how to use it.

6:

A: So long, now. Thanks for coming. It was good to see you.

B: Oh, it was a great party.

A: I'm glad you enjoyed yourself/yourselves.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 11: Listen to this conversation and fill in the state by using pronouns.

Mrs.Nadia:

Good morning! You are our new neighbor, right?

Mrs. Meriam: Good Morning! Yeah, I have just moved here. Let’s me introduce

(1)________.

My name is Meriam. I live with my husband, my daughter

and my lovely cat Mino. Can you introduce (2)______?

Mrs. Nadia: Sure. My name is Nadia. I am teacher of English. I have one daughter,

she is 5 years old.

Mrs. Meriam: Great! You're teacher of English. I really love English. By the way, our

children can be friends because my daughter is five too. They can play and enjoy

(3)________

Mrs.Nadia:

Sure. It’ll be a good idea.

Mrs.Meriam: I’m a doctor by the way. So if you need anything, just call me.

Mrs. Nadia: Wow!!! You're a doctor. That’s amazing. You must be busy all the

time. I know how hard is your job.

Mrs.Meriam: Sometimes I don’t have time to do the housework, but my husband

is so helpful. He sometimes cooks or does the dishes by(4)_______.

Mrs.Nadia: Yeah. It is so hard being a working, mum. We take care of everyone in

the house and we forget to take care of (5) _______.

Mrs: Meriam: I agree. You know....


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 12: Read this interview with George Prudeau, a high school

French teacher. Complete the interview with the correct reflexive or

reciprocal pronouns.

Interviewer: How did you come a teacher?

George: When I got laid off from my 9:00 - 5:00 job, I told 1.myself “Here’s my

chance to do what I really want.” One of the great things about teaching is the

freedom I have. I run the class by 2.___________ just the way I want to. I also like

the way my students and I learn from 3.____________. My students teach me a lot.

Interviewer: What about discipline? Is that a problem?

George: We have just a few rules. I tell my students, “Keep 4.___________ busy.

Discuss the lessons, but don’t interfere with 5.___________’s work.”

Interviewer: What do you like to teach best?

George: I love French, but the subject 6.______________ really isn’t all that

important. A good teacher helps students learn by 7._____________ and encourages

them not to give up when they have problems. For instance, John, one of my

students, just taught 8._____________ how to bake French bread. The first few

loaves were failures. I encouraged him to use positive self-talk, and in the end he

succeeded.

Hồ Lan Phương

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 13: Complete the answers to the questions using reflexive pronouns.

1. Who repaired the bike for you?

Nobody. I repaired it myself.

2. Who cuts Brian’s hair for him?

Nobody. He cuts …………………..

3. Do you want me to post that letter for you?

No, I’ll …………………………

4. Who told you that Linda was going away?

Linda ……………………………

5. Can you phone John for me?

Why can’t you …………………….

Exercise 14: Sara and Tom went to the office party. Look at each picture

and write a sentence describing what happened. Use a verb from the box

with a reflexive or reciprocal pronoun. You will use one verb more than

once.

buy cut drive greet introduce to smile at talk to

1....................................... 2.......................................


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

3....................................... 4.......................................

5....................................... 6.......................................

7....................................... 8.......................................


Phrasal

verbs

PHRASAL VERBS

GRAMMAR

I. WHAT ARE PHRASAL VERBS ?

Phrasal verbs are phrase that indicate actions. They are generally

used in spoken English and informal texts

Phrasal verb consists of two parts:

a verb ( sit, see, turn, look, go, put, think,.....)

a preposition or adverb ( in, on, at, up, down, off, through,....).

The adverb or preposition comes directly after a verb.

verb + preposition/adverb

* Example: sit down, stand up, turn on, go on, make up,...v..v..)

Sometimes phrasal verbs are consist of three elements:

verb + preposition/adverb + preposition/adverb

II. CLASSIFICATION AND CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH TYPE OF

PHRASAL VERBS.

The phrasal verbs are divided into 2 types:

Transitive phrasal verb

Intransitive phrasal verb

1, Transitive phrasal verb

Transitive phrasal verb

Subject Verb Particle Object

He

put on his lab coat.

helped out his students.

Note: particle = preposition/ adverb


Transitive phrasal verbs have an accompanying object to add a full meaning

→

to the sentence. As the example above, we have 2 accompanying objects: his lab

coat, his students.

Có tân ngữ

He put on his lab coat.

Anh ấy mặc áo Blouse

→

Trắng.

Câu đầy đủ ý nghĩa.

→

Không có tân ngữ

He put on

Anh ấy mặc →

Ta không thể biết anh ấy

→

mặc áo len hay áo khoác....

Câu không rõ nghĩa

→

NOTE:

Most trasitive phrasal verbs are separable. This means that objects can come:

After the verb + preposition or adverb

Between the verb and preposition or adverb

Example:

After verb + particle

We dropped off the students.

Between the verb and its

particle

We dropped the students off.

Please turn on the light. Please turn the light on.

All of the sentences are correct.


BE CAREFUL !!!

The order of object and preposition or adverb can usually be changed unless we

are using pronoun for our object. If we use a pronoun as the object of a phrasal verb,

it must go between the verb and the preposition or adverb.

We can say

we can not say

We dropped them off

Please turn it on

We dropped off them.

Please turn on it.

Correct

Incorrect

2, Intransitive phrasal verb

Intransitive phrasal verb

Subject Verb Particle

started

over.

He

grew up in Vietnam.

got

back

early.

Intransitive phrasal verbs do not have an object attached because they have

→

full meaning.

Note: particle = preposition/ adverb


NOTE:

Some phrasal verbs are either transitive or

intransitive, depending on the meaning.

NOTE:

* Example: come over. This phrasal verb has two

meanings.

The first is intransitive phrasal verb. It means to visit

someone in the place where they are. Ex: why don’t you

come over ? It stands on its own.

But “come over” can be transitive phrasal verb if a

feeling suddenly comes over you or an emotion that

affects you in a strong way. Ex: A wave of anger came

over him.

So whether a phrasal verb is transitive or intransitive, it

is important to know because it helps you understand how

to use it correctly.

...


III. THE MEANING OF PHRASAL VERB AND HOW TO LEARN ITS

EASILY.

1. The meaning of phrasal verb

Many phrasal verbs and

one word verbs have the

similar meanings. Phrasal

verbs are often less formal,

and they are more common in

everyday speech.

Phrasal verbs

Bring up

One word verbs

raise

Figure out

solve

Go on

Pick out

continue

select

... ...


The meaning of some phrasal verb can be more obvious.

They are literal. Stand

together with up means to

stand up, put with away

means to put away.

They are figurative. The

meaning of a phrasal verb can

often be something

completely different to the

base verb, its means that

phrasal verb need to be

memorised individually.

Example:

make up. The word make means to build or form something. But used in phrasal

verb, the word “make up” refers to people forgiving each other.

look up. It can be used literally. (Ex: he look up in the sky). But the same phrasal

verb can be used to mean to search some information in a book (Ex: he look up the

word in his dictionary).

2. Why are phrasal verbs difficult to learn ?

Because they are many of them.

Because they are so commonly used that they can

become overwhelming.

Because one phrasal verb can have mutiple meanings.

Many phrasal verb are idiomatic as well, so their

meanings are not always as individual word suggest.

Because the ways we learn are incorrect.


4. How to learn phrasal verb correctly ?

Don’t type “phrasal verb” in the google and then wait for the big list

to appear and try to memorise them. This will completely

overwhelmed you. You need to look for and find the phrasal verbs

that are relevent to you and are commonly used.

You need to look for them: read the news, read the blogs that you

love, go through and highlight all the phrasal verbs that you see.

Focus on topics, not on alphabetical lists because that is how you

are going to use phrasal verb while writng and talking about a

topic or issue.

Start with a list of phrasal verbs about ten would be perfect.

Try your own story using phrasal verbs. The story doesn’t have

to be true and it doesn’t have to be intelligent but it challenges

you to think creatively and to memorise phrasal verbs easily.


EXAMPLE

“I and my boyfriend broke up, so I am

feeling a bit down at the moment. I didn’t

show up to our date, because something came

up. I had just found out that I had to attend

the online meeting and I didn’t get to call off

the date. He thought I made it all up and that I

, actually fell for somebody else. He said I had

let him down. It so hard for me to get over

this”.

NOTE:

We will have some phrasal verbs and idioms

that are easy to confuse with each other.

Example: sleep on it, sleep it off, fly off the

handle,..... They are idioms not phrasal verbs,

so we can not change them into sleep it on, sleep

off it, fly to the handle off,....

The only way to tell them apart is

memorizing them.


PHRASAL VERBS

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 1 : Listen to the conversation and fill in the states.

Mr. Paul: Hi, Matthew! How's it going?

Mr. Matthew: Hi, Paul. I (1)_____ you ____ yesterday, but I couldn’t (2)_________ to

you. Are you OK?

Mr. Paul: Yes, I am. Sorry for not (3) _____ you____. I've been very busy

(4)____________ a new job.

Mr. Matthew: Really? But what happened?

Mr. Paul: I quit my job last week. I didn’t (5)____________ my boss very well and I (

(6)___________ my patience. He used to have me (7)_____ my projects ____ many

times. I just couldn’t (8) ___________ all that hard work. That job was (9)_______ me

________! It was simply (10) ______ all my time. I had to drink lots of coffee to

(11)_____ it ______ the day. I used to work during the weekends too, and I would

(12)_______ many nights to finish my projects.... and (13) ______ them ____ on time. I

(14)________ feeling so exhausted every day.....

(Source: youtube video)


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 2: Match the phrasal with its

correct meaning.

1.put off

2.call off

3.look up

4.go off

5.carry on

6.turn off

a.cancel

b.switch off

c.postpone

d.continue

e.explode

f.check

Exercise 3: Complete the phrasal verbs according to

their meanings in brackets.

1. ___________your shoes. (Remove)

2. Somebody has to __________ the baby. (Take care of)

3. She wants to ___________ the truth? (Discover)

4. Where can I ___________ the sweater? (See if it fits)

5. __________ (be quick)

6. Why don't you ___________ ? (Take a seat)

7. I will __________ the train now. (Enter)

8. ___________ the word in a dictionary.

(Consult a dictionary)

9. I want to _________ the form. (Complete)

10.The firemen __________ the fire. (Extinguish)


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 4: Mark the letter A, B, or C to indicate the word or

phrase that is CLOSEST in meaning to the underlined part in

each of the following questions.

1. Do you have a moment to try to

find my keys with me?

A. to look for

B. to get up

C. to talk over

6. It's cold outside; you'd better place a

sweater on yourself.

A. put on

B. take out

C. sit down

2. I don't like to go to the movies

alone.

A. on purpose

B. as usual

C. by myself

7. If you don't hurry in completing your

schoolwork, you'll do a better job.

A. get off

B. lie down

C. take your time

3. Don't sit on the dirty ground like

that; rise right now!

A. lie down

B. get up

C. sit down

8. Did you go on date with your new

girlfriend again today?

A. get along with

B. go out with

C. stand up

4. I think that you should remove the

last two sentences in the paragraph.

A. pick out

B. talk over

C. take out

9. Fortunately, Marie is associating well

with her new co-workers.

A. calling on

B. getting along with

C. taking over

5. The child said that she didn't break

the window deliberately.

A. all day long

B. making a difference

C. on purpose

10. How are you succeeding in your new

job?

A. getting on with

B. making a difference to

C. picking out


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 5: Read the article. Underline the phrasal verbs.

Circle/highlight the objects of the transitive phrasal verb

In Eloy Rodriguez's elementary school in Edinburg, Texas, teachers passed Chicano

students over for special honors classes. They also punished them for speaking Spanish. When

Rodriguez became the first U.S.-born Chicano biology instructor at his university, he worked 18

hours a day and slept in his lab. "I was very aware that I was the first this, and the first

that, and I knew that some people were waiting for me to slip up." Rodriguez didn't slip up.

However, he knows that when students feel teachers don't treat them fairly, it turns them

off education. Many of them just give up.

Today, Dr. Rodriguez is passing his own success on. When he became a professor at

Cornell University, he set out to find Latino graduate students. He takes these students with

him on many of his trips and works hard to turn them into top scientists. In 1990 he set up

KIDS (Kids Investigating and Discovering Science)—a science program for minority elementary

school children. They put on white lab coats and investigate science with university teachers

who treat them like research scientists. They observe nature and figure out problems. In

interviews, Rodriguez always brings up role models. "I saw my first snowflake before I saw my

first Chicano scientist," he says. Because of Rodriguez's efforts, many students will not face

the same problem.

*Chicano—Mexican-American

*Latino—from a Spanish-speaking country in Central or South America

Read these sentences and decide if they are True (T) or False (F)

____1.In Rodriguez's elementary school, teachers chose Chicano

students for honors classes.

____2.When Rodriguez became a biology instructor, some people

expected him to fail.

____3.Unfair treatment makes students less interested in education.

____4.Today, Rodriguez wants to forget his own success.

____5.He searches for Latino graduate students for his program

at Cornell.

____6.In 1990 Rodriguez visited a program called KIDS.

____7.Children in KIDS wear the same lab clothes as the scientists.

____8.Rodriguez rarely mentions role models.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 6: Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the

correct answer to each of the following questions.

1.I wish I hadn't said it. If only I could _______.

A. turn the clock round B. turn the clock down

C. turn the clock back D. turn the clock forward

2. I just took it _______ that he’d always be available.

A. into account B. for granted C. into consideration D. easy

3. My car is getting unreliable; I think I'll trade it _______ for a new one.

A. in B. off C. up D. away

4. Anne persisted _______ her search for the truth about what had happened.

A. on B. about C. at D. In

5. The old houses were _______ down to make way for a block of flats.

A. banged B. put C. hit D. knocked

6. I accidentally _______ Mike when I was crossing a street downtown yesterday.

A. caught sight of B. kept an eye on C. paid attention to D. lost touch with

7. My mother told me to _______ for an electrician when her fan was out of order.

A. send B. write C. rent D. turn

8. It is very important for a firm or a company to keep _______ the changes

in the market.

A. pace of B. track about C. touch with D. up with

9. The forecast has revealed that the world’s reserves of fossil fuel will

have _______ by 2015.

A. taken over B. caught up C. used off D. run out

10. Even if you are rich, you should save some money for a _______ day.

A. windy B. rainy C. foggy D. snowy


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

11. We _______ with a swim in the lake.

A. gave in B. cooled off C. got out D. took up

12. They’re staying with us _______ the time being until they can afford a house.

A. during B. for C. at D. in

13. Since he failed his exam, he had to ____ for it again.

A. take B. sit C. make D. pass

14. “Why don’t you sit down and _______?”

A. make yourself at peace B. make it your own home

C. make yourself at home D. make yourself at rest

15. He never lets anything _______ him and his weekend fishing trip.

A. come among B. come between C. come up D. come on

16. The Second World War _______ in 1939.

A. turned up B. took out C. brought about D. broke out

17. “We'd better _______ if we want to get there in time.”

A. take up B. put down C. speed up D. turn down

18. I could not _______ the lecture at all. It was too difficult for me.

A . make off B. take in C. get along D. hold on

19. My mother had to work 12 hours a day in a factory just to ________.

A. tighten the belt B. make ends meet

C. call it a day D. break the ice

20. He is coming _______ a cold after a night out in the rain.

A. across with B. down with C. away from D. up with


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 7: Complete the sentences using correct form of phrasal verbs.

pass away do without look forward to call off make up

carry away break out run out put up with keep up

1.Don't smoke in the forest. Fires _________easily at this time of the year.

2.I __________ seeing my friends again.

3.I'm afraid; we have __________ of apple juice. Will orange juice do?

4.Your website has helped me a lot to ___________ the good work.

5.A friend of mine has ___________ her wedding.

6.His mother can't __________ his terrible behavior anymore.

7.As an excuse for being late, she __________ a whole story.

8.I got _________ by his enthusiasm.

9.I just cannot __________ my mobile. I always keep it with me.

10.She was very sad because her father _________ last week.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 8: Choose the correct phrasal verb: go on / pick up / come

back / go back / find out / come out / go out / point out / grow up /

set up / turn out / get out / come in(to) / take on.

1. Can you ___________ (think of an idea) a better idea?

2. She ____________ (showed / mentioned) that the shops would already be

closed.

3. I wish I hadn’t__________________ (become responsible for) so much work!

4. I _______________ (went to an event) for dinner with my husband last

night.

5. He ________________ (entered a place where the speaker is) the kitchen

and made some tea.

6. Where did you __________________ (become an adult)?

7. I’d love to _________________ (arrange / create) my own business.

8. I really want to ________________ (leave a building) of this office and go

for a walk.

9. As I arrived, he ________________ (appeared from a place) of the door.

10. She _________________ (got something from a place) some dinner on the

way home.

11. Could you _________________ (get information) what time we need to

arrive?

12. I thought the conference was going to be boring but it

__________________ (in the end we discovered) to be quite useful.

13. What time did you _________________ (return to a place where the

speaker is) yesterday?

14. She _______________ (appeared from a place) of the café and put on her

gloves.

15. A performance _______________ (is happening) at the moment.

Hồ Lan Phương

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 9: Choose the correct answer.

This morning, like most mornings I woke up at around 6.30 am and (1)._____

( rose from bed after sleeping ) quickly. Another busy day. I (2).________ ( went to ) the

shower and then dressed quickly and (3)._____ ( got dressed ) my clothes. I went into

the kitchen and (4)._____________ ( prepared ) a quick breakfast of porridge, toast and

orange juice to begin my day.

I noticed that the rubbish bin was full so I went to the garden to (5)._____

( dispose of ) the rubbish and (6)._____ ( placed it ) in the correct bins as we recycle

everything. Once I had (7)._____ ( disposed of ) the rubbish, I (8)._____ ( prepared ) my

plan for the rest of the day. There were many tasks to (9)._____ ( to do ). A friend had

called me yesterday and I had promised to (10)._____ ( return his call ) and give him

some information. He was looking for some help with a project. I said I would

(11)._____( investigate ) it last night and call him today with my opinion.

1. a. got up b. get up c. getting up

2. a. jumped into b. jump into c. jumping in

3. a. put on b. put c. putting on

4. a. putting it together b. put c. put together

5. a. puts out b. put out c. putting out

6. a. dropping it b. dropped it c. drop it

7. a. putting away b. put it away c. put away

8. a. make up b. made up c. making up

9. a. carry out b. carrying out c. carried out

10. a. call back to him b. call him back c. call with him

11. a. look for b. look up c. look into

Exercise 10: : Choose the correct phrasal verb to fill in the blanks to complete

the passage.

check-in get on get off (x2)

break down take off turn back

John and David’s flight home from Amsterdam were at nine in the morning. They

had arranged to meet with John’s friend Mark at half-past six but Mark arrived at the

hotel almost half an hour late – that, however, was just the beginning of their

problems. On the way from the hotel to the airport, their car (1) …………….. in the

middle of a busy intersection, causing a traffic jam. Then, David realized that he had

left his mobile phone in the hotel, but it was too late for them to (2) ……………… When

they arrived at the airport, they had just enough time to (3) …………….., go through

passport control and security check, and (4) …………….. the plane. The plane (5)

…………….. very shortly after that and eight hours later, they landed in New York, but

they couldn’t (6)…………….. the plane because there was a problem on the runway.

They felt a jet lag and finally, forty-five minutes after landing, they (7) ………………

(Source:doenglish.vn)


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 11 Read these comments from an online discussion about call

centres. Complete the phrasal verbs in the text using the correct particle:

back, down, off, on, out, through, up.

A couple of months ago I rang 1 up my bank to tell them where to send my

new debit card. I got 2……..… to an operator. She was very friendly but I had to

hang 3………… for 15 minutes while she tried to contact my bank in Birmingham.

In the end, I gave 4…………. and sent an email! I’m not at all surprised that the

number of companies using call centers has dropped 5……….. dramatically in the

recent years!

Sidonie, Birmingham

What puts me 6………… Using call centers is when the staff appear not to have the

information I need. It makes me want to hang 7………….. immediately when they

put me on hold and make me listen to that awful music. Why don’t they just write

my number 8………. And call me 9……….. when they the information I want?

Haven’t companies worked 10………… yet that customer satisfaction increases

profits?

Exercise 12: Read this student’s journal notes. There are nine mistakes in the

use of phrasal verbs. The first mistake is already corrected. Find and correct

eight more.

I just got back from Venezuela back! I spent two weeks in the Amazon rain

forest with Dr.Rodriguez’s research group. We carried out research there on

plants that the Piaroa people use as medicine. We made down a list of these

plants, and we’re going to analyze them when we get back to school next week.

We set down camp near the Orinoco River, hundreds of miles from any

major city. Life there is hard. You get very early up every morning. You must

always watch up and never touch a new insect or plant. If you pick up it, you can

get a bad skin rash. But plants can also cure. One day, I felt sick. One of the Piaroa

gave me the stem of a certain plant to chew. It worked! Later I found at that the

same plant helps cure insect bites. And believe me, insects are a big problem in

the rain forest. I used up many bottles of repellent. But even when I put on it, it

didn’t totally keep the insects away.

This trip changed my life! I’m now thinking about switching my major to

pharmacology. I want to find over more about how people can use the same

plants that animals use as medicine.

Hồ Lan Phương

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 13: Find and correct the mistakes.

Were you a good student when you were at school?

I’m afraid I wasn’t if I’m honest. Often I didn’t hand my homework in, and I always felt I

could get it away with because my teacher wasn’t strict. But because of this I couldn’t

keep with up the course work and I end up fall behind. Eventually I had to drop the

school out.

So no, I wasn’t really a good student. When I looking back on my childhood, I wish I’d

done things differently really as it meant I had to work harder to achieve things later on

in life.

Exercise 14: Find and correct the mistakes.

Do you think the growth in multinational corporations is a positive development?

I’m not sure it is such a good thing. Many people putting forward arguments in favour it,

claiming it has helped developing countries by creating jobs for local people as many of

these companies have moved their manufacturing abroad. They then claim that the

economic development in these countries will catch up developed with countries.

However, there is no real evidence that this is the case as most the profit flows back to

the companies, not the people, and as soon as it becomes cheaper to manufacture in a

different country, the companies will pulling out the country of they are in and move to

the more profitable one. So I don’t think there is any real long-term benefit.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 15: Correct the mistakes.

What an Exhausting Trip!

Last year we decided to taking off 6 weeks of work so we could travel to

Ecuador. After 3 flights we had finally arrived in Ecuador but had to stay in a

hotel overnight. In the morning we had to took off from our hotel at 9 AM so that

we had enough time to go through security and get our tickets before our plane

taking off at noon to reach our final destination on the coast.

Once we were in the air, high above the mountains, the plane started to make a

strange noise. It sounded like one of the engines was act up. We were hoping

nothing as going to go wrong but I was definitely thinking that the mechanics should

tracking the source down of the noise; because the entire flight I was thinking all

of the horrible things that might happen if there was a problem with the engine of

the airplane.

About halfway through the flight, I decided to take out my jacket and use it as a

pillow against the side of the airplane because I was feeling running down after so

much time traveling. Just as I was about to fall asleep, a little girl started to acted

up and was crying. Although I’m complaining about the flight and the plane, I’m not

trying to ran down the airline. The staff were really friendly and after all, we did

arrive safely to our destination.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 16: Rewrite the sentence without changing the meaning.

1. Where did you find out about Disneyland Resort? ( get )

=> Where _______________________________?

2. When did you get up this morning? ( out of )

=> When _______________________________?

3. I’ll look through this leaflet to see what activities are organized at this attraction.

(read)

=> I’ll _______________________________.

4. They’re going to bring out a guidebook to different beauty spots in Viet Nam.

(publish)

=> They’re _______________________________?

5. I’m looking forward to the weekend. ( thinking )

=> I’m _______________________________


Exercise 17: Complete this advice for salespeople using the verbs and objects in

the brackes. Where possible, put the object between the verb and the particle.

In the selling situation, salespeople often think they should fill any silence with

the sound of their own voices. However, I recently 1 came across a very effective

use of silence (came across / a very effective use of silence). It happened during a sales

presentation that I attended last year in Vienna.

The client worked in the family fashion business and had a problem with stock

control. Near the end of the session, the salesperson asked her, 'When you

2……………… (sort out / these problems); and then he paused for 20 seconds before

continuing, 'what improvements will you expect to see?' Amazingly, the client

responded immediately and was able to 3 …………….. (go through / her own detailed

solutions)

When it came to question time, I wanted to 4 ....................... (find out / something).

I asked what the client had been doing during the silent pause. She said that she had

5 …..…….. carried on / thinking) while lots of ideas were moving about in her head and

then she had suddenly been able to see a solution.

You see, when we interrupt the thinking of others to 6 ……………. (put forward /

our solutions), we stop them 7.......................... (coming up with / their own ideas). If you

stay silent, you don't have to sell your products or ideas to your clients - you just

8……………….. (back up / them) in their own decision to buy!

Hồ Lan Phương

MODALS

&

SIMILAR EXPRESSION

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

ABILITY

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

ABILITY: CAN, COULD, BE ABLE TO

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

Nguyễn Xuân Thái

PERMISSION

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

PERMISSION :

CAN, COULD, MAY, DO

YOU MIND IF

CAN, COULD , MAY

Can, could, may are modal verbs. We use them to talk about things that are allowed or

not allowed.

Examples:

This cake looks yummy. Can i please have a

piece of it?

-No, you can’t.

May i ask you something?

-Yes, you may.

Could I use your phone, please?

-Yes, you can.

1.When it comes to asking for permission , it’s up to you to choose one of these

three words, each word is suitable for different situations depending on the

formality, the necessity, and the politeness that you want .

2.Using: may when your are in formal situations.

could when you are in semi-formal situations.

can when you are in informal situations.

3.If you want to make it even more polite, add the please, but be careful of the

word order.

Can sounds more urgent and direct than the other two, and of course, the tone

counts.

Examples:


Structure

Questions

Can/ Could/ May Subject Base form of verb

Can

Could

May

i

she

he

they

eat

this cake?

Note : Could is the past tense of can, but when you use could for permission, it is not

the past

When it comes to may, we often use it with “I” or “we”, because you can’t really ask

permission for someone else so much

Answers

Affirmative

Negative

Yes

You

she

he

they

can

may

No,

You

she

he

they

can’t

may not


Statements

Subject Can/ May (not) Base form of verb

You

He

She

can (not)

may (not)

eat

this cake

Note: We don’t you could when answering questions.

Example:

Could you borrow your pen ?

- Yes, you could

- Yes, you can

We don't use mayn't as the contracted form of may not.

In everyday life, we don’t always use modals, we can use expressions

like: absolutely, yeah, of course, nah, sorry,… they are more informal.

It’s better to give a reason when you refuse someone.

Example: Hey man, can i borrow your pen?

-Sorry man, I only have one


DO YOU MIND IF I

Do you mind if I is used when you think you’re going to be inconveniencing someone

through your actions

Examples:

Do you mind if I borrow you pencil?

-No, not at all

Structure

Statements

Short Answers

Do you mind if i

Subject

Verb

Affrimative

Negative

Do

you

mind

if i

i

we

they

she

he

it

stay

stays

here?

Not at all

No, I don’t

Go ahead

Yes, I do

Note: The phrase do you mind if I is even more polite than the phrase may i

Answering no and not at all means giving permission .

Ansewering yes means refusing permission.

Don’t be mistaken :

-Do you mind if I : ask if it’s ok for you to do something.

-Do you mind : ask somebody to do something for you.

Rising intonation ( voice goes up )

Examples:


FOCUSED PRACTICE

1 Choose the best answers :

1. In 2019, John… attend his dream university.

A: could

B: can

C: was able to

2. ….. cook is really important when you live alone

A. Caning

B. Being able to

C. Coulding

3. Sorry but I…. talk to you right now.

A: Can

B: Can’t

C: Could

4. If you work hard, you… buy the house that you’ve always wanted.

A. Can

B. were able to

C. Could

2 There are 6 mistakes. Find and fix them.

A: Hey excuse me . Could you speak english?

I’m looking for someone who be able to speak english with me.

B: Yes I can’t

A: So how long have you learned english? Couldn’t you understand well?

B: I’ve been learning english for 3 years and yeah I could understand you.

A: What is your level of english?

B: I don’t know for sure but last week I were able to get a band 6.5 in IELTS.

A: Wow that’s awesome.



1. You want to use your friend’s iphone.

You say :…..i use your phone ?

A. May i

B. Can

C. Couln’t

2.Your friend is giving you permission:

Yeah, you…

A. Can’t

B. Can

C. Could

3. You also want to borrow your friend headphone.

You say: Thanks, ….you mind if I borrow your headphone?

A. Don’t

B. Could

C. Do

4.Your friend says : No, of course i…. then gives you the headphone

A. Do

B. May

C. Don’t


1. A: I’m running out of money right now

Mayn’t I borrow you some, sir?

B: No. I don’t have any money

2.A: Hey man, what are you doing?

B: Oh, I’m just finding my pen, i’ve lost it

I’m about to have a class. Can I borrow yours?

A: Yeah, you could

3.A: Excuse me sir. Does you mind if I smoke here

B: No , I’m allergic to smoke.



1. John, my dad is busy today, Could you drive me home?

A. Yeah

B. Don’t worry, I can’t

2.I’m freezing, do you mind closing the window?

A: No, im hot

B: No, im cold too

3.There’s something wrong with my computer.

Can you fix it for me brother?

A. I’ll fix it for you

B. Yes, I have no clue about fixing computers

4. We’re going out on a date. Do you mind staying home tonight honey?

A: Yes, enjoy your night.

B: I’m sorry, I’m staying home tonight


A: Hey, I’m busy tonight so I guess our plan is cancelled

May you just play video game alone until midnight?. I’ll be back at 12.pm

B: Yeah, but we’re out of food, won’t you bring home some?

A: Yeah, I can’t. By the way, Could you mind cleaning the house

and take out the garbage,it’s full

B: Can please you just go?

A: Alright. I’ll be home at 12.



1. You’re a English major right? I think you….. watch this video.

Its about phrasal verbs

A. should

B. had better

C. ought not to

2. Your eyes is terrible. Seriously, you….. go to the hospital and get it

checked or else you will go blind.

A. had better not

B. had better

C. should not

3.A: John is really upset right now. Don’t say anything to him

B: So when…. I talk to him?

A. ought to

B. should

C. had better

4. There’s something wrong with your bike. You…. check it before riding it

A. had better not

B. should

C. shouldn’t


A: Hey man, how is it going?

B: I’m doing great man. Oh what happended to your leg?

A: Oh I got hurt when playing basketball, it was 3 days ago.

Could I bandage it?

B: I think you should to. It looks pretty bad though.

You had better not make an appointment with your doctor and discuss

it with him.

Trust me, if you don’t treat it well, it’ll go septic

A: Yeah I think I ought listen to you. Thanks man.



1. It’s summer….go to the beach.

A. let

B. let’s

C. how about

2. I can’t climb anymore…. cable car?

A. let’s

B. could

C. how about

3. John: I’m not hungry. You guys can eat out without me.

Tyler: OK. You…. stay home and wait us. We’ll be back soon.

A. could

B. why not

C. let’s

4. This restaurant is packed….. we go to my place and I’ll cook for everyone.

A. why don’t

B. why not

C. How about

10

There are 6 mistakes. Find and fix them.

A: OK guys, how are we gonna spend the night?

B: I think we should go to eat first. Why don’t we Sushi Restaurant?

C: Yeah I think we should eat first, but I don’t like sushi

why does we eat beef steak?

A: OK we’re gonna eat beef steak, but what are we gonna do next?

B: Let go to Bamboo Bar

C: Sounds great. But we couldn’t go to The Bros Bar . It’s my favorite spot.

Everyone: OK.

B: By the way, where are we gonna rest after that ?

A: Let’s just staying at a hotel.

B: I hate hotels

C: My bedroom is spacious, so we could sleeping at my house after

the night out


REQUEST

: CAN/ COULD/ WILL/ WOULD/

WOULD YOU MIND

1,the theory of

using can,

could,will, would,

would you mind

when making a

request

2,focused practice

Trịnh Thị Phương Thảo

THEORY

1,*Can: có thể

- use can to ask or tell someone to do something

Ex: can I ask you something?

-use can in type 1 conditional sentences

Ex: you can go now if you want

*Note: in the conjecture indicating the possibility of happening in the presentfuture

can be: có lẽ là...

can’t be: không thể nào là...

2,*Could: có thể

-use could to ask, tell someone to do something (use with a more polite

and formal meaning than can)

Ex: could you lend me 5 pounds until tomorrow?

-use could in the type 2,3 conditional:

Ex: if I were you, I could buy that book

Ex: If I had saved enough money, I could have bought a new car

-use could in a type 4 conditional

Ex: If I hadn’t eaten 4 cream cake, I couldn’t feel sick

*Note:

In the conjecture

+ the present-future: could be: có lẽ là... (20% xảy ra hoặc có thể hiểu

là không xảy ra)

+ the past: could have Ved/3: có lẽ là đã... ( 20% xảy ra hoặc có thể

hiểu là không xảy ra)

3*would you mind

-use to make a request, to ask someone to do something

Would you mind + Ving : bạn có phiền làm gì đó hay không?

Ex: would you mind turning off your cell phone?

Would you mind + If + clause in the past : bạn có phiền nếu tôi làm gì không?

Ex: Would you mind if i sat here?


THEORY

4,*Would: sẽ

-we often use would in

interrogative sentence

Ex: would you take me a book?

-use would to make a request, to

ask someone to do something

Ex: would you teach me this

unit?

-use would in a type 2,3

conditional sentence

Ex: I wouldn’t go out if I were

you

Ex: if it hadn’t rained, we would

have gone to the beach

-use would in a type 4 conditional

Ex: If we hadn’t known each

other before, we wouldn’t be sad

now


5,*Will: sẽ

-use will to make suggestions,

ask someone to do something

Ex: Will you meet me this

weekend?

-use will in type 1 conditional

sentences

Ex: If you study hard, you will

pass the exam

*CONCLUDE:

1, use modals can, could, will, and

would to make a request (ask

someone to do something)

Usage note: we use could and

would to soften request and make

them more polite

2, you can also use please to make

the request more polite. Note the

word order

3, -In affirmative answer to request,

we use expressions such as sure, of

course, no problem …

- In negative answer, we usually

apologize and give an explanation

BE CAREFUL! Do not use could or

would in response to polite request

4, we also use would you mind +

Ving or would you mind + IF+ Clause

in the past to make polite request

BE CAREFUL! When we answer this

type of request with not at all, it

means that we will do what the

person request

FOCUSED PRACTICE

EX1, Rewrite these sentence using the words in

(Trịnh Thị Phương THảo)

1, Pass me the report, please, Terry(can)

=>…………………………………………

2, Take me a book, please(can)

=>…………………………………………

3, can you speak English slowly?(could)

=>……………………………………

4, can you please bring money when join party?(could)

=>……………………………………

5, can you confirm it in next week? (will)

=>………………………………………..

6, Unless I finish my homework, I won’t watch T.V tonight(will)

=>………………………………………...

7, tomorrow, can you send a message back later?

I’m busy now(would)

=>…………………………………………..

8, could you please close the window?(would)

=>…………………………………………...

9, could I borrow your dictionary?(would you mind if)

=>…………………………………………

10, can you take me a photograph?(would you mind)

=>…………………………………………

EX2, Heather and her roommate Tara are planning a party in Kent Hall.

Use the word in parentheses to ask for permission. Answer the questions

(Trịnh Thị Phương Thảo)

1, Tara’s friend Troy is in town. She want him to come to the party

Tara: ………………………………... (do you mind if)

Heather:……………………………… I’d love to meet him

2, Heather wants to borrow her roommate’s black sweater.

Heather: I have nothing to wear…………………….. (can)

Tara:…………………………………. I’m planning to wear it myself!

3, Tara’s sister is coming from out of town. Tara wants her to stay in their room

Tara: …………………………………….. (do you mind if)

Heather: …………………………… she can sleep on the couch


FOCUSED PRACTICE

EX2, Heather and her roommate Tara are planning a party in Kent

Hall. Use the word in parentheses to ask for permission. Answer the

questions (continue)(Trịnh Thị Phương THảo)

4, Heather and Tara would like to have the party in the dormitory

lounge. Heather asks her dormitory counselor for permission.

Heather: ……………………………….. (may/ please)

Counselor:………………………. It’s available next Friday.

5, Heather and Tara would like to hang decorations from the ceiling

of the loug=nge

Heather: …………………………….. (may/please)

Counselor:………………………….. Fire regulations won’t allow it

6, Heather and Tara want to party until midnight

Heather: ………………………………. (could/please)

Counselor:……………………… Quiet hours start at 11:00 on Friday

7, Tara wants to play some of her friend Erica’s CDs at the party

Tara:…………………………………… (could)

Erica:…………………………….. Which ones should I bring?

8, It’s Friday night. A student wants to study in the lounge

Student: ……………………………… (can)

Heather:………………………….. We’re having a party. Want to join us?

EX3, Rewrite these internet safety tips. Use should. Ought to, or had better.

Choose between affirmative and negative (Trịnh Thị Phương Thảo)

The internet is a wonderful place to visit and hang out

Here are some tips to make your trip there a safe one!

1, I often use my real name online. Is that a problem?

Yes, ………………………………………… (always use a screen name)

Protect your identity!

2, Some in my chat group just asked for my address.

…………………………………………… (don’t give out any personal information)

People can use it to steal your identity and your money

3, My brother wants my password to check out a group before joining.

……………………………………………... ( don’t give it to anyone)

Not even your brother! He might share it, and then people can steal your

information

4, I sent a file to someone, and she told me it had a virus

……………………………………………. (get virus protection and use it)

A virus can hurt your computer and destroy important files (and other people’s

too)


FOCUSED PRACTICE

EX3, Rewrite these internet safety tips. Use should. Ought to, or had

better. Choose between affirmative and negative (continue) (Trịnh Thị

Phương Thảo)

5, I update my virus protection very month. Is that really necessary

Yes!……………………………………………. (keep your virus protection up-to-date)

Remember: old virus protection is no virus protection

6, I got an e-mail about at home-based business. I could make $15,000 a

month

………………………………………………… (don’t believe any “ get rich quick” offers)

They sound good, but people almost always lose money

7. I got an interesting e-mail. I don’t know who sent it, buy it’s got a file

attached

…………………………………… (don’t open any e-mail attachments from

strangers)

They could contain dangerous viuses.

8, The internet sounds too dangerous for me!

Not really……………………………… (be careful)

But enjoy yourself-it’s an exciting world out there!

EX4, Rewrite the sentence in the same meaning


1, Perhaps Susan know the address. (may)

=>Susan………………………………….

2, I managed to finish all my work. (be able to)

=>I……………………………………….

3, The best thing for you to do is to sit down. (had better)

=>You……………………………………

4, It’s possible that Joanna didn’t receive my message. (might)

=>Joanna…………………………………

5, I am sure you were surprised when you heard all the news. (must)

=>You…………………………………when you heard all the news.

6, I am sure that the cat is in the house somewhere. (must)

=>I am sure that………………………….

7, It wasn’t necessary for you to do all this work. (needn’t)

=>You……………………………………. all this work

8, I am sure that John is not the thief. (can’t)

=>I am sure that………………………….


FOCUSED EXERCISE: PRACTICE

EX4, Rewrite the sentence in the same meaning (continue)


9, I didn’t apologize. That was wrong of me (should)

=>I should…………………………...........

10, can I move this house? (would you mind if)

=>Would you mind if…………..................

11, Could I go back your house? (would you mind if)

=>Would you mind if………………...........

12, Will you post this letter for me? (would you mind)

=>Would you mind………………………...

EX5, Read a situation and write a sentence with the words in brackets


1)That dress you bought is very good quality. (It must / be / very expensive)

=>…………………………………………….

2) I haven’t seen Jim for ages. (He must / go away)

=>……………………………………………………………

3) I wonder where my umbrella is. (You must / leave it on the rain)

=>……………………………………………………………

4) Don passed the examination. He didn’t study very much on it. (The exam

couldn’t / be / very difficult)

=>…………………………………………………………..

5) She knew everything about our plans. (She must / listen / to our conversation)

=>…………………………………………………………..


Đoàn Đức Thắng

ADVICE

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

ADVICE : SHOULD, OUGHT TO,

HAD BETTER

I. Grammar presentation

1.Introduction

+) The Advice expresses the opinion someone gives you about what you should do or

how you should act in a particular situation.

+) We use should, ought to, had better to give advice and express that they think

something is a good (or a bad) idea. “Should” is the most common way to give advice.

2. Stucture

Form

Statements

Should (not)

Subject + ought (not) to + infinitive + object + …….

had better (not)

Yes/ No Questions Should + subject + infinitive + (object) + … ?

Short Answers

Yes, subject + should. / No, subject + shouldn’t.

WH-Questions

How

When + should + subject + infinitive + (object) + … ?

Where

Contractions :

should not = shouldn’t

had better = ‘d better


*Examples :

Affirmative

Negative

Question

A: I failed my test.

B: Really? You should

study harder.

Young children shouldn't

watch violent TV shows.

I have a problem. Should

I call my parents or my

friend?

A: It's really cold outside.

B: You ought to wear a

warm jacket.

You ought not to talk so

much.

(“ought to” is not usually

used in the negative form)

(“ought to” is not

common in question

form)

A: You had better slow

down. You are driving too

fast!

You had better not

forget to pay your tuition.

If you do, the university

will kick you out!

(“had better” is not

usually used in question

form)

* Using:

Should Ought to Had better

We use “should”

every time we want

to give an advice or

an opinion.

We can use “ought to”

to instead of “should”

to give an advice or

an opinion.

We use “had better”

when it’s advisable to do

something. If you don’t,

there will be a problem

or a danger.


*Advanced:

Using

Examples

1. In communication, two words "ought

to" or "should" can be used, but in

grammar or academics, it depends on a

number of contexts.

1. You should see the dentist.

2. You ought not to use public

property for private work.

2. “Ought to” is more emphatic than

“should”, implying that there is no other

option than to act. And it expresses what

we should/shouldn't do because of a rule.

He ought to get the

promotion. He works really

hard.

3. When asking for advice, always use

"should" instead of "ought to," and in

negative statements, often use "should"

instead of "ought to."

I didn’t pass the test at school.

What should I do?

4. "Should" refers to personal

recommendations made to others.

I think you should study abroad

in America.

5. "Had better" is a phrase that is used to

provide particular advise or to suggest

something that is best done right now.

6. "Had better" also implies a negative

outcome if you ignore the advice, in other

words, it is a threat.

7. The phrase "had better" is frequently

used in communication to provide advice.

8. When giving general counsel, we can

use "should" or "ought to“, but "had

better" has a stronger connotation when

the speaker deems the action necessary

and expects it to occur.

The neighbors are complaining.

We had better turn the radio

down.

We had better hurry or we’ll miss

the train.

You had better slow down.

I have an appointment in ten

minutes. I had better go now or

I’ll be late.


II. FOCUSED PRACTICE

Exercise 1: Complete the sentences. Use Shoud, ought to, had

better.

1. I think you _________ break up with him.

2. When you move to Ho Chi Minh City to study, you will

be all alone. You _________ take care of yourself.

3. You __________ use the company’s telephones for

personal calls. (not)

4. Now, we _________ hurry or we’ll miss the

deadline.

5. Van! You _________ lose weight.

6. I ________ get up early tomorrow. I've got a lot to do.

7. I think everybody __________ learn more foreign

language.

Exercise 2: Complete the sentences. Use Can, Could, Be able to.

1. I haven’t ________ sleep recently.

2. He tells me he ________ play the piano.

3. She spoke in a low voice but I ________ understand what she was saying.

4. When Tom was 16, he ________ run 100 meters in 11 seconds.

5. The fire spread through the building very quickly, everyone ________ escape.

6. _______ I go out?

7. _________ I borrow your computer?

8. The car fell into river. The worker ________ get it out but the driver was dead.

9. When we went into the house, we ________ smell burning.

10. Nicole ________ drive, but she doesn’t have a car.


Exercise 3: Complete the sentence. Use

Can, Could, May, Do you mind if.

1. ________ I ask a question, please?

2. ________ I borrow your book?

3. ________ he come tomorrow?

4. Could I borrow this pencil?

Yes, of course you ______

5. ________ I clean up later?

6. ________ I eat these tacos?

Exercise 4: Complete the sentences. Use can,

could, will, would, would you mind.

1. ________ you turn on the TV?

2. ________ you call me later?

3. ________ posting this letter for me?

4. ________ if I went back to your house?

5. ________ you close the door?

6. ________ you bring dessert?

Exercise 5: Complete the sentences. Use

Let’s, Could, Why don’t, Why not, How about.

1. They ________ come to our house for Christmas dinner.

2. _______ they play soccer with us tomorrow?

3. _______ stay for lunch?

4. _______ trying this restaurant?

5. Since you don't want to get the red hat, ________ the blue one? It looks good.

6. _______ go out for dinner tonight.

7. _______ you buy a new car? Yours always breaks down.



Exercise 6: Matching.

1. Jane has a toothache.

2. We’ve almost run out of petrol.

3. You are overeating.

4. He works really hard.

5. The neighbors are complaining.

6. When you move to Hanoi to study,

you will be all alone

A. You ought to take care of yourself.

B. He should see the dentist.

C. You should lose weight

D.We had better turn the radio down.

E. We’d better stop at the next petro

station to fill up.

F. He ought to get the promotion.


1. How about

2. Let’s

3. Why not

A. go to the races this afternoon?

B. a lodge in the rainforest?

C. go to the Temple Street Market tonight.

4. Why don’t

5. How about

D. resting before we go out?

E. we go to the races?


1. He want to smoke in my house

2. Her leg is broken

3, He had his driver's license

confiscated by the police

4, Baby is sleeping

5, I am having a bath

6, Anna is carrying heavy things

A. Could you turn off the TV?

B. He couldn’t drive his car

yesterday.

C. Can I help you?

D. Do you mind if I smoke?

E. She can’t dance in the party.

F. Would you mind waiting a

minute?

Bùi Thị Thu

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

SUGGETSTIONS

Introduction

- A suggestion is a piece of advice, proposal or an idea for consideration. In

other words, it’s an idea someone proposes. If someone makes a suggestion

to you, you have the complete right to either accept or reject that suggestion.

This means a suggestion is an idea that’s optional – you don’t have to

necessarily try it out.

- There’s some kind of suggestions: Let’s- Could – Why don’t – Why not – How

about.

II. STRUCTURE

1. Table 1- “Let’s”

+) To make a suggestion to someone, you can use the chunk "Let's".

It's short for "Let us".

+) We use let’s(let us) to make suggestions about doing something with

someone

When you use the chunk "Let's", you must add a

verb that expresses your suggestion. This form of

the verb must be the infinitive form, no matter

how many people you address

Bùi Thị Thu

→Exemple: Let’s go to the cinema tonight!

Let’s take a trip this summer

Let’s not stay at a hostel.

2. Table 2- “ Could”

(*): could is a model. Model have only one form. They do

not have –s in the third- person singular.

- We often use phrases with Could to make suggestions. Some are neutral,

some are strong. The negative form, couldn’t is stronger than the affirmative

form.

- Useage note: we often use Maybe in suggestion with Could

→ May be we could stay near the volcano.

Situation: you need to buy some book but you do not have enough money

→Our suggestion: you could talk to your father and ask

him to give you some money

Bùi Thị Thu

3. Table 3- “ Why don’t”

+ We can use Why don’t….? to make a specific suggestion

→Example: Why don’t we go to the coast until Sunday night?

Why doesn’t Tom call him tonight?

Why don’t we take the ferry?

(*): As you can see in the examples, this is a normal Present Simple

question using the negative form of do (don’t or doesn’t). The verb form is

Present but it refers to a future situation, usually a near future.

4. Table 4 – “Why not”

*We can use Why not to make a general suggestion. We often find it in advertising

→Example: Why not take a break in the south- west?

Why not treat yourself to a meal atvthe icon restaurant ?

Bùi Thị Thu

5. Table 5- How about

+) We often use How about when we make suggestions about food or drink. _

These suggestions are invitations:

→Example:

A: Are you hungry?

B: Yeah, how about some lunch?

* DISTINGUISH :

+) How about+ gerund: How about taking the ferry?

+) How about+ noun: How about the ferry?

Bùi Thị Thu

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

1. Listen to the following sentences and according to the

context choose the correct option (permission, request or

suggestion)

2. Listen and complete the sentence:

Bùi Thị Thu

1: A What we need is a … ... Camera (2 word)

B

Yes, it’s has to be ……… (1 word)

C Then …. ….. install this? (2 words)

2: A It’s simple.

B but very ………. (1 word)

A ……. …….. install one infront of all the doors. (2 words)

3: B It’s amazing!

C It’s ……….! (1 word)

A

… …. ….. some for our trucks? (3 words)

4: A Everybody eyes are different. It’s 100 per cent ……… (1

word)

B Hmmm.

A ….. ..…. …… look into it. (3 words)

5: B If someone …..working – like computer game, internet chatrooms -

……… ….. (2 words)

C ……. …….. ….. try it? ( 3 words )

3. Listen and choose T or F.

1. she would like to surprise her relatives.

2. her boyfriend can't stand doing romantic things.

3. it's easy for the girl to find a present for her sweetheart.

4. the boy offers the girl to choose the present according to her taste.

5. he's sure that a present should be connected with the hobby.

6. the girl refuses the idea of going to the baseball game together.

7. she isn't aware of her boyfriend's favorite team.

8. she'll ask her boyfriend directly about his favorite team.

Bùi Thị Thu

9. she has to surf the net to check the timetable of games.

10. he discourages the girl to choose the convenient day.

4. Listen and fill the requests

a, ……… you order a taxi for room 145, please?

b, I’d ……. A glass of wine, please.

c, ………. we have some more bread?

d, can you spend ……………. up to room 467, please?

e, We’d ………. a table on the terrace.

f, ………………. does the exchange bureau open?

g, Excuse me, this ………. is dirty.

5. Listen and choose TRUE or FALSE

A

1. Many year ago he and his family moved to China.

2. He live in Mexico before moving.

3. When he was 9, he was happy to live in China.

4. When he arrived in China, he felt lost.

5. He came back to USA.

B Listen again and complete with COULD or COULDN’T

He ……..(1) visit his grandparents wheb he lived in China. He …...(2)

read the writing on the sign and he……..(3) understand Chinese. After

few months he……..(4) buy his lunch at school and he ……(5) play with

some children.

Bùi Thị Thu

6. Listen and choose T or F

1. The woman has to stand up during the journey because there aren't any seats.

2. The man thinks that traveling by train is expensive.

3. The train is busy because there is a football match today.

7. Before you listen the conversations, guess what the

request for permission will be for each picture. Write

the number next to the picture that matches the

picture that matches the conversation.

pic a

pic b

pic c

pic d

pic e

Bùi Thị Thu

pic f

pic h

pic i

pic k

8. Listen and choose.

9. Listen and choose the best answer.

1. Why do the listeners write to the programme?

A: to get advice

B: to give opinions

C: to complain about holiday trips

Bùi Thị Thu

2. Who does Stella tip?

A: anyone who provides service

B: no one

C: people who affect her holiday in a positive way

3. Why the most people surprised in North America?

A: the service is bad

B: the tips are high

C: it’s expensive

4. What does Stella say about tipping in different countries?

A: always pay the same amount

B: try to avoid tipping because of service charges

C: expect to pay different percentages

5. Why are service charges more common?

A: because many waiters come from different countries

B: because it solves a problem when you have international guest

C: because the restaurents want to charge more

10. Listen and make sure the sentence TRUE or FALSE.

1. Sally order a tomato sald as starter.

2. Jamie and Sally choose the different main courses.

3. Sally prefer drinhking mineral water.

4. They are sitting at a table for two.

Bùi Thị Thu

MODALS

&

SIMILAR EXPRESSION

Preferences

Prefer, would prefer,would rather

GRAMMAR

Introduction:

We use prefer, would prefer and would rather to talk about things or

activities that you like better than other things or activities. We use them to

express general and specific preferences.

1.Prefer:

Statements

Subject

I

He

prefer

prefer

Noun/ Gerund/ to infinitive

novel.

reading novel.

(not) to read novel.

Statements

Subject

would

prefer

Noun/ Gerund/

to infinitive

to/ rather than

Noun/ Gerund/

bare infinitive

I

He

would

prefer

novel

reading novel

to read novel

to

rather than

music.

listening to

music.

listen to music.

Lưu Thu Thủy

Interrogative

Do/does

Subject

prefer


Do

you

novel?

Does

he

prefer

reading novel?

(not) to read novel?

Short answers

Affirmative

Negative

I

do.

I

don't.

Yes,

No,

He

does

.

He

doesn't.

2.Would prefer:

Contraction

would prefer = 'd prefer

Statements

Subject

I

He

would prefer

would prefer


novel.

reading novel.

(not) to read novel.

Lưu Thu Thủy

Statements

Subject

would

prefer

Noun/ Gerund/

to infinitive

to/ rather than

Noun/ Gerund/

bare infinitive

I

He

would

prefer

novel

reading novel

to read novel

to

rather than

music.

listening to

music.

listen to music.

Interrogative

Would

subject

prefer


you

novel?

Would

prefer

reading novel?

he

(not) to read novel?

Short answers

Affirmative

Negative

I

I

Yes,

He

would.

No,

He

wouldn't.

Lưu Thu Thủy

3.Would rather:

Contraction

would rather = 'd prefer

Have one subject:

Subject

would rather

Statements

bare infinitive

I

He

would rather

(not) read novel.

Statements

Subject

would

rather

bare

infinitive

than

bare

infinitive

I

He

would

rather

read novel

than

listen to music.

Interrogative

Would

subject

rather

bare infinitive

you

Would

rather

read novel?

he

Lưu Thu Thủy

Short answers

Affirmative

Negative

I

I

Yes,

He

would.

No,

He

wouldn't.

Have two subjects:

Statements

Subject 1

would rather Subject 2 past simple

I

would rather

(that)

they

came here.

didn't came

here.

Affirmative

Negative

Interrogative

Would Subject 1 rather Subject 2

past simple

Would

you

rather

(that)

they

came here?

didn't came

here?

Affirmative

Negative

Affirmative

Short answers

Negative

Yes,

I

He

would.

No,

I

He

wouldn't.

Lưu Thu Thủy

Grammar notes

1

2

Notes

We often use prefer to talk about

general preferences.

We often use would prefer and

would rather to talk about

specific preferences.

prefer and would prefer

can be followed by

noun, gerund or to-infinitive.

"would prefer + to-infinitive”

is more common than

“would prefer + gerund”

Examples

I prefer to read novel.

A: Would you like to have a cup

of coffee?

B: I’d prefer to have some water.

I prefer read novel.

I prefer reading novel.

I prefer to read novel.

I’d prefer read novel.

I’d prefer reading novel.

I’d prefer to read novel

3

4

5

would rather can only be

followed by the bare infinitive.

We can use this structure:

“S1 + would rather + S2 + V2/ed”

to indicate that we prefer

someone to do something, not us.

The structure is in the past, but

we are referring to the present or

future.

In the negative form prefer, would

prefer, and would rather (1 subject)

are followed by not.

Would rather (2 subjects), the S2 is

followed by “ didn’t + bare infinitive”

A comparison with to can follow

prefer/ would prefer + noun/gerund.

A comparison with than can follow

would rather + bare infinitive

A comparison with rather than can

follow prefer/ would prefer

+ to infinitive

I’d rather have a cup of tea.

I would rather he loved me.

I would prefer not drinking coffee.

I would rather he didn’t love me.

He prefers coffee to tea.

He would prefer drinking coffee

to eating cake.

He would rather love me than her.

I would prefer to drink coffee

rather than eat cake.

Lưu Thu Thủy

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Preferences


Ex1: Choose the correct option for each gap below.

1.

I prefer brown sugar ______ white sugar.

A. rather than B. that C. to D. than

2. I don't want to go out. I'd rather _______ at home.

A. staying B. stay C. to stay D. to staying

3. I prefer traveling by bus to ________ by train.

A. traveling B. travel C. traveled D. travel to

4. I'd rather you ________ here with me and the kids.

A. stay B. to stay C. stayed D. staying

5. I'd prefer to walk rather than _______ by car.

A. to go B. going C. go D. to going

6. I _______ become a pianist.

A. would rather B. prefer C. would prefer D. would rather to

7. I prefer running _______ .

A. rather than swim B. to swim C. than swim D. to swimming

8. She'd prefer to work night shifts _______ work at weekends.

A. rather than B. to C. than D. that

9. I _______ he didn't do it on his own.

A. 'd rather B. 'd like C. prefer D. 'd prefer

10. I'd rather she _______ something different.

A. studying B. study C. studied D. 'd study

Lưu Thu Thủy

Ex2: Write sentences using I'd prefer... or I'd rather... + one of the following:

get a taxi go for a swim wait till later

wait a few minutes listen to some music go alone

think about it for a while eat at home stand

Shall we walk home?

Do you want to eat now?

Shall we watch TV?

What about a game of tennis?

Shall we leave now?

Do you want to go to a restaurant?

I think we should decide now?

Would you like to sit down?

Do you want me to come with you?

1. (prefer) I'd prefer to get a taxi.

2. (rather) I'd rather wait till later.

3. ( prefer )

4. ( rather )

5. ( rather )

6. ( prefer )

7. ( rather )

8. ( rather )

9. ( prefer )

Ex3: Use your own ideas to complete these sentences.

1. ‘Shall I tell Anna what happened?’ - ‘No, I’d rather she …….... know.’

2. Do you want me to go now or would you rather I ………. here?

3. Do you want to go out this evening or would you rather ………. at home?

4. This is a private matter. I’d rather you ……………………. tell anybody else.

5. I don’t want to make a decision without jack and Sue.

I’d rather they ..……. here.

6. A: Do you mind if I put some music on?

B: I’d rather you ……………………. . I’m trying to study.

Lưu Thu Thủy

NECESSITY: Have (got) to, Must,

Don’t have to, Must not, Can’t

GRAMMAR

1.

Introduction

1.1. Usage:

- Must ( has the negative form mustn't) which is used to:

+ Expressing necessity, or compulsion in the present and in the future

e.g: Plants must get enough light and water => necessary

You must get up earlier in the morning => obligation

+ Give advice or request to be emphasized

e.g: you must be here before 8 o’clock tomorrow

+ Make a logical and certain inference

e.g: you must be hungry after a long walk

+ Must not is used to express prohibition- to say something not to do or to tell

someone not to do something. We can use can’t instead of must not to

express prohibition in spoken English

e.g: You mustn’t use the office phone for private calls

-have to and have got to can be used equivalently to must to express

necessity. But have to/ have got to can be used instead of must in cases where

must cannot be used: future tense, continuous tense, past tense, present

perfect tense, infinitive, gerund and after modal verbs

e.g: You can borrow my car, but you’ll have to bring it back befor ten [ NOT

you’ll must bring]

Ngô Phương Uyên

NOTE:

there is a difference between must and have to, have got to and sometimes this is

very important:

-Must is used to express an imperative from the speaker (the speaker's feelings and

wishes). Have to is used to express a compulsion due to a situation or an external

event (such as a rule, law, order, etc.)

e.g: + I really must stop smoking.

+ I have to stop smoking. Doctor’s order.

-Must not= can’t indicates prohibition.

Don't have to= don't need to means unnecessary

e.g: + Car mustn’t park in front of the entrance.

+ You don’t have to wash those glasses. They’re clean.

-In informal speech, have to is often pronounced “hafta” and got to is often

pronounced “gotta”

Be careful:

+ Must is the strongest and most serious modal verb of the three and is most

common in writing. It is unusual to use “must” in questions.

+ Have got to is most common in informal speech. It is not used in questions

+ Have to is the most commonly used modal of obligation. It is useful for forming

questions and negatives.

+ There is only one way to express past time with these modal verbs: HAD TO.

(There is no past tense of must/have got to.)

Ngô Phương Uyên

1.2. Structures:

Necessity: Have (got) to, don’t have to

+ Affirmative Statements:

Subject +have/has (got) to + Vinf

+ Negative Statements:

Subject + don’t/doesn’t + have to + Vinf

+ Yes/No questions:

Do/does + Subject + have to + Vinf ?

+Wh- questions:

Wh-word + do/does + subject + have to + Vinf ?

Necessity: must, must not, can’t

Subject + must (not) + Vinf

Subject + can’t +Vinf

Ngô Phương Uyên

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

NECESSITY: Have (got) to, Must,

Don’t have to, Must not, Can’t

2. Task-based practical

Exercise 1: Choose the correct answer for each sentence.

1) If you have a pet dog, you _____________ feed it every day or it will die!

A. have got to

B. have got

C. has got to

2) Son: Mom, I don't want to clean my room. _________________ it right now?

Mother: Yes, right now.

A. Do I must clean

B. Have I to clean

C. Do I have to clean

3) Friend: _________________________ pay to see the doctor?

Brother: No, she ________________ because she has medical insurance.

A. Must your sister / musn't

B. Does your sister have to / doesn't

C. Do your sister have to / don't

4) In order to log on to the Internet, Sally __________ her user I.D.

A. have to enter

B. has got to entering

C. must enter

5) When a police officer asks to see your driver's license, you _____________ to

him/her.

A. have got show it

Ngô Phương Uyên

B. must to show it

C. have got to show it

6) Mr. Wu: Hi, Mark. Where's your dad?

Mark: Oh, he ______________ to work because there was an emergency.

A. had got to go

B. had to go

C. musted go

7) If Richard wants to become a professional

musician, he ______________ every day.

A. haves to practise

B. have to practise

C. has to practise

8) According to the law, drivers ______________ at stop signs.

A. must stop

B. must stopping

C. must to stop

Exercise 2: Use the best modal to complete each sentence. You may need to

include the subject of the sentence in some of the answers. Read the

sentences carefully to see who the subject is and what tense is used

1. New drivers _______take a test in order to get a driver's license. They have no

choice.

2. A: ______________ go to work today?

B: No, I don't because it's Sunday.

3. John ______________finish the report quickly because the deadline is today at 4

pm.

4. A: Jennifer lost her passport. ________________get a new one?

B: No, she _______. She found it in her purse.

5. I'm sorry, Mom. I __________call you back later. My cell phone battery is dying.

Ngô Phương Uyên

6. Canadians _______________pay taxes every year. It's the law.

7. Sasha __________email her homework to her teacher because she forgot to

take it to class yesterday.

8. A: Does Joseph ___________study very much tonight?

B: No, he doesn't. He reviewed a lot last night and he understood everything

well.

9. Barbara ___________go to the supermarket because she doesn't have enough

food for dinner.

Exercise 3: Rewrite these sentences using a modal (obligation / absence of

obligation / prohibition )

a) It's not necessary to go to school on Saturdays

You .....................................................................................

b) It's obligatory for all drivers to have a driving licence

All drivers..............................................................................

c) It's compulsary for Peter to learn Spanish

Peter ....................................................................................

d) It's not obligatory for customers to go on the trips organized by the hotel

Customers ..........................................................................................

e) Passengers aren't allowed to smoke in this compartment

Passengers .................................................................

f) It 's necessary to book in advance

You .............................................................................

g) It's essential to have a visa to travel to India

You .............................................................................

h) It's not necessary for you to shout. I can hear you perfectly well

You .......................................................................................

Ngô Phương Uyên

Exercise 4: Underline the correct words. Sometimes both are possible

1. In my office you have to/must wear smart clothes.

2. I must/have to leave now, my class is about to start and I don’t want to be

late.

3. Notice to all conference participants: Please note that you must/have got

to register before entering the conference hall

4. Next year I’ll have to/I’ll must have a job

Exercise 5: Read the following short passage, find the mistakes and correct

them

Pollution is causing enormous problems all over the world these days.

Goverments need to act quickly if they want to stop this problem before it is too

late. The first thing I believe we will must do is reduce the amount we use our

cars. Our goverments must to encourage people to use public transport. In my

country, public transport is not very reliable, so the first thing that the

government must to do is ensure that buses and trains are viable alternative to

the car. They should also reduce the cost of travelling on public transport.

Exercise 6: Match the verbs in bold to their meanings

1. You must hurry or you'll miss

your appointment

2. You ought to see your dentist for

a check-up

3. You must eat a balanced diet

4. You need to drink about eight

glasses of water every day

5. You mustn't park here

6. You don't have to study medicine

to become a social worker

7. You shouldn't go out in the sun

without a hat.

8. In the UK you have ( got ) to be

18 to be able to vote

A. This is very important: it

isessential.

B. This is forbidden. You're not

allowed to do it.

C. This is necessary.

D. I advise you not to do this.

E. This is a rule/law.

F. It would be a good idea to do

this.

G. You can do this if you want to

but it's not necessary.

H. It is important that you do this.

Ngô Phương Uyên

Exercise 7: Complete the text using the correct forms of the words in the

box

Have to Don’t have to Must

Don’t have to Should Have to

Don’t have to Shouldn’t Mustn’t

Hi! I’m Harry and my school is organising a camping trip soon for all the

students. We 1._____ get permission from our parents first, of course, before

we can go. I’m not sure if I 2._______ go or not, and my parent have said I

3.________if I don’t want to. But I guess I 4._______just stay at home and miss

all the fun! We’ll 5.________take our own clothes to wear, but luckily we

6.______ take tents, because they’re provided. I 7._________ remember to take a

warm jacket, though, as t will be chilly. And the teachers have said we

8.________ take our mobile phones in case they get lost! It’s not allowed! I’d

really like to have my phone with me – but at least this means I 9.________ ring

my parents every night to say that I’m OK!

Exercise 8:You are going to listen to a conversation between Martha

and Julian about the deadline for a project at school. Pay attention to

the indications Martha gives Julian about it. Qualifying the following

statements as True or False.

1.Martha can’t help Julian with the project in any way

2. Julian must ask Mrs.Benet if he can hand in the project after the deadline

3.The presentation must look great when it’s finished

4. Julian has submitted his project

5.Martha has completed her project

Ngô Phương Uyên

UNIT 18: EXPECTATION: Be supposed to

GRAMMAR

A. Introduction

1.Usage

- To be expected to do/to be something

ex: You are supposed to be here an hour ago.

The party was supposed to be a surprise.

- Used to say what someone should do

ex: You're supposed to finished your homework before going outside.

You must do what you are supposed to.

- Used to refer what is/is not allowed to do

ex: They are not supposed to leave the room.

Are you supposed to be here after school?

- Used to showed when being angry or offended by someone/something

ex: Is that supposed to be funny? I found it pretty rude.

What was that supposed to mean?

- Used to indicate what people say about something/someone

ex: This breed of dog is supposed to be really expensive.

That person is supposed to be the best doctor in the town.

Nguyễn Vũ Hà Thủy

2.Structures

Subject

I

Statements

be (not) supposed to Base form of verb

am

was

You

We

They

are

were

(not)

supposed to

verb infinite

Objective

He

She

It

is

was

be

subject

Yes/No question

Be

Subject

supposed to

Base form of verb

Am

Was

I

Are

Were

you

we

they

supposed to

verb infinite

Is

Was

he

she

it

be + Subject

Answers:

Yes, subject + be

No, subject + be not


Wh-question

be

am

was

Subject

I

supposed to

Base form of verb

Wh-word

are

were

you

we

they

supposed to

verb infinite

is

was

he

she

it

be + Subject

Examples:

- She was supposed to finish the assignments yesterday

but now she's still doing it.

- Are we supposed to come here at this hour? - No, we

aren't.

- Where is he supposed to arrive?

- I couldn't contact you 2 days ago, where were you

supposed to be?

Nguyễn Vũ Hà Thuỷ

UNIT 18: EXPECTATION: Be supposed to

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

B. Practice

Exercise 1: Complete the conversation with the verb in parenthesis and a

form of be supposed to

1. A: The dress store called too. They delivered your

wedding dress to your office this morning. _____ they

(do)________________ that?

B: No, they weren’t! They (deliver)_______________ it here.

That’s why I stay at home today.

2. A: Let’s get in line. The rehearsal (start)_________________ in a few minutes

B: We’re bridesmaids. Where ____ we (stand)_____________?

A: Right here, behind Netta.

3. A: Hi. Where’s Netta?

B: Gary! You (not be)__________________________ here!

A: Why not?

B: The groom (not see)_______________________ the bride

on the day of the wedding until the ceremony. It’s bad

luck.

4. A: Sophie, could I borrow your handkerchief, please?

B: Sure, but why?

A: I (wear)__________________________ something old,

something new, something borrowed, and something

blue. I don’t have anything borrowed.

B: It (rain)______________________ this afternoon. Maybe

I should lend you my umbrella instead.

5. A: Where are Gary and Netta going on their honeymoon?

B: Aruba

A: Oh, that (be)_________________________ a really a nice island. How long are they

going to be away?

B: They (stay)____________________________ ten days, but they decided to stay two

weeks.


Exercise 2: Read Jack’s email to a friend. There are eight mistakes in the use

of be supposed to and was/were going to. The first mistake is already

corrected. Find and correct seven more.

Hi!

Remember my old college roommate Gary? He’s getting married tomorrow and

I’m the best man! He and his fiancée 0.were supposed to have a small wedding

but they ended up inviting more than 200 people! As best man, I have some

important responsibilities. For one thing, I'm supposing to make sure Gary gets to

the wedding ceremony on time - not an easy job for me. At first, we was going to

hire a limousine and driver, but I decided to drive him there myself in a rented red

sports car. I'm also supposed to hold the wedding rings during the ceremony.

Then, at the end of the reception party, I'm supposed to helping the newlyweds

leave quickly for their honeymoon. They're going straight to the airport (I'm also

suppose to hold the plane tickets for them). They are going to go to Hawaii, but

they changed their minds and are going to Aruba instead. Oh! I just looked at the

clock. I'd better sign off now, or I'll be late for the rehearsal dinner. I going to leave

five minutes ago! By the way, Sophie, the maid of honor, will be there too. I've

never met her, but she supposes to be very nice. I'll let you know how it goes!

Jack

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

______________________________________

Exercise 3: Choose the best answer

1. The train was ______ at 11.00. Why was it so late?

A. supposed to arrive B. suppose to arrived

C. supposed to arrives D. supposes to arrive


2. Why are you watching TV? You’re __________ your homework.

A. suppose to be doing

B. supposed doing

C. supposed to be doing

D. suppose to doing

3. I'm going to wash the car now. I was ___________ it yesterday but I didn't feel like it.

A. supposed do

B. supposed to

C. supposed to do

D. supposed to doing

4. I’d better hurry up; I’m _________ Helen at 11 o’clock.

A. supposed to be meeting

B. supposed to meet

C. suppose to meet

D. suppose to be meeting

5. Where’s Childe? He was _________ by now.

A. suppose to have arrived

B. supposed have arrived

C. supposed to arrived

D. supposed to have arrived

6. I _________ some email to my teacher today.

A. am supposed to send out

B. was supposed to send out

C. am suppose to send

D. were supposed to send out


Exercise 4: Match the following sentences

1.

2.

3.

He was supposed to call me back

The kids were supposed to do chores

Raphael is not supposed to bring heavy

stuffs

4. Eleanor was supposed to wear a red dress

5. Dean was supposed to go to the cinema

with us

6. The letter was supposed to arrive

yesterday

7. I'm supposed to bring her my phone

charger

8. It's supposed to be cheap

a. because he's just got a

surgery

b. but I don't think it is

c. but I left it at home

d. but he got a flu yesterday

e. but I haven't got it

f. but he didn't

g. but they forgot

h. because the dresscode was

written on the invitation

Exercise 5: Complete each sentence with be supposed to and the main verb

1. You (be) _______________________________ at work by nine.

2. I (go) _______________________________ to a meeting tomorrow.

3. The students (wait) __________________________________ until they’re dismissed by

the teacher.

4. She (make) ____________________________________ dinner last night.

5. The packages (be) ________________________________ here by now.

6. I (get) __________________________________ a phone call from the doctor.

7. Bob (fly) _____________________________________ to New York tomorrow.

8. The test (be) ___________________________________ easy, but it wasn’t.

9. You (help) _____________________________________ me move last weekend. What

happened?

10. The city (fix) ___________________________________ these potholes as soon as they

appear.


FUTURE POSSIBILITY: MAY, MIGHT, COULD

GRAMMAR

INTRODUCTION

1.Structure

“I’m not sure what to do.

I may watch TV.”

Statement

s

Subject

You

It

They

May,

Might,Could

may (not)

might (not)

could

Base form

of verb

get

could.

“I might try that cake

tomorrow"

Yes/No questions

Short answers

Are you going to fly to Paris?

Are you leaving on Monday?

I

may (not)

might (not)

could

Are you going to

Will you

Is it possible you’ll

be

there long?

We

may

might

could

be.

Wh-questions

Answers

When are you going to Paris?

How long are you going to be there?

I

We

may

might

could

go

be

next week.

there a week.

Nguyễn Thị Xuân Thu

2.Usage

-Expressing Future Possibility with May, Might, and Could

a, May(not), Might(not), and Could express possibility about the future. Could and

Might sometimes express more uncertainly than May.

-ex: It might get could tonight.

I may eat dinner at 7:00 p.m.

It could rain tomorrow.

-Be careful ! May be and Maybe both express possibility that something is

impossible.

Notice these differences:

·May be is a modal + be. It is always two words.

-ex: There may be a bus at 10 a.m.

·Maybe is not a modal. It is an adverb. It is always one word, and it comes at the

beginning of the sentence.

-ex: Maybe Mike’s right.

b, Use May not and Might not to express the posibility that something will not

happen.

-ex: There are a lot of clouds, but it might not rain.

Use Couldn’t to express the idea that something is impossible.

-ex: A:Why don’t you ask for John for a ride?

B: I couldn’t do that. He’s too busy.

-Be careful ! We usually do not contract Might not, and we never contract May not.


Modals Positive Sentences

Negative Sentences

Questions

Might

Alia might go to the

party.

Alia might not go to

the party. (not common)

Could

Juan could be late.

(not common)

Could Juan be late?

May

They may buy a

new car.

They may not buy a

new car.

(not common)

#note

Could not is almost always used to show past ability, not future possibility.

Ex: Lisa could not go to the party.

( Past ability = she didn't go to the party.)

c, Questions about possibility usually do not use may, might. Instead, they use the

future ( will, be going to, the present progressive) or phrases such as Do you think …?

or Is it possible that …?

The answers to these questions often use may, might, or could.

-ex: A: When will it start snowing?

C: Do you think it’ll snow tomorrow?

B: It might start around lunchtime. D: It could stop tonight.

In short answers to yes/no questions, use may, might, or could alone.

-ex: A: Will your office close early?

B: It might.

-Usage note: If be is the main verb, it is common to include be in the short answer.

-ex: A: Will our fight be on time?

B: It might be.



FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 1: Write might, may or could in the sentences below to show possibility. More

than one answer might be possible.

Ex: Mina__might___help me with my homework. ( Mina có thể giúp tôi làm việc nhà.)

1. John and Amy_________get a new kitchen.

2. I _________study Janpanese next year.

3. Pavel________try out for hockey next year.

4. Daniel___________not to go school because he’s sick.

5. ___________she be our teacher?

6. We___________ try this restaurant tonight.

7. Louise and Pierre____________get married in the spring.

8. ___________that be our bus?

9. They___________not be ready to take the test.

10. Isabella_____________not join the basketball team this year.


Exercise 2 : For each questions, write a short answer with could or couldn’t. Use be

necessary.

1.A: Do you think the roads will be dangerous? It’s snowing really hard.

B:_________.It’s a big storm.

2.A: Will the schools stay open?

B: Oh, no. _________.It’s too dangerous for school buses in a storm as bad as this one.

3.A: Will it be very windy?

B:____________. The winds are very strong already.

4.A: Will it get very cold?

B:____________. The temperature in Centerville is below zero.

5.A: Is it possible that the storm will be over by Monday?

B:___________.It’s moving pretty quickly now.

6.A: Do you think it will be warmer on Tuesday?

B:______________. It has stopped snowing in Centerville already.


Exercise 3: Find one error in each sentences.

Ex: She might coming to the concert with us.

=> She might come to the concert with us.

1. If I fininsh my assignment, I go could home early.

2. Hiro might calls you tomorrow.

3. My teacher could not give us homework to do this weekend. We’ll find out on Friday.

4. May that be a UFO?

5. He might gets a new puppy.

6. We could not go out tonight. We haven’t decided yet.

7. They may moving to another city next year.

8. Fatima might takes a year off school to travel around the world.

9. My children maybe absent from school tomorrow.

.

10. Francisco isn’t in class today. May he be sick?


Exercise 4: What it could be?

Look at the images.With a partner, come up with some guesses about what each image

might be. Use might, could or may in each sentence.

# Image What could this be?

It could be an evolope.

Ex:

It might be a wide-screen TV.

1

2

3

4

5


Exercise 5: Complete the sentences below by using ‘may (not)’ and ‘might (not)’ to describe

possibility.

1.There are some dark clouds in the sky. (may)

2.It’s nine-thirty and Jack feels tired. (might)

3. My class starts soon, but I’m not sure where the classroom is. (may not)

4. Sarah has some money and she is at a clothing store. (might)

5. Kelly and Jenny are friends, but they live in different cities. They are both

traveling to Washington this summer. [may]

6.It’s cold outside, but James isn’t wearing a jacket. [might]

7. My brother is at a restaurant and he feels a little hungry. [may]

8. I should go to work today, but I feel a little sick. [might not]


Exercise 6: First of all look at the sentences, read them all and then match the sentences

with the picture.

1.You may be a vegetarian.

2. You may think you are the King

or Queen.

3. You may be shy.

4. You might have a car.

5. You might be love music.

6. You might wear glasses.

7. You may be a boy or a girl.

8. You may be funny dancers.

9. You might be happy.


Conclusions: Must, have (got) to, may, might,

could, can't

GRAMMAR

Introduce:

1.Usage:

a. When we are almost 100 percent certain, we use must, have to or have got to to

state affirmative conclusions.

Usage note: We often use have got to instead of have to in informal speech and

writing. We usually contract have or has.

Pronunciation note: In informal speech, have to is usually pronounced “hafta” and

got to is usually pronounced “gotta”. Do not write “hafta” or “gotta”.

Eg: -You must be here before 8 a.m

-You must be tired after work hard

b. When we are less certain about our conclusion, we use may, might or could to

express that something is possible.

Eg: -It may be a bomb

+Where is John? - I don’t know. He might go out with his friends.

c. To express negative conclusion, use the following modals:

- Use can’t and couldn’t when you are almost 100 percent certain that something is

impossible.

Eg: + Lan is staying at home because her sickness

Nguyễn Thị Mỹ Linh

+ I don’t believe it. It can’t be true. I just saw her over there with her friends.

- Use must not when you are slightly less certain

Eg: -Her grandfather is in hospital. She must not go to work to take care of him.

- Use may not and might not when you are even less certain

Eg: - He hasn’t come yet, he may not remember the appointment.

Be careful! Don’t use have to and have got to to draw negative conclustions

d. In short answers, use a modal alone.

Eg: -Does she still work at Wilson’s?

She may not. I saw a new clerk there.

Be careful! Use be in short answers to questions that include be

Eg: - Is Ron still with City Bank? - I’m not sure. He might not be.

Notes:

-May ,might and could are used to offer, ask the permission or request but may and

might are more formal than could.

Eg:+ Can I sit here?

+ May I turn on TV?

- May, might and could are also used to express future possibility

Eg: It may be a bomb.

-Must and have(got) to are also used to express necessity.

Eg: - We have to wear uniform on Monday

-You must be here at 7:00 for your flight.


2.Structure:

Affirmative statements

Subjects May, might, must, could Base of verb

I

You

We

They

I

You

We

They

May, might, must, could be wrong

Negative statements

Subjects

May, might, must, could

Not

Base of verb

I

You

We

They

He

She

It

May, might, must, could

Not

Be

right

Affirmative statements with have (got) to

Subjects

I

You

We

They

He

She

It

Have (got) to

Have (got) to

Has (got) to

Base form

be


Affirmative statements with have (got) to

Subjects

I

You

We

They

He

She

It

Have (got) to

Have (got) to

Has (got) to

Base form

be

Yes/No Questions

Short Answers

Can/Could Subjects Base form

Can

Could

Do

Does

he

Subjects

know

Base form

that?

he know that?

Subject

He

Modal

must (not)

may (not)

might (not)

could(n't)

has (got) to

can't

Yes/No Questions with Be

Short Answers

Can/Could

Subjects

Be

Subject Modal Be

Can

Could

Be

Is

he

Subjects

he

be

a adjective?

a adjective?

He

must (not)

may (not)

might (not)

could(n't)

has (got) to

can't

be

Wh-Questions with Can and Could

Wh-word

Can/Could

Subjects

Base form

Who

What

Can

Could

it

they

be?

want?



could, can't

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 1: Write a short answer to each question. Use might (not) or must (not) and

include be where necessary.

A: You sound terrible. Are you sick?

B: I__(1)__.I have a headache and my throat is starting to hurt.

A: This bottle is empty. Are we all out of cough syrup?

B: We__(2)__. I think that was the last bottle.

A: I’ll go to get some cough medicine. Does that nighttime cough medicine work?

B: It__(3)__. It’s worth a try.

A: I forgot to cash a check today. Do you have any money?

B: I__(4)__. Look in my wallet. It’s on the table downstairs.

A: I found it. It’s 9:30. Is Drake Drugstore still open?

B: It__(5)__. Their advertisement says “ Open ‘til 11”.

A: Do you think they sell chicken soup? Some drugstores carry food.

B: They__(6)__. It’s a very small store

A: What about Quickshop? Do they have soup?

B: They__(7)__. They’ve got everything.


Ex 2: Choose the best answers:

1. Whose car is it? – It___ be Anton’s. I think I saw him driving a red car like this one.

A. could B. might C. mustn’t D. don’t have to

2. Young people___ obey their parents.

A. must B. may C. will D. ought to

3. These two boys look identical. They ___ twins.

A. must have been B. should be C. must be D. should have been

4. If a letter comes for me, ___ you please forward it to this address.

A. shall B. could C. must D. should

5. I don’t believe it. It___ be true

A. can’t B. mustn’t C. shouldn’t D. wouldn’t

6. Twenty years ago, David___ speak Arabic fluently. Now he’s forgotten a lot.

A. could B. might C. needn’t D. can’t

7. Yesterday everyone in office ___ leave the building for a fire drill. I am glad it wasn’t

a real fire.

A. may B. might C. must D. mustn’t

8. People who use public parks___ clean up after themselves.

A. must B. may C. ought D. might

9. Whatever___ come, I will always be by your side.

A. must B. may C. could D. need

10. “___ you hand that book, please?” “Sure. Here it is”.


A. Could B. Should C. Must D. May

Ex 3: Complete these sentences using must or the correct form of have (got) to.

Sometimes more than one answer is possible.

1. My flight’s at 8 pm, so I __(1)__ check in at six. I__(2)__ remember to book a taxi for

five o’clock.

2. She has a child at nursery school, so she usually__(3)__ leave the office by 3:30. We

really __(4)__ try to finish the meeting by 3pm so that she isn’t late. She__(5)__ drive

right across the city.

3. A: I’m going to the US Embassy this afternoon as I__(6)__ renew my extra visa.

B: Right. You__(7)__ remember to take your photographs with you!

4. When you join the company, you__(8)__ complete a tax form and give it to HR.

5. We’ve just opened a new office in York. You__(9)__ come and see it!

6. Well, I__(10)__ stop now, as I want to make sure that there’s plenty of time for

questions after the talk.

Ex 4: Ann and Marie are buying hats in the shop on Carlisle Street. Read the

conversation and rewrite he underline sentences another way. Use have got to

or can’t and word in parentheses .

Ann : Look at this hat, Marie. What do you think?

Marie : Oh, come on. That’s got to be a joke

1. (serious)

Anyway, it’s too expensive. Look at the price tag.

Ann : It’s $100. That can’t be right.

2. (wrong)


Marie : I know. It can’t cost more than $50.

3. (less)

Anyway, let’s talk about it over lunch. I’m getting hungry.

Ann : It’s too early for lunch. It has to be before 11:00.

4. (after)

Marie : Look at my watch. It’s already 12:30

Ann : Then let’s go to Café Au Lait. It’s on Jones Street. It can’t be far. 5. (nearby)

Marie : Let’s go home after lunch. I don’t feel well.

Ann : Oh, come on. You’re fine. You must be hungry.

6. (sick)

Ex5: Read this student’s reading journal for a mystery novel. There are six

mistakes in the use of must, have(got) to, may, might, could, and can’t. The first

mistake is already corrected. Find and correct five more.

The main character, Molly Smith, is a college ESL teacher. She is trying to find her

dead grandparents’ first home in the United States. It may being in a nearby town.

The townspeople there seem scared. They could be have a secret, or they must just

hate strangers. Molly has some old letters that might lead her to the place. They are

in Armenia, but one of her students mights translate them for her. They hafta be

important because the author mentions them right away. The letters must contain

family secrets. I’m sure of it. Who is the bad guy? It couldn’t be the student because

he wants to help. It might to be the newspaper editor in the town.

Ex 6: Underline the correct verbs in italics in this economic forecast. Sometime

both are possible

Consumer spending, which has been dynamic so far, (1) could/ must fall, because of


The government believes inflation (2) can/ might increase to 2.4% due to higher energy

prices, but it (3) may/ must fall to around 2% next summer if oil prices then fall as expected.

Employment growth of 1.5% (4) should/ might create up to 3.6 million new jobs in the next

12 months, but this (5) must/ shoulddecelerate to about 1% in the next three to five years as

the economy stabilises. Many businesses are having problem recruiting new staff due to the

labour shortages. Some economists believe it is possible that wages (6) must/ might

increase as a result.Some parts of the financial markets have performed poorly in recent

months, and this (7) could/ must possibly affect credit conditions more seriously than

predicted. The only thing that is certain is that in this economic climate we (8) can’t/ might

not be sure about anything!

Ex 7: Listen to the conversation between Nam and Mai. Decide whether the

following statements are true(T), false(F) or not given(NG) then fill in the

squares:

1.Ray Kurzweil is a talented man

2. Kurzweil believes that nanobots implanted into human brains to

make them think slower, and make them forgetful .

3. According to Kurzweil, A.I machines may destroy our world.

4. Scientists are quite careless in developing A.I programs.

5. scientists will detect any malfunctions and protect them from

cyber-attacks.


Preferences:


ANSWER KEY

Ex1:

1. C ( prefer + to Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa : Tớ thích đường nâu hơn đường trắng. )

2. B ( would rather + Vinf)

( Tớ không muốn đi chơi, tớ muốn ở nhà. )

3. A ( prefer + Ving + to + Ving )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn đi xe buýt hơn là đi tàu. )

4. C ( S1 +would rather + S2 + past simple )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ mong cậu sẽ ở lại đây với tớ và bọn trẻ. )

5. C ( would prefer + to Vinf + rather than + Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn đi bộ hơn đi xe ô tô. )

6. A ( would rather + Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn trở thành nghệ sĩ dương cầm. )

7. D ( prefer + Ving + to + Ving )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ thích chạy hơn là bơi. )

8. A ( prefer + to Vinf + rather than + Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa: Cô ấy muốn làm vào ca đêm hơn là phải làm vào cuối tuần. )

9. A ( S1+ would rather + S2 + past simple )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ không muốn cậu ấy làm nó một mình. )

10. C ( S1 + would rather + S2 + past simple )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn cô ấy học thứ gì đó khác. )

Lưu Thu Thủy

Ex2:

3. I'd prefer to listen to some music.

( Dịch nghĩa: Chúng ta xem TV đi? - Tớ muốn nghe nhạc hơn. )

4. I'd rather go for a swim.

( Dịch nghĩa: Thế chơi quần vợt thì sao? - Tớ muốn đi bơi. )

5. I'd rather wait a few minutes.

( Dịch nghĩa: Chúng ta đi thôi? - Tớ muốn đợi thêm một ít phút. )

6. I'd prefer to eat at home.

( Dịch nghĩa: Cậu muốn tới nhà hàng không? - Tớ muốn ăn ở nhà. )

7. I'd rather think about it for a while.

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ nghĩ chúng ta nên quyết định ngay bây giờ? - Tớ muốn

nghĩ thêm một lúc. )

8. I'd rather stand.

( Dịch nghĩa: Cậu muốn ngồi không? - Tớ muốn đứng. )

9. I'd prefer to go alone.

( Dịch nghĩa: Cậu muốn tớ tới với cậu không? - Tớ muốn đi một mình. )

Ex3:

1.didn't ( S1 + would rather + S2 + past simple )

Dịch nghĩa: Tớ có nên nói cho Anna chuyện gì đã xảy ra không?

- Không, tớ không muốn cô ấy biết.

2. stayed ( S1 + 'd rather + S2 + past simple )

Dịch nghĩa : Cậu muốn tớ đi bây giờ hay muốn tớ ở lại đây hơn?

3. stay ( would + S + rather + Vinf )

Dịch nghĩa : Cậu muốn đi chơi tối nay hay muốn ở nhà?

4. didn't ( S1 + would rather + S2 + past simple )

Dịch nghĩa : Đây là một bí vấn đề riêng tư, tớ mong cậu sẽ không

nói với ai khác.

5. was ( S1 + would rather + S2 + past simple )

Dịch nghĩa : Mình không muốn đưa ra quyết định mà không có Jack và Sue.

Mình muốn các bạn ấy đang ở đây.

6. didn't

Dịch nghĩa :

- Tớ có thể bật chút nhạc lên được không?

- Tớ không muốn cậu bật. Tớ đang cố gắng để học bài.

Lưu Thu Thủy

NECESSITY: Have (got) to, Must, Don’t have

to, Must not, Can’t

ANSWER KEY

Excercise 1

Answers and explanation

1.A (B is rejected because it’s minus the word to. The subject is “I”, so the

answer C is rejected too. And we got the correct one is A)

2.C (“must” doesn’t have the question form so A is rejected. B has the wrong

structure so C is the correct answer )

3.B (“must” doesn’t have the question form so A is rejected. The subject is “she”

so C is rejected. The correct answer is B)

4.C (A is wrong because the subject is Sally. B has the wrong structure so C is

correct)

5.C (A is rejected on the grounds that it’s lack of the word “to” and neither does

B because “must” isn’t accompanied by “to”. So C is correct)

6.B (There is only one way to express past time with these modal verbs: had to

so B is correct)

7.C (A is wrong because we don’t have “haves” in English and the subject is “he”

so B is wrong too. The correct answer is C)

8.A (B and C have wrong structure so A is the correct one)

Structures

• In order to + V +.., S + V + O

• According to + N, S + V+O

Ngô Phương Uyên

New words

Vocab

Word form

IPA

Meaning

insurance

n

/in'∫ɔ:rəns/

- sự bảo hiểm; hợp đồng bảo hiểm

- công việc bảo hiểm, nghề bảo hiểm

- tiền đóng bảo hiểm; tiền bảo hiểm

được thưởng

emergency

n

/i'mɜ:dʒensi/

- tình huống khẩn cấp

professional

adj, n

/prə'fe∫ənl/

-(thuộc ngữ) [thuộc] nghề, [thuộc]

nghề nghiệp

-chuyên nghiệp; nhà nghề

-(thuộc ngữ) (nghĩa xấu) chuyên

[môn]

-người chuyên nghiệp, có chuyên

môn

Excercise 2:


1.have to. Because the second sentence said: “ They have no choice.” So we can

see it’s a forced situation

2.Do you have to. Because this is a question and the subject is “I” so we need to

use modal verb “ have to” in yes/no question structure

3.Has (got) to. Because it’s a forced situation

4.Did she have to/didn’t . Because the sentence is in the past tense and only

modal verb “have to” can be used in the past tense and the others can’t so we

need to use have to in the past and in yes/no question structure here

5.Have to. Based on the sentence, it can be seen that this is a mandatory action

due to the situation, so we use “have to”

Ngô Phương Uyên

6.Have to. Because it said:” it’s the law” that means this is a mandatory action

due to the situation

7.Have to. Because it’s a forced situation that Shasa have to do because of her

teacher

8.Have to. In this case we need a modal verb of necessity but must can’t be used

in question structure so we use have to here

9.Have to. Based on the content we can see it’s a forced situation

Structures

S + V + O because S + V + O.

New words

vocab

Word form

IPA

Meaning

purse

n

/pɜ:s/

- ví [tiền]

Excercise 3:

Answers and explanations:

a) You don’t have to go to school on Saturdays

We have not necessary = don’t have to= don’t need to

b) All drivers must/have to have a driving licence

The first sentence has the word “obligatory” expressing compulsion in the

present so we can use must or have to

Ngô Phương Uyên

c) Peter has to learn Spanish

The first sentence has the word “compulsary” expressing compulsion in the

present and the subject is “Peter” so we can use has to or must

d) Customers don’t have to go on trips organized by the hotel

The first sentence has the word “not obligatory” and the subject is customers

so we can use don’t have to

e) Passengers mustn’t smoke in this compartment

The first sentence has the word “aren’t allowed” so we can use mustn’t or

can’t either

f) You need to book in advance

The first sentence has the word “necessary” so we can use need to or have to

g) You need a visa to travel to India

The first sentence has the word “essential” so we can use need or have to

have

h) You don’t have to shout. I can hear you perfectly well


Structure

It + to be + necessary/essential/obligatory/compulsary.. +for + S + V + to V

= It + to be + necessary/essential/obligatory/compulsary.. + to V

= S + must/have to/need to + V

New words

Vocab

Word form

IPA

Meaning

Compartment

n

/kəm'pɑ:tmənt/

-ngăn; buồng

Passenger

n

/'pæsindʒə[r]/

-hành khách (đi tàu, xe)

-thành viên (của một tổ,

một đội) làm được ít việc

(so với kẻ khác)

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 4:

answer and explanation

1. The correct answer is have to because the compulsion of situation


3. The correct answer is have got to because the compulsion of situation

4. The correct answer is I’ll have to because must can’t be used in future tense

Structure

S + to be + ADJ

S + V + O + before + Ving

New words

vocab

word form

IPA

meaning

register

n,v

/'redʒistə[r]/

• sổ

• đồng hồ ghi, công tơ

• (nhạc) khoảng âm

• (ngôn) phong cách

• vào sổ, đăng ký

• ghi thành văn bản để trình bày

• được nhớ rõ; được nhận thức

rõ (sự kiện); nhớ, ghi nhận (nói

về người)

• gửi bảo đảm (thư, hành lý)

• biểu lộ, biểu thị (qua nét mặt…)

• ghi, chỉ (đồng hồ ghi…)

conference

n

/'kɒnfərəns/

• sự bàn bạc, sự trao đổi ý kiến

• hội nghị

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 5

Answers and explanation:

+ Need to act is correct

+ Will must do is wrong because must can’t be used in future tense =>

must/need to/ have to do

+ Must to encourage is wrong because it has the wrong structure, it just has

must + Vinf not must + to + Vinf => must/should/have to encourage

+ Must to do is wrong because it has the wrong structure, it just has must +

Vinf not must + to + Vinf=> must/have to do

+ should also reduce is correct

Structure:

-ADV, S +V + O

-N(s/es) + S + V + O + to be + N/clause

New words

vocab

word form

IPA

meaning

viable

adj

/'vaiəbl/

- có thể đứng vững được

- có thể sống và phát triển

được

alternative

adj, n

/ɔ:l'tɜ:nətiv/

- có thể chọn để thay cho một

cái khác; khác

- sự lựa chọn (một trong hai

hay nhiều khả năng)

- một trong hai hay nhiều khả

năng

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 6:


1-H. Based on the content of the sentence and the key words “must” and “important”

2-F. Based on the content of the sentence

3-A. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “must”, “important” and “

essential”

4-C. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “necessary” and “need to”

5-B. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “forbidden”, “not allowed”,

”mustn’t”

6-G. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “ not necessary” and “don’t

have to”

7-D. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “shouldn’t”, “advise”

8-E. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “rule/law”, “have (got) to”

Excecise 8:


1 .F. Because Martha said: “ I can give you some suggestions”

2 .T. Because Martha said: “ You’ll have to ask Mrs.Benet about it”

3 .F. Because Martha said: “It doesn’t have to be a work of art”

4. F. Because Julian said: “ I haven’t even started yet”

5. T. Because Martha said: ”I finished it in one day”

New words

Vocab

Word form

IPA

Meaning

presentation

n

/'prezntəi∫n/

-sự đưa ra, sự bày ra; sự trình ra,

sự trình bày

-vở trình diễn

-tặng phẩm (vào một dịp long

trọng)

submit

v

/səb'mit/

-phục tùng, quy phục

-đệ trình

-gợi ý; biện luận

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 7:


1.Have to (based on the sentence, we can see that this is a forced situation so we

use have to here )

2.Should (because the writer is hesitating and asking himself “go or not”, so the

answer is should)

3.Don’t have to ( based on the sentence said : “If I don’t want to” that means the

writer no need to do it. So we use don’t have to)

4.Shouldn’t ( based on the content, this is the speaker’s point of view and this is

not a enforcement and this sentence is in a negative way)

5.Have to (according to the paragraph, the writer need to take his own clothes

because the situation: go on a camping trip, so this is a forced situation)

6.Don’t have to (we have some key words here : “but”, “because…” that means the

writer don’t need to do it so we use don’t have to)

7.Must ( because we can see that the action is come from the writer’s feeling that

he need to do it. So we use must conform to the note of part 1.1)

8.Mustn’t ( look at the next sentence, it said : “It’s not allowed”, so based on the

content we use mustn’t that means it’s forbidden)

9.Don’t have to ( based on the sentence we can understand that the character’s

action : “ ring my parent” is unecessary so we use “ don’t have to” here)

New words

Vocab

Word form

IPA

Meaning

chilly

adj

/'tʃili/

-lạnh, lạnh lẽo, giá lạnh

-ớn lạnh, rùng mình (vì lạnh)

-lạnh lùng, lạnh nhạt ( tính cách)

tent

n

/tent/

-lều; rạp

Ngô Phương Uyên

EXPECTATION: Be supposed to

ANSWER KEY

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 1:

a. A: Were they supposed to do

B: were supposed to deliver

b. A: is supposed to start

B: are we supposed to stand

c. A: aren’t supposed to be

B: isn’t supposed to see

d. A: am supposed to wear

B: is supposed to rain

e. A: is supposed to be

B: are supposed to stay

Exercise 2:

Hi!

Remember my old college roommate Gary? He’s getting married tomorrow

and I’m the best man! He and his fiancée 0.were supposed to have a small

wedding but they ended up inviting more than 200 people! As best man, I have

some important responsibilities. For one thing, I'm 1.supposed to make sure

Gary gets to the wedding ceremony on time - not an easy job for me. At first,

we 2.were going to hire a limousine and driver, but I decided to drive him

there myself in a rented red sports car. I'm also supposed to hold the wedding

rings during the ceremony. Then, at the end of the reception party, I'm 3.going

to help the newlyweds leave quickly for their honeymoon. They're going

straight to the airport (I'm also 4.supposed to hold the plane tickets for them).

They 5.were going to go to Hawaii, but they changed their minds and are going

to Aruba instead. Oh! I just looked at the clock. I'd better sign off now, or I'll be

late for the rehearsal dinner. I 6.was going to leave five minutes ago! By the

way, Sophie, the maid of honor, will be there too. I've never met her, but she

7.is supposed to be very nice. I'll let you know how it goes!

Jack


Exercise 3:

1.A 2.C 3.C 4.C 5.D 6.A

Exercise 4:

1. F

2. G

3. A

4. H

5. D

6. E

7. C

8. B

Exercise 5:

1. are supposed to be

2. am supposed to go

3. are supposed to wait

4. was supposed to make


6. was supposed to get

7. is supposed to fly

8. was supposed to be

9. were supposed to help

10. is supposed to fix



ANSWER KEY

Exercise1:

Answer: Answer:

Các dấu hiệu của tương lai: next year, tonight, in the spring, this year.

1. may/might/ could. (John và Amy có thể có một nhà bếp mới)

2. may/might/ coud. (Tôi có lẽ sẽ học tiếng Nhật vào năm tới)

3. may/might/ could. (Pavel có thể thử chơi khúc côn cầu vào năm tới)

4. may/might. (Daniel có thể không đi học vì anh ấy bị ốm. Chúng ta không sử

dụng could để nói về khả năng tương lai trong thể phủ định)

5. could. (Cô ấy có thể là cô giáo của chúng ta. Chúng ta sẽ thường sử dụng could

nhiều hơn cho các câu hỏi về khả năng trong tương lai)

6. may/might/could. ( Chúng tôi có thể thử ăn tại nhà hàng này tối nay)

7. may/might/could. ( Louise and Pierre có lẽ sẽ kết hôn vào mùa xuân)

8. could. ( Đó có thể là xe buýt của chúng ta. Chúng ta sẽ thường sử dụng could


9. may/might. ( Họ có lẽ chưa sẵn sàng để làm bài kiểm tra)

10. may/might.( Isabella có thể không tham gia vào đội bóng rổ năm nay)

Structure:

+) S + may/might/could + V(base) : có thể / có lẽ sẽ

-) S + may/might + not + V(base) : không thể / có lẽ chưa

?) Could + S + V(base) ? : Ai/Cái gì có thể là ?


Từ vựng (Vocabuliary)

Từ loại (Word form)

Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

kitchen

(n)

/ˈkɪtʃ.ən/

Phòng bếp

hockey

(n)

/ˈhɑː.ki/

Khúc côn cầu

sick

(adj)

/sɪk/

Ốm

restaurant

(n)

/ˈres.tə.rɑːnt/

Nhà hàng

married

(adj)

/ˈmer.id/

Kết hôn

basketball

(n)

/ˈbæs.kət.bɑːl/

Bóng rổ

team

(n)

/tiːm/

Đội

Exercise 2 :

Answer:

1. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa : Bạn có nghĩ những con đường sẽ trở lên nguy hiểm

không? Ngoài trời tuyết đang rơi rất nhiều. => Ta dùng ‘It could be’ vì dựa vào

các dấu hiệu ở hiện tại nó có thể sẽ nguy hiểm vì nó là một cơn bão lớn )

2. It couldn’t. ( Dịch nghĩa: Trường học vẫn sẽ mở cửa chứ? Dựa vào ý thứ hai của

câu trả lời ta thấy “ Nó quá nguy nguy hiểm cho những xe buýt trường học vì

đang trong một cơn bão ngày càng tệ hơn”=> Ta dùng “ It couldn’t” để bày tỏ khả

năng mở cửa trường học là không thể )

3. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa: Trời sẽ gió rất to phải không? Dựa vào ý thứ hai của

câu trả lời ta thấy “ Gió đã và đang rất mạnh rồi.” Các dấu hiệu ở thực tế cho thấy

điều đó là có thể nên ta dùng ‘ It could be’)

4. It could. ( Dịch nghĩa: Trời sẽ trở lên rất lạnh phải không? Ta sẽ dùng ‘It could’-

nó rất có thể vì nhiệt độ tại Centerville đã xuống tới 0 độ rồi. )

5. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa: Có thể là cơn bão sẽ kết thúc vào thứ hai? Điều đó là

có thể => ta dùng ‘It could be’ vì cơn bão hiện tại đang di chuyển rất là nhanh và

có thể nó sẽ rời đi sớm )

6. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa: Bạn có nghĩ trời sẽ ấm lên vào thứ ba không? Ta dùng

‘It could be’-điều đó là có thể vì tuyết đã ngừng rơi tại Centerville rồi )

Structure:

:

It + could ( be) : điều đó/ nó là có thể

couldn’t : điều đó/nó là không thể




Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

dangerous

(adj)

/ˈdeɪn.dʒɚ.əs/

Nguy hiểm

storm

(n)

/stɔːrm/

Cơn bão

temperature

(n)

/ˈtem.pɚ.ə.tʃɚ/

Nhiệt độ

below

(adv)

/bɪˈloʊ/

Phía dưới

possible

(adj)

/ˈpɑː.sə.bəl/

Có khả năng

quickly

(adv)

/ˈkwɪk.li/

Nhanh chóng

pretty

(adv)

/ˈprɪt̬ .i/

Khá

Exercise 3 :

Answer:

1. If I fininsh my assignment, I could go home early.( Nếu tôi hoàn thành nhiệm vụ của

mình, tôi có thể về nhà sớm)

2. Hiro might call you tomorrow.( Hiro có lẽ sẽ gọi cho bạn vào ngày mai)

3. My teacher might/may not give us homework to do this weekend. We’ll find out on

Friday.( Giáo viên của tôi có lẽ sẽ không cho bài tập về nhà vào cuối tuần này)

4. Could that be a UFO?( Đó có thể là một vật thể không xác định ngoài vũ trụ)

5. He might get a new puppy.( Anh ấy có lẽ sẽ có một chú chó con mới)

6. We might/may not go out tonight. We haven’t decided yet.( Chúng tôi có lẽ sẽ không

ra ngoài vào tối nay)

7. They may move to another city next year.( Họ có thể rời đến một thành phố khác vào

năm tới)

8. Fatima might take a year off school to travel around the world.( Fatima có thể nghỉ

học một năm để đi du lịch vòng quanh thế giới)

9. My children may be absent from school tomorrow.( Các con của tôi có thể nghỉ học

vào ngày mai)

10. . Francisco isn’t in class today. Could he be sick? ( Francisco không có trong lớp hôm

nay. Có thể là anh ấy bị ốm?)


Structure:






Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

concert

(n)

/ˈkɑːn.sɚt/

Sự kiện

assignment

(n)

/əˈsaɪn.mənt/

Nhiệm vụ

UFO

(n)

/ˌjuː.efˈoʊ/

Vật thể không xác định

puppy

(n)

/ˈpʌp.i/

Chú chó con

decided

(adj)

/dɪˈsaɪ.dɪd/

Quyết định

city

(n)

/ˈsɪt̬ .i/

Thành phố

travel

(v)

/ˈtræv.əl/

Du lịch

around

(adv)

/əˈraʊnd/

Vòng quanh

world

(n)

/wɝːld/

Thế giới

absent

(adj)

/ˈæb.sənt/

Không có mặt ở đâu đó

class

(n)

/klæs/

Lớp học


Exercise 4 :

Answer:

( Chúng ta sử dụng could, may, might để dự doán về các khả năng trong tương lai

chẳng hạn như các bạn chưa biết được hình trên nó là hình gì thì các bạn có thể phỏng

đoán nó theo suy nghĩ của bạn. Và sau đây là một số câu trả lời gợi ý.)

1. It could be a plate. / It might be a moon. (Nó có thể là một cái đĩa. / Nó có thể là

mặt trăng)

2. It might be a pyramid. / It could be a hat. (Nó có thể là một Kim tự tháp. / Nó có

thể là một cái mũ.)

3. It may be a box. / It might be an aquarium. (Nó có thể là một chiếc hộp. / Nó có

thể là một cái bể cá.)

4. It coud be ladder. / It might be a pair of skis. (Nó có thể là một cái thang. / Nó có

thể là một đôi ván trượt.)

5. It might be a starfish. / It could be a star-shaped lantern. (Nó có thể là một con

sao biển. / Nó có thể là một chiếc đèn ông sao.)

Structure:

+) S + may/might/could + V(base) : có thể


(Word form)

Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

plate

(n)

/pleɪt/

Đĩa

pyramid

(n)

/ˈpɪr.ə.mɪd/

Kim tự tháp

ladder

(n)

/ˈlæd.ɚ/

Thang

star-shaped lantern

(n)

/stɑːr-ʃeɪpt lantern /

Đèn ông sao

skis

(n)

/skiːz/

Ván trượt

starfish

(n)

/ˈstɑːr.fɪʃ/

Sao biển


Exercise 5 :

Answer:

1. It may rain.( Trời có thể mưa. Vì dựa vào dấu hiệu của hiện tại " trên trời

có một vài đám mây đen" chúng ta có thể dự đoán rằng trời rất có thể sẽ

mưa.)

2. Jack might go to bed.( Jack có thể là ngủ rồi. Chúng ta phỏng đoán dựa

vào dấu hiệu "Jack cảm thấy mệt" nên vào giờ này anh ấy có thể đi ngủ rồi.)

3. I may not be on time.( Tôi không thể đến đúng giờ. Dựa vào dấu hiệu " tôi

không biết chắc lớp học của mình ở đâu mà nó thì lại bắt đầu sớm" vì vậy

"tôi" sẽ mất thời gian đi tìm lớp học của mình nên có thể sẽ không vào lớp

đúng giờ.)

4. Sarah might buy some clothes.( Sarah có lẽ sẽ mua một vài bộ quần áo.

Chúng ta phỏng đoán cô ấy có thể mua quần áo vì "cô ấy có một chút tiền

và đang đứng trước cửa hàng quần áo.)

5. They may see each other.( Họ có thể sẽ gặp nhau.Vì cả Kelly và Jenny đều

có chung chuyến đi đến Washington vào mùa hè này nên biết đâu họ có thể

sẽ gặp nhau ở đâu đó tại Washington thì sao.)

6. James might get sick.( James có lẽ là bị ốm rồi.Bởi vì ngoài trời thì lạnh mà

James thì không mặc áo khoác cho nên anh ấy có thể sẽ bị ốm vì điều đó.)

7. My brother may buy some food.( Anh trai tôi có lẽ sẽ mua một chút đồ

ăn."Tôi" đoán rằng anh trai tôi sẽ mua thức ăn là vì anh ấy cảm thấy đói.)

8. I might not go to work today.( Tôi có lẽ sẽ không đi làm hôm nay. Bởi vì

"tôi" cảm thấy trong người có chút mệt nên có lẽ là " tôi" sẽ nghỉ làm hôm

nay.)

Structure:




Exercise 6 :

Answer:

7

1



or Queen.

3. You may be shy.







3

9

2

4

8

5

6



could, can't

ANSWER KEY

Ex 1:

1. must be ( vì có dấu hiệu ở câu sau “ tôi đau đầu và cổ họng của tôi bắt đầu đau”

cho thấy khả năng khá cao là B bị ốm và câu hỏi có “are” nên câu trả lời phả có “be”)

2. must be ( vì có dâu hiệu “ tôi nghĩ đấy là chai cuối cùng rồi”, câu hỏi có “are” nên

câu trả lời phải có “be” )

3. might ( vì có dấu hiệu “ đáng để thử đấy” cho thấy cả 2 người đều rất phân vân về

việc hiệu thuốc còn mở không )

4. might ( vì có dấu hiệu “ hãy xem trong ví của tôi” cho thấy B hoàn toàn không biết

trong ví của mình còn tiền không nên phải nhờ A kiểm tra)

5. must be ( vì có dấu hiệu “ mở cửa đến 11 giờ” mà hiện tại là 9:30 nên khả năng cao

hiệu thuốc vẫn mở cửa, câu hỏi có “is” nên câu trả lời phải có “be”)

6. must not ( vì đó chỉ là một tiệm nhỏ nên rất có thể họ sẽ không có súp)

7. must ( vì có dấu hiệu “ họ có mọi thứ” nên rất có thể họ có súp)

Workband:

New Word

Word form

IPA

English meaning

Vietnamese meaning

syrup

n

/ˈsirəp/

A thick sweet liquid made

by dissolving sugar in

boiling water

si rô


Collocation: Be out of sth: hết/mất cái gì

Structure:

Ex2:

- It’s worth + sth : đáng để làm gì

- What about sth? : cái gì đấy thì sao?

1.B (diễn tả một việc gì đấy có thể xảy ra và người nói có rất ít sự chắc chắn về điều

đó- tôi nghĩ là tôi đã thấy anh ta lái một chiếc xe màu đỏ giống cái này”.

2. A (diễn tả một việc bắt buộc phải làm theo )

3. C (vì đằng trước có “ 2 cậu bé trông giống hệ nhau” cho thấy người nói rất chắc

chắn rằng 2 cậu bé này là sinh đôi)

4. C (vì đây là một câu đề nghị mang tính lịch sự)

5. A (vì người này khẳng định rằng không tin, điều đó cho thấy rằng anh ta chắc chắn

nó không đúng sự thật )

6. A (vì câu là chỉ khả năng, năng lực của một ai đó trong quá khứ)

7. B (vì câu này thể hiện một việc gì đấy có khả năng xảy ra trong quá khứ)

8. A (vì câu này thể hiện hành động bắt buộc phải thực hiện)

9. B ( câu nói mang tính chất dự đoán, không có gì chắc chắn )

10. A (đưa ra một yêu cầu có tính lịch sự ta nên dùng could hơn là dùng may vì may

thể hiện sự trang trọng hơn could, nhưng đây là một tình huống giao tiếp bình

thường nên sự trang trọng là không cần thiết)


Word band

New Word Word form IPA English meaning Vietnamese meaning

obey v /ə'bei/

act according to what you

have been asked or ordered

to do by someone in

authority, or to behave

according to a rule, law, or

instruction

nghe lời

identical

adj

/ai'dentik/

exactly the same, or very

similar

giống hệt

twin n /twin/

either of two children born

to the same mother on the

same occasion

con sinh đôi

arabic

n

/'ærəbik/

a language spoken in

Western Asia and North

Africa

tiếng Ả-rập

drill

v

/dril/

practise something,

especially military

exercises, or to make

someone do this

diễn tập, rèn luyện

Collocations: -clean up: dọn dẹp, lau chùi

Structure: see/saw +O+ Ving: bắt gặp ai đó làm gì

Ex3:

1. have (got) to ( vì thời gian đăng kí đã được quy định sẵn, hành khách phải tuân theo)

2. must ( người nói muốn nhấn mạnh việc phải nhớ để bắt taxi để có thể đến sân bay

đúng giờ)

3. has (got) to ( diễn tả một hành động cần thiết cái là kết quả của tình huống – cô ấy

có một đứa con học ở trường mầm non)

4. have (got) to ( diễn tả sự cần thiết của hành động cái là kết quả của tình huống- để

cô ấy không bị muộn )


5. must ( nhấn mạnh vào việc cô ấy phải lái xe qua thành phố )

6. must ( người nói muốn nhấn mạnh vào việc làm mới hộ chiếu nhập cảnh)

7. must ( người nói nuốn nhấn mạnh tầm quan trọng của viêc mang theo tấm ảnh)

8. must ( vì người nói muốn nhấn mạnh sự cần thiết của việc hoàn thành tờ khai và gửi

nó đi)

9. have (got) to (vì đây là một câu đề nghị, lời mời mang tính lịch sự)

10. have (got) to ( diễn tả sự cần thiết của hành động cái là kết quả của việc “ tôi muốn

có thời gian cho những câu hỏi sau cuộc trò chuyện)

Word band


book

v

/buk/

to arrange to have a

seat, room, performer,

etc. at a particular time

in the future

đặt chỗ, đặt trước

Embassy

n

/'embəsi/

the group of people who

officially represent their

country in a foreign

country, or the building

they work in

Đại sứ quán

renew

v

/ri'nju:/

to increase the period of

time that something can

be used or is in effect

làm mới, gia hạn

Collocations: - check in: đăng kí

- make sure: bảo đảm

Structures:

- remember to V(inf): nhớ để làm gì

- try to V(inf): cố gắng làm gì

- plenty of + N( không đếm được/ số nhiều): nhiều


1. You can’t be serious.( “đó hẳn là trò đùa” = “ bạn không nghiêm túc” )

2. That’s got to be wrong (“ điều đó không thể đúng”= “ điều đó chắc chắn sai”)

3. It has got to cost less than $50( “nó không thể đắt hơn $50”= “ nó hẳn là có giá thấp

hơn $50”)

4. It can’t be after 11:00 (“ nó chắc chắn là trước 11 giờ”= “ nó không thể sau 11 giờ”)

5. It has got to be nearby(“ nó không thể ở xa” = “nó chắc chắn ở gần đây”)

6. You can’t be sick.(“bạn vẫn khỏe” = “ bạn không thể ốm được

Word band


tag

n

/tæɡ/

a small piece of paper, cloth,

or metal with information on

it, tied or stuck onto

something larger

nhãn ( hàng, giá)

joke

n

/dʒəʊk/

something, such as a funny

story or trick, that is said or

done in order to make people

laugh

trò đùa

Collocation: come on: thôi nào

Structures: - Let’s + Vinf

Ex5:

-It’s too + adj+ for sb/sth

0.being -> be (line 2) ( vì sau modal verbs là Vo)

1. be have -> have (line 3) ( vì câu này có nghĩa là “họ có thể có 1 bí mật’, vậy nên chỉ

dùng một đông từ “have” là đủ)

2. must -> might (line 4) ( vì người nói không có bất cứ bằng chứng nào về điều mà họ

kết luận nên có rất ít sự chắc chắn trong câu này)


3. mights -> might (line 4) (modal verbs không chia dù chủ ngữ là số ít hay số nhiều)

4. hafta -> have to (line 5) ( chúng ta không dùng “hafta trong văn viết”

5. to be -> be (line 7) ( vì sau modal verb là Vo)

Word band

New Word

Word form

IPA English meaning Vietnamese meaning

nearby

not far away in

adj /ˈnɪəbaɪ/ gần, không xa

distance; close

townspeople

n

/'taunz,pi:pl/

the people who live in a

particular town,

considered as a group

người thành phố,

dân thành thị

stranger

n

/'streindʤə/

someone not

known or not

familiar

người lạ

Structures:

Ex6

- S + V1 + O + that + V2 … ( relative clause)

-try to Vinf: cố gắng làm gì

1. must ( vì câu sau là dẫn chứng cho để chắc rằng điều này sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai)

2. might ( để diễn tả điều gì có thể xảy ra trong tương lai ta sử dụng “might” )

3. may ( vì có từ “if” thể hiện đây chỉ là một dự đoán không có gì để chắc chắn rằng nó

sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai)

4. might ( câu này diễn tả/ dự đoán một viêc có thẻ xảy ra trong tương lai do có cụm

từ chỉ thời gian ở tương lai “ in the next 12 months” )

5. must ( vì “ as the economy stabilizes” là dẫn chứng cho thấy điều này chắc chắn sẽ

xảy ra ở tương lai)

6. must ( vì thiếu hụt người lao động thì mức lương chắc chắn sẽ tăng lên)


7. could( vì có “possibly” thể hiện sự không chắc chắc, chỉ mang tính chất dự đoán điều

gì đó có thể xảy ra)

8. can’t ( vì có từ “certain” thể hiện sự chắc chắn nên sử dụng từ “can’t” để biểu thị rằng

việc đó không thể xảy ra)

Word band

New Word Word form

dynamic

inflation

decelerate

stabilize

financial

adj

n

v

v

adj

IPA

/dɑɪ.ˈnæ.mɪk/

/in'fleiʃn/

/di:'seləreit/

/'steibilalz/

/fai'nænʃəl/

English meaning

characterized by constant

change, activity, or

progress.

a general increase in

prices and fall in the

purchasing value of

money.

reduce in speed

make or become unlikely

to give way or overturn.

relating to finance.

Vietnamese meaning

năng động

sự lạm phát

chậm lại

làm ổn định

thuộc về tài chính

Collocations: - create up: tạo ra

- increase to: tăng lên

- fall to: rơi xuống - decelerate to: giảm tốc độ xuống

Structures:

- because of + N = because + clause = due to + N : bởi vì

- although + clause = despite/ in spite of + N : mặc dù

Ex7:

1.T ( “he must be very talented” )

2. F (“But Kurzweil believes that there could be tiny robots called nanobots implanted

into our brains to make us think faster, and improve our memory.”)

3. T (“According to him, A.I machines will also evolve and they may cause mass

destruction to our world, and exterminate humans as happens in some science-

fiction films”)


4. F (“ But I think scientists must be very careful in developing A.I program.”)

5. T (“ They must also detect any malfunctions and prevent cyber-attacks”)

Word band

New Word Word form

futurist

n

IPA

/ˈfjuː.tʃər.ɪst/

English meaning

a person who makes

statements about what

will happen in the

future based on their

studies and knowledge

Vietnamese meaning

người theo thuyết

tương lai

nanobot

n

/ˈnæn.əʊ.bɒt/

an extremely small

robot (= a machine

controlled by a

computer that can do

things automatically)

robot rất nhỏ

implant

v

/ɪmˈplɑːnt/

put an organ, group of

cells, or device into the

body in a medical

operation

cấy dưới da (theo y

học)

exterminate

v

/ɪkˈstɜr·məˌneɪt/

kill all the animals or

people in a particular

place or of a particular

type

tiêu diệt, hủy diệt

malfunction

n

/ˌmælˈfʌŋk.ʃən/

fail to work or operate

correctly

sự cố, sự trục trặc

cyber-attack

n

/ˈsaɪ.bə.rəˌtæk/

an illegal attempt to

harm someone's

computer system or the

information on it, using

the internet

tấn công mạng

Structure: - A be more adj than B: A hơn B

- A be as adj as B: A bằng B


NOUNS

&

ARTICLES

NOUNS & QUANTIFIERS

GRAMMAR

A noun is a word that refers to lots of things:

Person

Boy, girl, student, doctor, teacher, Mark, Jane, father

Place

School, London, village, city, bedroom, France

Thing

Telephone, chair, pen, dress, bottle

Event

Concert, party, conference, meeting, lesson

Substance Water, acid, wood, iron

Quality

Beauty, intelligence, charisma, height, weight

Organizing nouns by type

Proper nouns

Common nouns: Count nouns and Non-count nouns

Concrete nouns

Abstract nouns

Compound nouns

Collective nouns

Nguyễn Thị Thu Trang

Proper nouns: Proper nouns are another

type of concrete nouns referring to specific

people, places, or things such as months,

nationalities, seasons, which are more

formal and require capitalization. However,

we often use ‘the’ before seasons and we

don’t capitalize the first letter.

Ex: Names like Josh or

Mary

Ex: places like United

Statesor

Ex: The New York Times

Ex: seasons like Spring - Summer - Autumn - Winter


Common nouns: Common nouns

are concrete nouns that generally

refer to people, places, or objects.

Common nouns are not

capitalized unless they begin a

sentence.

Tree

School Baby Movie

Car

Collective nouns: Collective

nouns can also be concrete

nouns. Collective nouns refer

to a group of people, animals,

or objects,…

An army of frogs

A herd of people


Countable nouns: Countable nouns that

are also concrete refer to people or physical

objects that can be counted, and come in

both singular and plural forms. They don’t

require a number in front of them to be

considered countable.

She has many books about

fairy tale

I want to be a hero

Uncountable nouns: Refer to tangible or physical

objects that cannot be counted, such as air, salt, or

water. Though you can interact with each of those

elements, they cannot be physically broken up and

counted by traditional means, unless other

determiners are introduced. Uncountable nouns

do not have plural versions.

He would like to drink

a cup of water

You pay a lot of money and

want to receive a good service.



They can be emotions,

ideas, concepts and

beliefs,…

An abstract noun refers to

things that you cannot

experience with the five

senses. You cannot see,

smell, hear, taste, or

touch abstract nouns.

Abstract nouns refer to

intangible things that

don’t exist as physical

objects.

happiness or sadness

government and democracy

wealth and technology

Using abstract nouns in sentences

They work perfectly well as subjects and objects,

follow capitalization rules as usual, and can take a

possessive form

One of the hardest parts about abstract nouns is

determining whether they are countable or

uncountable. Often they can be both, but only one

is correct depending on the usage

Uncountable

abstract

nouns

Countable

abstract

nouns

Good education is the best

investment in Britain’s future.

(education in general)

The first daughter had a very expensive

education at a private school in France.

(the time one person spent at school)

Time passes more and more

quickly as you grow older.

(time in general)

We had a great time in Ibiza. We didn’t

want to come home.

(a specific period of time)

Love is like physical pain for

some people.

(love in general/all love)

I’ve always had a love of poetry, ever

since I was a child.

(a specific liking for something)


POSITION AND FUNCTION OF NOUNS

01

Being the subject

Ex: Musician plays the piano

02

As a direct object

Ex: He bought a book

03

As an indirect object

Ex: Tom gives Mary flowers

04

As an object for a preposition

Ex: I will speak to rector about it

Make complements

Ex: He calls me Nicki/ He is a teacher

05

06 After the articles

Ex: I have a lovely cat

After possessive adjectives

Ex:There is my computer

07

08

8.After the word quality

Ex: I need some coffee

After the determiner

Ex: These new clothes, both you and I,

09

Trịnh Thị Huyền Trang

NOTE: Some nouns have irregular

plural forms

Example

Child

Children

Mouse

Mice

Goose

Geese

Woman

Women

Foot

Feet

Tooth

Teeth

Deer

Deer

Man

Men


QUATIFITERS

Quatifiters Use Count

Noun

Non-count

noun

Example

Many

Much

A lot of/

lots of

usually in

negative

statements

and questions

usually in

negative

statements and

questions

usually in

positive

statements

There aren’t many

programmes on TV

that I find

interesting.

My dad never shows

much interest in the

news.

That film won a lot

of/lots of awards.

What a lot of

luggage you’ve got!

A few

means “some”

There have been a few

scandals in the papers

recently.

A little

means "some"

They say that a little

knowledge is a

dangerous thing.

Few

means not

many

Richard has few

interests outside work.

Little

means not

much

The police have little

information about

the robbery.


Be careful! Don’t confuse a few and

a little with few and little. Few and

little usually mean “not enough”

Usage note: Much is not formal in question and

negative sentences. In affirmative sentences,

much is very formal.

Watch out! : - The phrase ‘only a few’ means ‘not many’.

- The phrase ‘only a little’ means ‘not much’.


Hoàng Thị Ngọc Thương

Organize Nouns

1

2

3

4

Rules

V + ment -> N

V + ance -> N

V + ion/ation -> N

V + age -> N

Example

develop (v) + ment = development (n): sự phát triển

entertain (v) + ment = entertainment (n): sự giải trí

attend (v) + ance = attendance (n): sự tham dự

perform (v) + ance = performance (n): sự thực

hiện, sự biểu diễn

invent (v) + ion = invention (n): sự phát minh

inform (v) + ation = information (n): thông tin

marry (v) + age = marriage (n): hôn nhân

carry (v) + age = carriage (n): sự chuyên chở hàng

hoá, xe ngựa

5

V + al -> N

survive (v) + al = survival (n): sự sống sót

arrive (v) + al = arrival (n): sự đến, sự tới

6

V + er -> N

work (v) + er = worker (n): công nhân

employ (v) + er = employer (n): ông chủ

7

8

V + or -> N

V + ress -> N

act (v) + or = actor (n): diễn viên

visit (v) + or = visitor (n): người viếng thăm

act (v) + ress = actress (n): nữ diễn viên

wait (v) + ress = waitress (n): nữ bồi bàn

9

10

11

V + ing -> N

V + ant -> N

V + ledge -> N

teach (v) + ing = teaching (n): công việc dạy học

train (v) + ing = training (n): công việc đào tạo

assist (v) + ant = assistant (n): trợ lý

depend (v) + ant = dependant (n): người phụ

thuộc

know (v) + ledge = knowledge (n): sự hiểu biết,

kiến thức

To be continued...


12

13

V + ee -> N

V + ist -> N

employ (v)+ ee = employee (n): công

nhân

interview (v) + ee = interviewee (n): người đi

phỏng vấn

type (v) + ist = typist (n): người đánh máy

14

V + ar -> N lie (v) + ar = liar (n): kẻ nói dối

15

16

17

V + ence -> N

Adj + y/ty/ity -> N

Adj + cy -> N

depend (v) + ence = dependence (n): sự phụ

thuộc

honest (a) + y = honesty (n): sự thật thà

certain (a) + ty = certainty (n): sự chắc chắn

responsible (a) + ity = responsibility (n): trách

nhiệm

proficient (a) + cy = proficiency (n): sự

giỏi, sự thành thạo

18

Adj + ism -> N

N1 + ism -> N2

social (a) + ism = socialism (n): chủ nghĩa

xã hội

terror (n) + ism = terrorism (n): chủ nghĩa

khủng bố

19

Adj + age -> N short (a) + age = shortage (n): sự thiếu hụt

20

Adj + ness -> N

rich (a) + ness = richness (n): sự giàu có

polite (a) + ness = politeness (n): sự lịch sự

21

Adj + th -> N

wide (a) + th = width (n): bề rộng, bề ngang

22

Adj + dom -> N

free (a) + dom = freedom (n): sự tự do

23

N1 + hood -> N2

child (n) + hood = childhood (n): thời thơ ấu

neighbor (n) + hood = neighborhood (n): vùng

lân cận

24

N1 + ship -> N2

friend (n) + ship = friendship (n): tình bạn

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 1: Uta Bremer(UB) sailed around the world alone on a

small boat. Read her interview with Adventure travel (AT)

magazine. Underline the nouns.

ADVENTURE TRAVEL

Around the World Alone

AT: It took a lot of courage to make

this journey. When did you decide to

sail around the world alone?

UB: When I got my boat, Katya, for

my 19th birthday, I knew right away

that I wanted to do this.

AT: When did you start?

UB: I left New York on May 15, two

and a haft years ago, and I headed

for Panama.

AT: How far did you travel?

UB: Thirty thousand miles.

AT: How much equipment were you

able to take with you?

UB: I didn’t have much money, so I

didn’t bring many things, I used the

stars to navigate by, not electronic

technology.

AT: What did you eat?

UB: I bought food in different ports.

I loved going to markets and

learning about local cooking. And I

collected water in a pot when it

rained.

AT: How did you spend your time

when you were sailing?

UB: At first I listened to the news a

lot, but after a while I preferred

music. And I did a lot of reading.

AT: What was difficult for you?

UB: The loneliness. I had my cat,

Typhon, but I missed my family.

AT: What did you like best about

the trip?

UB: The sight of this harbor. I’m so

glad to be back for Thanks giving,

Write each noun in the correct column

Proper Nouns

Count Nouns

Common Nouns

Non-count Nouns



Exercise 2: Write the suitable answer

woman child foot man

person puppy tooth watch

1. Did you know that Jason’s dog has had three beautiful………….?

2. The Spice Girls was an all-girl band, so there weren’t any…......…?

3. It’s a bit strange that Victor wears two………......-one on each arm.

4. If ………..do the same jobs as their husbands, they should be paid the same

.

5. The dentist says I have to have two .....…….take out.

6. How many………….were there at the show?

7. We’ve walked miles! My …....……are hunting!

8. Mr.s Jenkins has just had a baby, so she’s got three……...…..now?

Trịnh Thị Thuỳ Trang

Exercise 3: Complete

the sentences with

the correct form of

the verbs in brackets.

1. The clothes you bought me for my birthday______(be) wonderful!

2. It turned out that the information we had received_____(be) wrong.

3. My new jeans_____(be) in the wash and I wanted to wear them tonight.

4. The luggage on a plane_____(take) up a lot of room.

5. Your hair_____(look) really nice and shiny.

6. I could tell by the look on her face that the news______(not be) good.

7. Oh, no! My money_____ (be) in my other jacket!

8. There_____ (be) some good articles in the paper.

9. J. K. Rowling_____ (have) an enormous influence on children’s literature.

10. The programme usually______ (come) on at half past eight.


Exercise 4: Match to complete the sentence

1. I hope that by the time I am old, I can

acquire a wealth of …………….…

2. No one could come up with a …………

to the math problem.

3. Health officials recently announced

that a ……… for the fatal disease had

been found.

4. One ……………of living in the town is the

lack of safe places for children to play.

5. I have an ………. with a doctor today

6. I don't want to make ………., but I have

a few suggestions that could make

things work more smoothly

7. I think you hit the ………..on the head

when you said that what’s lacking in our

company is a feeling of confidence.

A. nail

B. appointment

C. experience

D. solution

E. cure

F. disadvantage

G. trouble


Exercise 5: Read the paragraph

People have different views about how the authorities should measure their

country’s progress. While economic progress is essential, I myself think that other

measures of progress are also important.

There are three important reasons why economic growth is seen as a fundamental

goal for countries. Firstly, a high level of employment, a healthy economy result in job

creation and better salaries for all citizens. Secondly, economic progress ensures that

more money is available for governments to spend on infrastructure and public

services.

For instance, a government with higher revenues can invest in the country’s

transport network, its education system, and its hospitals. Finally, a strong economy

can help a country’s standing on the global stage, in terms of its political influence

and trading power.

Perhaps another key consideration when judging the progress of a modern

country should be how well that country protects the natural environment, and

whether it is moving towards environmental sustainability. Besides, the success of a

nation could be measured by looking at the health, happiness, and well-being of its

residents.

In conclusion, the economy is obviously a key marker of a country’s success, but

society's progress, environment, and health criteria are equally significant.

Check the True/False statements

1)Everyone doesn’t agree with the government’s measure

True

False

2)There is only one benefit of economic development

3)The development of a country is assessed on the

basis of monetary, economic, political, and military

4)People do enjoy the full material and spiritual values

5)The economy is important and so is the environment


Exercise 6: Underline

the mistakes in the

following sentences and

correct them.

QUESTION

CORRECTION

1.The informations you need are in the post.

2.The headquater is in United States.

3.We have had a lot of troubles witth the machinery.

4.Twelve persons work in my section.

5.There are differences and similarities between Vietnamese

and American culture.

6.The price of gold depends on several factor, including

supply demand in relation to the value of the dollar.

7.Most bats roots in crevices, caves, or building by day and

are active at night or twillight.


Exercise 7: Listen to

the dialogue. Then fill

in the blank right

answer.

Jokes

bridge

village

manager

Passenger

January

jeep

A: Just outside 1._____ there’s a very dangerous bridge.

B: Yes. Charles told me two jeeps crashed on it in 2______. What happened?

A: Well. George Churchill was the driver of the larger 3_____, and he was driving

very dangerously.

B: George Churchill? Do I know George Churchill?

A: Yes. That ginger-haired chap. He’s the 4_____ of the travel agency in Chester.

B: Oh, yes. I remember George. He’s always telling jokes. Well, was anybody

injured?

A: Oh, yes. The other jeep went over the edge of the 5_____, and two children and

another 6_____ were badly injured.

B: Oh dear! Were both the jeeps damaged?

A: Oh, yes.

B: And what happened to George?

A: George? He’s telling 7_____ in jail now, I suppose!

Exercise 8: Read the passage then classify the nouns into:

countable nouns or uncountable nouns.

A.“It was a great treat to be away from the city and to breathe the clean air of

the countryside. The rain had ceased and the sun was shining again as I drove

up to the door. My friends came out to welcome me "you're brought the sun",

they said. We went into the house, chattering and laughing, while the dogs

crowded round us, brushing up against us in welcome. "We're all going into the

forest this evening", my friend said - "We want to show you the young deer - We

haven't been able to go out for some days. It's been too wet".

B. He soon grew accustomed to all our ways. He insisted, for example, on

having his meals with us, and these had to be exactly the same as ours. He ate

on the window ledge out of the saucer. For breakfast, he would have porridge

or corn-flakes, with warm milk and sugar, while at lunch he had green

vegetables and potatoes and a spoonful of sweet pudding. At tea-time he had to

be kept off the table, or he would dive into the jam-pot with cries of delight. We

had to learn to be careful not to close doors without looking up first, in case he

was crouching on top. His moods were like those of a child. When he was

feeling affectionate, he would come along with a loving expression on his face,

climb on your shoulder and give your ear a playful bite.

Your answer

Countable nouns

Uncountable nouns

A

B



Exercise 9: Choose the suitable quantifiers.

: There isn't ............ (much/many) time left. How are we doing?

: We're okay, don't worry. The other team doesn't have .......... (much/many)

points left.

: Yeah, you're right. We're scoring ............. (much/lots of) points.

: We won ............. (a number of/a lot of) matches so far.

: But there are still ............ (a few/a little) rounds left.

: Well, with ............... (a few/a little) luck we will bet our top score.

If you’re walking down the right path and you’re willing to keep walking,

eventually, you’ll make progress.

- Barack Obama -


Exercise 10: There are eleven mistakes in the use of

nouns and in the use of the verb and pronoun agreement.

Find and correct them more.

October 27. I’ve been on the Canary Islands for three days now. I’ll start home when the

weather is better. I was so surprised when I picked up e-mails today. My family sent

some birthday presents to me. My birthday is the 31st.

october 29. I think the weather is getting worse. I heard thunders today, but there

wasn’t many rain. Typhoon and I stayed in bed. I started reading brave New World.

October 30. I left the Canary Islands today - just like columbus. There’s a strong wind

and plenty of sunshine now. I went 250 miles.

October 31. I’m 21 today. To celebrate, I drank little coffee for breakfast and I opened

my presents. I got some perfume some pretty silver jewelries.

November 1. The electricities are low. I’d better save them until I get near land. I’ll need

the radio then. It rained today, so I collected a few waters for cooking.

You should learn from your competitor, but never copy. Copy and you die.

- Jack Ma -

Exercise 11: Choose the right forms of quantifiers in

brackets to complete the paragraph.

How 1 (many/ much) lists is your name on? There must be 2 (plenty/

plenty of) lists of names in every part of the world and they must be used

to send information to 3 (millions/ millions of) people. The 4 (number/

amount) of letters ordinary people receive these days has greatly

increased. 5 (A lot/ A lot of)the people I know object to receiving unwanted

letters. 6 (Much/ Many) of the mail we receive goes straight into the wastepaper

basket. That's why 7 (most/ the most) people refer to it as junk mail.

It would be better for all of us if we received 8 (much/ many) less junk mail

and, as a result, saved 9 (many/ much) more trees from destruction.

Study

harder


ARTICLES

GRAMMAR

In English there are three articles: a, an, and the. Articles are

used before nouns or noun equivalents and are a type of adjective.

The definite article (the) is used before a noun to indicate that the

identity of the noun is known to the reader. The indefinite article (a,

an) is used before a noun that is general or when its identity is not

known. There are certain situations in which a noun takes no article.

RULES OF ARTICLES

RULES

Singular

count nouns

Plural

count nouns

Rule 1: Specific indentity not known

a, an (no article)

Rule 2: Specific identity known

the

the

Rule 3: All things or things in general

(no article)

(no article)

NOTES

Singular count nouns:

refers to items that can

be counted and are

either singular or plural

Plural count nouns:

refers to items that

are not counted and

are always singular

Nguyễn Thị Hoài Thương


Rule 1: Specific identity not known

A or An?

Use the indefinite article 'a' or 'an'

only with a singular count noun

whose specific identity is not

known to the reader.

1. Use the article 'a'

before a consonant

sound

a boy a girl a radio

2. Use the article a

before a vowel sound.

an apartment

an umbrella

- Sometimes an adjective comes between the article and noun

Example: a red apple, an happy boy...

3. Use the article a

or an when the noun

is mentioned for the

first time

Let's buy

a book.

Good idea.

Which one

should we

buy?

Becareful! It is the sound, not the

letter, that determines wether you

use a or an

Exceptions: a uniform, a university,

an hour, an honest man, a one-eyed

man, a one-way road, a useful way,

an SOS, a union, a unit, a European,

an M.A, an horrorable man...


Rule 1 - Specific identity not known

4. Use the article a or an to

indicate one in number (as

opposed to more than one)

E.g: I own a cat and two dog

E.g: I have a headache

5. Before an illness

Exceptions: have (the) flu/measles

6. Use the article a or an

to say what someone or

something is

I am a chef

I am a teacher

E.g: What a magnificant

house!

- It’s quite a small house

- We shouldn’t go out in

such a bad storm

7. Use the article a or an

after what, such , quite

(+ countable noun)


Rule 2: Specific identity known

Use the definite article the with

any noun (whether singular or

plural, count or noncount) when

the specific identity of the noun

is known to the reader, as in the

following situations

USAGES

01 02

Use the when a particular

noun has already been

mentioned previously.

E.g:

I ate an apple yesterday.

The apple was juicy and

delicious.

E.g:

Use the when an adjective,

phrase, or clause describing

the noun clarifies or restricts

its identity

The boy sitting next to me

raised his hand.

Use the in front of all nouns

to describe someone or

something specific of unique

E.g:

The Sun, The Earth, The World,…

Use the articles the in front of

a phrase or adjective such as

first, best, right, wrong, most,

or only indentifies the noun

E.g:

- He was the best hunter in

the country

- The best time, the first thing,…

- The most beautiful dress

03 04

Use the articles the before

certain adjectives to give a

plural meaning


plural countries or other plural

regions and bodies of country

05 06

E.g: The rich, the poor, …

E.g:

the Netherlands,

the United States,…



names of rivers, oceans and

seas

E.g:

the Nile, the Pacific

E.g:


the name of magazines,

newspapers,…

the Vogue, the Newyork time

07 08


deserts, forests, gulfs, and

peninsulas

Use the articles the before nouns

of proper names in the plural to

refer to the whole family

09 10

E.g:

the Sahara, the Persian

Gulf, the Black Forest, the

Iberian Peninsula

E.g:

the Smiths, the Ramsays


Rule 3: All things or things in general

No article

Use no article with

plural countable

nouns or any

uncountable nouns

used to mean all or

in general.

No article

How to

use it?

USAGE:

Names of most

countries/territories

E.g: Italy, Mexico, Bolivia

She lives in Italy

I'm from Vietnam

I've been to New

York twice.

Tokyo is in Japan

Names of cities, towns,

or states

E.g: Seoul, Manitoba, Miami

Names of streets

E.g: Washington Blvd., Main St.

Minnie: Where are you now?

Nick: I'm on Church Street.



Names of lakes

and bays

E.g: Lake Titicaca, Lake

Erie, Paradise Bay,..

Lake Victoria is one of

the largest lakes in the

world.

Names of mountains

E.g: Mount Everest, Mount

Fuji

Mount Fuji is the highest

mountain in Japan.

Names of continents

Vietnam is a country in

Southeast Asia

E.g: Asian, Europe, Africa

Names of islands

E.g: Easter Island, Maui,

Key West

Santorini is an island located on the

southern side of the Aegean sea.

NOTES:

Articles in phrases and expressions

Notice how we use articles

in the following phrases

and expressions. Many of

these are examples of

general categories.

For example, ‘the Thames’

means that we use ‘the’ for

all rivers.

USAGE:

Time:

-Definite article: in the 1990s, in (the) summer, in the morning

-Zero article: in 2008, in June, on Friday, at night

E.g: They do exercise in the morning

I have a lesson on Monday

Holidays:

Zero articles: Christmas, Thanksgiving, Tet,…

E.g: Children traditionally hang up stockings on

Christmas Eve for Santa Clause to fill with presents.

People &

Work:

-Indefinite article: have a job, work as a/an…

-Definite article: the queen, the president, the French

-Zero article: become president, go to work, he’s American

E.g: Juli is American. She has worked as a doctor

for 3 years. She used to examine the president.



Meal:

Zero articles: eat/have

breakfast /lunch /dinner

E.g: I eat breakfast everyday

Place:

Definite article: the Alps, the Earth,

the UK, the Cyclades

Zero article: Mount Everest, Paris,

Mars, Oxford Street, Lake Superior

Entertainment and sport:

Definite article: the media, on the

radio, play the guitar, go to the cinema

Zero article: listen to music, on

television, play tennis/football,…

Organisations:

Definite article: the army, the

police, the fire brigade,...

Education:

Definite article: go to the school (as a

visitor), in the first year

Zero article: go to school (as a

student), be in Class A, Maths

Travel:

Indefinite article: take a taxi, catch

a/the bus

Definite article: on the bus

Zero article: on foot, go home, go

by bus

Health:

Indefinite article: have a cold

Definite article: have (the) flu/measles

Zero article: have toothache

Public buildings:

Definite article: the bank, go to the

hospital/prison (as a visitor)

Zero article: go to hospital/prison

(as a patient/prisoner)

US vs UK grammar: Speakers of American English do not

usually use hospital without an article.

+ US: The ambulance took Simon to the hospital.

+ UK: The ambulance took Simon to hospital.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 1: Look

at this short

biography of

Leonardo-da

Vinci.

Leonardo da Vinci is a true Renaissance gentleman, with talents and

interests spanning the fields of art, science, and mathematics. He was born in

1452 in Vinci, a suburb of Florence, Italy. During the years growing up here,

he developed a love for painting and began to demonstrate his artistic and

academic talents.

In 1472, he was accepted into the Society of Florence Painters. In 1482,

da Vinci left Florence to work for Ludovico Sforza, Duke of Milan, as a fullfledged

painter and engineer. When Leonardo-da Vinci left Milan around

1500, he made a brief stop in Venice before returning home to Florence,

where he deepened his study of anatomy and flight mechanics.

However, in 1503, he returned to painting with a painting of the “Mona

Lisa”. His typical sfumato technique that brought a soft roundness to Lisa's

face, hair, and clothes was also echoed in the hills, rivers, and valleys behind

her. Begun around 1495 and completed around 1498, Leonardo-da Vinci was

commissioned to paint this fresco depicting “the Last Supper of Jesus” - the

painting is famous for its paint technique dry on several preparatory layers,

usually to wet the original at that time. Through his outstanding

achievements to this day, they show that he is not only good at art but also in

mathematics, physics, and geography. And Leonardo spent the last three

years of his life in Cloux's small mansion and died in 1519.

Read the statements. Check True or False

1. Leonardo was born and studied in Italy

2. He left home to travel around the world

in the 1480s

3. He had the only one famous picture

4. Leonardo lived in Cloux from 1514 to 1519

5. He used his whole life to bring great value

to the world

True

False


Exercise 2

Rewite the sentences

1. Rita/ play/violin/and/her sister/play/ guitar.

___________________________________________________________

2. Sahara/be/locate/Africa.

___________________________________________________________

3. Deaf/ be/ people/ who can’t here/anything.

___________________________________________________________

4. There is/ onion/left/in/ frigde.

___________________________________________________________

5. On/ our trip/ to/ Spain/we acrossed/Atlantic Ocean.

___________________________________________________________

6. Where is/ nearest shop?/ There is/one/ at/ end of this street.

___________________________________________________________

7. Davis/ played/ basketball/ and/ baseball/ at/ Boy’s club/ last year.

___________________________________________________________

8. Smiths/go to/ Ha Long bay/ next summer.

___________________________________________________________

9. Maria/ come/ from/ United States/ She/ be/ American girl.

___________________________________________________________

10. The boy/ said/moon/ be/ bigger than/earth.

___________________________________________________________


Exercise 3: Fill (a, an ,the or X) and match to complete the sentences

1. ……..Hyde Park

2.Childen usually

3.All work

4…… Grand hotel

5. There are only…. few mistakes

in your composition,

6.Jason’s father

7. ……winter is usually cold,

A. begin to go to……….school

at…….age of six

B. but winter of this year is

warm

C. is a very large park in central

London

D. don’t make……same ones

any more

E. bought him…….bicycle that

he had wanted for his birthday

F. had to be done…. by hand

when there were no modern

machines

G.is in…. Baker Street.


Exercise 4: Complete the sentences.

1. You forgot to insert ............. page number on ............. page 42.

2. That issue is covered in ............. section D of this report.

3. People play ……… cricket in South Africa, Australia and Sri Lan

Ka.

4. The film wasn’t very good, but I like …….. music.

5. I'm glad to tell you that we plan to open... . .. branch office in

Moscow and there will be……. opportunity for some of you to

transfer there. If you are interested in working in .......... new

branch, send me an email.

6. A lot of businessman and businesswoman agree that…………

knowledge of English is a must in ………. International trade today.

7. ……….new packing machine that I told you about processes

3,000 units ……... hour.

8. Tom had an accident last week. He was taken to .....….. hospital.


Exercise 5: Find and

correct mistakes

1) Ms. Parrot, the most famous lady detective of a twentyfirst

century, was born in United Kingdom in the 1960s.

2) She has been to many countries, including Portugal,

Singapore, and Australia as well as on an equator.

3) She has never been to Philippines or the United States,

but she speaks English, French, and Portuguese.

4) She is also a only person in the world to have

performed Tchaikovsky’s 1812 overture in one breath on

a recorder.

5) With great modesty, she has either declined such a fee

or donated money to the poor.


Exercise 6: Fill in the blanks with a, an, the or Ø (zero article)

1. ________ Sun is a star.

2. What did you have for________ breakfast this morning?

3. London is ________ capital of England.

4. When was ________ telephone invented?

5. We visited ________ Canada and ________ United States two years ago.

6. We haven't been to ________ cinema for years.

7. Do you need ________ umbrella?

8. ________ injured man was taken to ________ hospital.

9. She went out without ________ money.

10. Toshi speaks ________ Japanese at home.

11. A man and a woman were standing outside my house ________ man looked English

but I think________ woman was foreign.

12. The Soviet Union was ________ first country to send a man into ________ space.

13. Did you watch "Titanic" on ________ television or at ________ cinema?

14. After ________ lunch, we went for a walk by ________ sea.

15. Peru is ________ country in South America. ________ capital is Lima.

16. It was a beautiful day. ________ sun shone brightly in ________ sky.

17. It is said that Robin Hood robbed ________ rich and gave the money to ________ poor.

18. Life is not so easy for ________ unemployed.

19. Many people were killed in the accident. The bodies of ________ dead were taken

away.

20. The butler was ________ last person I suspected.

Your future depends on many things, but mostly on you.

- Frank Tyger -


Exercise 7: Complete the paragraphs with suitable articles.

1. My sister often goes to ________ church by ________ bus.

2. Mel's mother is in ________ hospital, so we went to visit her last night.

3. Rita is studying ________ English and ________ Maths this semester.

4. Do you know________ man who is waiting for the bus over there?

5. Please give me ________ cup of ________ coffee with ________ cream and ________

sugar.

6. ________ big books which are on ________ table are for my history class.

7. My ________ car is four years old, and it still runs well.

8. There are only _______ few seats for tonight's musical.

9. ________ chair that you are sitting in is broken.

10. The Civil War was fought in ________ United States between 1861 and 1865.

11. We went by ________ train to the west of England.

12. ________ people who live in ________ Scotland are called the Scots.

13. This house is very nice. Has it got ________ garden?

14. There isn't ________ airport near where I live. ________ nearest airport is 70

miles away.

15. Did you have ________ nice holiday? Yes, It was ________ best holiday I've ever

had.

16. Mai always plays ________ piano whenever she has free time.

17. My daughter was born on ________ fifth of January.

18. Yesterday I went to ________ school by ________ bus because my bike had been

broken down.

19. It takes me ________ hour to finish my work.

20. She used to have ________ cat and ________ dog but ________ dog died.

Exercise 8

Choose the correct answer.

1. Taiwan is _____ island. It is ______ largest island of ______

Republic of China.

A. an, a, Ø B. the, the,Ø C. a, the, the D. an, the, the

2. It is hot in ______ summer, and ______ days are longer.

A. a, the B. Ø, the C. the, the D. the, Ø

3. Where there is _____ will, there is _____ way.

A. the, a B. the, the C. a, the D. a, a

4. ______ Vietnamese are _____ hardworking people.

A. the, a B. the, Ø C. Ø, Ø D. Ø, a

5. Rose's hometown was in _____ south Sea and his father is in

______ Black Sea.

A. Ø, Ø B. the, a C. the, a D. the, the

6. Jimmy has tried twice, and now he will give it ______ third try.

A. one B. another C. the D. a



Exercise 9

Choose the most suitable article from the 4 answers A B

C D below to fill in the blanks. Please pay attention that

each articles will complete an idiom in the sentence.

1. My friend never likes using smartphones. She’s so behind _______

times.

A. a B. an C. the D. Ø

2. I want to move this desk. Can you give me _______ hand?


3. Business is really going poorly these days. We’ve been in _______ red

for the past three months.


4. I got to the drugstore just in _______ nick of time. I really need this

medicine!


5. Have you been to the new movie theater? No, only see movies once

in _______ while.

A. an B. a C. the D. Ø

6. I’m feeling under _______ weather – I think I’m getting a cold.


7. I think you hit _______ nail on _______ head when you said that what’s

lacking in our company is a feeling of confidence.

A. a/a B. a/the C. the/the D. Ø/a

8. I’m sitting on _______ fence with my girlfriend when we went

shopping!

A. a B. an C. Ø D. the

9. I used to see him all the time, but now he just visits me once in

_______ blue moon.


10. If you miss _______ boat, it means you are too late to get _______

opportunity in my comany.

A. a/an B. the/an C. Ø/an D. an/ Ø


Exercise 10

Editing

Read the articles about video game. There are thirteen mistakes in use

of the a, an, and the. The fisrt mistakes is already corected. Find and

correct twelve more.

THE PLUMBER AND THE APE

Once there was a plumber named Mario.

Plumber had beautiful girlfriend. One

day, a ape fell in love with the girlfriend

and the kidnapped her. The plumber

chased ape to rescue his girlfriend. This

simple tale became the Donkey Kong, a first video

game with a story. It was invented by Sigeru

Matsimoto, a artist with Nintendo, Inc. Matsimoto

loved the video games, but he wanted to make them

more interesting. He liked fairy tales, so he invented

story similar to a famous fairy tale. Story was an

immediate success, and Nintendo followed it with. The

Mario Brothers and then with Super Mario. The third

game became popular all over the the a world, and it is

still most famous game in video history. Nintendo has

continued to add the new characters to the story, but

success does not change Mario. He is always brave

little plumber in a red hat and work clothes.


Exercise 11: Listen to the record, and fill in the correct articles,

then practice speaking the dialogue with your classmate

aloud.

Mary: Hey! Come into ____ garden. Mai and Nam are dancing on ____ grass.

Hana: In the dark?

Mary: They’re dancing under the stars.

Lisa: Fantastic! And Phong is playing his guitar.

Hana: Just look at Mai! She can’t dance but she looks very smart.

Mary: Look at Nam. What ____ fabulous dancer!

Lisa: What ____ attractive couple they are! Let’s take ____ photograph of them.

Life is a story that makes yours the best seller.

– Reback –


Exercise 12: Listen to the conversation. Then listen again

and circle the correct articles.

1. A: What’s that?

B: Oh. It’s (a/the) new video game. Do you want to try it?

2. A: I’m reading the story you recommended now. Who’s Angelia? I can’t figure

it out.

B: she’s (a/the) princess with magic powers.

3. A: What about Aesop? Have you read (a/the) fable?

B: No. I’m going tonight.

4. A: You know, I’d like to buy (a/the) book of fables for Ava.

B: Good idea. She loves fables.

5. A: Let’s go to (a/the) bookstore this weekend!

B: OK. We can go on Sunday after lunch.

6. A: Speaking of lunch, I’m hungry.

B: Here. Why don’t you have (a/the) sandwich?

It’s fine to celebrate success but it is more important to heed the

lessons of failure.

- Bill Gates -

Adjectives

and

Adverbs

ADJECTIVES

GRAMMAR

Part 1.1-Definitions

adjective used to describe a host or add information to the host

Section 1.2-Classification

-part 1.2.1: positional adjectives

Adjectives before nouns: are adjectives that come before nouns that

can stand alone, without a noun.

stand-alone adjectives do not need nouns: there is no standard to

remember whether an adjective can go before a noun or not, but

when we read it, we will feel embarrassed.

eg: aware; afraid; alive; awake; alone; ashamed, ashamed; exempt;...

-part 1.2.2: adjectives according to function

descriptive adjective

+ adjectives indicating properties: expensive, rich, ..

+ adjectives for color: black, red,...

+ adjectives for size: small, big, tall,...

+ adjectives of status: happy, hungry, funny,...

+ adjectives of shape: oval, round, circle,...

-part 1.2.3: quantitative adjectives

+ answer the question “how much”, “how many”? that's why include

+ word for mass: much, many, some.

+counts; 1,2,3,86,742,..

+ ordinal number: first, second, third,...

- part 1.2.4: directive adjectives

+ Adjectives describe which noun or pronoun you are talking about.

They include the words: this, that, these, those. Indicative adjectives

always precede the object to which it points.

-part 1.2.5: possessive adjectives

Possessive adjectives describe the owner of an object. Common

possessive adjectives include my, his, her, their, your, our. If you

want to omit a noun or pronoun then you need to replace it with:

mine, his, hers,

-part 1.2.6: interrogative adjectives

Interrogative adjectives often appear in questions. The most

commonly used interrogative adjectives are: which, what, whose.

These words will not be considered interrogative adjectives if they

are not followed by a noun.

which/what/whose +N

Nguyễn Đức Trung-24A7512004

eg: which computer do you use?

what color do you like?

-Part 1.2.7:distributive adjectives

Distributive adjectives describe a particular member of a group. Some

distributive adjectives that you will often encounter include: each, every, either,

neither, any. These adjectives are always followed by a noun or pronoun.

eg:Every rose has its thorn

Part III-Place of adjectives in sentences

Part 3.1-In front of nouns

Adjectives come before nouns, but if there are many adjectives in a sentence,

they must be arranged in a certain order

Quantity>Opinion > Size > Quality > Age > Shape > Color > Participle Forms >

Origin > Material > Type > Purpose

for example: That is a beautiful tiny red flower

Part 3.2-After linking verbs

linking verbs like seen, tobe,look,...to show the feeling of the noun

eg: she looks tired because she studied late last night

Part 3.3-After a noun

* When adjectives are used to describe the quality/property of indefinite

pronouns:

There is nothing interesting.

I'll tell you something new.

* When two or more adjectives are joined by "and" or "but", the idea expressed

by the adjective is emphasized:

The writer is both clever and wise.

The old man, poor but proud, refused my offer.

* When adjectives are used in phrases describing measurement:

The road is 5 kms long

A building is ten stories high

* When adjectives are in the comparative form:

They have a house bigger than yours

The boys easiest to teach were in the classroom

* When the past participle is part of a reduced clause:

The glass broken yesterday was very expensive

* Some past participles (P2) such as: involved, mentioned, indicated:

The court asked the people involved

Look at the notes mentioned/indicated hereafter

Part 3.4-Adjectives used as nouns

Some adjectives that are used as nouns to refer to a group of people or a

concept are usually preceded by "the".

for example the poor, the rich,..


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Part 3.5-construction of adjectives

adjectives in addition to the available words, we can completely create adjectives

Adjectives - adjectives: dark-blue , wordly-wise , …

Noun - adjective: coal-black , snow-white,…

Adjective-noun (+ed): dark-eyed , round-faced,…

Noun – verb (past participant): snow-covered , handmade , …

Adjective/Adverb - verb : newly-born, white-washed,…

Noun/Adjective – V-ing: good-looking, heart-breaking, …

Hyphenated adjectives: A four-year-old girl = The girl is four years old,A ten-storey

building = The building has ten storeys,A never-to-be-forgetten memory = The

memory will be never forgotten.

Part 3.6: How to recognize adjectives (applies to most adjectives)

The ending is “-able”: comfortable, capable, considerable.…

The ending is “-ous”: dangerous, humorous, poisonous…

The ending is “-ive”: attractive, decisive, positive…

The ending is “-full”: stressful, harmful, beautiful…

The end is "-less": careless, harmless, useless...

The ending is “-ly”: friendly, lovely, expensive…

The ending is “-y”: rainy, sunny, windy…

End with "-al": political, historical, physical...

Ending with “-ed”: excited, interested, bored…

The ending is “-able”: possible, flexible, responsible…

End in "-ent": confident, dependent, different…

The ending is “-ant”: important, brilliant, significant…

End with “-ic”: economic, specific, iconic…

The ending is “-ing”: interesting, exciting, boring…


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

write the suitable answer

up out back of on off

1. People are fed……… with all these traffic jams

2. There was a………. confrontation between management and unions.

3. Tom’s very laid-………. about his exams.

4. It was just a one-………….; it won’t happen again.

5. At that time, it was completely unheard-………… for girls to go to university.

6. A cut-……………… stops the kettle boiling dry


1. It isn’t quite_________that he will be present at the meeting.

A. right B. exact C. certain D. formal

2. As there was a _____________ cut in the hospital, the surgeon had to call off the

operation.

A.power B. powering C. powder D. powerful

3. Could you please_________an appointment for me to see Mr. Smith?

A. manage B. arrange C. take D. have

4. The police_________her for helping the murderer to escape.

A. caught B. searched C. brought D. arrested

5. When John_________in London, he went to see the Houses of Parliament.

A. came B. reached C. arrived D. got

6. I read an interesting _________in a newspaper about farming today.

A. article B. advertisement C. composition D. explanation

7. Students are expected to _________their classes regularly.

A. assist B. frequent C. attend D. present

8. Before you sign anything important, pay careful _________to all the conditions.

A.notice B. attention C. regards D. reference

9. In the central region the dry season is long and severe, and the _________annual

rainfall is only about 70 cm.

A. refreshing B. general C. average D. greatest

10. As soon as the children were_________, their mother got them out of bed and into

the bathroom.

A. woke B. wake C. awake D. waken


FOCUSED

PRACTICE


Well, I would like to talk about the final football match between U23 Vietnam

and U23 Uzbekistan in Asian Football Championship in January, 2018.

You know, it is still spectacular and (1-impress)_______ although our team didn’t

win the cup for the following two reasons. Firstly because the team contributed

a (2-note)________ performance in the decisive match under extremely (3-

freeze)_________ weather. After (4-miracle)__________ victories over Iraq and

Qatar, our team was expected to create another miracle and be the champion.

The team played with all the strength and attempt they had despite the harsh

weather conditions.

Secondly, our team is the representative of patriotism and pride of (5-

nation)__________ identity. As you know, thanks to excellent team spirit, the

intense snow couldn’t prevent our boys from moving forward and fought

courageously. They tried their best to bring the (6-prestige)__________ trophy to

our country. Vietnamese people as well as other countries’ residents really

appreciated their constant effort throughout the tournament. Although we lost

1-2 to team Uzbekistan at the last minute and couldn’t claim the championship,

we have still felt so (7-pride)___________ of our “heroes” and now they are the

new-generation idols of our country.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Editing

When South African scientists first alerted the world to the rapid spread of

a new SARS-CoV-2 variant, some speculative it might not take off in other

countries. After all, an earlier variant named Beta, which dominated in

South Africa between November 2020 and May, did not spread much

beyond its borders and has since petered out. Today it’s clear that the

world will not be so lucky this time. Although many questions remain,

scientists feel increasingly confident that the new arrival, Omicron, is likely

to dramative alter the trajectory of the pandemic—and not for the better.

Omicron has now been found in more than 70 countries and is rapidly

gaining ground. As Science went to press, for example, Danish scientists

estimated Omicron was just days away from replacing Delta as the most

variant common . “What we see is an extraordinary, rapidly spreading,” says

Troels Lillebæk, an infectious disease researcher at the University of

Copenhagen. Despite very high vaccination rates, the country of 5 million is

now seeing more than 6000 cases a day, roughly twice the number seen

during the highest previous peak. (The growth seemed to show signs of

slow down early this week, but that may be in part because the country is

reaching the limits of its testing capable.) Neighboring Norway, which has

about the same population, is now projecting more than 100,000 cases a

day in a matter of weeks unless people drastically reduce social contacts.

Even if Omicron causes milder disease, as some scientists hope, the

astronomic case projections mean the outlook is grim, warns Emma

Holcroft, a virologist at the University of Bern. “A lot of scientists thought

Delta was already going to make this a really, really tough winter,” she says.

“I’m not sure the message has gotten across to the people who make

decisions, how much tough Omicron is going to make this.”For Hodcroft and

other virologists, immunologists, and epidemiologists, Omicron is another

dizzy plunge on the pandemic roller coaster, right before the holidays—a

time of frenzied phone calls, late-night work, and little sleep. “We have

people working the whole weekend again,” says Florian Krammer, a vaccine

researcher at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai. “It doesn’t

matter if something needs to be done at 10 p.m., it’s getting done.”



Reading

After facing setback after setback this year, the nonprofit formed to

make sure COVID-19 vaccines reach the poorest countries of the world

may finally live up to its promise in 2022. A 14 December report shows

that after scaling back its ambitions, the COVID-19 Vaccines Global

Access (COVAX) Facility is close to meeting a revised target of 1.42 billion

doses available this year. And today, the effort got a huge boost when

the World Health Organization (WHO) gave an emergency use listing to a

vaccine that COVAX is counting on for up to 1 billion doses next year.

Despite COVAX’s recent successes and its optimistic new supply forecast,

delivering the prized shots to needy countries isn’t the last word in

achieving global vaccine equity: Many nations may still struggle to

distribute their supplies and, in some cases, overcome vaccine hesitancy.

“Supply still needs attention, but we have pivoted to delivery and

absorption as the main issues,” says Seth Berkley, CEO of Gavi, the

Vaccine Alliance. Established by WHO, Gavi, UNICEF, and the Coalition for

Epidemic Preparedness Innovations (CEPI), COVAX initially set a goal of

vaccinating 20% of the population in every country—enough to cover

health care workers and the people most at risk of developing severe

disease. To accomplish this, COVAX said it needed to have 2 billion doses

available by the end of this year. The COVAX forecasting report issued

this week shows the effort will fall far short of that with 1.38 billion

doses available by year’s end.COVAX set out to buy vaccines in bulk and

then provide them to 1.8 billion people in 92 low- and middle-income

countries at little or no cost. But after COVID-19 vaccines first became

available in December 2019, many wealthy countries ordered far more

doses than they needed, bumping COVAX—which negotiates steep

discounts—to the end of the purchasing line. COVAX also counted on the

Serum Institute of India to supply up to 1.1 billion doses, but it backed

out of the arrangement in March in order to protect India during its

Delta variant surge.

1. How to achieve global vaccine equity

A.COVAX meets a revised target of 2 billion vaccines

B. Delivering the prized shots to needy countries

C. Many wealthy countries didn't order far more doses than they needed

D.Both A, B, and C

2. What is the synonym of optimism?

A.hopeful B.Doubtful C.Busy D.clear


3. Why did COVAX initially set a goal of vaccinating 20% of the

population in every country

A.It's enough to cover health care workers and the people most at

risk of developing severe disease

B.That reduces the financial burden on COVAX

C.It makes more countries provide more vaccines

D.It helps to quickly reach the global vaccine

4. What is the main topic of the passage?

A.By the end of this year, it is not possible to achieve universal

vaccine equity

B.Rich countries are selfish

C.It costs a lot of money to achieve vaccine equity

D.There are many countries that backed out of the arrangement to

protect their country

find mistakes and correct them

1, We suggested he go on holiday, but he didn’t agree because he had

to do his long hard deadline

2. We cleaned all the kitchen while our parents were out to dinner,

3. This is a 15-year-olds round Japanese table made of wood and that

our grandma purchased during the war

4. Last year Matt earned twice as many as his brother, who had a

better position than him

5. The woman whose red car is parked in front of the bank is a

famout pop star.

6.The better you are at English, more chance you have to get a job

with international organizations.

7.: Even though they are among the smallest carnivores, weasels will

attack animals that are double their size.

8.: Today was such beautiful day that I couldn’t bring myself to

complete all my chores.

9.: One of the most importants issue is the lack of parking spaces at

the local mall near our house.

10.when comparing math and music Many individuals believe that

learning arithmetic is many better for the brain than learning music.

reading

A. what is an adjective? you can see that adjectives make nouns in

paragraphs come alive, adjectives make sentences from passages

smoother. An adjective used to describe a host or add information to the

host,

B.The position of the adjective plays an important role in the composition

of the sentence, just changing the position of the adjective can lead to a

change in the meaning of the sentence or wrong usage of the grammar.

Adjectives before nouns: are adjectives that come before nouns that can

describe noun but they must be arranged in a certain

order:Quantity>Opinion > Size > Quality > Age > Shape > Color >

Participle Forms > Origin > Material > Type > Purpose.for example: That is

a beautiful tiny red flower.the other hand,stand-alone adjectives do not

need nouns: there is no standard to remember whether an adjective can

go before a noun or not, but when we read it, we will feel

embarrassed.like aware boy,alone home,..Adjectives might be after

linking verb as tobe,seem,look,...to show feeling of the noun

C.To classify adjectives, we divide them according to their usage, divide

by function, descriptive adjectives, quantitative adjectives, indicative

adjectives, possessive adjectives, interrogative adjectives. firstly, With

descriptive adjectives used to describe, we divide into many other

adjective forms: adjectives indicating properties such as expensive, rich,

...; adjectives for color as black, red, ..; adjectives for size like small, big,

tall, ..; adjectives of status such as happy, hungry, funny, ..; adjectives of

shape as oval, round, circle, ..Secondly, quantitative adjectives we answer

the question “how much”, “how many”? that's why include: word for

mass:much,many,some,..; counts; 1,2,3,86,742,..or ordinal number: first,

second, third,...Thirdly,directive adjectives Adjectives describe which

noun or pronoun you are talking about, used to indicate spatial and

temporal position in the interval time, They include the words: this, that,

these, those. Indicative adjectives always precede the object to which it

points. Fourthly, Possessive adjectives describe the owner of an object.

Common possessive adjectives include: my, his, her, their, your, our. If

you want to omit a noun or pronoun then you need to replace it with:

mine, his, hers. Fifthly, Interrogative adjectives often appear in questions,

you might think:"how can an adjective be a question".Adjectives of this

form. is to confirm the noun to be confirmed when the number of nouns

involved is too much. The most commonly used interrogative adjectives

are: which, what, whose. These words will not be considered interrogative

adjectives if they are not followed by a noun.


D.sometime Adjectives can also be used for many different purposes.

When after a noun, are used to describe the quality/property of

indefinite pronouns like there is nothing interesting,or when adjectives

are used in phrases describing measurement as the road is 5 km long or

adjectives used as nouns for example the rich, the poor,...There are many

other ways to use it depending on the intended use

E.In general, adjectives are used to describing or identify nouns;

depending on the position of the adjective, the meaning of the sentence

can change. There are many types of adjectives, but they are all used to

describe and add information to the noun and There are many other

ways to use it depending on the intended use.

Phần I-matching

1:definition of adjective in a sentence

2:adjectives have many classifications and depending on the different

usage, we divide the adjectives into respective groups.

3: summarizing, adjectives can be used in many different situations and

abilities

4:position of adjectives in a sentences

5:adjevtives have sone ways to use

A

B

C

E

D

E

Phần III-true or false

1.Adjectives are words that are only used to describe and identify objects

that can be listed as descriptive words

2.Adjectives that come before the list and have only a single meaning

3.Adjectives can be used as verbs in certain cases

5.Adjectives can be used in many different ways


Trần Quang Lợi

Adverb

GRAMMAR

A. Theory

1. What are adverbs?

Adverbs add information about verbs, adjectives, and adverbs. They tell us how,

where, when, or how often something happens, or about the speaker's attitude.

Ex: We need to look at this carefully. (tells us how)

Ex: My car is parked outside. (tells us where)

Ex: We haven't had any complaints recently. (tells us when)

Ex: Does she visit you often? (asks how often)

2. Kinds of adverbs

Adverbs can be classified according to their meaning in a sentence.

2.1, Adverbs of manner

An adverb of manner answers the question How? Adverbs of manner include:

badly, beautifully, better, bravely, cheerfully, fast, hard, quickly, slowly,

inadequately, healthy, well, etc.

Ex: Sarah slowly walked over the rocky beach. (Slowly answers the question: How

did Sarah walk?)

Adverbs of manner usually come at the end of a sentence. Adverbs ending in -ly

can sometimes be placed in the middle of a sentence if the adverb is not the focus

of the information.

Ex: He drove off angrily.

Ex: She angrily tore up the letter.

Ex: I don’t remember him very well.

- Adverbs of manner are usually formed by adding -ly after the adjective.

Ex:

Adjectives + → ly Adverbs

→ Bad Badly

→ Happy Happily

→ Quick Quickly

→ Terrible Terribly

→ Slow Slowly

Trần Quang Lợi

Adjectives ending in -l, double –l:

Ex: careful →carefully. beautiful →beautifully.

+ Adjectives ending in -y, change -y to -i:

Ex: easy →easily. angry →angrily.

*Note: Some words end in -ly but are adjectives like friendly, lonely, lovely,

cowardly, silly, ugly, likely, lively, etc. Adverbs cannot be formed with these

adjectives

Ex: We received a friendly greeting. (NOT We were greeted friendlily.)

Ex: Don’t act in a silly way. (NOT Don’t act Sillily.)

- Some words have adverbs with the same form as adjectives

Ex: hard, late, wrong, fine, fast, deep, near, straight, early, right, low, long, high, free,

etc.

Ex: We caught the fast train. (adjective)

Ex: The train was going quite fast.(adverb)

Ex: We didn’t have a long wait. (adjective)

Ex: Have you been waiting long? (adverb)

- Some words can have two adverbs, an adverb with the same form as the adjective

and an adverb ending in -ly with a different meaning.

Ex: Ann works hard, while her bother hardly works.

+ Hardly (= almost not)

+ Lately (= recently)

Ex: He has come to see me lately.

+ Nearly (= almost)

Ex: I nearly missed the bus.

+ Highly (=very, very much)

Ex: She’s a highly intelligent young woman.

+ Deeply (=very, very much)

Ex: He is deeply interested in this project.

+ Freely (=without limit)

Ex: you can speak freely - I won’t tell anyone what you say.

- Some adverbs may or may not have -ly, such as: cheap(ly), quick(ly), direct(ly),

fair(ly), slow(ly), tight(ly)

Ex: I came as quick/quickly as I could.

*Note: well is an adverb of good.

Ex: I like that teacher. He is good and he teachers very well. (NOT …very goodly)

Ex: She speaks English well. (NOT She speaks well English)

Trần Quang Lợi

2.2, Adverbs of time

An adverb of time answers the question When? Adverbs of time include: after,

always, before, during, early, later, never, now, often, rarely, recently, sometimes,

soon, then, today, tomorrow, usually, yesterday, etc.

Ex: John will attend the soccer game after he finishes his homework. (After answers

the question: When will John attend the soccer game?)

- Adverbs of time usually come at the end of a sentence.

Ex: Can you do it now?

Ex: What’s going to happen next?

Ex: We’ll leave on Monday morning.

+ Adverbs of time can sometimes be placed at the beginning of a sentence for

emphasis or contrast.

Ex: Today I’m going to London. (emphasis on time)

Ex: We’re really busy this week. Last week we had nothing to do. (contrast)

+ Some adverbs of time, such as: finally, soon, already, last now, still, just can also

be placed at the end of a sentence; still and just only stand in the middle of the

sentence.

Ex: We’ll soon be home.

Ex: My father finally agreed to let me go on the trip.

Ex: She is still busy.

Ex: Mr.Jonson has just gone out.

2.3, Adverbs of place

Ex: Susan placed the boxes above the file cabinet. (Above answers the question:

Where did Susan place the boxes?

- Adverbs of place usually come at the end of a sentence.

Ex: The children are playing upstairs.

Ex: Her parents live abroad.

+ Adverbs of place can sometimes be placed at the beginning of a sentence,

especially in prose and when the adverb is not the focus of the sentence. In this

case, the verb usually comes before the subject.

Ex: At the end of the garden stood a very tall tree.

Ex: Down came the rain.

*Note:

- Adverbs of direction come before adverbs of position.

Ex: The children are running around the garden.

Trần Quang Lợi

- Adverbs of place usually come before adverbs of time

Ex: We arrived at the airport early.

- Here and there can begin a clause: Here/There + verb + subject.

Ex: Here comes our bus.

Ex: There goes the train!

- The subject is the pronoun that comes right after here/there. Ex: Here it comes.

2.4, Adverbs of frequency

An adverb of frequency answers the question How often? Adverbs of frequency

include: always, never, usually,

frequently, occasionally, rarely, seldom, sometimes, etc.

Ex: Bob always forgets to check his email before class begins. (Before answers the

question: How often does Bob forget to check his email?)

- Adverbs of frequency are usually placed in the middle of a sentence.

Ex: I’ll never agree to their demands.

Ex: Mary has sometimes goes to the cinema with Tom.

- Adverbs of frequency usually come before the auxiliary when the auxiliary is

stressed and when the auxiliary is alone in a short answer.

Ex: I never can understand him.

Ex: Have you ever met her again? – Yes, I sometimes have.

- Some adverbs of frequency such as: often, normally, often, often, occasionally and

occasionally can also be placed at the beginning or end of a sentence to emphasize

or indicate contrast. Always and never do not come at the beginning or end of a

sentence.

Ex: Normally I tip my hairdresser. (NOT Always I tip…)

Ex: My dad cooks dinner sometimes, but usually my mum does it.

- Adverb phrases of frequency like every day, every hour, once a week, three times a

month, etc. They usually come at the beginning or end of a sentence.

Ex: He play tennis three times a week.

2.5, Adverbs of degree

An adverb of degree answers the question How much? It describes the strength and

intensity at which something

happens. Adverbs of degree include: almost, completely, enough, entirely,

extremely, hardly, just, little, much, nearly,

quite, rather, very, too, etc.

Ex: John worked very hard to complete his part of the project. (Very answers the

question: How hard did John work?)

- Adverbs of degree usually come before the adjective or adverb they modify.

Trần Quang Lợi

Ex: I’m very pleased with your success.

Ex: They spoke too quickly for us to understand.

- Enough comes after an adjective or adverb.

Ex: The box isn’t big enough.

- Some adverbs of degree can modify verbs such as: almost, barely, hardly, just,

nearly, quite, rather, really, scarcely usually in the middle of a sentence.

Ex: I really enjoyed it.

2.6, Interrogative adverbs

An interrogative adverb introduces a question. Interrogative adverbs are usually

placed at the beginning of the

sentence. Interrogative adverbs include: how, when, why, and where.

Ex: When will John’s plane arrive from Atlanta?

- Interrogative adverbs always come at the beginning of the sentence.

Ex: Why did you say that?

Ex: How did you come here?

2.7, Relative adverbs

Relative adverbs are words that provide more information about the people,

places, or things being discussed. Beyond that, relative adverbs join clauses and

sentences together. They are used at the beginning of adjective clauses, which are

also referred to as relative clauses.

Ex: I’ll never forget the day when I first met you.

3, Function of Adverbs

1, Modify verbs

Ex: He speaks English fluently.

2, Modify adjectives

Ex: It’s terribly cold today.

3, Modify other adverbs

Ex: She acts too badly.

4, Modify phrases

Ex: He was madly in love with her.

5, Modify whole sentences

Ex: Luckily, he passed the final exam.

4, Position of Adverbs

A, Front position

a.1, Interrogative adverbs (when, why, where, how) and adverbs of connection

(however, then, next, besides,...) usually come at the beginning of a sentence.

Trần Quang Lợi

Ex: Where do you live?.

Ex: I worked until five o’clock. Then I went home.

a.2, Adverbs of time or adverbial phrases of time can also be placed at the

beginning of a sentence for emphasis.

Ex: Yesterday morning something very strange happened.

B, Mid position

Some adverbs such as adverbs of frequency, adverbs of degree, and adverbs of

manner can be placed in the middle of a sentence in the following cases:

b.1, before ordinary verbs (go, come, see, hear,..)

Ex: I quickly ran and got my coat.

Ex: We always play tennis on Saturday.

b.2, after the verb be and after the auxiliary verbs (do, can will, must,...) or between

the auxiliary verb and the main verb.

Ex: She was always kind to me.

Ex: The meeting will probably last for about an hour.

Ex: We have suddenly decided to sell the house.

b.3, When there are two or more auxiliary verbs, the adverb usually comes after the

first auxiliary verb.

Ex: The picture has definitely been stolen.

Ex: She would never have been promoted if she hadn’t changed jobs.

b.4, When in the middle of a sentence, adverbs of manner or completion usually

come after all auxiliary verbs.

Ex: The problem has been carefully studied.

*Note:

- When you want to emphasize the verb be or the auxiliary verb, the adverb usually

comes first.

Ex: I really am sorry.

Ex: He probably has arrived by now.

Ex: I always don’t like her.

- Adverbs cannot be placed between the verb and the object.

Ex: She speaks English well. (NOT She speaks well English.)

C, End position

c.1, Adverbs of manner, time, and place usually come at the end of a sentence.

Ex: Tom ate his breakfast quickly.

Ex: What are you doing tomorrow?

Ex: Did you have a nice time in New York?

*Note:

- When more than one adverb or adverb phrase is at the end of a sentence, the

simple adverb usually comes before the adverb phrase.

Ex: I always eat here at lunchtime.

- Except for necessary complements, adverbs at the end of a sentence are usually in

the order: manner - place - frequency – time.

Ex: I worked hard yesterday.

Ex: He walked slowly around the park after dinner.

Ex: My parents traveled to Florida twice last year.

B. Exercise

Ex1: Read this story. Underline the words which are adverbs, and then say if their

position is in front, mid, or end.

Once a man called Alvin decided to rob a bank in Montgomery, Alabama. Alvin’s

parents had often told him that good manners were important. So Alvin went to the

bank and stood in line. He waited patiently. Soon it was his turn, He dramatically

pulled out a gun and threatened the cashier. She politely told him that he was in the

wrong line and should go to another counter. Alvin immediately went to the correct

place and stood in line again. Suddenly the police rushed in and arrested him. Alvin

was amazed. They’d caught him before he’d even done the robbery. The moral of

the story is that you shouldn’t always do what your parent tell you.

Ex2: Find the mistake in the underlined words and correct it.

1. It is said that five people were serious injured in the accident.

⇒______________________

2. Great circle routes, the shortest courses between two points on the surface of a

sphere, are routine used by international air traffic to save time.

⇒______________________

3. Lan is a hard worker. She works very hardly.

⇒______________________

4. The plane flew highly in the air, then lended suddenly.

⇒______________________

5. Broad speaking, curriculum includes all experiences which the students may have

within the environment of the school.

⇒______________________

6. Beginning in the late 19th century, the yearly rise in the productivity of England

was just slight less than Germany and the U.S.

⇒______________________

Trần Quang Lợi

Trần Quang Lợi

7. My mother is a friendly woman. She always smiles friendlily with our neighbors.

⇒______________________

8. Because Coyote hunts bad, he decides to team up with Eagle, who is an excellent

hunter.

⇒______________________

9. William danced very good in the contest, but Michael danced even better.

⇒______________________

10. The applicants for low-interest loans hope to buy decent built houses for their

families.

⇒______________________

Ex3: Put the words in the right order and write the statements.

1. Cleaned /every day /is/ the office

The office is cleaned every day.

→

2. afford/ can’t/ certainly/ a new car/ we

→_____________________________________________

3. didn’t/ far/ the tourists/ walk

→______________________________________________

4. Tom/ carefully/ cut/ the paper

→______________________________________________

5. for a long time/ have lived/ in the same house/ they

→____________________________________________

6. I/ been/ recently/ to the cinema/ haven’t

→_____________________________________________

7. to the bank/ goes/ every Friday/ Mrs. Brown

→_____________________________________________

8. last year/ saw/ Mrs. Michael/ occasionally/ John/ in the supermarket

→______________________________________________

9. The Queen/ since 1985/ the show/ has visited/ regularly.

→_______________________________________________

10. to Greek/ the Prime Minister/ last years/ went

→________________________________________________

Ex4: Complete each sentence using a word from the list. Sometimes you need the

adjective and sometimes the adverb.

careful(ly) happy/happily complete(ly) nervous(ly) fluent(ly)

continuous(ly) perfect(ly) financial(ly) quickly(ly) special(ly)

1. Our holiday was too short. The time passed very……...

2. Tom doesn’t take risks when he’s driving. He’s always……

3. Sue works..........She never seems to stop.

4. Alice and Stan are very….. ……married.

5. Monica’s English is very……..although she makes quite a lot of mistakes.

6. I cooked this meal…….for you, so I hope you like it.

7. Everything was very quiet. There was…….silence.

8. I tried on the shoes and they fitted me…….

9. Do you usually feel…….before examinations?

10. I’d like to buy a car but it’s………impossible for me at the moment.

Ex5: Choose the correct answer

1. I wouldn’t have missed my flight if the bus had arrived_________.

A, lately

B, late

C, more early

D, early

2. Although this tea tastes not bad, I don’t like it _________.

A, so

B, many

C, a lot

D, much

3. I think your presentation is ________ good.

A nice

B, pretty

C, quiet

D, beautiful

4. He ran so ________ that no one could catch up him.

A fast

B, fastly

C, slow

D, slowly

5. We recommend that you ________ purchase your home.

A, quickly

B, quick

C, quicken

D, quickness

6. Our production team ________ inspects the quality of our products.

A, through

B, thoroughness

C, thoroughly

D, thorough

Trần Quang Lợi

Trần Quang Lợi

7. The population team ________ inspects the quality of our products.

A, slight

B, slightly

C,slightness

D, slighted

8. The hotel is _________ located within easy walking distance of the beach.

A, perfect

B, perfectly

C, perfected

D, perfecting

Ex6: Adverb or adjective? Choose the correct forms.

I had a (1) strange/ strangely dream last night. I was in a garden. It was getting

(2) dark/ darkly, and it was (3) terrible/ terribly cold. My head was aching (4)

bad/badly. I was walking out of the garden when (5) sudden/ suddenly I saw a

man. He was sitting (6) quiet/ quietly on a seat. He seemed very (7) unhappy/

unhappily. He looked up and smiled (8) sad/ sadly at me. I don't know why, but I

felt (9) curious/ curiously about him. I want to talk to him, but I couldn't think

what to say. I just stood there (10) foolish/ foolishly

ADJECTIVES: COMPARISON WITH

AS…AS AND THAN

A – INTRODUCTION

Comparative adjectives compare one person or thing with another and enable us

to say whether a person or thing has more or less of a particular quality.

I – Comparisons with As … As

Use (not) as + adjective + as to compare people, places, or thing, and show how

they are (or aren’t) similar

S + V + (not) + as + adj + as + …

1. We use as + adjective + as to make comparisons when the things we are

comparing are equal in some way. Use just to make the comparision stronger

Ex : - The weather this summer is as bad as last year.

- The new dish is just as good as the old.

2. We use not as + adjective + as to make comparisons between things which aren’t

equal. We can modify not as … as by using not quite as or not nearly as

Ex : - Tom hasn’t grown as tall as Jone yet.

- The second race was not quite as easy as the first one ( The second race was

easy but the first one was easier )

* Note : With one – syllable adjectives, not as… as is more common than less … than

Lê Văn Trọng 24A7510604 K24ATCA

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

II – Comparisons with Than

1. Use comparative adjectives + than to show how people, places, or things are

different

2. In more formal situations, instead of than + object pronoun, we can use than +

subject pronoun + be:

Ex : - The movie was less interesting than the book

- I preferred Henry to Dennis. She was always more sociable than he was

* Note : Use than before the second part of the comparision

III – Formation of comparative adjectives

1. One – syllable adjectives

S + V + adj + -er + than + …

Type of adjective

Comparative form

Most adjectives

Add -er ( Ex : faster, older,..)

Adjectives ending in – e

Add -r ( Ex: larger,..)

Adjectives with one vowel + one

consonant

Double the final consonant

and add -er ( Ex: bigger,..)

Ex : warmer, later, bigger,…

- Ha Noi is warmer than Ho Chi Minh City

- Tom came later than Linda

- France is bigger than England


* Irregular adjectives


Adjective

Comparative form

Good

Bad

Far

Better

Worse

Farther

Further

Much

More

Little

Less


PRESENR CONTINUOUS

GRAMMAR

2. Two - syllable adjectives

S + V + more + adj + than +…

a) With most two – syllable adjectives, you form the comparative with more

Ex : - This morning is more peaceful than yesterday morning

- This task is more difficult than the one before

b) Two - syllable adjectives ending in -y change y to i and take the -er endings

Ex : busier, easier, happier…

- We were busier last week than this week.

- Are you happier now that you’ve changed your job?

c) Some other two - syllable adjectives (especially those ending in an unstressed

vowel sound) can also take the -er endings

Ex : cleverer, narrower, simpler,...

- I’ve always thought that Donald was cleverer than his brother.

- This new bed is narrower than the old one

* Note : We don’t normally use the -er endings with two-syllable adjectives

ending in -ful. Instead, we use more

Ex : This dictionary is more useful than the one we had before.

Not: This dictionary is usefuller …



3. Three or more syllables


Adjectives of three or more syllables form the comparative by putting more/less in

front of the adjective

Ex : The second lecture was more interesting than the first.

Not: The second lecture was interestinger …

4. Special adjectives

Some adjectives have two possible forms of comparison (-er and more).

Positive

Comparative

Clever

Common

Likey

cleverer / more clever

commoner / more

common

likelier / more likely

Pleasant

pleasanter / more pleasant

Polite

politer / more polite

Quite

quieter / more quiet

Simple

simpler / more simple

Stupid

Subtle

Sure

stupider / more stupid

subtler / more subtle

surer / more sure

FOCUSED

PRACTICE


5. Comparative adjectives: using much, a lot, far, etc.

We can strengthen or emphasise a comparative adjective using words such as

much, a lot, far before the comparative adjectives.

Ex : - This food is much better than the food we had yesterday.

- The town is a lot more crowded these days because of the new shopping

centre.

IV - Comparative adjectives: -er and -er, more and more

To show how a person or thing is increasing or decreasing, we can use two -er

form adjectives connected by and, or we can use more and more before long

adjectives. We don’t follow such comparisons with than:

Ex : - The weather is getting hotter and hotter.

- Everything is getting more and more expensive

V - Comparative adjectives: the -er, the -er and the more …, the

more …

To show cause and effect, we can repeat the + comparative adjective:

Ex : - The faster you drive, the more dangerous it is.

(= When you drive faster, it is more dangerous.)

- The higher they climbed, the colder it got.

(= When they climbed higher, it got colder.)

* Note : When both comparative adjectives describe the same person, place, or

thing, we often leave out the noun

Ex : A: The service is really fast here

B: The faster, the better



ADJECTIVES: SUPERLATIVES

1 Definition

We use superlative adjectives to compare one person, place, or thing with

other people, places, or things in a group ( at least three or more subjects)

2 Grammar

a, Short adjectives ( one syllable and two syllables ending in -y) use:

The + adjective + est

Example:

Big => the biggest

Small => the smallest

Tall => the tallest

Early => the earliest

Some adjectives have irregular superlative forms

Good/Well

The best

Bad/Badly

Many/much

The worst

The most

Little

The least

Far

Old

The farther/The further

The oldest/The eldest



b, Long adjectives ( two or more syllables ) use :

The most / the least + adjective

Example :

Famous => the most famous

Expensive => the most expensive

Popular => the most popular

Note : For some adjectives, like likely, lovely, or quiet, you can use either

the . . . -est or the most / the least

Example :

Paris is the liveliest city in the world

or

Paris is the most lively city in the world

3. Superlative adjectives with other words and expressions

a, Phrases with in and of :

Subject + verb + superlative adjective + noun + in( of) + noun

Example :

John is the tallest person in my class

This is the most beautiful stamp of my collection

b, one of and some of :

Use a plural noun with these expressions

Subject + verb + one of (some of) +superlative adjective +plural noun

Example :

BTS is one of the most famous bands in the world

c, Ordinal numerals ( second, third, fourth,...)

Subject +verb +the + ordinal numeral + superlative adjective + noun

Example :

This country has the second largest population in the world

The Indian Ocean is the third largest ocean in the world

d, Ever + present perfect

Subject +verb +superlative adjective +subject + ever + present perfect

Example :

Badain jaran desert is the most beautiful desert i have ever seen

This is the most interesting book i have ever read

Exercise 1: Choose the best answer

1. He is ....... singer I’ve ever met.

A. worse B. bad C. the worst D. badly

2. Mary is ....... responsible as Peter.

A. more B. the most C. much D. as

3. It is ....... in the city than it is in the country.

A. noisily B. more noisier C. noisier D. noisy

4. He sings ……….. among the singers I have known.

A. the most beautiful B. the more beautiful

C. the most beautifully D. the more beautifully

5. He is ....... student in my class.

A. most hard-working B. more hard-working

C. the most hard-working D. as hard-working

6. The English test was ....... than I thought it would be.

A. the easier B. more easy C. easiest D. easier

7. Physics is thought to be ....... than Math.

A. harder B. the more hard C. hardest D. the

hardest

8. Jupiter is ....... planet in the solar system.

A. the biggest B. the bigger C. bigger D. biggest

9. She runs …… in my class.

A. the slowest B. the most slow C. the slowly D. the most

slowly

10. My house is ....... hers.

A. cheap than B. cheaper C. more cheap than D. cheaper

than

11. My office is ....... away than mine.

A. father B . more far C. farther D. farer

12. Lana is ....... than David.

A. handsome B. the more handsome

C. more handsome D. the most handsome

13. She did the test ……….. I did.

A. as bad as B. badder than

C. more badly than D. worse than

14. A boat is ....... than a plane.

A. slower B. slowest C. more slow D. more

slower

15. Her new house is ....... than the old one.

A. more comfortable B. comfortably

C. more comfortabler D. comfortable


Exercise 2:

1. Julia/ tall/ her friend.

2. A banana/ not sweet/ an apple.

3. A fish/ not big/ a elephant.

4. This dress/ pretty/ that one.

5. the weather/ not hot/ yesterday.

6. A rose/ beautiful/ a weed.

7. A cat/ intelligent/ a chicken.

8. Hung/ friendly/ Minh.

9. Juli / tall/ her sister.

10. An apple/ not sweet/ a cherry.

11. A dog intelligent/ a chicken.

12. Hung/ friendly/ Huy.

13. A fish/ not big/ a elephant.

14. A rose/ beautiful/ a weed.

15. This skirt/ pretty/ that one.

16. The weather/ not cold/ yesterday.

Exercise 3:

1. Her old house is bigger than her new one.

-> Her new house…………………………………….........

2. No one in my class is taller than Peter.

-> Peter ……………………………………………….

3. The black dress is more expensive than the white one.

-> The white dress ……………………………………………

4. According to me, English is easier than Maths.

-> According to me, Maths ………………………………….

5. No one in my group is more intelligent than Mary.

-> Mary ……………………………………………………….

6. No river in the world is longer than the Nile.

-> The Nile …………………………………………………..

7. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world.

-> No mountain ……………………………………………...

8. This is the first time I have ever met such a pretty girl.

-> She is ……………………………………………………..

9. He works much. He feels tired.

-> The more …………………………………………………

10. This computer works better than that one.

-> That computer ……………………………………………..


Exercise 4: Give the correct form of the superlative adjective

in brackets

1 Who is the …….. (tall) person in your family?

2 My mum is the ……… (good) cook in the world.

3 December is the…….. (cold) month of the year in my country.

4 What’s the………. (dangerous) animal in the world?

5 Ethan is the ……… (happy) boy that I know.

6 My mother’s advice is ………..(useful) for me.

7 It is…………... (difficult) rule of all

8 This is …………...(famous) actor from Spain.

9 Kenyans are …………... (good) sprinters.

10 Saturn is………...2nd…………._ (large) planet in our solar system.

Exercise 5: Rewrite the sentences with superlative adjectives

1.I am not taller than anyone in the class.

=> I am ……………………………………

2.No one in her team is more beautiful than Salim.

=> Salim is …………………………………………...

3.There isn’t anywhere as old as this castle.

=> This castle ………………………………..

4.One of the greatest tennis players in the world is BJ.

=> BJ is …………………………………………………...

5.I have never driven faster than this car.

=> This is ……………………………..

6.There is no better doctor in this hospital than Mr.Long.

=>Mr Long is …………………………..

7.I’ve never seen such a boring film.

=> It’s………………………………..


Exercise 6

1. Mary is … responsible as Peter

A. moreB. much C. as D. the more

S + V + (not) + as + adj + as + …

2. It is … in the city than it is in the country

A. noisilyB. more noisier C. noisier D. noisy

3. Peter is … John

A. younger and more intelligent than

B. more young and intelligent than

C. more intelligent and younger than

D. the more intelligent and younger than

4. … I get to know her, the more I like her

A. for moreB. More C. The more D. The most

5. She did the test … I did

A. as bad asB. badder than C. more badly than D. worse than

6. Her office is … away than mine

A. fatherB. more far C. farther D. farer

7. In Viet Nam, it is normally … in the South than in the North

A. hot B. hotter C. hottest D. hoter

8. Cinderella danced … than any other girls at the ball

A. more graceful B. gracefuler C. gracefully D. more gracefully

9. My neighbor is driving me mad! It seems that… it is at night,… plays his

music

A. the less / the more loud C. the more late / the more loudlier

B. the less / less D. the later / the louder

10. Thanks to the progress of science and technology, our lives have become…

A. more and more good C. the more and more good

B. better and better D. gooder and gooder

Exercise 7: True or False

1. The more she studies, the smarter she will become.

2. The more I looks into your eyes, the more I love you.

3. The bigger the apartment is, the high the rent is.

4. The more difficult the games are, the excited the children are.

5. The more money he has, the most he wants to spend

6. She is much more intelligent than Nam does.

7. The more rich he is, the more miserable he gets.

8. The English test was easier than I thought it would be

9. It gets cold and colder when the winter is coming.

10. Her dress is more beautiful than yours. - T


COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

( comparison with as…as, comparative, superlative )

GRAMMAR

Nguyễn Thị Cẩm Tú

I.Comparison with as…as

1.Form

S + V + as + adverb + as + S

As...as

as

adverb

as

Golden

State

Warriors

played

as

hard

well

agressively

consistently

as

Cleveland

Cavaliers

2.Usages

- Use (not) as + adverb + as to compare actions and show how they are (or

aren’t) similar.

Use as + adverb + as to show how actions are the same or equal. Use

just to make the comparison stronger.

Ex: Liam behaved just as politely as most member in the team.

( He and the other members behaved politely the same. )

Use not as + adverb + as to show how actions are not the same or

equal.

Ex: Brian didn’t behave as politely as Justin.

( Brian and Justin didn’t behave the same. Justin behaved

more politely. )


II.Comparative

1.Form

S + V + adverb + er + than +S

S + V + more/less + adverb + than + S

Comparative

Compartive adverb form

Than

Golden

State

Warriors

played

Harder

better

More aggressively

Less consistently

Than

Cleveland

Cavaliers

2.Usages

a) Use comparative adverbs + than to show how the actions of two people

or things are different.

Ex: Cleveland Cavaliers played worse than Golden State Warriors.

Justin played less professionally than Brian.

He behaved more politely than Brian.

b) Comparatives with than and comparisons with as…as often express the

same meaning in different ways.

Ex: Stephen was trained more professionally than James.

James wasn’t trained as professionally as Stephen.

James was trained less professionally than Stephen.

Note: With one-syllable adverbs, not as … as is more common than

less…than

Ex: James didn’t practised as hard as Stephen.

NOT James practised less hard than Stephen.


3.Other ways of comparative

a) Repeat the comparative adverbs to show how something is creasing or

decreasing:

Comparative adverb + and + comparative adverb

Ex: Harry is playing better and better as the season continues.

( His performance keeps getting better.)

With long adverbs, repeat only more or less.

Ex: Stephen played more and more professtionally.

Cleveland Cavaliers played less and less skillfully.

b) Use two comparative adverbs to show cause and effect:

The + comparative adverb + the + comparative adverb

Ex: The harder Stephen practise, the better he play.

The more carelessly he drove, the more angrily

his mom talked.

The less carelessly he drives, the less angrily

his mom talked.

The sooner the better.


III.Superlative

1.Form

S + V + the +adverb (short)_est + .....

S + V + the most/least + adverb (long) + ...

Superlative

Superlative adverb form

Golden

State

Warriors

played

the best

the hardest

the most aggressively

the least aggressively

of all teams

in this season

2.Usages

a) Use superlative adverbs to compare one action with the action of other

people or things in a group.

Ex: Moana is the tallest students in my grade.

b) We often use the superlative with expressions beginning with of.

Ex: Kacoh scored the most frequently of any player on the team.


IV.Forming of comparatives and superlatives with adverbs

Adverb Comparartive Superlative

For short adverbs (one

syllable ), use adverb + -er or

the + adverb + -est.

Fast

Hard

Faster

Harder

The fastest

The hardest

For long adverbs (two or

more syllables ), use more

/less + adverb or the most /

the least + adverb.

Skillfully

More / less

skillfully

The more /

the least

skillfully

Some adverbs have irregular

comparative and superlative

forms.

Badly

Far

Little

Well

Worse

Farther / Further

Less

Better

Worst

Farthest /

Furthest

Least

Best

NOTE

- Some adverbs of manner

have two comparative and two

superlative forms.

Quickly

More quickly

Quicker

The most

quickly

The quickest

- The -er / -est forms are

informal. Do not use them in

formal speech and writing.

FOCUSED

PRACTICE


Exercise 1: Complete the sentences below, using The comparative…, the

comparative…

1. The crowd became increasingly angry at the long delay.

→ _________ the delay (was), ___________ the crowd became.

2. The value of a picture depends on how famous the artist is.

→ _______________ an artist (is), _______________ the picture is.

3. How well I sleep depends on how late I go to bed.

→ ___________________ I go to bed, ______________I sleep.

4. I don’t spend much time with my family because I work so hard.

→ ____________________ I work, _________________ I spend with my family.

5. The traffic moves very slowly as more cars comes into the city.

→ __________________ cars come into the city, _______ the traffic moves.

6. How much you sweat depends on how hot you get.

→ ___________ you get, ______________ you sweat.

7. It’s hard to concentrate when you are tired.

→ ______ you are, _______________ it is to concentrate.

8. How much petrol a car uses depends on how big the engine is.

→ ______________ the engine (is), ___________ the car uses.

9. If a knife is sharp, it is easy to cut something with.

→___________ a knife (is), _____________ it is to cut something.

10. I became increasingly nervous about her fast driving.

→ ___________ she drove, ___________ I became.


Exercise 2: An employee is talking about a competitor.

Complete the second sentence so that it means the

same as the first sentence. Use a comparative form

of the word in brackets and than + a pronoun or verb

phrase

1.The sales team at Marston's all speak French fluently. We don't.

→ They speak French........better than us / than we do............ (good)

2.Our average delivery time is three days. At Marston's, it's five days.

→ We deliver ................................................................................... (quickly)

3.My colleagues are very friendly. The people at Marston's aren't.

→ My colleagues are................................................................... (friendly)

4.Our sales team is very successful. The sales team at Marston's isn't .

→ We can sell......................................................................... (effectively)

5.The marketing department at Marston's has ten people. Ours has two!

→ Their marketing department is........................................................(big)

6.We had a great year last year. Marston's results weren't very good.

→ Our end of year results were............................................................(impressive)


Exercise 3: Complete these sentences using the

correct superlative adverb and adjective form of the

words in the box.

Bad/pay common/ask dense/populate

good/protect physical/demand wide/use

Environmenrtal/damage heavy/regulate rapid/expand

1.British business is not..…..the most heavily regulated….. in Europe and its

workers are not..............................................either.

2.The Consumer Price Index, which is prepared by the US Bureau of Labor

Statistics, is ......................................measure of inflation in North America.

3.Tourism is one of the biggest and ..........................business sectors in the world.

But in many regions it is also one of..................................... .

4.'Why are you applying for this position?' is probably ...................... question at

job interviews .

5................................... countries in the world are Rwanda, Monaco and Singapore.

6.Why are.............................. jobs such as fishing, mining and construction often

some of.................................. ?


Exercise 4: Read the description of the table below.

Decide if underlined comparisons are correct or not.

Tick ( ) them if they are right and correct them if they

are wrong.

2004 Olympic Games Medal Table

Rank Country Gold Silver Bronze Total

1

2

United State

China

35 29 39 103

32 17 14 63

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Russia

Australia

Japan

Germany

France

Italy

South Korea

27 27 38 92

17 16 16 49

16 9 12 37

14 16 18 48

16 14 18 48

10 11 11 32

9 12 9 30

10 Great Britain

9 9 12 30


The table shows the number of medals won by

the top ten countries in the 2004 Olympic

Games. The USA won 1 greatest number of

medals overall with total of 103. They won 2

more silver medals as gold and 3 more medals

than any other country in both categories. China

had 4 the second high number of medals at 63,

but unlike the USA, China won 5 less silver

medals than gold medals. While Russia’s silver

medal total was 6 more good than China’s, they

did not do 7 as well China in the gold medals,

winning just 27. Infact China had a 8 more lower

overall medal total than Russia but, as the table

is based on the number gold medals won, they

were placed second. Similarly, Germany was 9

significantly successful at winning medals than

Japan, with a total of 48 compared to Japan’s 37,

but because Japan won 10 two more gold

medals that Germany they were ranked 11

higher. Great Britain gave 12 the worse

performance in this group, winning only nine

gold and nine sliver medals.

Exercise 5: Read the article in a student newspaper. There are nine

mistakes in the use of adverbs. Find and correct them.

Last night was the last game of the season, and the Lions played the goodest

ther’ve played for months. Both the Cubs and Lions play a great offensive

game, but this time the Lions really played defense much more effectively as

the Cubs. Hernandez, the Cub’s star player, has been shooting more

aggressively and more aggressively all season. But in last night’s game, the

more aggressive he played, the most closely the Lions guarded him. Then, in

the last two minutes, “Tiny Tim” O’Conell made the winning shot for the Lions.

“He’s less than six feet tall, but he runs more fastly than anyone else on the

court,” the Cub’s coach said. “O’Conell doesn’t shoot as often other players, but

he’s a lot more accurately than the bigger guys.” The Cubs played a great

game last night too, but they just didn’t play as good as the Lions.


Exercise 6: Read the conversation of Sue and Carl. There are eighteen

mistakes, find and correct them.

Sue: Hi Carl. Have you written your

assignment ever ?

Carl: Hi Sue. No, I haven’t, but I’ve

been trying to get some ideas

together.

Sue: What sorts of things have you

been done?

Carl: Well, I’ve worked really hard

for the last two weeks and I’ve

finished nearly all the books

on the reading list. I’ve made

quite a lot of notes but they’re not very structured. What about you?

Sue: I did the reading a few weeks ago, and I made notes on

the more important things. I’ve written a rough plan this morning,

and I was going to make a start on writing the assignment today but

I’ve decided I need to read the best important parts of the books again

before I do that. I actually finding it quiet hard. It’s the first time

I’ve ever had to write such a long essay so I’m a bit nervous about it.

Carl: Yes, it’s a longest essay I’ve ever had to write as well. I find all the reading so

difficulty I read five books last week, and they all said different things!

(Pause)

Sue: I find the best approach is to read only

the sections that you need in order that

answer the question. You don’t usually

have to read the whole book. I’ve

collected plenty information for

the assignment that way.


Carl: That’s good advice. I’ve been trying to

read the whole of each book, and

more I read, more confused

I get. I probably wasted a

lot of time last week.

Sue: Oh I’ll tell you what other

things I found really helpfully.

When I was in the library last week,

I read those leaflets called ‘How to

get the best out of the libraby’ and

‘How to write assignments’. They really

helped. Had you read them?

Carl: No, I haven’t even seen them. I’ll have to get hold of the copy; they

sound useful. I really need some direction. I find I’m so tired at the moment.

I’ve read six articles this week but I can remember barely what they said!

In fact. I’ve been feeling tired sinceeeee I started this course.

Sue: Hmm, I know what you mean. I felt like that as well at the start until one of my

tutors told me it was far much important to get enough rest than to stay

up late studying. I’ve gone to bed early every night since than and I managed

concentrating for longer during the day, so in the end I do actually get more

done. I went to bed at ten thirty last night and feel greatly.

Carl: Well, I’ve just got up and I’m already

tired. I must to try going to bed

earlier – the least till I’ve done

this assignment.

Sue: Yeah, I should help.

GRAMMAR TOPIC

GERUND

AND

INFINITIVE

GROUP 8

1. HOÀNG SINH TƯ

2. PHAN THỊ THANH VÂN

3. TRẦN THỊ UYÊN

4. TRƯƠNG THÀNH TUỆ

TỔNG QUAN

GERUND

Gerund ( Danh động từ ) và Infinitives (

Động từ nguyên mẫu ) là hai dạng của động

từ có thể được sử dụng để thay thế cho

danh từ trong một câu, thường để chỉ các

hành động hơn là chỉ người hay đối tượng.

Khái niệm

Gerund ( danh động từ ) là danh từ được hình thành bằng cách thêm đuôi ing vào động từ.

Eg: coming, building, teaching…

- Phủ định của danh động từ được hình thành bằng cách thêm not vào trước V-ing.

Eg: not making, not opening…

- Cũng có thể thêm tính từ sở hữu vào trước danh động từ để nói rõ chủ thể

thực hiện hành động.

Eg: my turning on the air conditioner.

Cách dùng

- Dùng làm chủ ngữ trong câu.

Eg: Reading helps you improve your vocabulary.

- Dùng làm bổ ngữ cho động từ

Eg: Her favorite hobby is collecting stamps.

- Dùng làm tân ngữ của động từ

Eg: He loves surfing the Internet.

- Dùng sau giới từ (on, in, by, at…) và liên từ (after, before, when,.....)

Eg: Young people are very much interested in travelling.

He cleaned his room before going out with his friends

Hoàng Sinh Tư

- Dùng sau một số động từ và cụm động từ sau:

enjoy, avoid, admit, appreciate, mind, finish, practice, advise,

suggest, recommend, postpone, delay, consider, hate, like, love,

deny, detest, keep, miss, imagine, mention, risk, recall, risk, quiet,

waste (time), forbid, permit, resent, escape, cant’ help, can’t bear /

can’t stand, be used to, get used to, look forward to, it’s no use / it’s

no good, be busy, be worth…

Eg: They enjoyed working on the boat.

The man admitted stealing the company’s money.

INFINITIVE

Khái niệm

Infinitives là hình thức động từ nguyên mẫu.

- Có 2 loại động từ nguyên mẫu:

Động từ nguyên mẫu có "to" (to infinitives)

Động từ nguyên dạng không to (bare infinitives).

- Để thuận tiện, người Anh ‘ngầm’ quy ước rằng khi nói ‘động từ nguyên mẫu’

(infinitives) có nghĩa là ‘động từ nguyên mẫu có to’ còn khi muốn nói ‘động từ nguyên

mẫu không to’ thì người ta phải nói đầy đủ ‘infinitives without to’.

Eg: Infinitive: to learn, to watch, to play…

Bare infinitive: learn, watch, play…

- Phủ định của động từ nguyên mẫu được hình thành bằng cách thêm "not" vào

trước "to V" hoặc "V".

Eg: Infinitive: not to learn, not to watch, not to play…

Bare infinitive: not learn, not watch, not play…

Hoàng Sinh Tư

Cách dùng

a) Động từ nguyên mẫu có to:

- Dùng làm chủ ngữ trong câu:

Eg: To learn English well is important to your future job.

- Dùng làm bổ ngữ cho động từ:

Eg: The most important thing for you now is to learn hard.

- Dùng làm tân ngữ của động từ, tính từ:

Eg: He wants to learn English.

I am pleased to hear that you have passed your exam.

- Dùng sau hình thức bị động của động từ số 1:

Eg: We were made to work overtime yesterday.

- Dùng sau động từ số 1 và tân ngữ:

Eg: The doctor advised us to take a holiday for a rest.

- Dùng sau tân ngữ là các từ để hỏi (trừ why):

Eg: We completely didn’t know what to do at that time.

Hoàng Sinh Tư

- Dùng sau một số động từ sau: Agree , aim,

arrange, attempt, care, choose, appear, afford,

ask, demand, expect, hesitate, intend, invite,

want, wish, hope, promise, decide, start, learn,

fail, plan, manage, pretend, remind, persuade,

encourage, force, order, urge, seem, tend,

threaten, wait, intend, mean, happen, manage, …

Eg: She agreed to speak before the game.

He appeared to lose his weight.

Chú ý

Cả gerund và infinitive đều có thể được dùng làm chủ ngữ, bổ ngữ và tân

ngữ của động từ. Tuy nhiên, khi đóng vai trò làm chủ ngữ và bổ ngữ của

động từ, gerund thường được sử dụng phổ biến hơn (đặc biệt là trong văn

nói), infinitive chỉ được sử dụng khi người nói muốn nhấn mạnh vào mục

đích của hành động. (90% động từ làm chủ ngữ và bổ ngữ cho động từ được

chia ở dạng gerund).

Eg: Learning is important. Là phổ biến

To learn is important. Là ít phổ biến

The most important thing is learning. Là phổ biến

The most important thing is to learn. Là ít phổ biến

- Việc chia động từ ở gerund hay infinitive khi động từ đóng vai trò làm tân

ngữ phụ thuộc vào động từ chính.

Eg: We hate cooking. Là hate + Ving

We want to eat out. Là want + to V

Hoàng Sinh Tư

b) Động từ nguyên mẫu không to:

- Dùng sau các động từ khuyết thiếu:

Eg: I can speak Japanese.

- Chú ý: khuyết thiếu ought to V.

Eg: We ought to work hard at this time of the year.

- Dùng trong thể mệnh lệnh thức:

Eg: Look at the picture and answer the questions.

- Dùng trong một số cấu trúc: would rather, had better+ V và have sb, let sb,

make sb + V.

Eg: They made him repeat the whole story.

We had the mechanic service our car last week.

CHÚ Ý

+ Help có thể dùng cả động từ nguyên dạng có to và động từ nguyên dạng

không to ở sau.

Eg: They helped us (to) clean our classroom.

+ Một số động từ đặc biệt (need, dare) có thể được dùng cả như động từ

khuyết thiếu lẫn động từ thường. Khi được dùng như động từ khuyết thiếu,

động từ đi sau sẽ để ở nguyên mẫu không to; khi được dùng như động từ

thường, động từ đi sau sẽ chia ở nguyên mẫu có to.

Eg: We needn’t book in advance

We don’t need to book in advance.

Hoàng Sinh Tư

KHI NÀO DÙNG GERUNDS VÀ KHI

NÀO DÙNG INFINITIVES?

Có một số động từ có thể theo sau bởi cả gerunds lẫn infinitives.

Trong một số trường hợp, việc động từ thứ 2 chia ở dạng V-ing hay to

V không làm thay đổi hoặc chỉ thay đổi không đáng kể nghĩa của động

từ chính; trong những trường hợp khác, việc dùng V-ing hay to V có

thể làm thay đổi nghĩa của động từ chính.

Không làm thay đổi hoặc thay

đổi không đáng kể nghĩa của

động từ chính

Các động từ start, begin, continue, love, like, prefer có thể sử dụng cả V-

ing lẫn to V theo sau.

Eg: I love reading books.

I love to go out with my friends.

- Chú ý: Ta dùng like/love/prefer + V-ing hoặc like/love/prefer + to V nhưng

would like/would love/would prefer + to V.

- Chú ý: Ta có thể nói She began laughing/to laugh. They are beginning to

shout nhưng thường không nói They are beginning shouting.

Hoàng Sinh Tư

Làm thay đổi nghĩa của

động từ chính

+ remember / forget + V-ing: nhớ / quên việc đã xảy ra rồi (trong quá khứ)

+ remember / forget + to V: nhớ / quên việc chưa, sắp xảy ra (trong tương lai)

Eg: Remeber to turn off the light before leaving home.

I remember meeting you before.

+ stop + V-ing: dừng việc đang làm lại

+ stop + to V: dừng lại để chuyển sang việc khác

Eg: We stopped talking when the teacher came in.

On the way home, I stopped at the post office to buy a newspaper.

+ try + V-ing: thử làm gì

+ try + to V: cố gắng làm gì

Eg: You can try mixing these two ingredients together and see what will happen

You should try to improve your listening skill.

+ regret + V-ing: hối tiếc rằng đã làm gì

+ regret + to V: tiếc rằng sắp phải làm gì (thông báo tin xấu)

Eg: I regret being rude to him yesterday.

I regret to inform you that your application has been denied.

Hoàng Sinh Tư

+ need + V-ing = need + to be P2: cần được (bị động)

+ need + to V: cần (chủ động)

Eg: I need to wash my car.

My car is very dirty. It needs washing.

+ refuse + V-ing: phủ nhận là đã làm gì (hành động đã xảy ra rồi)

+ refuse + to V: từ chối không muốn làm gì

(hành động sẽ không xảy ra)

Eg: He refused going out with her last night.

He refused to lend me some money.

+ go on + V-ing: tiếp tục việc đang làm

+ go on + to V: tiếp tục một việc mới sau khi hoàn thành việc đang làm

Eg: After finishing her BA, she went on to get a master’s degree.

She went on watching TV

+ mean + V-ing: có nghĩa là, có liên quan đến

+ mean + to V: có chủ ý, có kế hoạch làm gì

Eg: Working harder means getting more money.

He meant to move the Newcastle

+ Dùng sau các động từ chỉ tri giác và tân ngữ: hear, sound, smell, taste, feel, watch,

notice, see, listen, find .. + O + V-ing để chỉ khoảnh khắc hành động đang diễn ra.

+ Dùng sau các động từ chỉ tri giác và tân ngữ: hear, sound, smell, taste, feel, watch,

notice, see, listen, find .. + O + V để chỉ sự hoàn tất của hành động – nghe hoặc thấy

toàn bộ sự việc diễn ra

Eg: When I entered the room, I found him reading a book

I saw her go with a strange man yesterday.

Hoàng Sinh Tư

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 1:

Find and correct the

mistakes below.

1.My daughter enjoys to play with her kittens

2. Have you forgotten bringing your hall ticket?

3. I requested him lending me a few hundred

rupees.

4. I heard them to sing.

5. I told her minding her own business.

Phan Thị Thanh Vân

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 2: Write the suitable answer.

Shall we get married?

Yes, let's

He decided....

Please help me.

Ok

He agreed...

can I car²r²yä yäouÇr² bagg

for² yäouÇ?Ő

He offered...

No, thanks.

I can manage.

LetÁ's¹ meetÁ atÁ 8Ā o'clock

Ok, fine.

They aranged...

WhlatÁ's¹ yäouÇr² name?Ő

Pleas¹e don'tÁ tÁell

anyäone.ŉ

She refused...

She promised...

I'm not going to

tell you.

I won't.

I promise

Sources of learning material:

English grammar in use


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 3: Which goes with which?

Match the correct pairs.

are you ready?

let's goo!

1, It’s a nice town

2, it’s an interesting idea

a, I don’t believe you’re story

b, We’ll never find him.

3, It’s no use standing here talking

4, It’s not important

c, It’s not worth getting a taxi

d, We’ve to do something

5, There’s no point in looking for

him

6, It’s no good apologising to me

7, It’s not worth arguling with him

e, He won’t change his opinion

f, It’s worth spending a few days

here

g, It’s not worth worrying about

8, The hotel is a short walk from here h, It’s worth considering

1….. . 2, ……. 3,……..4,…….

5,…….. 6, ……..7, ……. 8, ……..

Sources of learning material:

English grammar in use


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

E X E R C I S E 4

Complete using the correct form

(-ing form, bare infinitive or full infinitive)

of the verbs in the box. Use each verb only once.

achive be behave come do hope

improve learn listen make play

sit down take tell try use work

Report: William Watson

William Watson sometimes seems to be afraid of (1)hard. He can't help(2)...... to avoid

(3)...... anything that involvesIs(4).... his brain, particularly on Friday afternoons. He

seems to detest(5).... is seriously, and pretends he isn't capable of (6)... anything of

worth. This is unfortunate as, with a little more effort, Wiiam could succeed in(7) .....

great progress.

However, at present he frequently just wants (8)... the fool. He enjoys (9)... jokes.

Presumably, he imagines this (10)....the best way to make friends, but in fact he offen

just ends up preventing the other students from (11)... He has promised on several

occasions (12)... his behaviour in class, but then he just keeps on (13)...in exactly the

way. Recenty, | have had to beg him (14) ... but its difficult to know how to make him

(15)...to his senses. He just doesn't seem interested in (16)... to my opinion. I'm tempted

to give up even (17)... that he might improve. Having said that though, Mr Watson is an

extremely good maths teacher!

Julie Cross - 5A

Sources of learning material: Destination B2


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 5

Read the

paragraph.

Like many student, Eva is a

procrastinator. She keeps

putting off her school work.

When she studies, she often

stops to go for a walk in the

park. She wants to improve her

study habits, but she isn't sure

how. Eva decided to make a list

of things she needs to do every

day. She always remembers to

make her list, but she often

forgets to read it. It’s very

frustrating. Last night Eva

remembered reading an article

in the school newspaper about

a support group for

procrastinators. She thinks

being in a group is a good idea.

She likes sharing ideas with

other students.

1

2

Circle the gerunds.

Underline the infinitives.

Now read these sentences.

Write T (True) or F (False).

___ 1. Eva never does her school work.

___ 2. She quit going for walks in the park.

___ 3. She’d like to be a better student.

___ 4. Eva makes a list every day.

___ 5. She always reads her list.

___ 6. She read about a support group.

___ 7. She thinks it’s good to be in a group.

___ 8. She likes to share ideas with others.

Sources of learning material: Grammar - Banking

Academy of Vietnam - Faculty of Foreign Languages


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EXERCISE 6

Complete these sentences using the correct form of the verbs in

brackets.

1. As a consultant, l enjoy ____ (meet) such a wide range of people.

2. Do you want anything____ (drink) before we start the meeting?

Tea? Coffee?

3. After 14 years I have decided ____ (step down) as managing

director. I will, however, carry on ____ (manage) the company until my

successor takes over in May.

4. Were beginning ____ (involve) the staff more in the decisionmaking

process

5. If you agree _____ (order) over 100, well give you a 10% discount.

6. How long did you spend ____ (prepare) this report? Five minutes?


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

7. The Internet has really helped consumers _____ (compare) prices easily.

8. My job involves a lot of time ____ (read) the financial press.

9. Will Saudi Arabia continue _____ (read) financial press oil

production?

10. I’m like you - I don’t like ____ (make) presentations; | prefer _____

(be)in the audience,

11. You can not afford ____ (miss) this fantastic investment

opportunity

12. Personally, I hate ____ (ask) for help, but I always expect my

staff ____ (ask) me for help when they need it.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EXERCISE 7

R E W R I T E T H E W O R D S / V E R B I N I T A L I C S ,

( - I N G F O R M O R - T O I N F I N I T I V E )

A N D T H E N , E X P L A I N W H Y Y O U C H O S E T H A T :

Forget

1, I should have taken my medicine this morning but

I didn’t remember.

never

forget

=> I ……………………….my medicine this morning.

2, I’ll always remember the time when I went up Mont Blanc.

=> I’ll ……………………. Mont Blanc.

Regret

3, Jackie wishes she hadn’t said that to Allie.

=> Jackie ………. ………………that to Allie.

Regret

4, I’m sorry but your credit card has been cancelled by the bank.

=> I………….your credit card has been cancelled by the bank.

Mean

5, Crashing the car wasn’t my intention, you know!

=> I ……………………………the car, you know !

Mean

6, If I take that job, I ‘ll have to do a lot of more travelling.

=> Taking that job ………………………..to do a lot of more travelling.


EXERCISE 8:

Rewrite the sentences with the word in Intalics

1, They finally succeeded in escaping from the room. Manage

They finally………………….from the room.

2, I bought a new notebook on the way to school. Stopped

On the way to school………. A new notebook

3, We're staying in Milan for a night before flying home. Planning

We………………..Milan for a night before flying home.

4, I don't want to cook tonight - let's have a takeaway. Feel

I don't……………… tonight - let's have a takeaway.

5, I'm going to get annoyed if you don't stop making that noise!

Continue

If you ......that noise, I'm going to get annoyed!

6, Could you ask Francis to come into my offices, please? Mind

Do you………………Francis to come into my office, please?

Trần Thị Uyên

EXERCISE 9:

Find mistakes and correct, if it's correct put an "x"

- 01|I hope to start driving as soon as

I'm seventeen.

- 02| Stop pretending being asleep. I saw

you open your eyes!

- 03|My mum suggested to go bowling,

but I didn't think that was a good idea.

- 04| Quentin will do anything to avoid to

walk to school. He's so lazy!

-05| I really like visiting New York .

- 06| Do you like watching TV or do you

prefer play computer games?

- 07| The weather seems being better.

What about a picnic this weekend?

- 08| I expect to be home at nine o'clock,

so have dinner without me.

- 09| Our head teacher makes us all to

wear jackets - even in summer!

- 10| Don't let the dog sitting on the sofa!

Trần Thị Uyên

EXERCISE 10 :

Find and correct 12 mistakes in these emails

Dear Mr Williams,

I heard you to speak at the IAD event last July.

I don't know if you remember to meet me at the IAD

event. I enjoyed meeting you and to hear your talk on

internet marketing. (I hope you didn't notice me leave

early. I had to catch a plane. I would Ike to invite you to

speak at our company conference next month (6tth 8th).

We cen arrange scheduling your talk at a time that is

convenient for you. We can also offer to pay your

expenses and a fee of C500.

If you agree to attend, would you mind to send me a title

by next Friday?

I look forward to hear from you and hope to see you soon.

Yours sincerely.

Katie de Lang

Dear Kate

Good to hear from you. Of course I

remember- in fact I keep meaning to get in

touch. And didn't mind you leaving early-I saw

you to look at your watch all the time in the

last 15 minutes! Thanks for invite me to speak

at your conference. I would love coming-any

day is fine. I can easily spend a day or two to

look around the city. I feel like taking a few

days' off actualy, as I've iust finished to write

my book on relationship marketing. Just let

me to know where l'm staying and I'Il sen you

next month. John

P/S Don't forget to send your phone number.

Trần Thị Uyên

EXERCISE 11 :

Any news of Mounts? Are they

managing 1... to take ... (take) much

business from us?

So, should we spend a lot of time 4

..... (try) to win back that business?

Complete the conservation

Use the verbs in brackets.

I'd say that around here we're still

doing OK. Customers tend 2……….

(come) to us first.

But we've ended up 3 .......... ..... (lose)

customers in Scotland because that's

always been their area.

I'd say not, no. We decided 5………(focus) on

other areas for now so that we can concentrate

on 6 ........ (build) our business round here. We

can't afford 7............ (ignore) the local area.

I guess Mounts have considered 8. .............

(move) into our area here, though. Are they

still relying on.9............ (be) the cheapest?

Yeah. If they do target this area, I expect

10…………(get) a lot of calls from customers

about prices. It's a worry - I don't mind

11............(tell you)

Well, we'll just have to keep 12. ........

(offer) a better service.

Just sent

Trần Thị Uyên

EXERCISE 12:

Circle the correct words

LAUGHTER IS THE BEST MEDICINE!

LAUGHTER IS THE BEST MEDICINE!

The next time you're feeling ill, try (1)

watching/ to watch a comedy instead

of just doing nothing. At least, thať's

what some doctors suggest (2) doing /

to do. If you want (3) getting / to get

better, there's nothing like laughter.

First of all, an activity you enjoy (4)

doing/ to do takes your mind off your

illness. Time seems (5) passing/ to pass

more quickly and you worrying about

how you feel.

Trần Thị Uyên

EXERCISE 13 :

Find mistakes and correct

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

I generally prefer coffee from tea.

Do you prefer watching a DVD at home to go to the cinema?.

I had prefer to meet you a bit later, if that's all right with you.

He’d prefer not have to get up so early tomorrow, but he will if he has to.

Shona prefers to not wear make-up to work.

Would you prefer to get a pizza rather from go out tonight?..

You would better see a doctor if you're not feeling well.

I had rather be poor and happy than rich and lonely. .

I’d prefer having an early night tonight, if that's okay with you.

She’d rather start revising if she wants to do well in the exam next week .

I’d rather you write your essay in a notebook, to be honest...

Trần Thị Uyên

EXERCISE 14

REWRITE THE SENTENCES

1. Steve advised me to tell Paul about it.

-> Steve suggested me........................................

2. Could you help me put these chairs away?

-> Do you mind.....................................................

3. I’d like you to read this letter.

-> Would you mind..............................................

4. He said he didn't take the money.

-> He denied......................................................

5. He wishes he hadn't alerted the police.

-> He regrets.....................................................

Trương Thành Tuệ

EXERCISE

15

Complete the sentences

choose word from the box

to hear to help to invite to make not

1 It’s nice of Dan and Kate to invite me to their party.

2 I’ve been travelling a long time. Now I’m …............….to be back home.

3 I heard about Tom’s accident. I was relieved ……...........…that he’s OK.

4 It was nice …...........…….to remember my birthday.

5 Let me know if you need any assistance. I’d be very pleased….…. you.

of you silly amazed glad

6 I thought James was about 25. I was …………to discover he was 40.

7 It was inconsiderate of our neighbours…….. so much noise.

8 My interview went well. I was disappointed…………to be offered the job.

9 It’s …….... of me to worry so much about things that are not important.


EXERCISE 16

Complete sentences

with correct form

1

a. We wanted...to leave……... the building.

b. We weren’t allowed……….. the building. (leave)

c. We were prevented ……….. the building.

2

a. Sam and Chris hoped……….. the problem.

b. Sam failed …………………...the problem. (solve)

c. Chris succeeded…………….. the problem.

3

a. I’m thinking …………… .away next week.

b. I’m planning ……………..away next week. (go)

c. I’d like …………………….away next week.

d. I’m looking forward …… away next week.

4

a. Helen wanted…………………….. me lunch.

b. Helen insisted ……………………..me lunch. (buy)

c. Helen promised…………………… me lunch.

d. Helen wouldn’t dream ……………..me lunch.


EXERCISE 17

Matching box A and B to

make sentences with to...

1. I shouted

2. I opened the box

3. I moved to a new apartment

4. I couldn’t find a knife

5. I called the police

6. I called the hotel

7. I employed an assistant

A

B

A. I wanted to be nearer my friends

B. I wanted someone to help me with my work

C. I wanted to report the accident

D.I wanted to warn people of the danger

E. I wanted to see what was in it

F. I wanted to chop the onions

G.I wanted to find out if they had any rooms free

1 I shouted to warn people of the danger

2 I opened the box …………………………………………

3 ……………………………………………………………….......

4 ……………………………………………………………..........

5 ……………………………………………………………….......

6 ……………………………………………………………….......

7 ……………………………………………………………….......


EXERCISE 18

COMPLETE THE SENTENCES

1 Carla is a very good student. (she / bound / pass)

> She’s… bound to pass………. the exam.

2 I’m not surprised you’re tired after your trip. (you / bound / tired)

>……………………………. after such a long journey.

3 Andy has a very bad memory. (he / sure / forget)

>………………………….anything you tell him.

4 I don’t think you’ll need an umbrella. (it / not / likely / rain) .

>……………………………….

5 The holidays begin this weekend. (there / sure / be)

>……………………a lot of traffic on the roads.


EXERCISE 19

CHOOSE CORRECT ANSWER

1. My father usually helps me_______ English.

A. to learn B. lean C. learning D. both A and B

2. He was heard_______ shout.

A. To B. Of C. By D. At

3. This student expected_______ the first winner of the Grand Prix.

A. Be B. Being C. To be D. Will be

4. I told her_______ about her wedding; everything will straighten out.

A. Don't worry B. Not to worry C. No worry D. Not worry

5. May I suggest you let_______

A. Mary doing so C. Mary does to

B. Mary do so D. Mary to do so

6. She_______ him when he called her.

A. Pretended not hear B. Pretended she heard not

C. Pretended not to hear D. Did not pretend hear

7. The doctor advised_______ late.

A. Me not staying up B. Me not stay up

C. Me not to stay up D. I did not stay up

8. "_______us face the enemies", shouted the soldiers.

A. Make B. Let C. Leave D. Keep

9. Mr. Brown told the schoolgirls_______ in class.

A. Don't ear B. Not to eat C. Eat not D. Not eat

10. I have heard Dang Thai Son_______ the piano.

A. Played B. Plays C. Play D. To play


EXERCISE 20

CHOOSE CORRECT ANSWER

1. I have heard Dang Thai Son_______ the piano.

A. Played B. Plays C. Play D. To play

2. The young teachers wanted a Foreign Language Teaching workshop

_______ in Ho Chi Minh City.

A. To be holding B. Should hold C. To be held D. To hold

3. _______able to take part in the international math contest two years from

now, Son works very hard in his math lass.

A. In order to be B. Being C. Been D. So that he be

4. Try_______ so many mistakes.

A. Not to make B. Not make C. To make not D. Make not

5. Let me_______ from you soon.

A. to hear B. hear C. Hearing D. Heard

6. John is too stupid_______ understand this.

A. To B. Not to C. To not D. For

7. The wind is_______ to blow the roof off.

A. Strong enough B. Too strong C. Quiet strong D. Very strong

8. My father is _______ to stay up late.

A. Too tired B. Enough tired C. Tired enough D. So tired

9. John wanted me_______ him.

A. To be helping B. Help C. To help D. I help

10. I want_______ early tomorrow morning.

A. To leave B. Leaving C. Me leave D. Me leaving


GERUNDS

&

INFINITIVES

Trần Thành Vinh

Infinitive of

purpose

Grammar

presentation

Trần Thành Vinh

Structure

Affirmative statement

Structure: S + V +…+ (in order)/(so as)+ to-infinitive

Example: - I go to the hospital to visit my grandparent

- I study hard in order to have good marks

- She went on holiday so as to relax

Negative statement

Structure: S + V +…+ in order/ so as + not+ to- infinitive

Example: - I drank coffee in order not to fall asleep

- He got up very quietly so as not to wake the children

- I phoned her to require help

Trần Thành Vinh

How to use

1. Use an infinitive (to + base form of verb) to explain the

purpose of an action. It often answers the question Why?

Ex: 1. I give up cakes to lose weight.

2. A: Why did you go to the mall?

B: I went there to buy a new camera phone.

And

2. Use the longer form in order (not) to + base form of

verb to explain a (negative) purpose.

Ex: I bought my first camera in order to send photos

Reporters use camera phones in order not to miss

deadlines.

Trần Thành Vinh

Usage notes

1. In conversation,you can answer the question Why? with an

incomplete sentence beginning with to.

Ex: A: Why did you go to the mall?

B: To buy a new camera phone.

2. In order not to is formal. In everyday spoken English, we often

express a negative purpose with because + a reason.

Ex: Reporters use camera phones because they don’t want

to miss deadlines.

3. We can only use the infinitive of purpose if the subject of the

main verb and the infinitive of purpose are the same. If they are

different, we use 'so that + clause' or 'in order that + clause'.

Ex: I went to the library to study.

I went to the library so that John could study. (The two subjects

are different - I and John - so we can't use an infinitive of purpose.)

4. In a negative statement, the meaning of “ not + to-infinitive” is

different with “ in order/so as + not + to-infinitive” 's one

Ex: I went outside not to help my mom. (to do something else

besides helping my mom)

I went outside in order not to help my mom. (avoids helping

my mom)

Trần Thành Vinh

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 1:Read more about camera phones. Underline

and write all the infinitives that express a purpose

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Exercise 2: Choose from Box A and Box B to make a new

sentence with to…

1. I shouted

2. I opened the box

3. I’m saving money

4. I need a knife

5. I’m wearing two sweaters

6. I phoned the police

I want to keep warm

I want to go to Canada

I wanted to report the accident

I wanted to warn people

I want to chop these onions

I wanted to see what was in it

1. I shouted to warn people of the danger.

2. I opened the box……………………………………………………………

3. I………………………………………………………………………………………

4. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

5. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

6. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

Trần Thành Vinh

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Trần Thành Vinh

Exercise 3: Join the two sentences, using the “infinitive of

purpose”.

1. Shella went by bus. She wanted to save money.

_________________________________________________________________

2. Peter has a part-time job. He needs to get some extra money.

_________________________________________________________________

3. My mother went to the post office. She had to post some letters.

_________________________________________________________________

4. Mary stayed at college until 9 pm. She had to finish her History project.

_________________________________________________________________

5. Peter sent Mary an e-card. He wanted to wish her “Happy Birthday”

__________________________________________________________________

6. Paul did some exercise. He wanted to lose weight.

__________________________________________________________________

7. She’s gone to the supermarket. She needs to buy some sugar.

__________________________________________________________________

8. Daisy is studying hard. She wants to be a doctor.

__________________________________________________________________

9. They have gone to town. They want to buy new boots.

__________________________________________________________________

10. We are on a diet. We want to get thinner.

__________________________________________________________________

11. I phoned my grandparents last night. I wanted to invite them to our

Christmas dinner.

__________________________________________________________________

12. My mother is organising a party. She wants to celebrate my birthday.

___________________________________________________________________

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Trần Thành Vinh

Exercise 4: Join these pairs of sentences using the words

in brackets.

1. She changed the subject. She didn’t want us to know about her

problem. (so that)

…………………………………………………………………………………………..........

2. John phoned Sara. He wanted her to come to his birthday party. (so

that)

…………………………………………………………………………………………..........

3. James works overtime. He wants to improve his situation. (so as to)

…………………………………………………………………………………………..........

4. Betty took a taxi yesterday. She didn’t want to be late. (so as not to)

…………………………………………………………………………………………...........

5. The teacher worked on his lesson plans. He wanted to get ready. (in

order to)

…………………………………………………………………………………………...........

6. We tell the kids stories. We want them to sleep in peace (so that)

…………………………………………………………………………………………............

7. I hid the toys. I don’t want my sister to take them. (so that)

…………………………………………………………………………………………............

8. I cleaned the house. I didn’t want to live in a dirty place. (in order not

to)

……………………………………………………………………………….........................

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Trần Thành Vinh

Exercise 5: Match the sentences to the purpose.

1. They use their keys…

2. We go to the park…

3. You use the dictionary…

4. He turns left and right…

5. She goes to school…

6. I use the scissors….

7. They use the spaceship…

8. Robert use his tablets…

9. Tom uses his mobile phone…

10. I use an avatar…

a)…to explore the moon

b)…to learn new things

c)…to protect myself

d)…to cut my old notebook

e)…to play their new games.

f)…to play basketball.

g)…to translate my essay

h)…to chat with his friends

i)…to cross the road.

j)…to open the door.

INFINITIVES WITH

TOO & ENOUGH

Grammar

Presentation

Infinitives with too and enough

1.

They answered too quickly for Kyle to understand the issues.

=> S+ V + Adj/adv + ( for Sb) + to V

2. They answered clearly enough Kyle to understand the issues..

=> S + V + adv + Enough + (for sb) + to V

S+ tobe + adj + enough+( for sb) + to v

S + V+ enough + N + (for sb) + to V

NOTE!

1. Use the following to give a reason:

too + adjective / adverb + infinitive

Ex: I’m too young to vote. ( I can't vote)

2. You can also use the following to give a reason : adjective / adverb + enough +

infinitive

Ex: - I’m old enough to go into the army (I can go to the army.)

3. Too comes before the adjective or adverb.

- She’s too old to drive.

Enough comes after the adjective or adverb.

But it comes before Noun

- I’m not old enough to drive.

Not I’m not enough old.

4. Sometimes we use for + noun /pronoun before the infinitive.

- It’s not too hard for people to understand.

5. You don’t need the infinitive when the meaning is clear.

A: Are you going to vote this year?

B: No, I’m too young (to vote.)

Or

No, I’m not old enough (to vote).

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

Khánh Vinh

Grammar

Presentation

*Some problems when changing sentences with ENOUGH

- Lưu ý 1:

Trong câu có trạng từ too, so, quite, very…. Hay các danh từ

many, much, a lot of, lots of thì phải bỏ các từ này đi.

Ví dụ: He has a lot of money.He can buy a car.

• -> He has Nếu enough a lot of money to buy a car (sai)

• ->He has enough money to buy a car (đúng)

- Lưu ý 2:

Nếu 2 câu đã cho cùng chủ ngữ thì bỏ phần “for sb”

VD: John is strong. He can lift the box => John is strong enough to

lift the box

- Lưu ý 3:

Nếu Chủ ngữ câu đầu và bổ ngữ câu sau là 1 thì phải bỏ bổ ngữ

câu sau.

VD: The water is quite warm. I can drink it => The water is warm

enough for me to drink.

Thành ngữ nói phổ biến trong tiếng Anh với enough :

Enough is enough! ( đủ rồi nhé, cái gì cũng có giới hạn của nó)

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EX1. Complete the sentences using enough + the following words:

big chairs cups fit milk money room time

warm well

1. I can’t run very far. I’m not …….fit enough………

2.Some of us had to sit on the floor because there weren't ………enough

chairs…….

3. I'd like to buy a car, but I don't have…………………………… at the moment.

4. Do you have ................................... in your coffee or would you like some

more?

5. Are you ……………..........................? Or shall I switch on the heating?

6. It's only a small car. There is n 't............. ....................... for all of us.

7. Steve didn't feel…………………………. to go to work this morning.

8. I enjoyed my trip to Paris, but there wasn't ................................. to do

everything I wanted.

9. Try this jacket on and see if it's……………………………….. for you.

10. There weren't …………………………….. for everybody to have coffee at the

same time.

EX2. Make one sentence from two. Complete the new sentence using

too or enough.

1. We couldn't carry the boxes. They were too heavy.

=> The boxes were too heavy to carry. ..........................................................

2 I can't drink this coffee. It's too hot.

=> This coffee is ................................................................................................

3 Nobody could move the piano. It was too heavy.

=> The piano ........................................................................................................

4 Don't eat these apples. They're not ripe enough.

=> These apples ..................................................................................................

5 I can't explain the situation. It is too complicate

=> The situation........................................................................................................

Khánh Vinh

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Khánh Vinh

6 We couldn't climb over the wall. It was too high.

=> The wall ..............................................................................................................

7 Three people can't sit on this sofa. It isn't big enough.

=> This sofa ......................................................................................................................

8 You can't see some things without a microscope. They are too small.

=> Some ............................................................................................................................

EX3. Fill in the blanks with "too" or "enough" to complete the

sentences.

1. The film was ______ boring to watch so we left the cinema early.

2. The house on the corner isn't cheap ______ for us to buy. We will find

another one.

3. I know Sarah is very enthusiastic but she isn't tall and talented ______ to

play in the school basketball team.

4. The soup is ______ cold to eat. Shall we heat it on the stove?

5. I think this t-shirt is ______ big for me to wear. I would like to give it to

you.

6. He was not good ______ to play in the school band so the teacher chose

another student.

7. Some of the probems in the Maths exam were ______ difficult for me to

answer so I got a bad mark.

8. The racer couldn't drive fast ______ to come first in the World

Championship.

9. Look! This knife is ______ blunt to chop the onions.

10. The shopping bags were ______ heavy for the old woman so she

wanted help.

11. Toby wasn't strong ______ to lift the desk. so his friend Laura helped

him carry it.

12. These cars are ______ expensive for me to buy. Have you got cheaper

ones?

13. The weather was ______ cold to go out so the two boys stayed at home

and played chess.

14. The sea isn't warm ______ to swim in March in Turkey.

15. Daniel isn't hardworking ______ to pass all his exams.

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Khánh Vinh

EX4 . 4.1a, Answer the questions using "too".

1. Why can't elephants jump? _______________________________________ .

2. Why can't a child drive a car? _______________________________________ .

3. Why couldn't you solve the problem?

_______________________________________ .

4. Why couldn't he drink the coffee? _______________________________________

.

5. Why can't she touch the ceiling? _______________________________________ .

4.1b, Answer the questions using "enough"

1. Why can't you buy a Ferrari? _______________________________________ .

2. Why can't Sue lift 100 kilos? _______________________________________ .

3. Why couldn't Sam reach the cupboard?

_____________________________________.

4. Why couldn't she put on the dress?

_______________________________________ .

5. Why can't she catch the mouse? _____________________________________ .

4.2 Rewrite the sentences using "enough" .

1. The book was too boring to read so I stopped reading it.

_______________________________________

2. I was too sick to go to work so I stayed at home on Monday.

_______________________________________

3. The room was too dark to find my pink gloves.

_______________________________________

4. The horse was too wild to ride so I decided not to.

_______________________________________

FOCUSED PRACTICE

EX5. Choose the best answer: A, B or C.

1, It was _____ so we didn’t get it.

A/ expensive enough

B/ too expensive

C/ enough expensive

2, It’s ___ to read; I don’t

understand it at all.

A/ enough difficult

B/ too difficult

C/ difficult enough

3, They didn’t sell _____ to make it

worthwhile.

A/ tickets enough

B/ enough tickets

C/ too tickets

4,There were _____ people there.

A/ too

B/ too many

C/ too much

5, It’s not ____ to sort things out.

A/ enough late

B/ late enough

C/ too late

6, It’s ____ to pass.

A/ enough difficult

B/ too difficult

C/ too much difficult

7, I left because I’d had ______ their

arguing.

A/ enough

B/ enough of

C/ too

8, He ate ____ and felt ill.

A/ enough much

B/ much enough

C/ too much

9, I’m shattered; I didn’t ____ last night.

A/ enough sleep

B/ sleep enough

C/ too sleep

10, It’s ____ to walk- I’ll take the bus.

A/ enough far

B/ far enough

C/ too far

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EX6. Some teenagers are leaving a concert. Comple the conversation. Use the words

in parentheses with the infinitive and too or enough.

1. A: Hologram is so cool! Did you catch the words in that last song?

B: No. the guitar was too loud for me to understand the words.

(loud/ me/ understand)

2. A: They’re playing in Hampton Stadium next month.

B: Let’s go. The tickers are …

(cheap / us/ afford)

3. A: I don’t think the stadium has wheelchair access yet.

B: We’ll sit on the grass. This concert is going to be …

(good / you / miss)

4. A: It’s 9:30. Do we have time to get a slide of pizza?

B: No. it’s …

(late / stop)

5. A: I hate this curfew!

B: Me too! I think we’re … out past 10:00!

(old / stay)

6. A: Where’s Kyle tonight?

B: Working. He didn’t get off …

(early/ come)

7, A: The new recreation center just opened.

Do you want to play basketball tomorrow?

B: Sure. But I’m still … you!

(slow/ beat)

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EX7, Rewrite the sentence with “Enough”.

1, The moon is bright. I can read a book by it.

=>

2, I have enough money. I can pay this bill.

=>

3, These rubber trees are big. They can give us milky liquid.

=>

4, This novel is interesting. We can read it.

=>

5, This kind of rubber is good. We can use it to make tires for cars.

=>

6, We think you are very strong. You can lift this table.

=>

7, He has no time. He can’t finish this work.

=>

8, My friend is quite well. She can work again.

=>

9, There isn’t enough time. The pupils can’t write this essay.

=>

10, She doesn’t explain this exercise clearly. Her pupils can’t do it.

=>

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EX8, Read the sentences about Robert's presentations. Correct the

mistakes by moving one word

1 You speak quiely too. => you speak too quitely.

2 You don't prepare enough carefully. => ........... ............

3 You talk fast too. => ................. ....

4 You don't explain the ideas enough slowly. =>...............

5 You finish your talks early too. => .............

6 You don't answer the questions enough clearly. => .......................

EX9. A group of executives is on a team-building course on a

remote island in Scotland.Re-write each of the sentences using

the words in brackets

1. Our tents aren't big enough.

(small) Our tents are too small

2 We have too little food.

(enough).............................................................................................

3 We have brought too few warm clothes.

(enough).............................................................................................

4 They make us walk 20 miles a day.

(far)..................................................................................................

5 We're having arguments all the time.

(too many) ............................................................................................

6 The weather is too bad for this kind of exercise.

(enough)....................................................................................................

7 The instructors hardly ever help us.

(often/enough) ........................................................................................

8 We're only sleeping for three hours a night.

(enough).....................................................................................................

9 We're carrying an unnecessary amount of equipment.

(much)........................................................................................................

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EX10. Read this student’s journal entry. There are 5 mistakes in the

use of infinitives with too or enough. The first mistake is already

corrected. Find and correct 5 more.

The Hologram concert was

awesome! Now I’m too excited for

sleeping. That Eve Durkin can really

sing. My voice isn’t enough good to

sing in the shower! After the concert

we were really hungry, but it was to

late to go for pizza. I HATE this

stupid curfew! It’s too weird

understand. My friend Todd works

and has to pay taxes, but the law

says he’s too young for staying out

past 10:00 P.M! That’s really crazy!

Well I’d better try to get some sleep

or I’ll too tried too get up in the

morning.

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

EX11: Complete the conversation with too or enough

(tall) He wasn't paper isn't. ....... to become a flight attendant. (busy) I'm

afraid I'm...... to talk you now.(good) The ..(patience) I haven't got.............. to

be a teacher.(late) It's 10 pm. It's (enough) She couldn't run. to the cinema.

to catch the bus.(warm) It's not .............. to go out.(chairs) We don't have for

all students here. (busy) She's trying to come up in our party tonight.

(people) We have.. to form three groups. (young) Jim is ............. to drive

motorcycle. No more workouts. That's.............for today. (flour) There

isn't.............. to make fifty loads of bread. (far away) We were..............to

heard what he was saying. (dark) The forest is .......... that he can't see

anything.(English) He doesn't know ............... to talk to foreigner. (food and

drink) There was......….….......... for about twenty people. (hot) The tea

is........... for me to drink.(big) Is this box ........ for all those things? (shy)

I'm.............. to talk to him.

Hoàng Thị Hà VY

Hoàng Thị Yên

Nguyễn Thị Thu Yến

GERUNDS

AND

INFINITIVES

Grammar

Presentation

Gerunds

Eva enjoys going to the park

Infinitives

Eva wants to go to the park.

She loves taking long breaks.

She loves to take long breaks.

She stopped studying.

She stopped to study.

Changing habits is hard.

It's hard to change habits.

1.Some verbs, like the ones below, are followed by a gerund (base form + -ing).

appreciate avoid can't stand end up feel like keep mind recall regret

Eg: Eva avoids doing her work.

2. Some verbs, like the ones below, are followed by an infinitive (to + base form).

afford agree decide expect need

offer plan want would like

E.g: He decided not to keep his appointment.

Usage Note: We usually do not repeat to when there is more than one ìninitive.

E.g: He plans to watch TV, read the paper, and call his friends.

Not

He plans to watch TV, to read the paper, and to call his friends.

3. Some verbs, like the ones below, can be followed by a gerund or an infinitive.

begin continue hate like love prefer

E.g: Jeff hates studying. Or Jeff hates to studying.

4. BECAREFUL! The verbs stop, remember, and forget can be followed by either the

gerund or the infinitive, but they have very different meanings.

E.g: Eva stopped taking breaks. (She doesn't take breaks anymore.)

Eva stopped to take a break. (She stopped another activity in order to take a

break.)

5. The gerund is the only verb form that can follow a preposition.

E.g: Jeff is worried about writing his paper.

He's looking forward to finishing it.

6. To make general statements, you can use:

Gerund as subject Or it + infinitive

E.g: Writing a paper is hard Or It's hard to write a paper

Hoàng Thị Yên

7. Some rules to distinguish gerunds and infinitives:

Gerunds can be the subject of a sentence.

Infinitives are not.

Eg : Learning English is important for your

future.

Do not use: To learn English is important your

future.

Gerunds and infinitives can be used as object in a

sentence.

+ The conjugation in the gerund or infinitive when

the verb is the object depends on the main verb.

+Verbs that are follow by –ing or to V have the

same meaning: begin, continue, instend, start…

-The note: No two verbs ending in –ing can go

together:

Eg: They are continuing to eat.

Do not use: They are continuing eating.

Only infinitives is used after object of person.

Eg: I invite him to go shopping.

Only gerunds is used after the preposition.

Eg: I forgive you for not telling the truth.

=> Both can be used as the subject, complement, and

object of a verb. However, when acting as the subject

and complement of a verb, the gerund is more

commonly used (especially in spoken language),

and the infinitive is only used when the speaker

wants to emphasize the purpose of the action. (90%

of verbs as subjects and complements of verbs

are conjugated in the gerund form).


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex1: Read an email. Complete the sentences using the verbs in

the box in the –ving form.

do get give go

set take write use hear

To : Michael

Subject : Web- based publishing project

Dear Michael,

I’m just writing to ask if you be interested in (1) talking Part in a new webbased

publish project that we are planing.

It’s probably not worth(2)________ into all the details at the moment, so I’ll

give give you a quick overview. The basic proposal involves (3)______ up a

website to give business students a web-based learning program . We are

considering (4)____________all sorts of different types of media – text, audio,

and video, because we know that learners generally enjoy (5)________a

variety of different tasks. Our IT specialists have just finished (6)_________.

The special programs that we will need, so we’re almost ready to start. Luis

suggested (7)_________intouch with you to see if you’d be interested, and I

thought that you’d be great for the project too. Would you mind

(8)________me a ring some time in the week? Or just send me an email it

that’s easier.

I look forward to (9)_____________ from you.

Best wishes.

Christina .


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex2: Rewrite the sentences using the verbs in brackets

+object +to + in infinitve.

1.

‘Don’t forget to post that letter!’

2. ‘Go on, apply for the job.’

3. ‘If I were you, I’d make a formal

complaint.’

4. ‘Would you finish the report as soon as

possible , please?’

5. ‘You can leave early if you life.’

6. ‘ Don’t rush into a decision.’

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

(remind) He reminded me to past the letter.

(encourage)___________________________________.

(advise)_______________________________________.

(ask)_________________________________________.

(allow)_______________________________________.

(warn)_______________________________________.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 3: Listen to the conversation. Complete the sentences using

the verbs in the –ing or to V.

Little Italy

(Oliver, Daisy and Alfie are at Oliver and Daisy’s home. Oliver is upset, so Daisy and Alfie

decide to cheer him up)

Daisy: what’ up, Oli?

Oliver: Hm? Oh, nothing.

Alfie: Oh, come on, something’s wrong.

Oliver: No, seriously….

Daisy: Don’t tell me, you invited Amy (1)_______ to your class diner but she decided

(2)_________with Elliot instead….

Alfie: Well, you like (3)__________ , so lunch isn’t the problem. I know!You want

(4)_____________your favourite T-shirt but it’s got tomato on it.

Oliver: No! Well, yes, that too – I don’t know how (5)_________it but, no, that’s not the

real problem. It’s … well….. it’s Mum.

Daisy: Have you had an argument? When did she phone? Oh, I hate (6)__________ her

calls.

Oliver: She hasn’t called yet, don’t worry.

Daisy: So what’s up? Come on! Just tell us! I don’t like (7)________ you like this, Oli.

Oliver: Well, she’s in Italy. And she promised (8 )_________ me there. I was looking

forward to (9)________ . I planed (10) ________ to some real Italian restaurants to, you

know, have some real Italian food, so I could try (11)_________ some at home. And I

wanted to visit Rome and Venice and Florence and Siena and … well, she hasn’t even

remembered (12)____________ or to send an email or anything!

Daisy: No, but she will. You know she’s always so busy. She never stops working. Or

maybe she’s had a problem. But it’ll be cool, she’ll phone.

Alfie: Do you know what you need? You need (13)_____________some fun! We can

pretend to be in Italy!

Daisy: Pretend (14)______________there?

Alfie: Yes! Let’s do it! You wanted to practice cooking Italian food, didn’t you?

So …. Here’s a cookbook. We just need to choose a dish and then we need

(15)______________ ingredients. You cook, Oliver, and I know how to make great

tiramisu. Daisy, you can get some Italian music- we can eat a garden, like at a

pavement cafe.

Daisy: Alfie, you’re mad. You’re wonderful and mad, and I love (16)_____________ mad

things….


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Mum: Hi, guys!

Oliver: Hi, Mum!

Amy: Hi, Sopie! How’s Italy?

Mum: Oh, it didn’t stop (17)__________ all day yesterday, and today it’s foggy! It’s

impossible! I can’t see anything or go anywhere. I’ll have to come back next month.

Oh, and Oli, would you like (18) ____________too then? Gennaro Falcone, the famous

restaurant owner, has offered (19)_____________you some of his most popular

recipes. I told him you really enjoy (20)______________.

Oliver: I’d love to go, Mum! Thanks!

Mum: So. What are you doing? It looks …interesting!

Ex 4:Editing. Read “ The chocolate revolution”. There are 10

mistakes in use of gerund and infinitive. The first mistake is

already corrected. Find and correct nine more.

THE CHOCOLATE

REVOLUTION

reaching

After to reach Europe with Columbus in 1502, chocolate rapidly became

popular as a drink that people took improve their health.

To eat solid chocolate, however, was unpopular; it was dark and bitter,

and manufactures did not know how mix it with milk and cream making

it taste better.

The discover of milk chocolate was made in 1876 by Daniel Peter in

Switzerland. After to try unsuccessfully for eight years to mix milk and

dark chocolate. Peter began working with his neighbour, the chemist

Henri Nestlé . Nestlé had developed a new product feeding Babies; in

the process, he had discovered how making condensed milk, which

Peter tried instead of to use ordinary milk. The result was an instant

success, and the two men joined forces manufacturing milk chocolate

for a grateful world.

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex 5: Use a to-infinitive or –ing form , giving

alternatives where possible.

1. I’m afraid I can’t afford that much. Would you be prepared

(reduce) _________ the price if I pay cash?

2. Jack was stupid ( chear)__________ in the exam. He was bound to

get caught.

3. He felt good (know) _____________ that he had helped solve the

problem.

4. Don’t feel that you need to stay to the very end of the

conference. You’re free (leave)___________ at any time.

5. I hadn’t been to Wolverton since I was a child, and I was curious

(see)____________ how it had changed.

6. Anyone trying to climb the mountain would be foolish

( underestimate) _____________ the challenge facing them.

7. People told me I was crazy(open) ______________ a shop in this

part of the city, but it’s been very successful so far.

8. She was too busy(talk)_________________ on the phone to notice

tha Dave had come into the room.

9. She felt guilty (earn)__________ such a lot when so many people

in the country were living in poverty.

10. It’s so difficult to get a job at the moment you’d be mad

(resign)_____________.

11. Some people would be inclined(panic) _______________ if they

smelt smoke in the house.

12. I felt awful (turn)_______________ people away from the concert,

but there just wasn’t any more room.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex6: Read Eva's journal entry.There are eight mistakes in the use of

the gerund and infinitive.The first mistake is already corrected . Find

and correct seven more.

Hoàng Thị Yên

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex7: Complete these sentences using the correct form of the verbs in

the box

Find Know Use Take Pass

Write Touch Finish Keep Complete

1. Mr. White didn't have any money, so he decided ________ a job.

2. The teacher reminded the students ________ their assignments in

time.

3. My group leader expects me ________ this paper as soon as

possible.

4. Our teacher encourages us ________ a dictionary whenever we are

unsure of the meaning of a word.

5. Before I went away to college, my mother had reminded me

________ her a letter once a week.

6. Mrs. Snow has warned her young children not ________ the hot

stove.

7. The student on the corner pretended ________ the answers to the

teacher's questions.

8. Residents are not allowed ________ pets in that apartment

building.

9. All applicants are required ________ the entrance examination.

10. Ann advised her sisters ________ the plane instead of driving to

San Francisco.

Hoàng Thị Yên

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Ex8: Choose the best answer.

1. I couldn't help ________ at his jokes.

A. laugh B. laughing C. to laugh D. laughed

2. Tom offered ________ Jane a ticket to the theater, but she refused to take it.

A. to give B. give C. giving D. to be given

3. Those workers stopped____ their coffee because they felt tired with their new work.

A. drink B. drank C. drinking D. to drink

4. He asked them ________

A. help him B. should help him C. to help him D. help to him

5. Mr Minh advised my family ________ leaving Vietnam.

A. to think B. not to think C. against D. against to

6. I hope ________ that woman again.

A. to see B. of seeing C. seeing D. have seen

7. She wasted much time ________ her old pair of shoes.

A. mend B. to mend C. mending D. to be mended

8. He regrets ________ lazy last year. He lost his job.

A. to be B. be C. been D. being

9. She remembered ________ that woman last month.

A. of seeing B. to see C. seeing D. have seen

10. David tried his best ________, but his girlfriend refused ________

A. explaining; to listen B. explaining; listening

C. to explain; to listen D. to explain; listening

Hoàng Thị Yên

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Hoàng Thị Yên

E x 9 : R e a d t h i s p a r a g r a p h .

Like many students, Eva is a procrastinator. She keeps putting of her school

work. When she studies, she often stops to go for a walk. She wants to

improve her study habits, but she isn't sure how. Eva decided to make a list

of things she needs to do every day. She always remenbers to make her list,

but she often forgets to read it. It's very frustrating. Last night Eva

remembered reading an article in the school newspaper about a support

group for procrastinators. She thinks being in a group is a good idea. She

likes sharing ideas with other students.

Now read these sentences. Write T(True) or F(False).

___F___1. Eva never does her school work.

_______2. She quit going for walks in the park.

_______3. She’d like to be a better student.

_______4. Eva makes a list every day.

______5. She always reads her list.

______6. She read about a suport group.

______7. She thinks it's good to be in a group.

______8. She likes to share ideas with others.

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Hoàng Thị Yên

Ex10: Read this quiz. Circle the correct form of the verbs. In some

cases, both forms are correct.

• Do you remember to read /reading about it? No, at that time I

1.

was too young to read/reading newspaper.

2.

• My brother is a stamp collector.He started collecting/to collect

3.

stamps when he was 10 years old.

• I don't know why he avoids meeting/to meet me.

4.

• I'm trying my best to study/studying English well in order to

5.

find a better job.

• I saw a man jump/ jumping through the window 5 minutes ago

6.

, but I couldn't remember his face.

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

Hoàng Thị Yên

Ex 11: Complete these sentence use the correct form of

the verb in parentheses.

1. The boy admitted (break) … my ancient flower vase.

2. After (hear)… the conditions , I decided (not enter)… for the competition

3. He keeps (hope)… and (pray)… that things will get better.

4. Would you mind (give)… me a hand?

5. Imagine (have)… to get up at 4 a.m every day.

6. She went on (talk) … about her illness until we left that .

Answer Key

SIMPLE PRESENT

KEY

Ex 1:

2 Come to our first Fairtrade market on 16 July at Cutty Sark Gardens

3 Listen to our guest speakers talking about Fairtrade and development issues.

4 Learn how you can improve the lives of farmers in developing countries.

5 Take part in lots of games and fun activities.

6 Win some great prizes in our raffle to raise funds for Afghan women.

7 Buy some wonderful presents for yourself and those you love.

8 Make a real difference to many of the world's poorest people.

Detailed explanation:

·Xét về nghĩa của câu, hai vế tương đương nhau, hợp lý với nhau

·Có hiệu quả giao tiếp cao giúp người đọc hiểu biết các thông tin

·Nâng cao nhận thức, cách thức cho người đọc

Vocabulary

Wonderful /ˈwʌn.də.fəl/: tuyệt vời, tuyệt diệu

Raffle/ˈræf. əl/: cuộc xổ số

Fund /fʌnd/: quỹ

Improve /ɪmˈpruːv/: Cải thiện

Structures:

S + V + O

S + BE + A/AN/THE + N

Collocation:

1.Verb + noun

Eg: miss (verb)

·Miss a chance: bỏ lỡ cơ hội

·Miss the bus: bỏ lỡ chuyến xe

2.Adj + noun

Eg: wonderful (adj)

·Wonderful present: món quà tuyệt vời

·Wonderful holiday: kì nghỉ tuyệt vời


SIMPLE PRESENT

KEY

Ex 2:

2 is 3 allows 4 Does Skype have 5 don't cost

6 includes 7 don't have 8 does Skype have 9 writes 10 talk


·Dùng thì hiện tại đơn khi nói về sự thật, một khẳng định chắc chắn về gì đó.

·Do chủ thể là số ít (Skype) nên phải dùng “is” và “allows” cũng phải chia theo chủ

thể.

·Đây là một câu hỏi yes/no và có chủ thể là số ít nên dùng “does” và sau là động từ

nguyên thể.

·Dùng “don’t cost” bởi vì chủ thể là số nhiều (calls to other users of the service).

·Do chủ thể là “it” (số ít) nên dùng “ is”.

·Vì chủ thể là số nhiều (normal telephone connections) nên dùng “don't have”.

·Đây là một câu hỏi Wh và có chủ thể là số ít nên dùng “does” và sau là động từ

nguyên thể.

·“One person” nghĩa là một người nên đó là chủ thể số ít vì vậy động từ “writes” cũng

phải chia số ít theo chủ thể đã cho.

·Đây là chủ thể số nhiều (people) nên động từ “talk” là động từ nguyên thể.

Vocabulary

Advantage /ədˈvɑːn.tɪdʒ/:Lợi ích

Communicate /kəˈmjuː.nɪ.keɪt/:Truyền đạt

Conference /ˈkɒn.fər. əns/:Cuộc thảo luận

Headset /ˈhed.set/:Tai nghe

Structures:

WH + BE + S?

DO/DOES + S + V ?

YES/NO, S + DO/DOES (DON’T/DOESN’T)

Collocation:

1.Noun + noun

Eg: Development issues: vấn đề phát triển

Software programme: chương trình phần mềm


SIMPLE PRESENT

KEY

Ex 3:

2 do the banks close 6 takes ... does it take

3 don't use 7 does this word mean

4 does Ricardo come 8 doesn't do

5 do you do


2. chủ thể số nhiều nên dùng do và theo sau là động từ thường

3. chủ thể là I mà đây là dạng phủ định

4. đây là câu hỏi có Wh và có chủ thể số ít

5. đây là câu hỏi có Wh và có chủ thể số nhiều

6. có chủ thể là số ít nên dùng takes và sau đó là dùng does

7. đây là câu hỏi có Wh và có chủ thể số ít

8. chủ thể là số nhiều nên dùng does

Vocabulary

sentence/ˈsen.təns/: câu

electrician/ˌɪlekˈtrɪʃ.ən/: thợ điện

Ex 4:

2 Does your sister play tennis?

3 Which newspaper do you read?

4 What does your brother do?

5 How often do you go to the cinema?

6 Where do your grandparents live?

Structures:

S + V

Wh + do/does + S + V


- Đây là bài tập nói về những công việc hay việc được lặp đi lặp lại nên dùng thì

hiện tại đơn

- Với những câu hỏi nếu chủ thể số ít thì dùng does và nếu chủ thể số nhiều thì

dùng do. Sau đó là động từ dạng nguyên thể

Vocabulary

newspaper /ˈnjuːzˌpeɪ.pər/: bài báo

cinema/ˈsɪn.ə.mə/: rạp chiếu phim

grandparents/ˈɡræn.peə.rənt/: ông bà

Structures:

Wh + do/does + S + V

DO/DOES + S + V ?

YES/NO, S + Do/Does(Don’t/Doesn’t)


SIMPLE PRESENT

GRAMMAR

Ex 5:

3 rises 7 translates

4 make 8 don’t tell

5 don’t eat 9 flows

6 doesn't believe


3. Do chủ thể là số nhiều

4. Do chủ thể là số ít

5. Do chủ thể là số nhiều và có dạng phủ định

6. Do chủ thể là số ít và có dạng phủ định


8. Do chủ thể là số nhiều và có dạng phủ định


Vocabulary

atheist /ˈeɪ.θi.ɪst/: vô thần

interpreter /ɪnˈtɜː.prə.tər/ thông dịch viên

Structures:

S + V + O

Ex 6:

2 A stockbroker buys and sells 6 Management consultants advise

3 An architect designs 7 A journalist writes

4 Venture capitalists invest 8 Personnel officers arrange

5 Auditors check


- Bài tập nói về những việc cần làm của một công việc nên sử dụng hiện tại đơn

- Những chủ thể số ít thì động từ thêm s/es, những chủ thể số nhiều thì để động

từ ở dạng nguyên thể

Vocabulary

consultant /kənˈsʌl.tənt/: người tư vấn

steward /ˈstjuː.əd/: người quản lý

passenger/ˈpæs.ən.dʒər/: hành khách

Structures:

S + V + O

Collocation

look after: chăm sóc

Noun + Noun

-Management consultant: người tư

vấn quản lý


SIMPLE PRESENT

KEY

Ex 7:

2 needs 3 think 4 try 5 helps 6 start 7 make

8 be 9 don't like 10 suggest 11 don't forget 12 Don't tell


- Bài tập nói sử dụng thì hiện tại đơn

- Những chủ thể số ít thì động từ thêm s/es, những chủ thể số nhiều thì để động

từ ở dạng nguyên thể

Vocabulary

muscles/ˈmʌs.əl/: cơ bắp

offend/əˈfend/: xúc phạm

audience/ˈɔː.di.əns/: thính giả

Structures:

S + V + O

Ex 8:

3 comes 4 X 5 X 6 X 7 it always has

8 is 9 X 10 are not 11 produce 12 X


3. Do chủ thể là số ít nên động từ phải chia theo chủ thể

7. Always là trạng từ phải đứng sau chủ thể và đứng trước động từ chính

8. Do chủ thể là số ít nên dùng is

10. Do chủ thể là số nhiều nên dùng are

11. Do chủ thể là số nhiều nên dùng are

Vocabulary

headquarters /ˌhedˈkwɔː.təz/: trụ sở chính

competition/ˌkɒm.pəˈtɪʃ.ən/: sự cạnh tranh

operate /ˈɒp.ər.eɪt/: vận hành

create/kriˈeɪt/: tạo ra

Structures:

S + V + O

S + BE + A/AN/THE + N


Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Answer

key

Present Progressive

Ex 1:

2. are having (S: they + are + Ving)

3. are you doing (Wh-question)

4. is expecting (S: he + is +Ving)

5. isn't working (S: the printer-danh từ số ít + is not + Ving)

6. Are you calling (Yes/No question)

7. am phoning (S: I + am + Ving)

Vocabulary

upstairs (n) /ʌpˈsterz/: trên gác

department (n) /dɪˈpɑːrt.mənt/: ban, khoa

product (n) /ˈprɑː.dʌkt/: sản phẩm

Structures


Be(am/is/are) + S + V(ing) ?

Wh-word + be + S + V(ing) ?

Collocation

N + N : products website

V + N : ring you back: gọi lại

Ex 2

Theo yêu cầu của đề bài, chúng ta cần chia đúng động từ trong hộp về thì hiện tại

tiếp diễn và sắp xếp chúng vào đúng vị trí bằng cách dịch câu.

a.

2. aren’t doing (A fifth of businesses: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

3. are investing (One-third of companies: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

4. aren’t helping (Supermarkets: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

5. are being (They: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

Dịch: Theo một cuộc khảo sát gần đây, các doanh nghiệp nước Anh 1. từ chối đầu

tư vào các sáng kiến xanh. 1/5 số doanh nghiệp ở London 2. không làm đủ để bảo

vệ môi trường. Chỉ 1/3 số công ty 3. đang đầu tư vào việc bảo vệ môi trường bằng

cách mua thiết bị văn phòng tiết kiệm năng lượng. Đặc biệt là siêu thị 4. không

giúp khách hàng đưa ra lựa chọn xanh. Một cơ quan giám sát môi trường cho biết:

“Họ 5. đang hơi chậm chạp trong việc đưa ra các giải pháp thay thế túi nhựa xanh”.

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

b.

1. are still working (We: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

2. are making (We: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

3. are putting (We: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

4. isn’t going (The vast majority of it: chủ ngữ số ít)

5. are looking (We: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

Dịch: 'Chúng tôi đã quyết định vào năm 1992 làm cho tổ chức trở nên "xanh" hơn và

chúng tôi 1. vẫn đang tiếp tục làm vì đó là một quá trình liên tục, nhưng chúng tôi

cảm thấy mình 2. đang đạt được tiến bộ tốt. Chúng tôi 3. đang bỏ một số tiền lớn

vào nghiên cứu và và phần lớn trong số đó 4. không đi vào các công nghệ văn

phòng thông thường, mà là các hệ thống mới. Chúng tôi 5. đang xem xét ý tưởng

về văn phòng không giấy tờ, đồng thời cũng đang nghiên cứu rất nhiều về các hệ

thống mới '.

c.

1. are introducing (Hotels: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

2. are demanding (Guests: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

3. are finding (Hotels: chủ ngữ số nhiều)

4. is taking (The industry: chủ ngữ số ít)

Dịch: Các khách sạn 1. đang giới thiệu một loạt các chương trình xanh, một phần vì

khách doanh nhân của họ 2. yêu cầu nó, và cũng bởi vì các khách sạn 3. nhận thấy

rằng nó sẽ giúp tiết kiệm tiền. 'Ngành công nghiệp 4. đang rất coi trọng các vấn đề

môi trường', người phát ngôn của Hiệp hội doanh nghiệp du lịch cho biết.

Vocabulary

initiative (n),(adj) /ɪˈnɪʃ.ə.t̬ ɪv/: bắt đầu, khởi đầu

watchdog (n) /ˈwɑːtʃ.dɒɡ/: người giám sát

conventional (adj) /kənˈven.ʃən.əl/: thông thường, theo truyền thống

partly (adv): /ˈpɑːrt.li/: một phần, phần nào

Structures


S + V + ADV

Collocation

Adj + N:

recent survey: khảo sát gần đây

environmental initiatives: các sáng kiến về môi trường

N + N:

office equipment: thiết bị văn phòng

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 3:

1.are giving up

2.are finding

3.are going

4.are having

5.is costing

6.are paying

7.is planning

8.is getting

9.isn’t doing

10.are concentrating

11.are running

12.are opening

According to the exercise’s request, we have to change the verbs in italics to the

present continuous to emphasise that the article is describing a current trend

Theo yêu cầu của đề bài, chúng ta cần chuyển động từ được in nghiêng sang thì

hiện tại tiếp diễn để nhấn mạnh bài báo đang miêu tả xu hướng hiện giờ của

người nông dân.

Đối với những chủ ngữ số nhiều như farmers, they, supermarkets, some, others:

S + are + V(ing)

Đối với những chủ ngữ số ít như farmer, it, the government:

S + is + V(ing)

Dịch: Nhiều nông dân đang từ bỏ nghề nông vì họ thấy khó kiếm sống. Mỗi tuần,

ít nhất bảy nông dân chăn nuôi bò sữa phải nghỉ kinh doanh vì họ phải bán sữa

dưới giá thành sản xuất. Một nông dân chăn nuôi bò sữa đang có ý định bỏ nông

nghiệp cho biết: “Chúng tôi tiêu tốn 24 xu một lít để sản xuất, nhưng các siêu thị

đang trả cho chúng tôi 20 xu”. Ông nói thêm: “Mọi chuyện ngày càng nghiêm

trọng hơn mỗi tuần và chính phủ không làm gì để giúp chúng tôi. Những ngày này

nhiều nông dân đang tập trung tìm nguồn thu nhập khác. Một số đang điều hành

các nhà khách và những người khác đang mở trang trại của họ cho du khách.

Vocabulary

Farmer (n) /ˈfɑːr.mɚ/: Người nông dân

Farming (n),(v) /ˈfɑːr.mɪŋ/: Làm nông

Government (n) /ˈɡʌv.ɚn.mənt/: Chính phủ

Income (n) /'ɪn.kʌm/: Thu nhập

Collocation

N + N

dairy farmer: nông dân chăn nuôi bò sữa

guest house: nhà khách

Structures

S + be(am/is/are) +Ving

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 4:

2. have (usually=>Hiện tại đơn, S: I =>V nguyên thể: have)

3. am sharing (at the moment=>Hiện tại tiếp diễn, S: I + am +Ving)

4. are redecorating (at the moment=>Hiện tại tiếp diễn, S: they + are + Ving)

5. Do you like (non-action verb: like không chia tiếp diễn)

6. Hate (non-action verb: hate không chia tiếp diễn)

7. are always talking (S + be + always + V-ing: thể hiện ý than phiền, phàn nàn về

một việc gì đó mà mình hay người khác thường hay làm, hay mắc phải.)

8. smells (S: the office, non-action verb)

9. is always eating ( S+ be + always + V-ing: thể hiện ý than phiền, phàn nàn về

một việc gì đó mà mình hay người khác thường hay làm, hay mắc phải.)

10. does he eat (hiện tại đơn)

11. Cycles (everyday=>hiện tại đơn, S:who-the other colleague +Vs/es)

12. doesn’t have (everyday=>hiện tại đơn, S:who-the other colleague +Vs/es)

13. Gets (everyday=>hiện tại đơn, S:who-the other colleague +Vs/es)

14. don’t want (non-action verb: want không chia tiếp diễn, S: I + V nguyên thể)

Vocabulary

colleague (n) /ˈkɑː.liːɡ/: đồng nghiệp

terrible (adj) /ˈter.ə.bəl/: kinh khủng

impossible (adj) /ɪmˈpɑː.sə.bəl/: bất khả thi

cycle (v) /ˈsaɪ.kəl/: đạp xe

Structures

S + be + always +Ving

S + V(s/es)


Collocation

have a shower: đi tắm

Adj + N

own office

social lives

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 5:

2f

Dịch: Khách sạn Sorrento ở Seattle đang nâng cấp các phòng và cơ sở vật chất,

chuyển đổi 154 phòng thành 76 dãy phòng sang trọng cho khách doanh nhân, mỗi

phòng đều được trang bị máy fax và cổng dữ liệu.

3a

Dịch: Biota là công ty công nghệ sinh học hàng đầu của Úc, hiện tại đang tiến hành

nghiên cứu các loại thuốc để chữa cảm lạnh thông thường.

4h

Dịch: Microsoft dự đoán doanh số bán PC sẽ sụt giảm, hãng đang phát triển máy

chơi game mới và các sản phẩm khác dành cho gia đình để bù đắp cho điều này.

5e

Dịch: Airbus tự tin về tương lai dài hạn của ngành hàng không, hãng đang phát triển

một loại máy bay phản lực hai tầng mới sẽ được đưa vào sản xuất trong một vài

năm tới.

6d

Dịch: EMI đang tìm cách phân phối âm nhạc mới, đó là bán các bài hát trực tuyến

thông qua MusicNet và Pressplay.

7g

Dịch: Bloomsbury xuất bản sách tiểu thuyết và sách tham khảo. Nó hiện đang gần

hoàn thành một dự án từ điển mới.

8c

Dịch: HIT Entertainment đã mua bản quyền Pingu. Hãng đang có kế hoạch giới thiệu

nhân vật hoạt hình này trong các chương trình truyền hình dành cho trẻ em ở Mỹ.

Vocabulary

biotechnology (n) /ˌbaɪ.oʊ.tekˈnɑː.lə.dʒi/: công nghệ sinh học

anticipate (v) /ænˈtɪs.ə.peɪt/: dự báo

compensate (v) /ˈkɑːm.pən.seɪt/: đền bù

convert (v) /kənˈvɝːt/: chuyển đổi

Structures


Collocation

carry out research: tiến hành nghiên cứu

publish fiction, book: xuất bản tiểu thuyết, sách

biotechnology company: công ty công nghệ sinh học

game console: máy chơi game

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 6:

According to the exercise’s request, we have to complete the dialogue with am, is,

or are and the -ing form of the verbs in brackets.

Theo yêu cầu của đề bài, ta phải hoàn thành đoạn đối thoại với am, is, are và động

từ đuôi ing tring ngoặc

2.are trying (S: we + are + Ving)

3.is helping (S: she + is + Ving)

4.is working (S: Fatih +is +Ving)

5.are meeting (S: they +are +Ving)

6.am finishing (S: I + am +Ving)

Vocabulary

exhibition (n) /ˌek.səˈbɪʃ.ən/: triển lãm

report (n) /rɪˈpɔːrt/: bản báo cáo

Strutures

S + be(am/iss/are) +Ving

Collocation

set up something: chuẩn bị, sắp xếp

Ex 7:

Pierre

Marie

Anna

Michel

Gina

Laure

Alain

2. Pierre is not talking to Alain or Michel.

3. Alain is not holding a glass of wine.

4. Anna is not wearing a red dress.

5. Marie is not leaving the party.

6. Pierre is not talking to Laure or Marie.

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 8:

According to the exercise’s request, we have to listen and write questions using

the verbs in the present continuous.

Theo yêu cầu của đề bài, ta phải nghe và viết câu hỏi dùng động từ ở thì hiện tại

tiếp diễn

1. Is it going

2. What projects are you working

3. Are you hoping

4. Are your colleagues learning

5. Is anyone in your department looking

6. How is your company doing

7. Is it achieving

8. What is your company investing

9. Is your boss making

10. Is he or she running

Vocabulary

promote (v) /prəˈmoʊt/: thăng chức

achieve (v) /əˈtʃiːv/: đạt được

major (adj): chính

Strutures

S + be(am/is/are) + Ving

Be(am/is/are) + S + Ving ?

Collocation

get promoted: thăng chức

run department: điều hành bộ phận

achieve goals: đạt được mục tiêu

look for something: tìm

invest in: đầu tư vào

work on something: dành thời gian phát triển, làm cái gì

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Ex 9:

1. eat never => never eat (hiện tại đơn)

2. I'm being => I'm (2 động từ to be)

3. are eating => eat (hiện tại đơn)

4. I'm having => I have (hiện tại đơn)

5. ask => asks (S: she + Vs/es)

6. always is => is always

7. work => are working (this semester =>hiện tại tiếp diễn)

8. are analyze => are analyzing (hiện tại tiếp diễn be + Ving)

9. leave => am leaving (hiện tại tiếp diễn)

10. aren't liking => don't like (non-action verb: like không chia tiếp diễn)

Vocabulary

homesick (adj) /ˈhoʊm.sɪk/: nhớ nhà

tardiness (n) /ˈtɑːr.di.nəs/: sự chậm chạp

Structures


S + (do/does) + V

Collocation

culture shock: sốc văn hóa

fall asleep: ngủ

Ex 10:

2. Do the farmers bring (hiện tại đơn, S: the farmers + V nguyên thể)

3. we always collect (hiện tại đơn, S: we + V nguyên thể)

4. deliver (twice a day=> hiện tại đơn, S: the tankers + V nguyên thể)

5. do you have (hiện tại đơn, S: you + V nguyên thể)

6. test (hiện tại đơn, S: we + V nguyên thể)

7. passes (hiện tại đơn, S: the milk + Vs/es)

8. operates (hiện tại đơn, S: the milk + Vs/es)

9. isn't working (at the moment=>hiện tại tiếp diễn, S: the production line + is + Ving)

10. are changing (at the moment=>hiện tại tiếp diễn, S: the employees + are + Ving)

Vocabulary

pasteurization (n) /ˌpæs.tʃɚ.əˈzeɪ.ʃən/: sự diệt khuẩn theo phương pháp pasteu

shifts (n) /ʃɪft/: ca

insulated (adj) /ˈɪn.sə.leɪtid/: được cách điện

consignment (n) /kənˈsaɪn.mənt/: sự gửi hàng

Nguyễn Ngọc Mai

Structures

Do/Does + S + V ?


Collocation

pass down: truyền xuống

N + N

production line: dây chuyền sản xuất

Ex 11:

1.C (S: prices)

2.B (S: we)

3.A (S: the delegation)

4.D (S: consumer base)

5.C (S: I)

6.A (S: we)

7.C (S: She)

8.B (S: the company's building)

Vocabulary

delegation (n) /ˌdel.əˈɡeɪ.ʃən/: đoàn đại biểu

acquisition (n) /ˌæk.wəˈzɪʃ.ən/: sự giành được

strategy (n) /ˈstræt̬ .ə.dʒi/: chiến lược

survey (n) /ˈsɝː.veɪ/: khảo sát

develop (v) /dɪˈvel.əp/: phát triển

increase (v) /ɪnˈkriːs/: tăng

consider (v) /kənˈsɪd.ɚ/: cân nhắc

Structures


Collocation

Look out: An exclamation used to tell someone about important

information that they are unaware of.

N + N

marketing strategy: chiến lược marketing

consumer base: cơ sở người tiêu dùng

Adj + N

recent survey: khảo sát gần đây

SIMPLE PAST

ANSWER KEY

Ex1:

KEY

1. ate (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: yesterday).

2. Did / drive / did (Hành động drive của Helen được hỏi là hành động có thể đã diễn

ra, kết thúc trong quá khứ hoặc không xảy ra trong quá khứ).

3. bought (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: last week).

4. went (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: last summer holiday).

5. Did / swim / didn’t (Hành động được hỏi có thể đã diễn ra, kết thúc trong quá khứ

hoặc không diễn ra trong quá khứ).

6. saw (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: last night).

7. did / drank (Các hành động được kể lại và diễn ra liên tiếp nhau trong quá khứ).

8. bit (Các hành động được kể lại và diễn ra liên tiếp nhau trong quá khứ).

9. did / get up (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: this morning; hành động get up được hỏi tới đã

diễn ra trong quá khứ).

10. flew (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: in 1903 - mốc thời gian trong quá khứ).

11. heard (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: one minute ago).

12. broke / hurt (Kể lại sự việc xảy ra trong quá khứ khi chủ thể 10 tuổi).

13. caught (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: last week).

14. did / read (Hỏi về khoảng thời gian nhất định mà hành động diễn ra trong quá khứ).

15. forgot / bring (Hành động đã diễn ra rõ ràng trong quá khứ ngay cả khi thời điểm

này không được đề cập đến).

VOCABULARY

comedy movie /ˈkɒmɪdi ˈmuːvi/: phim hài

jump /ʤʌmp/: nhảy

bite /baɪt/: cắn

robber /ˈrɒbə/: tên cướp

COLLOCATIONS

Get up: thức dậy

STRUCTURES

S + V-ed/V2 +...

S + was/were +...

Did + S + V+...

When S1 + was/were +..., S2 + V-ed/V2+...

Wh-word + did + S + V +...?



ANSWER KEY

Ex2:

Theo yêu cầu của đề bài, ta phải chuyển các động từ trong ngoặc sang quá khứ

theo quy tắc hoặc bất quy tắc, phụ thuộc vào tình huống của từng câu mà ta

phải viết lại động từ ở dạng khẳng định hoặc phủ định cho phù hợp:

3. didn’t disturb (Dịch: Tôi biết Sarah rất bận nên tôi không làm phiền cô ấy).

4. left (Dịch: Tôi rất mệt, vì vậy tôi đã rời bữa tiệc sớm).

5. didn’t sleep (Dịch: Chiếc giường rất khó chịu. Tôi ngủ không ngon).

6. flew (Dịch: Cửa sổ mở và một con chim bay vào phòng.)

7. didn’t cost (Dịch: Khách sạn không đắt lắm. Nó không tốn nhiều).

8. didn’t have (Dịch: Tôi đang vội nên không có thời gian gọi điện cho bạn).

9. were (they là chủ thể số nhiều nên cần dùng were. Dịch: Thật khó khăn để mang

được những chiếc túi đó. Chúng rất nặng).

VOCABULARY

disturb /dɪsˈtɜːb/: quấy rầy

in a hurry: đang vội

COLLOCATIONS

Take off sth: cởi ra; nghỉ(học,việc,...)

STRUCTURES

S + V-ed/V2 +...

S + was/were (+not) +...

S + didn’t + V +...

Ex3:

KEY

1. had

2. she walked to work

3. It tooks her half an hour

4. She starts work

5. she didn’t have any lunch

6. she finished work

7. she was tired when she got home

8. she cooked

9. she didn’t go

10. she went to bed

11. she slept

VOCABULARY


Go out: ra ngoài chơi; tắt

STRUCTURES

S + V-ed/V2 +...

S + didn’t + V +...

ANSWER KEY

Ex4:

1. It was cloudy yesterday.

2. In 1990, we moved to another city./ We moved to another city in 1990.

3. When did you get the first gift?

4. She did not go to the church five days ago./ She didn’t go to the church five days

ago.

5. How was he yesterday?

6. Did Mrs. James come back home and have lunch late last night?

7. Were they happy last holiday?

8. How did you get there?

9. I played football last Sunday.

10. My mother made two cakes four days ago.

11. Tyler visited his grandmother last month.

12. Joni went to the zoo five days ago.

13. We had fun yesterday.

COLLOCATIONS

STRUCTURES

come back: quay trở lại S + V-ed/V2 +...

S + was/were +...

Did + S + V+...

Wh-word + did + S + V +...?

Ex5:

1. went

2. cooked

3. wrote

4. was tired

5. slept

6.studied

7.taught

8.wanted

9.spent

10.rang

VOCABULARY

wood /wʊd/: gỗ, củi

STRUCTURES

S + Ved/V2 +...

Bị động: S + was/were + Vp2 (+by) +...

Ex6:

Đoạn văn mô tả các hành động xảy ra liên tiếp trong quá khứ và đã kết thúc

=> Chia tất cả đáp án ở thì quá khứ đơn.

1. was

2. married

3. ordered

4. chased

5.took

6.lived

7.loved

8.told

9.changed

10.made

11.went

12.put

13.found

14.were

Continue...


ANSWER KEY

VOCABULARY

queen /kwiːn/: nữ hoàng

stepmother /ˈstɛpˌmʌðə/: mẹ kế

jealous /ˈʤɛləs/: ghen tuông, ghen tị

evil /ˈiːvl/: tà ác

refuge /ˈrɛfjuːʤ/: trốn, trú ẩn

dwarf /dwɔːf/: người lùn

dearly /ˈdɪəli/: thân yêu, tha thiết

the talking miror /ðə ˈtɔːkɪŋ ˈmɪrə/: tấm gương biết nói

witch /wɪʧ/: phù thuỷ

poisoned /ˈpɔɪznd/: bị nhiễm độc

disguise /dɪsˈgaɪz/: cải trang

tempt /tɛmpt/: cám dỗ

everlasting /ˌɛvəˈlɑːstɪŋ/: vĩnh hằng, vĩnh viễn

glass coffin /glɑːs ˈkɒfɪn/: quan tài thuỷ tinh

COLLOCATIONS

Pass away (Trang trọng hơn Die): Qua đời

Take refuge (with sb) in sth: Trốn (với ai) vào đâu đó

Live happily ever after (thành ngữ): Sống hạnh phúc mãi mãi về sau = Trăm

năm hạnh phúc

Dịch bài

Bạch Tuyết là con gái của một nữ hoàng xinh đẹp, người đã qua đời khi cô còn

nhỏ. Cha cô đã kết hôn một lần nữa, nhưng mẹ kế của cô gái đã rất ghen tị với cô

vì cô quá xinh đẹp.

Mụ nữ hoàng tà ác đã ra lệnh cho một thợ săn để giết Bạch Tuyết nhưng ông

không thể làm điều đó bởi vì cô ấy quá đáng yêu. Ông đuổi cô đi thay vào đó, cô

đã chạy trốn với bảy chú lùn trong ngôi nhà của họ ở trong rừng. Cô sống với các

chú lùn và chăm sóc họ và họ yêu cô tha thiết. Sau đó một ngày gương nói

chuyện nói với nữ hoàng ác ma rằng Bạch Tuyết vẫn còn sống. Bà đã thay đổi

mình thành một phù thủy và tạo ra một quả táo độc. Bà đã đi đến nhà các chú

lùn cải trang thành một bà già và cám dỗ nàng Bạch Tuyết ăn táo độc, đưa cô

vào một giấc ngủ vĩnh hằng.

Cuối cùng, một hoàng tử tìm thấy cô trong quan tài kính nơi các chú lùn đã đặt

cô và đánh thức cô dậy bằng một nụ hôn. Bạch Tuyết và hoàng tử đã kết hôn và

sống hạnh phúc mãi mãi về sau.



ANSWER KEY

Ex7:

1. I bought one yesterday.

2. I was/went there two years ago.

3. I did/finished it last night.

4. I sold it in June.

5. I broke a/the window a week ago.

STRUCTURES

S + V-ed/V2 +...

S + was/were +...

Ex8:

COLLOCATIONS

worry about: lo lắng về

angry with: giận dữ với

1. Where ______did she go________(she/ go) last summer holiday?

2. What _______did you do_______(you/ do) last month?

3. He _______worked_______(work) in a factory.

4. You _____didn't call_________(not/ call) your parents last night.

5. _______Did you wear_______(you/ wear) your pink dress?

6. He _____didn't read_________(not/ read) that story.

7. _______Did you go_______(you/ go) on Sunday morning?

8. ________Did she study______(she/ study) English last night?

9. _______Did we arrive_______(we/ arrive) last night?

10. Who _______did you meet_______(you/ meet) yesterday?

11. _____Did they come_____(they/ come) to the birthday party?

12. She ______didn't met________(not/ meet) her relatives.

13. _______Did she go_______(she/ go) to the cinema with you?

STRUCTURES

S + V-ed/V2 +...

S + was/were +...

S + didn't + V

Did + S + V+...

Wh-word + did + S + V +...

Ex9:

1. work -> working (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: At present).

2. are -> was (Fire là danh từ không đếm được, sau tobe lại là cụm one of the most

important inventions nên có thể dễ dàng nhận ra fire được dùng như danh từ số

ít).

3. was -> is (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: now-Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn. Dịch: Beyonce bây giờ đã

rất nổi tiếng trên toàn thế giới và cô ấy đã phát hành một số album trong sự

nghiệp ca hát của mình).

Continue...


ANSWER KEY

4.came -> will come (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: In the future-Thị tương lai đơn, không có

dự định trước nên không chắc chắn sẽ xảy ra).

5.since -> for (since+mốc thời gian, for+khoảng thời gian, a long time là một khoảng

thời gian, vì vậy chúng ta sử dụng for).

6.are->is (who là đại từ quan hệ thay thế cho my elder brother-danh từ số ít nên ta

phải dùng động từ tobe là is).

7.teaching -> taught (Mệnh đề sau là mệnh đề ở quá khứ, là thời điểm mà hành

động ở mệnh đề trước diễn ra, vì vậy mệnh đề trước cũng phải ở quá khứ).

8.achieved - has achieved (Dấu hiệu nhận biết: so far-Thì hiện tại hoàn thành).

9.am having -> had (Hành động diễn ra trong quá khứ là in November, 2013 và đã

kết thúc).

10.helped -> helps (Nhắc đến lợi ích của Smartphone đối với con người trong cuộc

sống ngày nay, vì vậy động từ của câu phải chia ở thì hiện tại, chủ ngữ là danh từ số

ít nên động từ thêm s).

VOCABULARY

brave /breɪv/: dũng cảm

freshmen /ˈfrɛʃmən/: sinh viên năm nhất

STRUCTURES

S + be(is, am ,are) + Ving+...

S + V(s/es) +...

S + be(is, am, are) +...

S + will + V +...

S + have/has + Vp2 +...

S + Ved/V2 +...

Ex10:

1.did

2.did

3.went

4.buy

5.bought

6.saw

7.see

8.do

9.went

10.took

11.eat

12.ate

13.enjoy

14.enjoyed

15.didn't

16.stayed

VOCABULARY

cough /kɒf/: ho

fever /ˈfiːvə/: sốt

COLLOCATIONS

Go out: ra ngoài

STRUCTURES

S + V-ed/V2 +...

S + was/were +...

Did + S + V+...

Wh-word + did + S + V +...

Đặng Thúy Nga

Ex 1:

1. At 8 o’clock yesterday evening, I was eating at a restaurant with my friend.

(Vào lúc 8 giờ tối hôm qua, tôi đang ăn ở một nhà hàng với bạn của tôi.)

2. At 5 o’clock last Monday, I was doing exercises.

( Lúc 5 giờ đồng hồ thứ Hai tuần trước, tôi đang tập thể dục.)

3 At 7:45 yesterday evening, I was meeting her at a coffee shop.

(7:45 tối hôm qua, tôi gặp cô ấy tại một quán cà phê.)

• Miêu tả hành động đang diễn ra tại một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ

S + was/were + V-ing

4. At 10.15 yesterday morning, They were waiting for the bus when the accident

happened.

(Lúc 10h15 sáng hôm qua, họ đang đợi xe buýt thì tai nạn xảy ra.)

When + QKĐ, QKTD (Sự kết hợp của QKĐ + QKTD diễn đạt hành động đang xảy ra

thì có hành động khác xen vào).

5. Matt phoned while we were eating.

( Matt gọi điện trong khi chúng tôi đang ăn.)

6. The doorbell rang while I was cooking.

(Chuông cửa vang lên khi tôi đang nấu ăn.)

Past continous

7. We saw an accident while we walking on the street.

(Chúng tôi đã nhìn thấy một vụ tai nạn khi chúng tôi đang đi bộ trên đường phố.)

8. Ann fell asleep while she was watching the film.

(Ann ngủ gật trong khi cô ấy đang xem phim.)

While + QKTD, QKĐ

Lưu ý: “while” thường dùng cho những hành động đang xảy ra trong một khoảng thời

gian kéo dài, còn “when” thường dùng cho những hành động xảy ra chen ngang tại một

mốc thời gian nhất định. Do vậy, “when” có thể dùng cho cả thì Quá khứ đơn và Quá

khứ tiếp diễn, nhưng “while” chỉ có thể dùng cho thì Quá khứ tiếp diễn.

9. Half an hour ago, While he was taking a bath, she was using the computer.

(Nửa giờ trước, Trong khi anh ấy đang tắm, cô ấy đang sử dụng máy tính.)

• Miêu tả hai hành động diễn ra đồng thời trong quá khứ

Trong câu xuất hiện trạng từ while + mệnh đề chia thì quá khứ tiếp diễn, ta

chia mệnh đề còn lại theo thì quá khứ tiếp diễn để diễn tả 2 hành động xảy ra cùng 1

lúc trong quá khứ

10. My dad was always complaining about my room when he got there.

(Bố tôi luôn phàn nàn về phòng của tôi khi ông ấy đến đó.)

• Miêu tả hành động lặp đi lặp lại trong quá khứ, thường mang tính phàn nàn.

Quá khứ tiếp diễn dùng với always.

Đặng Thúy Nga

EX2:

1. It was peaceful and the birds were singing.

(Thật bình yên và chim đang hót)

• Diễn đạt các hành động xảy ra liên tiếp trong quá khứ

2. I was washing my hair when the phone rang.

(Tôi đang gội đầu thì chuông điện thoại reo)

• Miêu tả hành động đang diễn ra thì có một hành động khác chen ngang

3. You didn’t come to the club last night.

(Bạn đã không đến câu lạc bộ hôm qua)

• QKĐ Diễn đạt một hành động xảy ra một, một vài lần hoặc chưa bao giờ xảy

ra trong quá khứ

4.It took ages to get home.

(Phải mất nhiều thời gian để về nhà)

• QKĐ điễn tả hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ

5. We tried to keep quite because the baby was sleeping.

( Chúng tôi đang cố giữ im lặng vì em bé đang ngủ)


6.As I was watching him, the man suddenly ran away.

(Khi tôi đang quan sát anh ta, người đàn ông đột ngột bỏ chạy.)

• Miêu tả hành động đang diễn ra thì có một hành động khác chen ngang

7. We passed a petrol-station five minutes ago.

(Chúng tôi đã đi qua một trạm xăng năm phút trước.)

• Diễn đạt một hành động xảy ra một, một vài lần hoặc chưa bao giờ xảy ra

trong quá khứ

8. Everything seemed OK.

• Mọi chuyện đã ổn và kết thúc trong quá khứ nên ta dùng quá khứ đơn

9. Where did you buy that bag?

• Một câu hỏi về chiếc túi được mua và điều này đã xảy ra trong quá khứ

10. When I heard the alarm, I left the room immediately.

(Khi tôi nghe thấy tiếng chuông báo động, tôi rời khỏi phòng ngay lập tức.)


Đặng Thúy Nga

EX3:

2. Peter was talking to the receptionist.

b, I opened my emails.

3. the trainee was cleaning the machine.

b, we had to close the factory down.

4. a, they were losing €300,000 a week.

b, they made everyone redundant.

• Past continuous: unfinished, ongoing action in the past (+finishes actions)

S + was/were + Ving

• Past simple: Completed actions in the past

S+V_ed/V_2

Ex 4:

2. knocked

(suddenly - đột nhiên: ta dùng quá khứ đơn vì là hành động xen vào).

3. made

(trong khi anh ấy đang làm việc cho Du Pont thì anh ấy sản xuất lô này-QKĐ để miêu tả

hành động xen vào)

4. was working

(While+QKTD)

5. was carrying

(hành động xảy ra đồng thời: Ông thực hiện nghiên cứu khí làm mát khi ông để một mẻ

trong thùng chứa qua đêm)

6. left

(hành động xảy ra đồng thời: Ông thực hiện nghiên cứu khí làm mát khi ông để một mẻ

trong thùng chứa qua đêm)

7. were testing

8. realized

(Các nhà khoa học tại phòng thí nghiệm Pfizer ở Anh thử nghiệm một loại thuốc tim mới có

tên là Viagra khi họ nhận thấy rằng)

Structures:

Ø When + QKĐ, QKTD

Ø While + QKTD, QKĐ.

Ø While + QKTD, QKTD

Collocations:

Complain about ST: phàn nàn về điều gì đó...

Come to: Kết quả là, dẫn tới, đưa tới

Take to SB/ST: Thực hiêṇ môṭ thói quen, bắt đầu thích ai đó hoặc thứ gì đó

Try to+Vinfinitive: Cố gắng để làm việc gì đó.

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 1: Complete the sentences

#answer key

1. The film will end at 10:30 pm.

2. Taxes will increase next month.

3. I will not remember your email address.

4. Why will you not lend me your car?

5. Will you open the window, please? I can’t reach.

6. The restaurant was terrible! I will not eat there again.

7. Jake will not ask his teacher for help.

8. I will try to help you.

9. Where is your ticket? The train will arrive any minute.

10. While the cat’s away, the mice will play.

#Detailed explanation: Như yêu cầu của đề bài : hoàn thành câu, chúng ta có

thể làm cách dễ dàng khi áp dụng công thức thì tương lai đơn để nói về những

điều sắp xảy ra. Công thức: S+will+ V0.

#Vocabulary:

-terrible (adj) /ˈterəbl/: very unpleasant; making you feel very unhappy, upset or

frightened

Dễ nhầm lẫn với "terrific" excellent; wonderful

#Structure:

S+will(not)+V0

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 2: Put the verbs in brackets according to the appropriate tense

#Detailed answer:

1. am flying- "tôi sẽ bay vào ngày mai" , đó là một kế hoạch đã được sắp xếp để

làm và có thời gian cụ thể, ta chọn thì hiện tại tiếp diễn để .

2. is the train pulling out. Câu có nghĩa là :" Xin chào , mấy giờ tàu khởi hành vào

buổi chiều vậy?" . Một kế hoạch được sắp xếp với khoảng thời gian cụ thể , ta sử

dụng thì hiện tại tiếp diễn.

3. Are you traveling. Nghĩa của câu :" Ngày mai mấy giờ bạn tới thủ đô nước Pháp

vậy" ? . Hành động tới Paris đã được sắp xếp và có thời gian , tương tự vậy ta sử

dụng cấu trúc thì hiện tại tiếp diễn

4. am going. Nghĩa của câu : "Tôi sẽ đi xem phim vào tối nay" . Cách áp dụng như

các câu trên , ta dễ dàng khi chọn thì hiện tại tiếp diễn

5. have. Hành động "ăn sáng vào 7h30" được ấn định như một bảng biểu, ta sử

dụng thì hiện tại đơn .

6. are going. Việc “ chúng ta đi chơi “ đã được sắp xếp vào thời gian là “ cuối tuần

này “ nên ta sử dụng thì hiện tại tiếp diễn

7. do they start to

8. opens/closes .” thư viện mở cửa vào 8h30 sáng và đóng cửa lúc 7h30 tối “ là

một thời gian biểu được ấn định, ta dùng thì hiện tại đơn

9. are having. Áp dụng chú ý khi sử dụng về thì hiện tại tiếp diễn để nói về tương

lai: hành động được sắp xếp ở một khoảng thời gian trong tương lai

#Structures:

-HTĐ: S+V(es,s)

-HTTD: S+tobe(am,is,are)+Ving

#Collocation:

-pull out(V) khởi hành

-go out (v) : đi chơi

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 3: Choose the future. Two people are travelling to a conference.

Read their conversation and circle the most appropriate future forms.

#Detailed answer:

1. It’s going to rain . (Chọn be going to thay vì will bởi vì câu dự đoán ấy dựa

vào thông tin mà người A có được khi nghe dự báo thời tiết.)

2. We’ll take . (Bởi hành động này được quyết định ngay tại thời điểm

nói.)

3. Leaves. (Sử dụng thì hiện tại đơn vì đó là một lịch trình ấn định

sẵn.)

4. I’ll make (Hành động được quyết định tại thời điểm nói.)

5. Are we going to do (Không chọn are we doing bởi hành động này chưa được

sắp xếp sẵn để làm.)

6. We’ll think (Hành động được quyết định tại thời điểm nói. Hơn thế,

“think” không chia được ở dạng tiếp diễn.)

7. I’ll go (Mặc dù có từ “now”-dấu hiệu của thì hiện tại tiếp diễn,

nhưng hành động “ go home” được quyết định tại thời điểm nói, chứ không phải

đã được sắp xếp để làm từ trước.)

8. I’ll see you (Hành động tự phát, ngay tại thời điểm nói.)

#Vocabulary:

-conference (n) hội nghị, cuộc họp

-Schedule (n) lịch trình

#Structures:

TLĐ: S+will+V0

TLG: S+tobe+ going to V0

HTĐ: S+V(s,es)

#Collocation:

-get up : thức dậy

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 4: Use the suggested words to write complete sentences

correction

#detailed answer:

1. If you don’t study hard, you won’t pass the final exam

Trong câu này, ta áp dụng thì tương lai đơn trong một đơn vị kiến thức rộng hơn là

câu điều kiện, cụ thể là câu điều kiện loại 1: Giả sử một việc có thể xảy ra ở hiện tại

hoặc tương lai

2. Will you come tomorrow?

Nghĩa câu:” bạn sẽ tới vào ngày mai chứ?”-Một câu hỏi tự phát tại thời điểm nói ta

dung thì tương lai đơn

3. If it’s rain, he will stay at home. –Ta áp dụng công thức câu điều kiện loại 1,sử

dụng thì tương lai đơn

4. I’m afraid she won’t be able to come to the party.- Nghĩa của câu :” Tôi sợ rằng cô

ấy sẽ không thể tới bữa tiệc”- Câu nói tự phát,sử dụng thì tương lai đơn

5. You look so tired, I will bring you something to eat. – Tương tự , ta dựa vào cách

dung thì tương lai đơn để hoàn thành câu.

#Structures:

-TLĐ : S+will+V0

-Câu điều kiện loại I: If+ S+V( hiện tại đơn ), S+will(not) +V0

t

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 5: Rewrite the following questions with be going to

#Answer key:

1 - Where are we going to eat tonight?

2 - What is he going to do tomorrow?

3 - What am I going to eat for lunch?

4 - Who are going to carry shopping for me?

5 - What time are you going to phone me?

6 - When are you going to give me present?

7 - How much longer is it going to take?

8 - Where is Paul going to sleep?

9 - Why are people going to go there?

10 - How much wine are they going to drink?

#Detailed explanation :

Theo đề bài ,ta thực hiện thao tác viết lại câu theo cấu trúc thì tương lai gần . Chỉ

cần lựa chọn động từ “tobe” phù hợp với chủ ngữ và đảo nó lên trước chủ ngữ.

#Structure:

Wh-word + tobe(am,is,are)+S+Ving?

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 6: Complete the following sentences:

#Answer Key:

1. will not be/ won't be

2. will not be take/ won't be take

3. will not do/ won't do

4. will not go/ won't go

5. will not pass/ won't pass

6. will not take/ won't take

7. will not buy/ won't buy

8. will not eat/ won't eat

9. will not snow/ won't snow

10. will not wait/ won't wait

#Detailed explanation : Để hoàn thành bài này, ta áp dụng công thức phủ định

của thì tương lai đơn . Chú ý : không viết “willn’t” mà viết “ will not “ hoặc “won’t”.

#Vocabulary :

-Afraid (v): e sợ

-Strike (v): to hit somebody/something hard or with force

#Structure :

TLĐ : S+will not (won’t)+V0

Exercise 7 . Make the future simple

#Answer key

1 - will get;

2 - will win;

3 - will come;

4 - will be;

5 - will be;

6 - will turn on;

7 - will come;

8 - will take;

9 - will feel;

10 - will be;

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

#Detailed answer:

Đề bài yêu cầu “Sử dụng thì tương lai đơn “. Vì thế, ta sẽ sử dụng cấu trúc

thì tương lai đơn xuyên suốt bài.

#Vocabulary:

-Conservative (adj): bảo thủ

-Election (n): cuộc bầu cử

#Structure:

TLĐ :S+will+V0

#Collocation:

-Turn on: bật lên

-take place: tổ chức

-Pass the exam: vượt qua bài kiểm tra

Exercise 8: Editing

#Detailed answer:

1. → willn’t won’t – đây là một điều chúng ta thường dễ nhầm lẫn ,thì hiện tại đơn

ở dạng phủ định sẽ viết là “will not” hoặc “ won’t”

2. → called call . – Dựa vào cấu trúc thì tương lai đơn : theo sau “will” là động từ

nguyên thể

3. Is → leaving leaves - chuyến bay khởi hành lúc 9h sáng là một lịch trình ấn định

,ta sử dụng thì tương lai đơn.

4. → go going -Áp dụng công thức thì tương lai gần

5. → cost will cost – điều “họ nghĩ” là một hành động tự phát tại thời điểm nói, nên

ta dùng thì tương lai đơn

6. probably → will will probably -áp dụng cách sắp xếp trật tự từ trong câu, nên

trạng từ sẽ đứng sau “will”.

7. → grew grow- Cấu trúc thì tương lai đơn

FUTURE

Nguyễn Thị Nga

ANSWER KEY

#DỊCH BÀI ĐỌC

Doanh nghiệp nào sẽ tạo ra nhiều việc làm nhất?

Bạn có đoán ra chuyến du hành vũ trụ không? Nếu vậy, Giáo sư Patrick Collin, giáo sư

kinh tế ở Nhật Bản, cũng đồng ý với bạn. Tại một bài giảng gần đây, anh ấy nói, “Sẽ

không lâu nữa mọi người sẽ gọi cho các đại lý du lịch của họ và đặt các chuyến bay

đến Mặt trăng. Tưởng tượng! Có, còn chỗ trên chuyến bay ngày mai đến Mặt trăng.

Xe rời đi lúc 9:00 sáng. Sắp đầy rồi nên vui lòng đến sớm để nhận phòng.

Tất nhiên, nhiều người không đồng ý với Collins. Họ cho rằng du hành vũ trụ tốn quá

nhiều chi phí và sẽ không có nhiều người đi du lịch. Họ cũng nghĩ rằng mọi người sẽ

không cảm thấy đủ an toàn để du hành vào không gian. Nhưng nghiên cứu của

Collins cho thấy rằng phần lớn mọi người nghĩ rằng sẽ đáng để tiết kiệm tiền của họ

để du hành vào không gian. Ông tuyên bố rằng mặc dù nó có thể sẽ bắt đầu như một

hoạt động dành cho một số người giàu, nhưng nó sẽ phát triển rất nhanh - giống như

ngành hàng không (máy bay) đã phát triển trong 100 năm qua. Sau tất cả, Collins

nhắc nhở chúng ta, anh em nhà Wright đã bay chiếc máy bay đầu tiên của họ vào

năm 1903.

#Vocabulary

-Astronaut (n):/ ˈæstrənɔːt/ phi hành gia

-Screwdriver (n): /ˈskruːdraɪvə(r)/ cái tua

vít

- Shuttle (n): /ˈʃʌtl/ con thoi

-Gravity (n): /ˈɡrævəti/ trọng lực

- Adventure (n): /ədˈventʃə(r)/ sự phiêu

lưu

#Structure:

• Thì tương lai đơn : S+ will/won’t + Vinf

• Thì tương lai gần : S+ be + going to + Vinf

#Collocation :

-check-in (n) kiểm tra kĩ lưỡng

-Majority of : đại đa số, phần lớn

-save one’s money: tiết kiệm tiền

-start out: bắt đầu làm gì

Nguyễn Thị Hồng Nhung-24A7511752

Vocabuliary Word form IPA Meaning

disrespectful

impairment

integrate

integrate

campaign

disability

deafen

(adj)

(n)

(v)

(n)

(n)

(v)

(v)

/ˌdɪsrɪˈspektfl/

/ɪmˈpeəmənt/

/ˈɪntɪɡreɪt/

/dəʊˈneɪt/

/kæmˈpeɪn/

/ˌdɪsəˈbɪləti/

/ˈdefn/

không tôn trọng

sự suy giảm

hòa nhập

quyên góp

chiến dịch

khiếm khuyết,

làm ai đó không

nghe được

Nguyễn Thị Hồng Nhung - 24A7511752

ANSWER

Ex 1:

1, you arrive

2, you’ve had

3, you’ve met

4, you aren’t working

5, you’re staying

6, you leave

Ex 2:

1,T

2, F (they haven’t tried Russian food)

3, T

4, F (they can’t speak French anymore)

5, F (A studied French for 5 years)

Ex 3:

1, have just came

2, have never been

3, Did

4, did

5, was

6, spent

Ex 4:

1, T

2, F (July has ridden a horse twice in her life)

3, F (Samantha could ride a horse very well)

4, T


Ex 11:

1, T

2, T

3, F (Amy were given a homework to interview an interesting person and then

translated it to Chinese)

4, F (Sophie’s mom had only won one earlier this year)

5, T


VOCABULARY

& STRUCTURE

VERB

- Volunteer / välənˈtir / : tình nguyện

- Explore /iks'plɔ:/ : khám phá

- Blast /blɑ:st/ : nổ

NOUN

- Conservation / känsərˈvāSH(ə)n / : bảo tồn

- Trip /trip/ : chuyến đi chơi

- Journey /'dʤə:ni/ : hành trình

- Arrangements /ə'reindʤmənt/ : sự sắp xếp

- Yogurt /yōɡərt/ : sữa chua

- Cabbage /kabij/ : bắp cải

- Noodle /ˈno͞ odl/ : mì

- Weather /'weθə/ : thời tiết

- Future /'fju:tʃə/ : tương lai

- Pyramid /'pirəmid/ : kim tự tháp

- Temple /'templ/ : ngôi đền

- Camel /'kæməl/ : lạc đà

- Desert /di'zə:t/ : sa mạc

- Architecture /'ɑ:kitektʃə/ : kiến trúc

ADJECTIVES

- International /,intə'næʃənl/ : quốc tế

- Delicious /di'liʃəs/ : thơm ngon

- Fantastic /fæn'tæstik/ : tuyệt vời

- Powerful /'pauəful/ : mạnh mẽ


KEYS FOR PRONOUNS EXERCISES

Exercise 1:

1. I, myself (chủ ngữ là I => đại từ phản thân là myself => Tôi tự mặc quần áo sáng

nay )

2. He, himself (chủ ngữ là He => đại từ phản thân là himself => Anh ấy đã tự tay làm

tất cả bữa sáng )

3. We, ourselves (chủ ngữ là We => ourselves => Chúng tôi phải tự nấu ăn… )

4. You, yourself (chủ ngữ là You => yourself => Khi bạn đi mua sắm cho tôi,hãy mua

một món quà cho chính bạn)

5. She, herself ( herself vì chủ ngữ là She => Cô ấy đã làm tất cả các đồ trang trí

Giáng sinh một mình)

6. The new robotic toys, themselves ( The new robotic toys là 1 cụm chủ ngữ dạng

số nhiều => themselves => Những đồ chơi robot mới có thể tự cất chúng đi)

7. They, themselves ( chủ ngữ là They => themselves => Họ từng quay camera trên

điện thoại để chụp ảnh mình)

8. The man, himself ( dùng himself vì chủ ngữ là the man => Người đàn ông nói

chuyện với chính mình khi đi bộ xuống phố)

9. The parrot, itself (chủ ngữ The parrot => itself => Con vẹt ngắm mình trong

gương mỗi ngày)

10. I, myself (chủ ngữ I => myself )

*Vocabulary:

parrot (n) /'pærət/ con vẹt

knit (v) /nit/ đan len

*Collocations:

-dress=put on clothes: mặc quần áo

-make dinner: làm bữa tối

+ make a mess : làm bẩn

+ make a mistake : tạo lỗi

+ make plans: lập kế hoạch

+ make a decision: đưa ra quyết định


Exercise 2

1.a. each other ( Ở đây chỉ sự yêu thương lẫn nhau )

2.b. each other ( Họ nói chuyện với nhau, không phải tự nói với chính mình )

3.b. themselves

( Dựa vào nghĩa arrogant: ngạo mạn -> anh ấy và vợ chỉ yêu bản thân mình -> dùng

themselves để chỉ bản thân họ )

4.a. himself ( dùng himself chỉ bản thân John tự nướng bánh )

5.b. ourselves

( Ở đây chúng ta không cần sự trợ giúp nào nên tự bản thân chúng ta làm việc đó ->

dùng ourselves )

6.a. each other

(Theo nghĩa câu gốc tôi và bạn gái đều hiểu nhau -> dùng each other để chỉ sự thấu

hiểu lẫn nhau )

7.a. herself ( dùng herself để chỉ bản thân chị gái tôi dính vào rắc rối )

8.b. herself

( Họ ở nhà của chính họ, không phải ở nhà của nhau -> dùng themselves chỉ bản thân

họ)

9.a. each other

( Theo nghĩa câu gốc, cả hai người Mary và Tom đều không thích nhau -> dùng each

other để diễn tả điều đó )

10.b. themselves

( Theo nghĩa câu gốc Mary và Tom đều không thích bản thân họ -> dùng themselves để

diễn tả điều đó )

*Vocabulary

arrogant

bake

adj /ˈær.ə.ɡənt/ kiêu ngạo

v /beɪk/ nướng,hầm, hấp

*Structure

be + in love: phải lòng ai đó

get + someone + in trouble: gặp phải rắc rối

be + at home: ở nhà

Hồ Lan Phương

Exercise 3

1. each other ( chỉ hành động trao nhẫn cho nhau của Maria và Juan )

2. himself ( chủ ngữ ở đây là He => dử dụng himself => Anh ấy muốn gây ấn

tượng với cô ấy, vì vậy anh ta đã tự nướng một chiếc bánh)

3. one another ( chủ ngữ là The defendants ( những tên tội phạm ) => có

nhiều chủ thể (>2 đối tượng) nên sử dụng one another )

4. herself ( dùng herself vì chủ ngữ là Jennifer =>Jennifer tự mình làm việc

nhà….)

5. itself ( chủ ngữ là That car đã xác định => itself => Chiếc xe đó ở trong lớp

học tất cả vì chính nó)

6. ourselves ( dùng ourselves vì chủ ngữ là we => Chúng tôi không cần phải

đi ra ngoài,chúng ta có thể tự mình sửa bữa tối)

7. each other ( dùng each other vì chỉ có 2 chủ thể Terry và Jack => hành

động nói chuyện với nhau của 2 người ở hành lang)

8. one another ( chủ ngữ là The kids có nhiều hơn 2 người nên sử dụng one

another )

9. yourselves ( dùng yourselves vì chủ ngữ là you (hủ thể là những đối tượng

trẻ )

10. one another ( chủ ngữ là the students có số lượng nhiều người => dùng

one another)

*Vocabulary:

defendant (n) /di'fendənt/ người bị kiện ( có tội)

impress (v) /im'pres/ gây ấn tượng

hallway (n) /'hɔ:lwei/ hành lang

*Collocations:

-bake a cake : nướng bánh

=make a cake

-blame sb for st : đổ lỗi cho ai về cái gì

-do chores: làm việc nhà

-kick the ball: đá bóng


Exercise 4:

1. shaving

Decide to V: quyết định làm gì

Grow a beard: nuôi râu

Feed up with: chán ngấy với cái gì

Shave: cạo (râu, lông, tóc)

Dịch nghĩa: Anh ấy đã quyết định nuôi râu

vì anh ấy đã chán ngấy với việc cạo chúng.

2. feel

Feel much better: cảm thấy tốt hơn

Dịch nghĩa: Hôm qua tôi không được khỏe nhưng hôm nay, tôi cảm thấy tốt

hơn nhiều rồi.

3. dried myself

Climb out of something: trèo khỏi, ra khỏi cái gì

Towel: khăn tắm

Dịch nghĩa: Tôi ra khỏi bể bơi và lau khô người bằng khăn tắm.

4. concentrate

Concentrate: tập trung

Dịch nghĩa: Tôi đã cố gắng để học nhưng tôi không thể tập trung được.

5. defend yourself

Defending yourself: tự vệ, bảo vệ bản thân

Attack someone/something: tấn công ai/cái gì

Dịch nghĩa: nếu ai đó tấn công bạn, bạn cần phải có khả năng tự vệ.

6. meeting

Go out: ra ngoài, đi chơi

Meet: gặp mặt

Dịch nghĩa: tôi sẽ đi chơi với Chris chiều nay, chúng tôi sẽ gặp mặt nhau lúc 7.30

7. relax

Rush around: hối hả, vội vã

Sit down: ngồi xuống

Relax: thư giãn

Why don’t you + V: câu gợi ý

Dịch nghĩa: bạn cứ luôn luôn hối hả tất bật vậy. Sao không ngồi xuống và thư giãn

8. wash

Wash: rửa

Dịch nghĩa: không có nước, vì vậy chúng tôi không thể rửa ráy.


Exercise 5:

2. yourself ( mệnh đề when chỉ you -> dùng yourself để bổ nghĩa cho “you” trong

mệnh đề when )

3. one another ( colleagues số nhiều -> trong câu có nhiều hơn 2 người -> dùng

one another chỉ sự yêu thích lẫn nhau giữa “my colleagues and I” )

4. myself ( dùng myself là đại từ phân thân bổ nghĩa cho “I” )

5. themselves ( dùng themselves để chỉ employees -> Những người làm công tạo

ra nhiều quyết định chính sách cho bản thân họ )

6. each other’s ( dùng each other chỉ sự đồng ý lẫn nhau của 2 người quản lý -> sau

chỗ trống là 1 danh từ -> thêm sở hữu cách -> dùng each other’s )

7. by yourself ( work by yourself: làm việc một mình )

8. himself ( dùng himself để bổ nghĩa cho CEO -> Bản thân giám đốc tham gia tất

cả cuộc họp )

9. ourselves ( bổ nghĩa cho we -> Chúng tôi cảm thấy tốt về bản thân và những việc

chúng tôi làm cho công ty )

10. by yourself ( dùng yourself bổ nghĩa cho “you”, đằng trước có 1 động từ ->

thêm by -> chọn by yourself -> Bạn có nghĩ việc ủy quyền hay tự làm nhiệm vụ sẽ

nhanh hơn không ? )

*Vocabulary:

colleague (n) /ˈkɒliːg/ đồng nghiệp

policy (n) /ˈpɒlɪsi/ chính sách

department (n) /dɪˈpɑːtmənt/

phạm vi, lĩnh vực

proposal (n) /prəˈpəʊzəl/ đề nghị

socially (adv) /ˈsəʊʃəli/ về mặt xã hội

delegate (n;v) /ˈdɛlɪgeɪt/ ủy quyền

*Collocation

find it + adj: cảm thấy như thế nào

make + a ( lot of ) decision: tạo ra (nhiều) quyết định

agree + with: đồng ý với

prefer + to V: thích cái gì

Hồ Lan Phương

Exercise 6:

myself

Jan’s birthday was Wednesday. And I forgot to call him. I reminded me all day,

and then I forgot anyway! I felt terrible. My sister Anna said, “ Don’t be so

yourself

hard on yourselves” but I didn’t believe her. She prides herself on remembering

everything. Then I remembered the article on self-talk. It said

themselves

that people can change the way they explain problems to theirselves. Well, I

myself

listened to the way I talked to me, and it sounded really insulting-like the way

our high school math teacher used to talk us. I thought, Jan and I are good

other

me

friends, and we treat each others well. In fact, he forgave myself for my

mistake right away. And I forgave him for forgetting our dinner date two

each other

weeks ago. Friends can forgive themselves, so I guess I can forgive myself.

1.me => myself (ở đây chỉ có một chủ thể là “ tôi")

2.yourselves=> yourself

+yourselves được sử dụng như tân ngữ của động từ hoặc giới từ, đề cập đến những

người được nói đến, được đề cập trước đó.

+yourself : Bản thân của bạn (số ít).

=> Trong câu trên, nhắc đến một đối tượng duy nhất là “ tôi” nên ta phải dùng yourself

3.theirselves=> themselves

4.me=> myself ( Chủ thể là “tôi”: tôi nói với chính mình)

5.others => other Không có each others, ở đây ta dùng “ each other” ( vì có 2 người là Jan

và tôi): với nhau => chúng tôi đối xử tốt với nhau

6.myself=> me: người thực hiện hành động là “ anh ấy” vậy nên ta không được dùng

"myself" và phải thay thành "me"-đối tượng bị tác động.

Dịch: thực tế, anh ấy đã tha thứ lỗi lầm của tôi ngay lập tức.

7.themselves => each other

Đại từ phản thân (Reflexive pronoun) là đại từ được dùng khi chỉ chủ ngữ trong câu thực

hiện hoạt động nào chịu sự tác động hay ảnh hưởng từ chính bản thân họ.

=> Nếu dùng themselves thì câu sẽ có nghĩa :những người bạn có thể tha thứ chính bản

thân họ.=> không hợp lý về nghĩa.

Đại từ đối ứng (reciprocal pronoun) là đại từ thể hiện hành động hoặc mối quan hệ lẫn

nhau. Và trong câu đang nói đến " Jan và tôi" - friends => dùng " each other"

=> Câu sẽ có nghĩa là: những người bạn có thể tha thứ cho nhau.


Exercise 7

1 C. him-> himself ( do ở đây chỉ có một người thực hiện hành động là " the boy" )

2. B. ourselves-> us

(take st/ sb for granted – xem ai/ cái gì là điều hiển nhiên )

3. D. me -> myself

( make oneself understood: làm ai hiểu ra vấn đề)

4.A. formally -> formerly

Dịch: mặc dù trước đây là những người bạn thân, nhưng họ đã trở nên xa lạ với nhau

bởi một số hiểu lầm đáng tiếc.

Căn cứ vào cách dùng từ ta thấy A sai . Vì theo nghĩa như câu gốc sẽ không phù hợp

với ngữ cảnh và ngữ nghĩa

Note : 2 từ dễ gây nhầm lẫn

Formally (adv): trang trọng

Formerly (adv): cũ, trước đây

5. D themselves-> each other ( Trong câu này có 2 người thực hiện hành động tác

động qua lại lẫn nhau là " she and her husband"=> ta phải dùng each other.

6. B. with ourselves -> together

Nghĩa gốc của câu: chúng tôi đã học cấp ba cùng nhau.

=>Sai vì with ourselves là với bản thân nhau , tức là tôi đi học vs bản thân tôi, cô ấy

đi học với bản thân cô ấy.

=> Để đúng với nghĩa gốc của câu ta phải dùng " Together: cùng nhau"

7. C. one another -> each other

( Câu này có 2 người là ông và bà tôi tác động qua lại , nên ta phải dùng each other )

8. D. one another -> each other ( câu này có 2 đối tượng tác động qua lại là she

và her man)

9.C. themselves-> each other

Nghĩa gốc: Hai sinh viên đã đấu tay đôi bằng súng lục được nạp đạn. Tôi nghĩ họ sẽ

giết nhau nhưng may mắn thay cuối cùng không có chuyện gì xảy ra.

+Nếu dùng “ themselves” thì câu này sẽ có nghĩa là họ sẽ giết “ chính họ” => tự sát

=> sai nghĩa=> dùng "each other" để thể hiện sự tác động lẫn nhau giữa 2 đối

tượng.

10. C. the others-> each other/ one another

Nghĩa gốc:Thông qua mạng lưới xã hội truyền thông, mọi người có thể kết nối với nhau

trên toàn thế giới.

" the others": những người còn lại => sai nghĩa câu.

=> Vì số lượng người không xác định ta có thể dùng " each other" hoặc " one

another"

11.A. harshly -> severly ( severly/ extremely improverished : cực kì nghèo khổ )


*Collocation:

*Vocabulary

-Out of danger : thoát khỏi nguy hiểm

- Take sb/st for granted:coi ai cái gì là điều hiển nhiên.

- Make oneself understood: làm ai hiểu ra vấn đề.

- Bitter quarrel: tranh cãi nảy lửa.

-Loaded pistols: súng đã nạp đạn.

-Severly/ extremely improverished : cực kì nghèo khổ

Formally adv /ˈfɔː.məli/ trang trọng, chính thức

Formerly adv /ˈfɔː.mə.li/ cũ, trước đây

Pistol n /ˈpɪs.təl/ súng lục

Harshly adv /ˈhɑːʃ.li/ khắc nghiệt, nghiêm khắc

Impoverished adj /ɪmˈpɒv.ər.ɪʃt/ bần cùng, nghèo nàn, suy nhược

Exercise 8:

1: She poured herself some tea.

2: We bought ourselves a van.

3: You must go by yourselves.

4: Peter builds himself a hut.

5: Did you paint it yourself?

6: I carried this box myself.

7: Alan was proud of himself.

8: The fire went out by itself.

9. They cooked it themselves.

10. Fiona lives there by herself.

Exercise 9:

1: Mike and Bill know each other quite well.

2: Sue and Lisa haven’t seen each other for ages.

3: Peggy and Jane made this delicious cake themselves.

4: Grandpa constructed this desk himself.

5: Can we sell the things we made ourselves?

6: The little girl can already ride the tri-cycle herself

7: Laura and Betty are helping each other with their homework.

8: Some people only think of themselves.

9: John and his girlfriend are still angry.

They are not talking to each other.

10: Does the laptop switch off itself automatically?



Exercise 10:

1: They should be really proud of themselves.

(Chắc hẳn là họ sẽ rất tự hào về nhau).

Ở đây phải dùng themselves vì chỉ nhiều người (the guys), không thể dùng

each other vì each other chỉ dùng để chỉ 2 người tác động qua lại với nhau.

VD: Mike and Jane are talking to each other.

2: You know Ed blames himself for everything.

(Bạn phải biết là Ed tự nhận mọi lỗi lầm về mình).

Ở trường hợp này ta có thể thấy rõ Ed tự trách móc bản thân và nhân mọi

lỗi lầm về mình, vậy nên ta phải dùng himself.

3: Are you going by yourself or with a tour?

(Bạn đi một mình à hay đi theo tour?).

Do ở đây chỉ một người nên dùng yourself (không dùng yourselves vì

yourselves dùng để chỉ 2 người trở lên).

4: Megan keeps asking herself if she can do the job.

(Megan liên tục tự hỏi bản thân rằng cô ấy có thể làm được công việc này

không).

Vì ở đây Megan đang tự hỏi bản thân mình nên dùng herself.

5: In our department, we're still teaching ourselves how to use it.

(Ở trong phòng của chúng tôi, chúng tôi vẫn đang chỉ cho nhau cách sử dụng

nó).

Ở đây dùng ourselves vì chỉ nhiều người, vì each other dùng chỉ 2 người tác

động qua lại.

6: I'm glad you enjoyed yourself.

(Tôi mừng là bạn đã có thể tận hưởng).

Do ở đây nhắc tới 1 người nên dùng yourself.


Exercise 11:

Mrs.Nadia: Good morning! You are our new neighbor, right?

Mrs. Meriam: Good Morning! Yeah, I have just moved here. Let’s me introduce (1)

myself. My name is Meriam. I live with my husband, my daughter and my lovely cat

Mino. Can you introduce (2) yourself ?

Mrs. Nadia: Sure. My name is Nadia. I am teacher of English. I have one daughter,

she is 5 years old.

Mrs. Meriam: Great! You're teacher of English. I really love English. By the way, our

children can be friends because my daughter is five too. They can play and enjoy (3)

themselves.

Mrs.Nadia:

Sure. It’ll be a good idea.

Mrs.Meriam: I’m a doctor by the way. So if you need anything, just call me.

Mrs. Nadia:

Wow!!! You're a doctor. That’s amazing. You must be busy all the

time. I know how hard is your job.

Mrs.Meriam: Sometimes I don’t have time to do the housework, but my husband

is so helpful. He sometimes cooks or does the dishes by(4) himself.

Mrs.Nadia:

Yeah. It is so hard being a working, mum. We take care of everyone in

the house and we forget to take care of (5) ourselves.

Mrs: Meriam: I agree. You know....


Exercise 12:

2. myself ( dùng myself để chỉ đại từ I - tự bản thân George điều hành lớp học )

3. one another ( ở đây đang nói về sự học hỏi lẫn nhau giữa “my students and I”

-> nhiều hơn 2 người -> dùng one another )

4. yourself ( ở đây George đang dặn dò học trò của mình -> đây là câu trực tiếp

nên dùng yourself để chỉ “students” )

5. one another ( đằng sau chỗ trống có sở hữu cách -> có 2 sự lựa chọn: each

other hoặc one another -> ở đây George đang nhắc nhở chung các học sinh nên

nhiều hơn 2 người -> dùng one another )

6. itself ( dùng itself để chỉ “subject” - 1 danh từ chỉ vật )

7. themselves ( dùng themselves để chỉ “students” - danh từ chỉ người số nhiều )

8. himself ( dùng himself để chỉ John )

*Vocabulary:

lay off (v) /leɪ/ /ɒf/ từ bỏ

discipline (n;v) /ˈdɪsɪplɪn/ kỷ luật

interfere (v) /ˌɪntəˈfɪə/ can thiệp vào

encourage (v) /ɪnˈkʌrɪʤ/ khích lệ

give up (v) /gɪv/ /ʌp/ từ bỏ

for instance (adv) /fɔːr/ /ˈɪnstəns/

loaf-loaves (n) /ləʊf/ - /ləʊvz/

ví dụ như

ổ bánh

self-talk (n) /sɛlf-tɔːk/ tự nói với bản thân

*Structure

help + somebody + V: giúp ai đó làm gì

encourage + to + V: khích lệ

how + to + V: cách làm gì đó

Hồ Lan Phương

Exercise 13:

2. Nobody. He cuts it himself

Dịch nghĩa: không ai, anh ấy tự cắt tóc.(không có ai cắt cho anh ấy)

3. No, I’ll post/do it myself

Dịch nghĩa: không, tôi sẽ tự làm nó. (nhân vật “tôi” muốn tự làm, không cần đến sự

giúp đỡ)

4. Linda told me herself/ Linda herself told me/ Linda did herself

Dịch nghĩa: Linda tự nói với tôi.

5. Why can’t you phone him yourself?/do it yourself?

Dịch nghĩa: sao bạn không tự gọi cho anh ấy.

Collocaction & Strucrure

Why dont you + V: câu gợi ý

Want sb to do st: muốn ai làm gì

Go away: biến mất, rời khỏi nhà để đi đến nơi nào đó

Exercise 14:

Because of what you see in the picture, the answers are:

1.Sara bought herself a new dress.

(Sara đã mua cho mình một chiếc váy mới)

2.Tom cut his beard by himself.

(Tom đã tự cạo râu)

3.Sara smiled at herself in the mirror.

(Sara đã mỉm cười với bản thân trong gương)

4.Tom talked to himself in the mirror.

(Tom đã nói chuyện với chính mình trong gương)

5.Tom and Sara talked to each other.

(Tom và Sara đã trò chuyện với nhau)

6.Sara drove by herself.

(Sara đã tự lái xe)

7.Tom and Sara greeted each other.

(Tom và Sara đã chào hỏi nhau)

8.Tom and Sara introduced themselves to each other.

(Tom và Sara đã giới thiệu bản thân cho nhau)

Collocation:

Smile at: mỉm cười về ai/điều gì

Talk to someone: nói với ai

Introduce to someone: giới thiệu với ai


KEYS FOR PHRASAL VERBS EXERCISES

Exercise 1:

1.called....up : gọi / liên lạc với ai đó

2.get through : liên lạc được

3. calling....back :gọi lại/liên lạc lại với ai đó

4. looking for :tìm kiếm

5.get on with: get on well with -có mối quan hệ tốt với ai

6.ran out of: cạn kiệt

7. do…over: hoàn thành

8. put up with: chịu đựng

9. stressing....out: áp lực

10.taking up: bắt đầu làm

11.make....through: giải quyết một vấn đề khó khăn

12.stay up: thức khuya

13.hand....in: nộp, trình bày công việc

14.ended up: kết thúc, chấm dứt

Exercise 2:

1.put off – postpone ( trì hoãn)

3.look up – check (kiểm tra)

5.carry on -continue (tiếp tục)

2.call off – cancel (hủy bỏ)

4.go off – explode (phá hủy/ nổ)

6.turn off – switch off (tắt/ dừng hoạt động)


Exercise 3:

1.take off

remove st = take off st :cởi bỏ ( ở đây take off có nghĩa là cởi một cái gì đó )

2.look after

take care of sb = look after sb: chăm sóc ai đó

3.find out

discover st = find out st: tim ra cái gì đó

4.try on

see if it fits = try on: thử một cái gì đó

5.hurry up

be quick=hurry up : nhanh lên!

6.sit down

take a seat = sit down : ngồi xuống

7.get on

enter = get on: lên xe,tàu,máy bay

8.look up

consult a dictionary=look up: tìm kiếm/ tra từ điển

9.fill in

complete=fill in: hoàn thành

10.put out

extinguish=put out :làm phiền/ gây rắc rối


Exercise 4:

1.A

Try to find = look for: tìm kiếm


Take over: tiếp quản, đảm nhận

2. C

alone = By myself: một mình

On purpose: có mục đích

As usual: như bình thường

3. B

rise = get up: đi lên, đứng lên,..

Lie down: nằm xuống

Sit down: ngồi xuống

4. C

remove = take out: bỏ đi, cho ra ngoài

Pick out: lựa chọn, nhận dạng

Take over: đảm nhận, tiếp quản

6.A

place st/sb on = put on: đặt trên, mặc

take out: đưa ra cho ra ngoài

sit down: ngồi xuống

7. C

don't hurry = take your time: thong thả

get off: xuống tàu, xe

lie down: nằm

8. B

go on a date with = go out with: hẹn hò đi

chơi

get along with: có mối quan hệ tốt với ai

stand up: đứng dậy

9.B

accosiated well with = get along with

calling on: yêu cầu xin giúp đỡ

taking over: đảm nhận tiếp quản

5. C

deliberatly = on purpose: thận trọng

all day long: cả ngày

making a difference: cải thiện, thành công

10.B

succeed in = make a difference to

getting on with: có mối quan hệ tốt với ai

picking out: lựa chọn hoặc nhận dạng


Exercise 5

In Eloy Rodriguez's elementary school in Edinburg, Texas, teachers passed

chicano students over for special honors classes, They also punished them for

speaking Spanish. When Rodriguez became the first U.S.-born Chicano biology

instructor' at his university, he worked 18 hours a day and slept in his lab. "I was

very aware that I was the first this, and the first that, and I knew that some

people were waiting for me to slip up." Rodriguez didn't slip up. However, he

knows that when students feel teachers don't treat them fairly it turns them off

education, Many of them just give up.

Today, Dr. Rodriguez is passing his own success on.When he became a

professor at Cornell University, he set out to find Latino graduate students. He

takes these students with him on many of his trips and works hard to turn them

into top scientists. In 1990 he set up KIDS (Kids Investigating and Discovering

Science)—a science program for minority elementary school children. They put on

white lab coats and investigate science with university teachers who treat them

like research scientists. They observe nature and figure out problems.In interviews,

Rodriguez always brings up role models "I saw my first snowflake before I saw my

first Chicano scientist," he says. Because of Rodriguez's efforts, many students

will not face the same problem.

1.F (In Eloy Rodriguez’s elementary school in Edinburg, Texas, teachers passed

Chicano students over for special honors classes: Tại trường tiểu học của Eloy

Rodriguez ở Edinburg, Texas, giáo viên không cho những học sinh Chicano vào

các lớp học danh dự đặc biệt ) => sai " chose: đã chọn"

2.T (When Rodriguez became the first U.S.-born Chicano biology instructor at his

university,.... and I knew that some people were waiting for me to slip up." :một

số người đang mong chờ tôi mắc sai lầm)=> đúng

3.T (...... when students feel teachers don't treat them fairly it turns them off

education, Many of them just give up. : điều đó khiến cho họ không còn hứng

thú học tập, nhiều người trong số họ đã lựa chọn bỏ học)

=> Đúng "makes students less interested in education "= it turn them off


4.F( Today, Dr. Rodriguez is passing his own success on : bây giờ, Tiến sĩ Rodriguez

đang tiếp nối sự thành công của mình ) => sai " forget": quên"

5.T ( When he became a professor at Cornell University, he set out to find Latino

graduate students)=> đúng

6.F ( In 1990 he set up KIDS : anh ấy đã thành lập KIDS năm 1990 )

=> sai " visited" vì anh ấy đã thành lập ra chương trình KIDS không phải " đã

thăm "

7.T ( They put on white lab coats and investigate science with university teachers who

treat them like research scientists : Họ mặc áo khoác phòng thí nghiệm và nghiên

cứu khoa học với các giảng viên, những người đối xử với họ như các nhà nghiên

cứu khoa học) => đúng

8.F ( Rodriguez always brings up role models....: Rodrifuez luôn đề cao những tấm

gương tốt...) => sai " rarely : hiếm khi"

*Phrasal verbs:

Pass sb/st over: lơ đi/ không chú ý /bỏ qua ai , cái gì.

Slip up = make a mistake : mắc lỗi

Turn sb off : làm ai sao nhãng, mất hứng thú.

Give up: từ bỏ

Set out : bắt đầu một cuộc hành trình

phô bày , để lộ

sắp xếp, tổ chức

Turn sb/st into sb/st: biến thành/ trở thành ai đó/ cái gì

Set up : thành lập, khởi nghiệp

Put on : mặc / tăng cân

Figure out: chỉ ra

Bring up : nuôi nấng / đề cập, nói đến

*Vocabulary

Elementary

adj

/ˌel.ɪˈmen.tər.i/

instructor n /ɪnˈstrʌk.tər/

Snowflake n /ˈsnəʊ.fleɪk/

cơ bản, sơ đẳng, cơ sở

giảng viên, người dạy

bông tuyết

White lab coats np áo khoác trắng phòng thí nghiệm


Exercise 6

1 C turn the clock back: quay ngược thời gian.

2 B

- take it for granted that: cho việc gì xảy ra là điều tất nhiên, hiển nhiên. (it trong

cấu trúc này là cố định)

- take sth into account: xem xét điều gì

- take sth into consideration: xem xét kỹ điều gì

- take it easy: cứ thoải mái đi, bình tĩnh lại.

3 A trade sth1 in for sth2: mua đồ mới (sth2) bằng cách các thêm đỗ cũ (sth1 )

4 D persist in sth: kiên quyết trong việc gì

5 D knock down sth: tháo dỡ, phá hủy (nhà cửa, công trình xây dựng)

6 A

- catch sight of: bắt gặp, thoáng thấy. (hợp nghĩa của câu)

- keep an eye on: theo dõi, để mắt

- pay attention to: chú ý đến

- lose touch with: mất liên lạc với

7 C send for sb: gọi ai đến (thường là thợ sửa chữa, bác sĩ......)

8 D keep up with: bắt kịp, theo kịp.

9 D run out: hết sạch, cạn kiệt.

10 B save for a rainy day: dành dụm, tiết kiệm cho thời kỳ khó khăn.

11 B cool off: làm mát, trở nên mát mẻ

- cụm này hiếm nhưng dựa vào swim - lake mà cool là “mát” thì đánh bài liều xem !

12 B for the time being: tạm thời trong thời gian ngắn.

13 B sit for + exam: đi thi.

14 C make yourself at home :cứ tự nhiên như ở nhà !

15 B come between: xen vào, cản trở ai không làm được gì.

(có X and Y thì đoán là between :3 )

16 D break out: nổ ra, xảy ra (chiến tranh, bệnh tật).

17 C speed up: tăng tốc, đi nhanh.

18 B. take in: hiểu.

19 B

- make ends meet: kiếm đủ sống

- tighten the belt: tiêu ít tiền hơn, giảm chi tiêu

- call it a day: dừng xong việc và nghỉ ngơi, không làm nữa, bỏ lại.

20 B .come down with + bệnh: bị dính bệnh (nhẹ).


Exercise 7:

1.break out: xảy ra một cách đột ngột, bùng nổ,nổ ra

2.look forward to: mong chờ

3.run out: hết,cạn kiệt

4.keep up: tiếp tục

5.called off: hủy bỏ

6. put up with: chịu đựng với ai/cái gì

7. made up:bịa ra 1 câu chuyện nào đó

8. carried away: ở đây có nghĩa là hào hứng với cái gì

9. do without: không thể làm việc gì mà không có một thứ gì đó ( thường dùng với

câu phủ định)

10.passed away: mất, không còn,qua đời


Exercise 8:

1.Can you come up with a better idea?

• come up: nảy lên ( ý tưởng )

2. She pointed out that the shops would already be closed.

• point out: chỉ ra

3. I wish I hadn’t taken on so much work!

• take on: tiếp quản

4. I went out for dinner with my husband last night.

• go out: ra ngoài

5. He came into the kitchen and made some tea

• come into: thừa kế

6. Where did you grow up?

• grow up: lớn lên

7. I’d love to set up my own business.

• set up: thành lập

8. I really want to get out of this office and go for a walk.

• get out: ra khỏi

9. As I arrived, he came out of the door.

• come out: xuất hiện

10. She picked up some dinner on the way home

• pick up: hái/nhặt/lấy

11. Could you find out what time we need to arrive?

• find out: tìm hiểu

1. a. got up quickly: thức dậy rất nhanh

(ở đây get up được hiểu là thức dậy).

12. I thought the conference was going to be boring but it turned out to be quite

useful.

• turn out: chuyển thành

13. What time did you come back yesterday?

• come back: quay lại

14.She came out of the café and put on her gloves.

• come out: xuất hiện

15. A performance is going on at the moment.

• go on: xảy ra

Exercise 9:

Hồ Lan Phương

2. a. jumped into the shower: đi tắm

(jump into được hiểu là hành động một cách nhanh chóng, không suy nghĩ).

3. a. put on my clothes: mặc quần áo.

4. c. put together a quick breakfast: làm một bữa sáng nhanh chóng

(put toghether ở đây được dùng theo nghĩa là bỏ vào với nhau).

5. b. put out the rubbish: đổ rác

(put out ở đây được hiểu là bỏ ra ngoài, trong trường hợp này là đổ rác).

6. c. drop it in the correct bins: đặt nó vào đúng thùng

(ở đây chỉ việc bỏ rác vào đúng thùng quy định).

7. c. put away the rubbish: đổ rác

(put away cũng dùng để ám chỉ việc bỏ ra, ở đây dùng chỉ việc bỏ rác ra ngoài).

8. b. made up my plan: lên kế hoạch

(made up: tự làm nên cái gì đó).

9. a. carry out: để làm

(do ở đây ám chỉ rằng có nhiều việc cần làm).

10. b. call him back: gọi lại cho anh ấy.

11. c. look into it: tìm hiểu về nó

(look into = investigate = tìm hiểu).

Vocabulary:

quickly (adv): nhanh chóng

rubbish (n): rác

bins (n): thùng rác

carry (v): mang vác, gánh vác

investigate (v): đầu tư


Exercise 10:

John and David’s flight home from Amsterdam were at nine in the morning. They

had arranged to meet with John’s friend Mark at half-past six but Mark arrived at

the hotel almost half an hour late – that, however, was just the beginning of their

problems. On the way from the hotel to the airport, their car (1) broke down in the

middle of a busy intersection, causing a traffic jam. Then, David realized that he had

left his mobile phone in the hotel, but it was too late for them to (2) turn back

When they arrived at the airport, they had just enough time to (3)check-in, go

through passport control and security check, and (4) get on . the plane. The plane

(5) took off very shortly after that and eight hours later, they landed in New York,

but they couldn’t (6) get off the plane because there was a problem on the runway.

They felt a jet lag and finally, forty-five minutes after landing, they (7) got off.

*Vocabulary:

busy intersection (N.p) ngã tư, ngã ba đông đúc người qua lại

security (n) /si'kjuərəti/ an ninh, sự bảo mật

runway (n) /'rʌnwei/ đường băng

jet lag (n) /'dʒet læg/ sự mệt mỏi sau một chuyến bay dài

*Phrasal verbs:

- break down: bị hỏng, vỡ… = break off

- turn back: quay trở lại = come back =return to = go back

- check-in: làm thủ tục lên máy bay

- go through: đi qua, vượt qua

- get on: lên xe,máy bay…

- take off: cất cánh

-get off: rời đi


Exercise 11:

2. through ( get through: liên lạc )

3. out ( hang out: dành thời gian cho… )

4. up ( give up: từ bỏ )

5. out ( drop out: rút lui )

6. out ( put sb out: khiến ai đó gặp rắc rối )

7. back ( hang back: rút lui )

8. down ( write down: viết ra )

9. back ( call back: gọi điện thoại lại )

10. through ( work through: giải quyết vấn đề )

*Vocabulary:

debit (n) /ˈdɛbɪt/ khoản nợ

operator (n) /ˈɒpəreɪtə/ người phụ trách

dramatically (adv) /drəˈmætɪk(ə)li/ đáng kể

staff (n) /stɑːf/ nhân viên

awful (adj) /ˈɔːfʊl/ đáng sợ, tồi tệ

customer (n) /ˈkʌstəmə/ khách hàng

satisfaction (n) /ˌsætɪsˈfækʃən/ sự vừa ý, thỏa mãn

profit (n) /ˈprɒfɪt/ lợi ích, lợi nhuận

*STRUCTURE:

try + to V: cố gắng làm gì

appear + to V: xuất hiện làm gì

make + someone + V: khiến ai đó làm gì

Exercise 12:

I just got back from Venezuela back! I spent two weeks in the Amazon rainforest

with Dr.Rodriguez’s research group. We carried out research there on plants that the

Piaroa people use as medicine. We made down up a list of these plants, and we’re

going to analyze them when we get back to school next week.

Hồ Lan Phương

We set down up camp near the Orinoco River, hundreds of miles from any

major city. Life there is hard. You get up very early up every morning. You must

always watch up out and never touch a new insect or plant. If you pick up it up,

you can get a bad skin rash. But plants can also cure. One day, I felt sick. One of

the Piaroa gave me the stem of a certain plant to chew. It worked! Later I found at

that the same plant helps cure insect bites. And believe me, insects are a big

problem in the rainforest. I used up many bottles of repellent. But even when I put

on into it, it didn’t totally keep the insects away.

This trip changed my life! I’m now thinking about switching my major to

pharmacology. I want to find over out more about how people can use the same

plants that animals use as medicine.

*Phrasal verb:

carry out: tiến hành

make up a list: lập danh sách

get back: trở lại

set up: dựng lên

get up: thức dậy

watch out: coi chừng

pick up: hái/lượm/nhặt

use up: sử dụng hết

put into: nỗ lực làm gì

*Vocabulary:

medicine (n) /ˈmɛdsɪn / thuốc chữa bệnh

analyze (v) /ˈænəlaɪz / phân tích

insect (n) /ˈɪnsɛkt/ côn trùng

rash (n) /ræʃ/ nốt ban

cure (n;v) /kjʊə/ chữa trị

stem (n) /stɛm/ thân cây, cuống lá

chew (v) /ʧuː/ nhai

repellent (n;adj) /rɪˈpɛlənt/ không thấm nước

pharmacology (n) /ˌfɑːməˈkɒləʤi / dược lý học

Hồ Lan Phương

Exercise 13:

I’m afraid I wasn’t if I’m honest. Often I didn’t hand in my homework, and I

always felt I could get away with it because my teacher wasn’t strict. But

because of this I couldn’t keep up with the course work and I ended up

falling behind. Eventually I had to drop out of the school.

So no, I wasn’t really a good student. When I look back on my childhood, I

wish I’d done things differently really as it meant I had to work harder to

achieve things later on in life.

Hand in ở đây được hiểu là nộp bài tập.

Get away with it ở đây được hiểu là trốn thoát được, không bị bắt.

Keep up with ở đây được hiểu là chạy theo, bám đuổi, ám chỉ việc

không theo kịp kiến thức.

Ended up falling behind ở đây được hiểu là tụt lùi phía sau, ám chỉ việc

học hành tụt dốc.

Drop out ở đây được hiểu là bỏ học, ám chỉ việc phải thôi học vì hổng

kiến thức.

Look back on ở đây được hiểu là nhìn lại (flashback), ám chỉ việc hồi

tưởng lại những sai lầm hồi trẻ.

Exercise 14:

I’m not sure it is such a good thing. Many people put forward arguments in

favour it, claiming it has helped developing countries by creating jobs for local

people as many of these companies have moved their manufacturing abroad.

They then claim that the economic development in these countries will catch

up with developed countries.

However, there is no real evidence that this is the case as most the profit flows

back to the companies, not the people, and as soon as it becomes cheaper to

manufacture in a different country, the companies will pull out of the country

they are in and move to the more profitable one. So I don’t think there is any

real long-term benefit.

Put forward: đưa ra, ở đây chỉ việc đưa ra các lập luận.

Catch up with: bắt kịp, ở đây chỉ việc theo kịp với các nước phát triển.

Pull out of: rút khỏi, ở đây chỉ việc các công ty sẽ rút khỏi đất nước và

chuyển tới một nơi có lợi nhuận cao hơn.


Exercise 15:

1. taking off 6 weeks -> take 6 weeks off: ở đây hiểu là đi nghỉ mát 6 tuần.

2. took off -> take off: take off ở đây được hiểu là máy bay cất cánh.

3. taking off -> took off: cũng được hiểu là máy bay cất cánh.

4. act up -> acting up: được hiểu là động cơ máy bay đang gặp trục trặc

(act up ở đây ám chỉ việc một thứ gì đó hoạt động không như thường lệ).

5. tracking the source down -> track down the source: ở đây được hiểu là đi

tìm nguyên nhân dẫn đến việc động cơ máy bay bị trục trặc.

6. thinking -> thinking over: được hiểu là lo xa, nghĩ về những trường hợp có

thể xảy ra.

7. take out -> take off: ở đây được hiểu là cởi áo khoác.

8. running down -> run down: ở đây được hiểu là cảm thấy mệt mỏi.

9. acted up -> act up: act up ở đây được hiểu là cư xử không đúng mực.

10. ran down -> run down: làm cái gì đó ngưng hoạt động, ở đây ám chỉ việc dù

người viết phàn nàn về chuyến bay cũng như máy bay, nhưng người viết hoàn

toàn không có ý định khiến hãng bay đó phải ngưng hoạt động.

jacket (n): áo khoác

airplane (n): máy bay

fall asleep (v) chìm vào giấc ngủ

staff (n): nhân viên

friendly (adj): thân thiện

V

o

c

a

b

u

l

a

r

y

exhausting (adj): mệt mỏi, kiệt sức

arrive (v): đến nơi

overnight (adv): qua đêm

strange (adj): kì lạ

engine (n): động cơ

mechanic (n): kĩ sư máy móc

track (v): tìm kiếm

source (n): nguồn

destination (n): điểm đến

pillow (n): gối

complain (v): phàn nàn

airline (n): hãng hàng không


Exercise 16:

1. Where did you get the information about Disneyland Resort?

find out= get information + about st : tìm kiếm thông tin về cái gì

2. What time did you get out of bed this morning?

get up = get out of bed : thức dậy, rời khỏi giường

3. I’ll read this leaflet to see what activities are organized at this attraction.

look through = read : đọc, xem xét

4. They’re going to publish a guidebook to different beauty spots in Viet Nam.

bring out = publish : công bố, giới thiệu rộng rãi

5. I’m thinking with pleasure about the weekend.

look forward to st= think with pleasure about : mong chờ. suy nghĩ về cái gì

Exercise 17:

2. sort these problems out

sort something out: tìm ra cách giải quyết

3. go through her own detailed solutions

go through: trải qua, kiểm tra

4. find out something

find out: tìm hiểu, nhận thấy

5. carried on thinking

carry on: thực hiện

6. put forward our solutions

put forward: đưa ra

7. coming up with their own ideas

come up with: nảy ra

8. back up them

back up: giúp đỡ, ủng hộ


*Vocabulary:

salespeople (n) /ˈseɪlzˌpiːpl/ những người bán hàng

session (n) /ˈsɛʃən/ kỳ họp

client (n) /ˈklaɪənt/ khách hàng

interrupt (v) /ˌɪntəˈrʌpt/ làm gián đoạn

Hồ Lan Phương

ANSWERS

&

EXPLANATIONS

ANSWERS &

EXPLANATIONS

Part 1

ABILITY

1. Could => Can

‘Hurry up’ chỉ được dùng trong thì hiện tại nên câu nói này xảy ra ở

hiện tại, vậy nên không thể dùng ‘could’.

2. Cans => can

‘Can’ chỉ có đúng 2 dạng là ‘can’ và ‘can not’ dùng cho tất cả đại từ

xưng hô.

3. Being can’t => not being able to

Sau động từ không thể dùng trợ động từ, nên ở đây ‘not being able

to’ đóng vai trò là danh động từ.

4. Could => was able to

Ta dùng ‘was/were able to’ trong tình huống cụ thể ở quá khứ.

5. Can => could

Câu nói xảy ra ở quá khứ nên phải dùng ‘could’.

(1) can/am able to: vì câu nói diễn ra ở hiện tại.

(2) has been able to: vì đây là câu khẳng định ở thì hiện tại hoàn thành.

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

VOCABULARY

WORD

FORM

IPA

MEANING

Suitable (adj) /ˈsuː.t̬ ə.bəl/ Phù hợp

Position (n) /pəˈzɪʃ.ən/ Vị trí

Candidate (n) /ˈkæn.dɪ.dət/ Ứng cử viên

Field (n) /fiːld/ Lĩnh vực

STRUCTURE:

S + can/could + V

S + cannot/could not (can't/couldn't) + V

Can/Could + S + V?

S + am/is/are + able to + V

S + was/were + able to + V

S + will be able to + V

S + am/is/are + not able to + V

S + was/were + not able to + V

S + will not be able to + V

Am/Is/Are + S + able to + V? => Yes, S + am/is/are./No, S + am/is/are +

not.

Was/Were + S + able to + V? => Yes, S + was/were./No, S + was/were +

not.

Will + S + be able to + V? => Yes, S + will./No, S + will not.

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

COLLOCATION AND PHRASAL VERB:

Hurry up: Nhanh lên

What can possibly go wrong: Điều gì xấu có thể xảy ra chứ?

Part 2

PERMISSION

1. Can => May

Đây là câu nói lễ phép nên ta dùng ‘may’

2. Can => Do you mind if

Ta biết đây là vấn đề có thể gây khó chịu cho người hỏi nên ta dùng ‘do

you mind if’

3. Mayn’t => can’t

Với câu trả lời phủ định, chỉ có thể dùng “can’t”

4. Parking => park

Cấu trúc câu hỏi của ‘could’: Could + S + V(bare)?

(1) can/could: ta cũng có thể dùng ‘do you mind if’ nhưng vì câu hỏi này k cần

lễ phép nên ta ưu tiên dùng ‘can’ hoặc ‘could’.

(2) Do you mind if: dựa vào câu trả lời bên dưới.

VOCABULARY

WORD

FORM

IPA

MEANING

Smoke (v) /smoʊk/ Hút thuốc

Park (v) /pɑːrk/ Đỗ xe

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

STRUCTURE:

Do you mind + if + S + V-present?

Would you mind + if + S + V-ed

Can/Could + S + V?


Move in: chuyển vào nơi ở mới

Part 3

REQUESTS

1. Being => be

Cấu trúc câu hỏi của ‘can’: Can + S + V(bare)?

2. Bring => bringing

Cấu trúc câu hỏi của ‘would you mind’:

Would you mind + V(ing)?

1. Would => Can/Will

Đây là lời đề nghị không cần lễ phép nên ta không dùng ‘could’ và

‘would’.

2. Could => couldn’t

Khi ta muốn yêu cầu ai đó làm gì nhưng không chắc chắn rằng họ có

thể làm được, ta dùng:

S + couldn’t/wouldn’t + V(bare), could/would + S?

1. Can/could: đại từ là I nên ta không dùng ‘will’ và ‘would’

2. Would you mind: dựa vào động từ ở thì hiện tại tiếp diễn ‘shutting’

và câu trả lời bên dưới.

3. Can/could/will/would đều có thể dùng được ở trường hợp này.

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

VOCABULARY

WORD

FORM

IPA

MEANING

Principal (n) /ˈprɪn.sə.pəl/ Hiệu trưởng

Alcohol (n) /ˈæl.kə.hɑːl/ Cồn, đồ uống có cồn

STRUCTURE:

Can/Could you + (please) + Verb (infinitive) + …?

Will you + (please) + Verb (infinitive) + …?

Would you + (please) + Verb (infinitive) + …?

Would you mind + Ving form of verb…?

*Lưu ý:

Người dùng thêm từ ‘please’ ở giữa câu, để nhấn mạnh độ quan trọng,

cần thiết của sự yêu cầu. Cũng đồng thời cho người nghe thấy được sự

thành khẩn của người đưa ra yêu cầu đó.

Còn khi họ dùng từ ‘please’ ở đầu câu, thì thấy được rằng đó là một

câu đề nghị nghe có vẻ mạnh mẽ, quan trọng hơn.

Từ ‘please’ được đặt ở cuối câu, thì thấy được đây là cấu trúc đưa ra lời

đề nghị, ở mức độ trung bình.

Ngoài ‘please’ ta còn có thể sử dụng ‘possibly’.

Part 4

ADVICE

1. Ought not to => shouldn’t

Trong Anh-Mỹ ta không sử dụng dạng phủ định của ‘ought to’.

2. Should => had better

Lời khuyên mangtính chất nặng nề hơn thì ta dùng ‘had better’.

3. Eats => eat

Cấu trúc của ‘should’: S + should(not) + V(bare)

4. Ought => Should

Trong câu hỏi lời khuyên ta chỉ có thể dùng ‘should’.

5. Had she better => should she

Tương tự câu d.

(1) ’d better: vì lời khuyên mang tính răn đe.

(2) ’d better: ta biết nếu không thực hiện theo lời khuyên thì sẽ có kết

quả xấu nên ta dùng ‘had better’.

(3) should: trong câu hỏi lời khuyên ta chỉ có thể dùng ‘should’.

(4) “should/ought to/’d better” đầu có thể dùng được trong trường hợp

này.

VOCABULARY

WORD

FORM

IPA

MEANING

Gather (v) /ˈɡæð.ɚ/ Gom

Material (n) /məˈtɪr.i.əl/ Nguyên liệu, vật

liệu, tài liệu.

STRUCTURE:

S + “Should”/ “Should not”+ V(bare)

S + “Ought to”/ “Ought not to” + V(bare)

S + “had better”/ “had better not” + V(bare)

Should + S + V(bare) ?


Get a scolding from sb: bị ai đó mắng.

Treat sb to st: đãi ai đó cái gì đó.

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

Phạm Mỹ Tâm

Part 5

SUGGESTIONS

1. Going => go

Cấu trúc của “let’s”: Let’s (not) + V(bare).

2. Do => doing

Cấu trúc của ‘how about’ với danh động từ: How about + V(ing)?

3. Can => could

Trong câu đề xuất ý kiến ta thường sử dụng ‘could’ thay ‘can’.

4. Why not => Why don’t/How about

Có đại từ xưng hô ‘we’ đằng sau nên ta sử dụng “why don’t” hoặc

“how about”.

5. Why don’t => Why not

Ta có thể rút gọn động từ khi sử dụng ‘now’ với điều kiện động từ đã

xuất hiện ở câu trước. Như vậy ta có thể hiểu câu nói này là: Why

not discuss it now? => không thể dùng “why don’t” vì không có đại từ

xưng hô.

(1) How about: dựa vào động từ ở thì HTTD ‘getting’

(2) Let’s/Why not: vì trong câu không có đại từ xưng hô.

(3) How about: vì đằng sau là danh từ.

Let's + V(bare)

S + could + V(bare)

Why don’t + S + V(bare) ?

Why not + V(bare) ?

How about + N/V(ing) ?

STRUCTURE:

SELF-REFLECTION OF WHAT I HAVE LEARNT FROM THE

GRAMMAR POINT THAT I HAVE JUST ANALYZED:

Sau khi tự tìm tòi kiến thức và bài tập về unit 11, em đã hiểu hơn về nghĩa về

mặt khả năng của ‘can’, ‘could’ và ‘be able to’. Ví dụ điển hình chính là trước khi

thực hiện dự án này, em vẫn nghĩ ‘can’, ‘could’ và ‘be able to’ đều trợ động từ;

giờ thì em đã biết rằng ‘can’, ‘could’ là trợ động từ, còn ‘be able to’ thường được

coi là động từ hay cụm động từ.

ANSWERS & EXPLANATIONS


1. C ( we don’t use “can” in past tense and we can’t use “could” to talk about ability

in the past )

2. C ( only “be able to” can become a gerund )

3. A ( present continuous ,so we can’t use “could” )

4. A ( conditional sentences type 1)

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

Affirmative /əˈfɜːmətɪv/ Đồng ý

(n) (adj)

Continuous

Conditional

(adj)

(adj)

/kənˈtɪn.ju.əs/

/kənˈdɪʃ.ən.əl/

Liên tục tiếp

diễn

Có điều kiện

Structure:

Ving + be + adj

If S +V, S + can +V

Collocations: V+ ADV

Eg: work hard: làm việc chăm chỉ


2

There are 6 mistakes. Find and fix

them.

1. Could => Can ( asking about present ability)

2. Be able to => is able to

3. Can’t => can ( the answer is affirmative )

4. Couldn’t => Can (asking about present ability )

5. Coud => Can (talking about present ability )

6. Were => was

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

Awesome

(adj)

/ˈɑː.səm/

Tuyệt vời

Band

(n)

/bænd/

Thang đo

Structure:

S+ have/has + been +Ving

S +be + Ving

S + have/has +PII


1. B ( we can’t use “may I” because there’s already an “I” right after that,

we can’t use “couldn't” to ask for permission)

2. B ( the friend is giving permission )

3. C ( the phrase Do you mind if I is correct )

4. C ( the friend doesn’t mind )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

headphone

(n)

/ˈhed.foʊn/

tai nghe

permission

(n)

pəˈmɪʃən

sự cho phép

Structure:

S +be + Ving

S+V

Collocations: V + N

Eg: give permission : cho phép


4 There are 4 mistakes. Find and fix

them.

1. Mayn’t => May ( there is no such word as mayn’t)

2. You could=> You can ( we don’t use could when giving permission )

Does => Do ( do you mind if I is correct )

3. No => Yes ( the old man can’t handle smoke, so he does mind )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

allergic (adj) /əˈlɜːʤɪk/ dị ứng

Structure:

S + be + about to

S + be + adj

S + have/has + PII

S + be + Ving

Collocations:Preposition + Noun

Eg: Out of money : Hết tiền


1. A ( B is confusing )

2. B ( Brian is also cold, so he doesn’t mind )

3. A ( B is confusing )

4. A ( The son loves playing with his little sister, so he doesn’t mind )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

date (n)

/deɪt /

freeze

(v)

/ˈfriː.z/

clue

(n)

/kluː/

Cuộc hẹn

Đóng băng

Manh mối

Structure:

S + be + Ving

S + be + adj

S + will +V

S + V

Collocations: V + Preposition

Eg: go out : đi chơi

Idiom :Have no clue : không biết gì hết


6


them.

1. May=> Can/Could ( we can’t make a request starting by “may” )

2. Won’t => Can/could/ will/ would ( B asks A to buy some food )

3. Could=> Do (The phrase do you mind if I )

4. Can’t => Can ( permission is given “yeah” )

5. Can please you => Can you please ( wrong order )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

midnight

garbage

(n)

(n)

/ˈmɪdnaɪt /

/ˈɡɑːr.bɪdʒ/

nửa đêm

rác

Structure:

S + will be + adj

S + be +PII

S + be + adj

Collocations: -V + Preposition

Eg: take out the garbage: đổ rác

-Preposition + Noun

Eg: out of food : hết thức ăn


1.A Should ( a soft advice, and we don’t use ought not to )

2.B Had better ( a strong advice , if that person ignores it , she/he will probably go

blind )

3.B Should ( we don’t use “ought to” and “had better” for questions )

4.B Should ( checking the bike is necessary )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

Major

Upset

(n)

(adj)

/ˈmeɪ.dʒɚ/

/ʌpˈset/

ngành

buồn bực

Structure:

S + be + N

S + be + adj

S + V

Idiom: Go blind : bị mù


8


them.

1. Could => Should ( asking for advice not permision)

2. Should to => ought to ( should don’t go with to )

3. Had better not make => Had better make ( meeting doctors is necessary )

4. Ought => should ( there is no “to” after ought so we replace it by should )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

septic

bandage

Structure:

S + be + Ving

S + V(ed) + PII

S + V + Adv

If S + V , S will + V

(adj)

(n) (v)

/ˈsep.tɪk/

/ˈbæn.dɪdʒ/

nhiễm trùng

băng, bó

Collocations: Verb + N

Eg: Make an appointment

(lên cuộc hẹn)


1. B ( how about + ving or N , let’s + V )

2. C ( how about + N )

3. A ( S + Could + V )

4. A ( the phrase why don’t we )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

Word form

(Từ loại )

IPA(Phiên âm)

Meaning(Nghĩa)

cable

(n)

/ˈkeɪ.bəl/

dây cáp

packed

(adj)

/pækt/

chật cứng

Structure:

S + be (not) + adj

S + will + be + adj

S + will + V


10


them.

1. Why don’t=> How about ( why don’t we is followed by V not N )

2. Why does we =? Why don’t we ( there is no “why does we” )

3. Let => Let’s ( spelling error )

4. Couldn’t => Could ( C is suggesting )

5. Let’s just staying => Let’s just stay ( let’s + V )

6. Could slepping => could sleep ( could +V )

Vocabulary

(Từ vựng )

spacious

Word form

(Từ loại )

(adj)

IPA(Phiên âm)

/ˈspeɪ.ʃəs/

bamboo (n)

/bæmˈbuː/

Meaning(Nghĩ

a)

rộng rãi

tre

Structure:

S + be + going to + V

S + be + N

S + V + N

SELF-REFLECTION OF WHAT I HAVE

LEARNT FROM THE GRAMMAR POINT

THAT I HAVE JUST ANALYZED.

After researching and doing exercises., I definitely have a better grasp of

what to use when it comes to asking for permission. Besides , I now can

clearly distinguish modal verbs and their function in different situations .

Back then I didn’t know that we can’t use could when giving permission and

we should use shouldn’t instead of ought not to.


REQUEST : CAN/ COULD/ WILL/ WOULD/

WOULD YOU MIND

synthesize new

words,

structures,

idioms

detailed

explanation


REQUEST

EX1, Rewrite these sentence using the words in brackets

1, can you pass me the report, Terry?

2, can you take me a book?

3, could you speak English slowly?

4, could you please bring money when join party?

=>ở dạng bài tập đơn giản này, ta sẽ đảo can/could lên đầu câu,

sau đó đến S+V+O, và kết thúc bằng dấu hỏi. Tuy nhiên V ở đây là

V chính trên câu đề cho, vì vậy khi viết lại thì V ở dạng nguyên

thể

5, will you confirm it in next week? (đặt will lên đầu câu và làm

các bước như câu 1,2,3,4 sao cho câu có nghĩa phù hợp nhất)

6, if I finish my homework, I will watch TV tonight. (viết lại câu

điều kiện loại 1 vì đầu câu có unless: nếu không... , và dựa vào

nghĩa ta có nếu tôi không kết thúc bài tập thì tôi sẽ không xem ti

vi tối nay, thì viết lại câu sẽ ngược lại: nếu tôi kết thúc bài tập về

nhà thì tối tôi sẽ coi ti vi)

7,TOMORROW, would you send a message back later? I’m busy

now (ở câu này có trạng từ chỉ thời gian: tomorrow, nên ta đặt nó

lên đầu, sau đấy dung would viết lại câu sao cho phù hợp nghĩa)

8, would you please close the window? (viết lại với would như các

bước ta đã đề cập đến ở các câu đầu như:1,2,...)

9, would you mind if i borrowed your dictionary? ( would you

mind + IF+ MĐ ở quá khứ)

10, would you mind taking me a photograph? ( would you mind +

Ving)

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

WORD FORM

( từ loại )

IPA

( phiên âm )


MEANING ( nghĩa )

Addres (n) /əˈdres/ Địa chỉ

pass (v) /pɑːs/ Đưa

Confirm (v) /kənˈfɜːm/ Xác nhận, thừa nhận

Message (n) /ˈmes.ɪdʒ/ Tin nhắn, thông điệp

dictionary (n) /ˈdɪkʃəˌnɛri/ Từ điển

join (v) / ˈsilɪŋ/ Tham gia


REQUEST

EX1, Rewrite these sentence using the words in brackets

(continue)

• Structure

• Can: có thể (dùng để đưa lời đề nghị, yêu cầu, xin phép với sự việc và hành

động ở hiện tại)

• Could: có thể (dùng để đưa lời đề nghị, yêu cầu, xin phép với sự việc và

hành động ở quá khứ, nhưng sẽ mang nghĩa lịch sự hơn can)

• Will: sẽ (đưa ra lời đề nghị, yêu cầu, cho những hành động ở tương lai)

• Would: sẽ (sử dụng tương tự như will nhưng mang ý nghĩa trang trọng và

lịch sự hơn)

Would you mind + Ving : bạn có phiền làm gì đó hay không?

Would you mind + If + clause in the past : bạn có phiền nếu tôi làm gì

không?

c o l l o c a t i o n :

v e r b + n o u n

E X : m i s s ( v )

1 , m i s s a n o p p o r t u n i t y : b ỏ l ỡ c ơ h ộ i

2 , m i s s t h e b u s : l ỡ c h u y ế n x e b u s

E X : t a k e ( v )

1 , t a k e a c h a n c e : đ ù a v ớ i s ự m a y r ủ i

2 , t a k e a b r e a k : n g h ỉ g i ả i l a o




Hall. Use the word in parentheses to ask for permission. Answer

the questions

1 —do you mind if Troy comes to the party?

— not at all

( dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: Troy, bạn của Tara đang ở trong thị trấn.

cô ấy muốn đưa anh ấy đến bữa tiệc nên hỏi Heather rằng bạn có phiền

nếu Troy đến dự tiệc không, với cấu trúc do you mind if + S + V + O ở thì

hiện tại đơn. Và nhìn vào câu trả lời của Heather ở vế sau: tôi rất vui khi

gặp anh ấy, thể hiện chứng tỏ sự dồng tình khi Tara đưa Troy đến. Vì vậy

vế trước nên dùng not at all: tất nhiên/ dĩ nhiên rồi)


REQUEST


Hall. Use the word in parentheses to ask for permission. Answer the

questions (continue)

2. —Can I borrow your black sweater?

—Sorry.

( dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: Heather muốn mượn chiếc áo len của bạn cùng

phòng với cô ấy, ta dùng can vì hành ộng này diễn ra ở hiện tại, chính xác hơn là

ngay tại thời điểm nói. Và Tara trả lời rằng: tôi đang định mặc nó, thể hiện sự từ

chối , và ta thường đưa ra lời xin lỗi đi cùng là giải thích khi từ chối lời yêu cầu, lời

đề nghị)

3. —Do you mind if my sister stays in our room?

—No, not at all. OR No, I don’t.

(dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: em gái của Tara đến từ thành phố. Tara muốn

cô ấy ở lại phòng của họ nên đưa ra lời đề nghị: bạn có phiền nếu em gái tôi ở lại

đây không, với cấu trúc do you mind if + S + V + O ở hiện tại đơn. Heather trả lời

rằng ohh, không tức là cô ấy không phiền. vậy chỗ trống trong câu trả lời của

Heather chắc chắn là not at all)

4. —May we please have the party in the dormitory lounge?

—Sure.

(dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: Heather và Tara muốn tổ chức tiệc trong phòng

khách kí túc xá, Heather hỏi cô ấy xin phép tư vấn kí túc xá, câu hỏi như sau:

chúng ta có thể có 1 bữa tiệc trong kí túc xá nhưng vui lòng xin phép trước. Người

quản lí nói rằng: nó đã có sẵn vào t6, vậy là họ có thể tổ chức tiệc)

5. —May we please hang decorations from the ceiling of the lounge?

—No, you may not.

(dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: Heather và Tara muốn treo đồ trang trí từ trần

nhà của phòng khách. Heather hỏi ý kiến ng quản lí rằng: họ có thể làm thế

không với cấu trúc với từ may, và please thể hiện sự mong mỏi được đáp trả lời

đề nghị .Người quản lí nói rằng: các quy định về phòng cháy sẽ không cho phép

nó, hẳn là chuyện nên hoàn toàn không thể trang trí)

6. —Could we please party until midnight?

—No, you can’t

(dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: Heather và Tara muốn tiệc tùng đến nửa đêm, vì

vậy Heather hỏi người quản lí kí túc rằng họ có thể làm vậy không, với cấu trúc đi

với could và please. Nhưng ng quản lí đưa ra quy định về giờ giấc yên tĩnh từ lúc

11h, chúng tỏ rằng họ sẽ không được tiệc đến nửa đêm, vì vậy, người quản lí từ

chối: no, you can’t )


REQUEST

EX2, Heather and her roommate Tara are planning a party in Kent Hall. Use

the word in parentheses to ask for permission. Answer the questions (continue)

7. —Could we play some of your CDs at the party?

—Sure. OR Certainly.

(dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: Tara muốn chơi 1 số đĩa nhạc CD của

người bạn Erica tại bữa tiệc nên đã đưa ra lời yêu cầu với could, và Erica

hỏi lại rằng cô ấy nên mang cái nào, chứng tỏ cô ấy rất sẵn sang cho Tara

mượn nhạc cụ)

8. —Can I study here (OR in the lounge)?

—I’m sorry, you can’t.

(dựa vào nghĩa tình huống ta có: đó là tối thứ sáu, Một sinh viên muốn

học trong phòng chờ, sinh viên đề nghị rằng cô ấy có thể học không,

nhưng Heather trả lời rằng họ đang tổ chức 1 bữa tiệc, bạn có muốn

tham gia không, chứng tỏ căn phòng ấy hiện tại không thể dung,nên đưa

ra lời xin lỗi và giải thích lí do cho lời đề nghị)


VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

WORD FORM

( từ loại

IPA

( phiên âm )

MEANING ( nghĩa )

plan ( n ) / plæn / Kế hoạch

Dormitory ( n ) / ˈdɔrməˌtɔri/ Ký túc xá

lounge ( v ) / laʊnʤ/ Phòng chờ

ceiling ( n ) / ˈsilɪŋ/ Trần nhà

join ( v ) / ˈsilɪŋ/ Tham gia


• Structure : permission

Can/ could/ may +S+V(nguyên thể)+O, please? : ai đó có thể làm gì đó hay

không…? ( hoặc có thể đảo please lên đầu, đều oke)

- can với hành động có thể xảy ra ở hiện tai

- Could với hành động có thể xyar ra trong quá khứ

- May với hành động có thể xyar ra ở tương lai

Do you mind if + S +V(HTĐ) + O ? : bạn có phiền nếu toi làm cái này/ cái

kia hay không


REQUEST

EX2, Heather and her roommate Tara are planning a party in Kent Hall. Use the

word in parentheses to ask for permission. Answer the questions (continue)

COLLOCATION

(adj) + noun

EX: heavy (adj)

1, heavy rain: mưa nặng hạt

2, heavy workload: khối lượng công việc nhiều

3, heavy traffic: giao thông tắc nghẽn, kẹt xe

EX: big (adj)

1,a big decision: một quyết định lớn

2,a big failure: một thất bại lớn


SELF-REFLECTION OF WHAT I HAVE LEARNT FROM THE GRAMMAR

POINT YOU HAVE JUST ANALYZED.

1, lưu ý nhỏ rằng dùng -can với hành động có thể xảy ra ở hiện tai

- Could với hành động có thể xyar ra trong quá khứ

- May với hành động có thể xyar ra ở tương lai

2, mệnh đề theo sau cấu trúc do you mind if được chia ở thì hiện tại đơn



better. Choose between affirmative and negative

The internet is a wonderful place to visit and hang out

Here are some tips to make your trip there a safe one!

1. you should always use a screen name

(thường sử dụng tên thật trên mạng,đó có phải vấn đề không? , câu này đưa ra

nhằm mong nhận được lời khuyên và sự việc ở hiện tại, vì vậy ta sẽ dùng should,

vế sau có nói nên làm thế để bảo vệ danh tính của bạn)

2. You’d better not give out any personal information.

( ai đó trong nhóm trò chuyện của tôi vừa hỏi địa chỉ tôi, vế sau có đưa ra lí do vì

sao không nên cung cấp thông tin cá nhân, vì vậy câu nên dùng should hoặc had

better nà, nhưng do việc hỏi địa chỉ đã xảy ra thì ta nên chia ở trong quá khứ =>

dùng had better)


REQUEST


better. Choose between affirmative and negative (continue)

3. You shouldn’t give it to anyone.

(anh trai tôi muốn mật khẩu của tôi để kiểm tra 1 nhóm trước khi tham gia,

và vế sau có : ngay cả anh traoi của bạn cũng không…. Thể hiện đây là sự

việc đang diễn ra ở hiện tại => dùng should)

4. You ought to get virus protection and use it.

( tôi đã gửi tập tin cho 1 người nào đó,và cô ấy nói với tôi rằng nó có vi-rút, vế

sau có:vi-rút có thể làm hư ,máy tính của bạn và phá hủy các tệp quan

trọng…. nó chắc chán là lời khuyên, nên nhận bảo vệ chống vi-rút và sự dụng

nó, tuy nhiên, chuyện vi rút có thể làm hỏng máy tính là sự việc sẽ hoặc

không xảy ra ở tương lai => ought to)

5. You should keep your virus protection up-to-date.

(lời khuyên này đưa ra cho sự việc diễn ra ở hiện tại, có every month =>

should)

6. You’d better not believe any “get rich quick” offers.

(câu sau có : chúng có vẻ tốt nhưng hầu như mọi người đều mất tiền, cái việc

mọi người đã mất tiền chắc chắn là sự việc đã xảy ra trong quá khứ, vì vậy

mới có căn cứ cho hiện tại, là lời khuyên => had better)

7. You shouldn’t open any e-mail attachments from strangers.

( đây là câu nói được đặt trong tình huống mà nói ngay tại thời điểm hành

động được kể lại ấy, do đó nó ở hiện tại, và là lời khuyên không nên làm gì=>

shouldn’t)

8. You should be careful

(câu này được xác định là đang nói về hiện tại, về internet thú vị,…tuy nhiên

vẫn cần cẩn thận với nhiều thứ liên quan đến internet)


VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

WORD FORM

( từ loại )

IPA

( phiên âm )

MEANING ( nghĩa )

attach ( v ) / əˈtæʧ / Gắn, buộc, cột

address ( n ) / əˈdrɛs / Địa chỉ

password ( n ) / ˈpæˌswɜrd / Mật khẩu

dangerous ( a ) / ˈdeɪnʤərəs / Nguy hiểm

screen ( n ) / skrin / Màn hình

identity ( n ) / aɪˈdɛntəti / Sự nhận ra


REQUEST


better. Choose between affirmative and negative (continue)

• Structure

• Had better, should, ought to: nên, khuyên ai đó nên làm gì

• Had better: khuyên làm gì với sự việc đã xảy ra trong quá khứ

• Should: lời khuyên cho sự việc xảy ra ở hiện tại

• Ought to: lời khuyên cho sự việc có thể hoặc không xảy ra trong

tương lai

1 check out: thủ tục đi ra

2, lose money: mất tiền

3, get rich: giàu, có nhiều tiền

• COLLOCATION :



SELF-REFLECTION OF WHAT I HAVE LEARNT FROM THE

GRAMMAR POINT YOU HAVE JUST ANALYZED.

Ta nên chú ý vào hoàn cảnh từng câu, nên dịch câu cẩn thận và sử

dụng had better, ought to, should sao cho nghĩa câu hợp lí nhất có

thể

EX4, Rewrite the sentence in the same meaning


1, Susan may know the address (vì perhaps nghĩa là có thể, ta dùng may theo

gợi ý của đề bài và viết lại sao cho câu phù hợp nghĩa)

2, I was able to finish all my work ( vì V: managed được chia ở quá khứ nên t

sử dụng was)


REQUEST


3, You had better sit down ( the best thing for you nghĩa là điều tốt nhất cho

bạn, tức nó diễn tả lời khuyên, nên t dùng had better: nên)

4, Joanna mightn’t have received my message (vì vế sau của câu có didn’t

received: đã không nhận được, diễn tả hành động đã xảy ra trong quá khứ

nhưng nghĩa mang tính chất suy đoán, hoặc nó đã xảy ra, hoặc nó chưa xảy ra,

nên khi viết lại câu ta dùng mightn’t have received: có lẽ là đã...)

5, You must have been surprised when you heard all the new ( ta thấy trong câu

có were surprised: đã rất ngạc nhiên, diễn tả hành động đã xảy ra trong quá

khứ chỉ phỏng đoán sự việc nên khi viết lại câu với must, ta sử dụng cấu trúc:

must have Ved/3: chắc hẳn là đã )

6, I am sure that the cat must be in the house somewhere ( câu dùng cấu trúc I

am sure that: tôi chắc chắn là, thể hiện sự phỏng đoán chắc chắn, câu sử dụng

V: is, hành động ở hiện tại vì vậy khi viết lại câu ta sẽ dùng cấu trúc must be:

chắc hẳn là, tả hành động xảy ra ở hiện tại- tương lai)

7, You needn’t have done all the work ( trong câu có: it’s wasn’t necessary: nó đã

không cần thiết, tả hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ vì vậy khi viết lại với V need,

ta sẽ dùng cấu trúc: needn’t have Ved/3: đáng nhẽ không cần làm gì, diễn tả

hành động đã xảy ra trong quá khứ)

8, I am sure that John can’t be the thief ( I am sure that: tôi chắc chắn là, chỉ sự

phỏng đoán, ở vế sau ta thấy: John is not, V ở đây được chia ở hiện tại, vì vậy

nên khi viết lại câu với can’t, ta sẽ dùng cấu trúc can’t be: không thể nào là...

diễn tả hành động xảy ra ở hiện tại-tương lai)

9, I should have apologized. That was wrong of me ( trong câu ta thấy cả 2 V đều

được chia ở quá khứ: didn’t apologize, was wrong, dịch cả câu sẽ là: tôi đã không

xin lỗi, đó là lỗi của tôi, thể hiện sự nuối tiếc, vì vậy khi viết lại câu t sử dụng cấu

trúc should have Ved/3: đáng nhẽ nên làm gì)

10, Would you mind if I moved this house ( ta sẽ sử dụng cấu trúc would you

mind + if + clause in the past: bạn có phiền nếu tôi làm gì đó ?, thể hiện yêu cầu

lịch sự )

11, Would you mind if I went back your house ( chuyển V go thành went và viết

lại câu với cấu trúc would you mind + if + clause in the past: bạn có phiền nếu

tôi làm gì đó không? )

12, Would you mind posting this letter for me ( ta dùng cấu trúc: would you

mind + Ving: bạn có phiền nếu làm gì đó không? )


REQUEST


VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

WORD FORM

( từ loại )

IPA

( phiên âm )

MEANING ( nghĩa )

receive ( v ) / rəˈsiv / Nhận

wrong ( a ) / rɔŋ / Sai

thief ( n ) / θif / Kẻ trộm

finish ( v ) / ˈfɪnɪʃ / Kết thúc

message ( n ) / ˈmɛsəʤ / Lời nhắn

heard ( v ) / hɜrd / nghe


• Structure :

• Can: có thể (tả hành động ở hiện tại), đưa ra lời yêu cầu, đề nghị,…

• Could: có thể (tả hành động ở quá khứ), đưa ra lời yêu cầu, xin

phép,..

• Be able to: có thể (tả hành động ở mọi thì nếu không thể dung can/

could)

• Will: sẽ (tả hành động ở tương lai)

• Would: sẽ (tả hành ở ở tương lai trong quá khứ)

• Would you mind +Ving: bạn có phiền làm gì đó không …?

• Would you mind if + S + V(QKĐ) +O: bạn có phiền nếu tôi làm gì đó

không...?


COLLOCATION:

Verb+ noun

EX: take (verb)

1, take a taxi: bắt 1 chiếc xe taxi

2, take an exam: đi kiểm tra

3, take a seat: tìm 1 chỗ ngồi


REQUEST


1) It must have been very expensive. (câu đề bài có ý nghĩa rằng: chiếc

váy bạn đã mua thì có chất lượng rất tốt, V bought chia ở quá khứ, vì vậy khi

viết lại với must ta dùng cấu trúc must have Ved/3: chắc hẳn là đã)

2) He must have gone away. (đề bài: tôi đã không gặp Jim trong nhiều

năm,ta thấy có haven’t seen, vì vậy khi viết lại với must, ta dùng cấu trúc

must have Ved/3, vì hành động này đã xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng kéo dài

tới hiện tại)

3) You must have left it on the train. (tôi tự hỏi rằng chiếc ô của tôi ở

đâu, tức là ở đêy cái ô đã không thấy nữa, người này đưa ra dự đoán rằng

bạn đã dùng chiếc ô đó, vì vậy ta sẽ viết lại với cấu trúc must have Ved/3)

4) The exam couldn’t have been very difficult. (Don đã vượt qua kì thi.

Anh ấy đã không học quá nhiều, vì vậy câu dự đoán chắc chắn là đề không

khó, viết lại sử dụng cấu trúc couldn’t have Ved/3)

5) She must have listened to our conversation. (cô ấy đã biết mọi thứ

về kế hoạch của chúng tôi, ở đây là đã biết, chứng tỏ cái lí do dẫn đến cô ấy

biết tất cả ấy đã xảy ra tại 1 thời điểm nào đó trong quá khứ, nên ta dùng

cấu trúc viết lại là must have Ved/3)


VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

WORD FORM

( từ loại )

IPA

( phiên âm )

MEANING ( nghĩa )

dress ( n ) / drɛs / Chiếc váy

quality ( n ) / ˈkwɑləti / Chất lượng

wonder ( v ) / ˈwʌndər / Tự hỏi

umbrella ( n ) / əmˈbrɛle/ Cái ô

difficult ( adj ) / ˈdɪfəkəlt / Khó

plan ( n ) /plæn / Kế hoạch

examination ( n ) /ɪgˌzæməˈneɪʃən / Bài kiểm tra


REQUEST


(continue)

Structure:

*the present-future

1, must be: chắc hẳn là...

2, can be: có lẽ là...

3, can’t be: không lẽ là...

4, may/might/could be: có thể là... (60%/40%/20% chỉ khả năng xảy ra

của sự việc- hành động)

*the past

1, must have Ved/3: chắc hẳn là đã...

2,can’t have Ved/3: không thể nào là đã

3, may/might/could+ have Ved/3: có thể là đã... (60%/40%/20% chỉ khả

năng xảy ra của sự việc- hành động)

4, should have Ved/3: đáng nhẽ nên làm gì

5,shouldn’t have Ved/3: đáng nhẽ không nên làm gì

6, needn’t have Ved/3: đáng nhẽ không cần làm gì


Verb + (adj)

EX: get (verb)

1,get wet: bị ướt

2, get worried: bị lo lắng

COLLOCATION:


=>>>SELF-REFLECTION OF WHAT I HAVE LEARNT FROM THE

GRAMMAR POINT YOU HAVE JUST ANALYZED.

Qua việc tìm hiểu và giải các dạng bài tập sử dụng can, could, will, would,

would you mind trong việc đưa ra yêu cầu hay đề nghị ai đó làm gì, em

tự rút ra cho bản thân nhiều kinh nghiệm và lưu ý khi sử dụng chúng

trong từng trường hợp khác nhau. Đặc biệt là hiểu sâu sắc hơn về cách

giao tiếp, cách ứng xử của người bản xứ, cũng như sửa được các tình

huống mà mình dùng từ hoặc cấu trúc sai



Exercise 1:

1.should. Bởi vì câu trên thể hiện ý kiến cá nhân của người nói.

2.Ought to. Bởi vì ý nghĩa câu nói thể hiện lời khuyên nếu không làm như thế thì

không còn cách nào khác.

3.Ought not to. Không dùng shoudn’t bởi vì câu nói thể hiện việc không nên làm

vì do một quy định.

4.Had better. Dùng had beter vì nó mang nghĩa lời khuyên mạnh hơn 2 từ còn

lại, mang nghĩa không làm theo lời khuyên đó sẽ gặp mội kết quả xấu.

5.Should. Bởi vì nó là ý kiến cá nhân của người nói

6.Had better. Dùng had beter vì nó mang nghĩa lời khuyên mạnh hơn 2 từ còn

lại, mang nghĩa không làm theo lời khuyên đó sẽ gặp mội kết quả xấu.

7.Should. Bởi vì nó là ý kiến cá nhân của người nói

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

Deadline

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

IPA

( phiên âm )

MEANING

( nghĩa )

(N) /ˈded.laɪn/ Tới hạn, hạn chót

Weight

( N )

/weɪt/

Cân nặng, trọng lượng

Miss

( V )

/mɪs/

Bỏ lỡ, nhớ

Foreign ( N ) /ˈfɔːr.ən/ Ngoại quốc

• Structure :

+) Future tense: S+will+infinitive+ object+….

• COLLOCATION AND PHRASAL VERB

1. Break up with : chia tay

2. Be all alone: ở một mình

3. Take care of: Chăm sóc

Exercise 2:

1.Been able to. Bởi vì không

thể dùng “can” hoặc “Could” ở

thì hiện tại hoàn thành nên

chúng ta sẽ sử dụng “be able

to” để chỉ có thể hay không thể

làm điều gì.

2. Can. Điền “Can” bởi vì để chỉ khả năng của bản

thân người nói ở thời điểm hiện tại. Thường

những câu nói để chỉ khả năng của bản thân,

người nói sẽ ít khi sử dụng “be able to” thay vào

đó là sử dụng “can” hoặc “Could” để câu nói được

tự nhiên và ngắn gọn.

3. Could. Sử dụng “Could” vì nó

được dùng trong mệnh đề phụ do

chi phối của động từ quá khứ ở

mệnh đề chính, để diễn tả khả

năng có thể làm ở thời điểm nói.

Và “Could” đặc biệt sử dụng với

các động từ cảm giác.

5. Was able to. Câu này không sử

dụng “Could” vì khi người nói muốn

nói rằng ai đó đang tìm cách xoay sở

làm một việc gì đó trong một hoàn

cảnh “đặc biệt” hoặc “nguy cấp” và

việc đó có khả năng xảy ra thì phải sử

dụng “be able to” (không phải “Can”

hoặc “could”).

6. Can. Vì dùng

trong câu xin phép,

yêu cầu, đề nghị.

4. Could. Bởi vì diễn tả khả năng ở quá khứ và

thường những câu nói để chỉ khả năng của bản thân,

người nói sẽ ít khi sử dụng “be able to” thay vào đó là

sử dụng “Can” hoặc “Could” để câu nói được tự nhiên

và ngắn gọn.

7. Could. Vì dùng trong câu xin phép,

yêu cầu, đề nghị. Không sử dụng “Can”

mà thay vào đó là “Could” vì nó sắc thái

trang trọng hơn.

8. Was able to. Câu này không sử dụng

“Could” vì khi người nói muốn nói rằng

ai đó đang tìm cách xoay sở làm một

việc gì đó trong một hoàn cảnh “đặc

biệt” hoặc “nguy cấp” và việc đó có khả

năng xảy ra thì phải sử dụng “be able to”

(không phải “Can” hoặc “could”).

9. Could. Sử dụng “Could” vì nó được

dùng trong mệnh đề phụ do chi phối của

động từ quá khứ ở mệnh đề chính, để

diễn tả khả năng có thể làm ở thời điểm

nói. Và “Could” đặc biệt sử dụng với các

động từ cảm giác.

10. Can. Vì diễn

tả khả năng ở

hiện tại.

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

Understand

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

(V)

IPA

( phiên âm )

/ˌʌn.dɚˈstænd/

MEANING

( nghĩa )

Hiểu

Spread (V)

/spred/ Lan tràn



• Structure :

+) When Subject+V(simple past)+object, Subject+Could/ be(simple past)

able to+infinitive+..

+) present perfect: Subject + have/has (not) + PII + …


1. speak in… voice : nói với giọng..

2. spread through: Lan ra

3. fall into: rơi xuống, rơi vào

4. smell burning: ngửi thấy mùi khét

5. get it out: Thoát ra

Exercise 3:

1. May. Những câu hỏi yêu cầu mà có please thì thường dùng “May” và vì “May” có

độ trang trọng cao hơn “Can” và “Could”.

2. Can/Could. Dùng để hỏi yêu cầu.

3.Could. Dùng “Could” chứ không dùng “Can” vì “Could” có độ trang trọng hơn,

“Could” thường dùng trong quá khứ nhưng khi dùng để hỏi đề nghị, yêu cầu sự cho

phép thì vẫn được sử dụng cả trong hiện tại và tương lai. Trường hợp này không

trang trọng tới mức phải dùng “May”.

4. Can/may. Dù trong câu hỏi có sử dụng “Could” thì câu trả lời cũng chỉ sử dụng

“Can” hoặc “May”.

5. Do you mind if. Vì hỏi cho những hành động có thể gây phiền phức hoặc không

thoải mái, không tiện cho người khác.

6. Do you mind if. Vì hỏi cho những hành động có thể gây phiền phức hoặc không

thoải mái, không tiện cho người khác.

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

Borrow

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

(V)

IPA

( phiên âm )

/ˈbɑːr.oʊ/

MEANING

( nghĩa )

Mượn

Tacos (N)

/ˈtɑː.koʊ/ Bánh tét

• Structure :

+) Can/Could/May + Subject + infinitive + object + …?

+) Do you mind if I + infinitive + object +…?


1. Of course: đương nhiên rồi

2. clean up: Dọn dẹp

Exercise 4:

1. Can. Dùng để diễn đạt yêu cầu, nhờ ai đó làm gì của người nói trong thời

điểm nói. Trong trường hợp này vấn đề nhờ vả khá đơn giản nên chúng ta

có thể sử dụng “Can” chưa trang trọng tới mức phải sử dụng “Could”.

2. Could. Trong trường hợp này chúng ta sử dụng “could” để tăng sự

lịch sự trong câu nói.

3. Would you mind. Trong trường hợp này yêu cầu người khác làm việc gì đó

hộ mình nhưng việc này có thể sẽ làm phiền hoặc gây ra sự bất tiện cho người

mình nhờ và động từ ở dạng V-ing nên chúng ta sử dụng “Would you mind”.

4. Would you mind. Tương tự như câu 3 nhưng chúng ta có cấu trúc là

“Would you mind if I” nên ở đây có thể dễ dàng điền được “Would you

mind”.

5. Would. Trong trường hợp này chúng ta nên sử dụng “Would” vì

để tăng thêm sự lịch sự cho câu hỏi yêu cầu.

6. Will/Can. Dùng để diễn đạt yêu cầu, nhờ ai đó làm gì của người

nói trong thời điểm nói.

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

IPA

( phiên âm )

MEANING

( nghĩa )

Dessert

(N)

/dɪˈzɝːt/

Món tráng miệng

· Structure :

+) Can/Could/Will/Would + Subject + infinitive + object + …?

+) Would you mind if I + infinitive + object +…?

V-ing + object + …?


1. Turn on: bật lên

2. go back to: quay trở lại


Exercise 5:

1. Could. Vì đưa ra gợi ý dưới dạng câu trần thuật chúng ta phải sử dụng

“Could”.

2. Why don’t. Trong trường hợp này, chúng ta không sử dụng được “How about”

vì “How about” có 2 dạng là + gerund hoặc + Noun. Và câu này chúng ta sử dụng

“Why don’t” để diễn đạt lời gợi ý mang tính chủ quan, trực tiếp của người nói. Ở

đây không sử dụng “Why not” vì nó là từ thay thế, là một biến thể của “Why don’t

you” mà ở đây chúng ta đã có chủ ngữ là they rồi nên không dùng được.

3. Why not. Tương tự như câu 2 thì không thể dùng “How about” ở trong câu

này được và cũng không sử dụng “Why don’t” được bởi vì sau chỗ điền không

bắt đầu bằng một chủ ngữ mà bắt đầu bằng một infinitive.

4. How about. Ở câu này chỉ có thể điền “How about” vì có “gerund”

ngay sau đó

5. How about. Ở câu này chỉ có thể điền “How about” vì có “noun” ngay

sau đó.

6. Let’s. Vì nó bắt đầu một câu trần thuật thông thường để diễn đạt một

gợi ý của người nói.

7. Why don’t. Tương tự như câu 2, trong trường hợp này chỉ có thể điền

“Why don’t” mà không thể là bất cứ một từ nào khác cả.

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

Restaurant

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

(N)

IPA

( phiên âm )

/ˈres.tə.rɑːnt/

MEANING

( nghĩa )

Nhà hàng

Tomorrow (Adv) /təˈmɔːr.oʊ/ Ngày mai

· Structure :

+) Subject + could + infinitive + …

+) Let’s + infinitive + …

+) Why don’t + subject + infinitive + …?

+) Why not + infinitive + …?

+) How about + gerund + …?

Noun?



1. come to: tới, đến

2. stay for: ở lại cho

3. go out: ra ngoài

4. break down: phá vỡ, hư hỏng

Exercise 6:

1-B. Vì dịch nghĩa thì anh ấy bị đau răng thì anh ấy nên đi gặp bác sĩ.

2-E. Dùng phương án loại trừ và dịch nghĩa có thể dễ dàng chọn được đáp án E

3-C. Vì vế trước có nghĩa là bạn đang bị thừa cân nên chọn C (bạn nên giảm cân đi),

ở đây đáp án sử dụng should vì muốn diễn tả quan điểm, lời khuyên chủ quan của

người nói.

4-F. Anh ấy làm việc rất chăm chỉ và điều hiển nhiên là anh ấy nên được thăng

chức. “Ought to” dùng để diễn đạt không còn cách làm nào khác ngoài cách đó.

5-D. Dịch nghĩa và dùng phương án loại trừ để chọn. (Hàng xóm đang phàn nàn.

Chúng ta nên vặn nhỏ đài xuống.)

6-A. Đáp án còn lại cuối cùng. (Khi bạn lên Hà Nội đi học, bạn sẽ ở một mình. Bạn

nên“phải” tự chăm sóc cho bản t

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

Complaine

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

(V)

IPA

( phiên âm )

/kəmˈpleɪn/

MEANING

( nghĩa )

Phàn nàn

Promotion (N) /prəˈmoʊ.ʃən/ Sự thăng cấp

· Structure :

+) Subject + should/ought to/ had better +

infinitive + object +…


1. run out of: hết, cạn kiệt


Exercise 7:

1-B. Vì “How about” sẽ + với noun nên chọn B.

2-C. Vì Let’s ở trong câu trần thuật, các từ còn lại không thể đi với đáp án C được.

3-A. Vì “Why not” thì tương đương với “Why don’t we” và đi ngay sau nó là động từ

và có dấu “?” ở cuối câu nên chọn A.

4-E. Vì trong câu hỏi gợi ý thì “Why don’t” đi sau nó phải là chủ ngữ.

5-D. đáp án còn lại và theo ngữ pháp trong câu hỏi gợi ý thì sau “How about” sẽ là

gerund hoặc noun.

VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

Rainforest

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

(N)

IPA

( phiên âm )

/ˈreɪn.fɔːr.ɪst/

MEANING

( nghĩa )

Rừng nhiệt đới

Rest (V) /rest/ Nghỉ ngơi

Logde

(N)

/lɑːdʒ/

Lều

Exercise 8:

· Structure :

+) Let’s + infinitive + …

+) Why don’t + subject + infinitive + …?

+) Why not + infinitive + …?

+) How about + gerund + …?

Noun?

1-D. Vì anh ấy muốn hút thuốc nên anh ấy hỏi có được hút thuốc không. “Do you

mind” để tăng độ lịch sự cho câu hỏi xin phép.

2-E. Cô gấy bị gẫy chân chính vì thế cô ấy không thể nhảy trong bữa tiệc. Câu này

sử dụng “can’t” để diễn tả khả năng của người được nhắc tới.

3-B. Anh ấy bị cảnh sát tịch thu bằng lái xe nên anh ấy không thể lái xe vào ngày

hôm qua. Câu này sử dụng “couldn’t” cũng dùng để diễn tả khả năng của người

được nhắc tới.

4-A. Đứa trẻ đang ngủ, bạn tắt TV đi? Câu này là câu yêu cầu với could .

5-F. Tôi đang tắm, Phiền bạn đợi tôi một chút?. Câu này cũng là câu yêu cầu nhưng

sử “Would you mind” để tăng độ lịch sự cho câu nói.

6-C. Anna đang mang vác đồ nặng, tôi có thể giúp gì cho bạn không? Đây là một

câu đề nghị giúp đỡ.


VOCABULARY

( từ vựng )

License

WORD FORM

(từ loại)

(N)

IPA

( phiên âm )

/ˈlaɪ.səns/

MEANING

( nghĩa )

Giấy phép

Confiscate (V) /ˈkɑːn.fə.skeɪt/ Tịch thu

· Structure :

+) Ability: Subject + can/could + (not) + infinitive + object + …

+) Permission: Do you mind if + subject + infinitive + object + …?

Can + subject + infinitive + object + …?

+) Requests: Could + Subject + infinitive + object + …?

Would you mind + gerund + object + …?


1. Have a bath: tắm

2. Turn off: tắt

SELF-REFLECTION OF WHAT I HAVE

LEARNT FROM THE GRAMMAR POINT

THAT I HAVE JUST ANALYZED.

- We usually use should to give an advice even in writing and speaking English.

- I can understand more about the way to give a advice and practise some

execises about this.

- I can discriminate how to use should, ought to and had better.

- I have more useful knowledge.


DETAIL

ANSWERS

1.

1. Permissions (00:13)


3. Requests (00:20)


5. Requests (00:29)


7. Requests (00:37)

8.1. Requests (00:42)

8.2. Suggestions (00:48)


10. Suggestions (00:58)

11.Requestions (01:03)

12. Suggetions (01:07)

13. Suggestions (01:14)

14. Requests (01:20)

15. Requests (01:24)

2.

1. Secret camera (00:07)

2. Hidden (00:09)

3. Why not (00:11)

4. Effective (00:34)

5. We could (00:35)

6. Terrible (00:52)

7. How about getting (00:53)

8. Fool proof (01:09)

9. I think we should (01:11)

10. Isn’t (01:35)

11. 11.You’ll know (01:40)

12. Why don’t we (01: 42)

BÙI THỊ THU

3.

1. T (00:18) (I wanna do the same for him)

2. F (00:13) (My boyfriend always tries to surprise me by doing romantic thing)

3. F (00:20) (can’t think of anything)

4. F (00:32) (I would think about something he likes)

5. T (00:34) (and do something connected with that)

6. F (00:52) (that’s a nice idea)

7. T (00:55) (I’m not sure what is his favorite team)

8. F (01:07) (how can I find out his favorite team without aking questions)

9. T (01:30) (I recommend that you check the schedule on website)

10. F (01:36) (you’ll be able to choose the convenient day)

4.

a. Can (00:05)

b. Like (00:15)

c. Could (00:25)

d. Laundry service (00:36)

e. Like (00:46)

f. What time (00:550

g. Glass (01:07)

5.

A

1. True (00:05)

2. False (00:15) (in New York city)

3. False (00:18) (worried)

4. True (00:29)

5. True (00:51)

B

1. Couldn’t (00:23)

2. Couldn’t (00:30)

3. Couldn’t (00:35)

4. Could (00:45)

5. Could (00:48)

BÙI THỊ THU

6.

1. False (00:14-00:19)

2. True (00:28)

3. True (00:34)

7.

1. h (00:08) (smoke)

2. a (00:14) (new car)

3. f (00:21) (your phone)

4. d (00:31) (your laptop computer)

5. e (00:42) (party)

6. g (00:51) open the window)

7. c (00:59) (turn off the TV)

8. k (01:11) (Monday off)

9. i (01:20) (park hear)

10. b (01:28) (leave the room)

8.

- Have a picnic in the part (00:17)

- Visit Marta (00:52) (shall we visit her)

- Go swimming (01:24)

- Go to the cinema (01:46) (shall we go to the cinema)

9

10.

1. a (00:20)

2. c (00:47-00:55)

3. b (01:16-01:23)

4. c (02:15)

5. b (02:51-02:55)

1. True (00:24)

2. False (00:41)

3. True (00:52)

4. True (00:07)

BÙI THỊ THU

Preferences:


ANSWER KEY

Ex1:

1. C ( prefer + to Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa : Tớ thích đường nâu hơn đường trắng. )

2. B ( would rather + Vinf)

( Tớ không muốn đi chơi, tớ muốn ở nhà. )

3. A ( prefer + Ving + to + Ving )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn đi xe buýt hơn là đi tàu. )

4. C ( S1 +would rather + S2 + past simple )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ mong cậu sẽ ở lại đây với tớ và bọn trẻ. )

5. C ( would prefer + to Vinf + rather than + Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn đi bộ hơn đi xe ô tô. )

6. A ( would rather + Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn trở thành nghệ sĩ dương cầm. )

7. D ( prefer + Ving + to + Ving )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ thích chạy hơn là bơi. )

8. A ( prefer + to Vinf + rather than + Vinf )

( Dịch nghĩa: Cô ấy muốn làm vào ca đêm hơn là phải làm vào cuối tuần. )

9. A ( S1+ would rather + S2 + past simple )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ không muốn cậu ấy làm nó một mình. )

10. C ( S1 + would rather + S2 + past simple )

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ muốn cô ấy học thứ gì đó khác. )

Lưu Thu Thủy

Ex2:

3. I'd prefer to listen to some music.

( Dịch nghĩa: Chúng ta xem TV đi? - Tớ muốn nghe nhạc hơn. )

4. I'd rather go for a swim.

( Dịch nghĩa: Thế chơi quần vợt thì sao? - Tớ muốn đi bơi. )

5. I'd rather wait a few minutes.

( Dịch nghĩa: Chúng ta đi thôi? - Tớ muốn đợi thêm một ít phút. )

6. I'd prefer to eat at home.

( Dịch nghĩa: Cậu muốn tới nhà hàng không? - Tớ muốn ăn ở nhà. )

7. I'd rather think about it for a while.

( Dịch nghĩa: Tớ nghĩ chúng ta nên quyết định ngay bây giờ? - Tớ muốn

nghĩ thêm một lúc. )

8. I'd rather stand.

( Dịch nghĩa: Cậu muốn ngồi không? - Tớ muốn đứng. )

9. I'd prefer to go alone.

( Dịch nghĩa: Cậu muốn tớ tới với cậu không? - Tớ muốn đi một mình. )

Ex3:

2. stayed ( S1 + 'd rather + S2 + past simple )

Dịch nghĩa : Cậu muốn tớ đi bây giờ hay muốn tớ ở lại đây hơn?

3. stay ( would + S + rather + Vinf )

Dịch nghĩa : Cậu muốn đi chơi tối nay hay muốn ở nhà?

4. didn't ( S1 + would rather + S2 + past simple )

Dịch nghĩa : Đây là một bí vấn đề riêng tư, tớ mong cậu sẽ không

nói với ai khác.

5. was ( S1 + would rather + S2 + past simple )

Dịch nghĩa : Mình không muốn đưa ra quyết định mà không có Jack và Sue.

Mình muốn các bạn ấy đang ở đây.

6. didn't

Dịch nghĩa :

- Tớ có thể bật chút nhạc lên được không?

- Tớ không muốn cậu bật. Tớ đang cố gắng để học bài.

Lưu Thu Thủy

NECESSITY: Have (got) to, Must, Don’t have

to, Must not, Can’t

ANSWER KEY

Excercise 1


1.A (B is rejected because it’s minus the word to. The subject is “I”, so the

answer C is rejected too. And we got the correct one is A)

2.C (“must” doesn’t have the question form so A is rejected. B has the wrong

structure so C is the correct answer )

3.B (“must” doesn’t have the question form so A is rejected. The subject is “she”

so C is rejected. The correct answer is B)

4.C (A is wrong because the subject is Sally. B has the wrong structure so C is

correct)

5.C (A is rejected on the grounds that it’s lack of the word “to” and neither does

B because “must” isn’t accompanied by “to”. So C is correct)

6.B (There is only one way to express past time with these modal verbs: had to

so B is correct)

7.C (A is wrong because we don’t have “haves” in English and the subject is “he”

so B is wrong too. The correct answer is C)

8.A (B and C have wrong structure so A is the correct one)

Structures

• In order to + V +.., S + V + O

• According to + N, S + V+O

Ngô Phương Uyên

New words

Vocab

insurance

emergency

professional

Word form

n

n

adj, n

IPA

/in'∫ɔ:rəns/

/i'mɜ:dʒensi/

/prə'fe∫ənl/

Meaning

- sự bảo hiểm; hợp đồng bảo hiểm

- công việc bảo hiểm, nghề bảo hiểm

- tiền đóng bảo hiểm; tiền bảo hiểm

được thưởng

- tình huống khẩn cấp

-(thuộc ngữ) [thuộc] nghề, [thuộc]

nghề nghiệp

-chuyên nghiệp; nhà nghề

-(thuộc ngữ) (nghĩa xấu) chuyên

[môn]

-người chuyên nghiệp, có chuyên

môn

Excercise 2:


1.have to. Because the second sentence said: “ They have no choice.” So we can

see it’s a forced situation

2.Do you have to. Because this is a question and the subject is “I” so we need to

use modal verb “ have to” in yes/no question structure

3.Has (got) to. Because it’s a forced situation

4.Did she have to/didn’t . Because the sentence is in the past tense and only

modal verb “have to” can be used in the past tense and the others can’t so we

need to use have to in the past and in yes/no question structure here

5.Have to. Based on the sentence, it can be seen that this is a mandatory action

due to the situation, so we use “have to”

Ngô Phương Uyên

6.Have to. Because it said:” it’s the law” that means this is a mandatory action

due to the situation

7.Have to. Because it’s a forced situation that Shasa have to do because of her

teacher

8.Have to. In this case we need a modal verb of necessity but must can’t be used

in question structure so we use have to here

9.Have to. Based on the content we can see it’s a forced situation

Structures

S + V + O because S + V + O.

New words

vocab

purse

Word form

n

IPA

/pɜ:s/

Meaning

- ví [tiền]

Excercise 3:

Answers and explanations:

a) You don’t have to go to school on Saturdays


b) All drivers must/have to have a driving licence

The first sentence has the word “obligatory” expressing compulsion in the

present so we can use must or have to

Ngô Phương Uyên

c) Peter has to learn Spanish

The first sentence has the word “compulsary” expressing compulsion in the

present and the subject is “Peter” so we can use has to or must

d) Customers don’t have to go on trips organized by the hotel

The first sentence has the word “not obligatory” and the subject is customers

so we can use don’t have to

e) Passengers mustn’t smoke in this compartment

The first sentence has the word “aren’t allowed” so we can use mustn’t or

can’t either

f) You need to book in advance

The first sentence has the word “necessary” so we can use need to or have to

g) You need a visa to travel to India

The first sentence has the word “essential” so we can use need or have to

have

h) You don’t have to shout. I can hear you perfectly well


Structure

It + to be + necessary/essential/obligatory/compulsary.. +for + S + V + to V

= It + to be + necessary/essential/obligatory/compulsary.. + to V

= S + must/have to/need to + V

New words

Vocab

Compartment

Passenger

Word form

n

n

IPA

/kəm'pɑ:tmənt/

/'pæsindʒə[r]/

Meaning

-ngăn; buồng

-hành khách (đi tàu, xe)

-thành viên (của một tổ,

một đội) làm được ít việc

(so với kẻ khác)

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 4:

answer and explanation



3. The correct answer is have got to because the compulsion of situation

4. The correct answer is I’ll have to because must can’t be used in future tense

Structure

S + to be + ADJ

S + V + O + before + Ving

New words

vocab

register

conference

word form

n,v

n

IPA

/'redʒistə[r]/

/'kɒnfərəns/

meaning

• sổ

• đồng hồ ghi, công tơ

• (nhạc) khoảng âm

• (ngôn) phong cách

• vào sổ, đăng ký

• ghi thành văn bản để trình bày

• được nhớ rõ; được nhận thức

rõ (sự kiện); nhớ, ghi nhận (nói

về người)

• gửi bảo đảm (thư, hành lý)

• biểu lộ, biểu thị (qua nét mặt…)

• ghi, chỉ (đồng hồ ghi…)

• sự bàn bạc, sự trao đổi ý kiến

• hội nghị

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 5


+ Need to act is correct

+ Will must do is wrong because must can’t be used in future tense =>

must/need to/ have to do

+ Must to encourage is wrong because it has the wrong structure, it just has

must + Vinf not must + to + Vinf => must/should/have to encourage

+ Must to do is wrong because it has the wrong structure, it just has must +

Vinf not must + to + Vinf=> must/have to do

+ should also reduce is correct

Structure:

-ADV, S +V + O

-N(s/es) + S + V + O + to be + N/clause

New words

vocab

viable

alternative

word form

adj

adj, n

IPA

/'vaiəbl/

/ɔ:l'tɜ:nətiv/

meaning

- có thể đứng vững được

- có thể sống và phát triển

được

- có thể chọn để thay cho một

cái khác; khác

- sự lựa chọn (một trong hai

hay nhiều khả năng)

- một trong hai hay nhiều khả

năng

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 6:


1-H. Based on the content of the sentence and the key words “must” and “important”

2-F. Based on the content of the sentence

3-A. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “must”, “important” and “

essential”

4-C. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “necessary” and “need to”

5-B. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “forbidden”, “not allowed”,

”mustn’t”

6-G. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “ not necessary” and “don’t

have to”

7-D. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “shouldn’t”, “advise”

8-E. Based on the content of the sentence and key words “rule/law”, “have (got) to”

Excecise 8:


1 .F. Because Martha said: “ I can give you some suggestions”

2 .T. Because Martha said: “ You’ll have to ask Mrs.Benet about it”

3 .F. Because Martha said: “It doesn’t have to be a work of art”

4. F. Because Julian said: “ I haven’t even started yet”

5. T. Because Martha said: ”I finished it in one day”

New words

Vocab

presentation

submit

Word form

n

v

IPA

/'prezntəi∫n/

/səb'mit/

Meaning

-sự đưa ra, sự bày ra; sự trình ra,

sự trình bày

-vở trình diễn

-tặng phẩm (vào một dịp long

trọng)

-phục tùng, quy phục

-đệ trình

-gợi ý; biện luận

Ngô Phương Uyên

Excercise 7:


1.Have to (based on the sentence, we can see that this is a forced situation so we

use have to here )

2.Should (because the writer is hesitating and asking himself “go or not”, so the

answer is should)

3.Don’t have to ( based on the sentence said : “If I don’t want to” that means the

writer no need to do it. So we use don’t have to)

4.Shouldn’t ( based on the content, this is the speaker’s point of view and this is

not a enforcement and this sentence is in a negative way)

5.Have to (according to the paragraph, the writer need to take his own clothes

because the situation: go on a camping trip, so this is a forced situation)

6.Don’t have to (we have some key words here : “but”, “because…” that means the

writer don’t need to do it so we use don’t have to)

7.Must ( because we can see that the action is come from the writer’s feeling that

he need to do it. So we use must conform to the note of part 1.1)

8.Mustn’t ( look at the next sentence, it said : “It’s not allowed”, so based on the

content we use mustn’t that means it’s forbidden)

9.Don’t have to ( based on the sentence we can understand that the character’s

action : “ ring my parent” is unecessary so we use “ don’t have to” here)

New words

Vocab

chilly

tent

Word form

adj

n

IPA

/'tʃili/

/tent/

Meaning

-lạnh, lạnh lẽo, giá lạnh

-ớn lạnh, rùng mình (vì lạnh)

-lạnh lùng, lạnh nhạt ( tính cách)

-lều; rạp

Ngô Phương Uyên

EXPECTATION: Be supposed to

ANSWER KEY

ANSWER KEY

Exercise 1:

a. A: Were they supposed to do

B: were supposed to deliver

b. A: is supposed to start

B: are we supposed to stand

c. A: aren’t supposed to be

B: isn’t supposed to see

d. A: am supposed to wear

B: is supposed to rain

e. A: is supposed to be

B: are supposed to stay

Exercise 2:

Hi!

Remember my old college roommate Gary? He’s getting married tomorrow

and I’m the best man! He and his fiancée 0.were supposed to have a small

wedding but they ended up inviting more than 200 people! As best man, I have

some important responsibilities. For one thing, I'm 1.supposed to make sure

Gary gets to the wedding ceremony on time - not an easy job for me. At first,

we 2.were going to hire a limousine and driver, but I decided to drive him

there myself in a rented red sports car. I'm also supposed to hold the wedding

rings during the ceremony. Then, at the end of the reception party, I'm 3.going

to help the newlyweds leave quickly for their honeymoon. They're going

straight to the airport (I'm also 4.supposed to hold the plane tickets for them).

They 5.were going to go to Hawaii, but they changed their minds and are going

to Aruba instead. Oh! I just looked at the clock. I'd better sign off now, or I'll be

late for the rehearsal dinner. I 6.was going to leave five minutes ago! By the

way, Sophie, the maid of honor, will be there too. I've never met her, but she

7.is supposed to be very nice. I'll let you know how it goes!

Jack


Exercise 3:

1.A 2.C 3.C 4.C 5.D 6.A

Exercise 4:

1. F

2. G

3. A

4. H

5. D

6. E

7. C

8. B

Exercise 5:


2. am supposed to go

3. are supposed to wait

4. was supposed to make


6. was supposed to get

7. is supposed to fly

8. was supposed to be

9. were supposed to help

10. is supposed to fix



ANSWER KEY

Exercise1:

Answer: Answer:

Các dấu hiệu của tương lai: next year, tonight, in the spring, this year.

1. may/might/ could. (John và Amy có thể có một nhà bếp mới)

2. may/might/ coud. (Tôi có lẽ sẽ học tiếng Nhật vào năm tới)

3. may/might/ could. (Pavel có thể thử chơi khúc côn cầu vào năm tới)

4. may/might. (Daniel có thể không đi học vì anh ấy bị ốm. Chúng ta không sử

dụng could để nói về khả năng tương lai trong thể phủ định)

5. could. (Cô ấy có thể là cô giáo của chúng ta. Chúng ta sẽ thường sử dụng could


6. may/might/could. ( Chúng tôi có thể thử ăn tại nhà hàng này tối nay)

7. may/might/could. ( Louise and Pierre có lẽ sẽ kết hôn vào mùa xuân)

8. could. ( Đó có thể là xe buýt của chúng ta. Chúng ta sẽ thường sử dụng could


9. may/might. ( Họ có lẽ chưa sẵn sàng để làm bài kiểm tra)

10. may/might.( Isabella có thể không tham gia vào đội bóng rổ năm nay)

Structure:







Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

kitchen

(n)

/ˈkɪtʃ.ən/

Phòng bếp

hockey

(n)

/ˈhɑː.ki/

Khúc côn cầu

sick

(adj)

/sɪk/

Ốm

restaurant

(n)

/ˈres.tə.rɑːnt/

Nhà hàng

married

(adj)

/ˈmer.id/

Kết hôn

basketball

(n)


Bóng rổ

team

(n)

/tiːm/

Đội

Exercise 2 :

Answer:

1. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa : Bạn có nghĩ những con đường sẽ trở lên nguy hiểm

không? Ngoài trời tuyết đang rơi rất nhiều. => Ta dùng ‘It could be’ vì dựa vào

các dấu hiệu ở hiện tại nó có thể sẽ nguy hiểm vì nó là một cơn bão lớn )

2. It couldn’t. ( Dịch nghĩa: Trường học vẫn sẽ mở cửa chứ? Dựa vào ý thứ hai của

câu trả lời ta thấy “ Nó quá nguy nguy hiểm cho những xe buýt trường học vì

đang trong một cơn bão ngày càng tệ hơn”=> Ta dùng “ It couldn’t” để bày tỏ khả

năng mở cửa trường học là không thể )

3. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa: Trời sẽ gió rất to phải không? Dựa vào ý thứ hai của

câu trả lời ta thấy “ Gió đã và đang rất mạnh rồi.” Các dấu hiệu ở thực tế cho thấy

điều đó là có thể nên ta dùng ‘ It could be’)

4. It could. ( Dịch nghĩa: Trời sẽ trở lên rất lạnh phải không? Ta sẽ dùng ‘It could’-

nó rất có thể vì nhiệt độ tại Centerville đã xuống tới 0 độ rồi. )

5. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa: Có thể là cơn bão sẽ kết thúc vào thứ hai? Điều đó là

có thể => ta dùng ‘It could be’ vì cơn bão hiện tại đang di chuyển rất là nhanh và

có thể nó sẽ rời đi sớm )

6. It could be. ( Dịch nghĩa: Bạn có nghĩ trời sẽ ấm lên vào thứ ba không? Ta dùng

‘It could be’-điều đó là có thể vì tuyết đã ngừng rơi tại Centerville rồi )

Structure:

:

It + could ( be) : điều đó/ nó là có thể

couldn’t : điều đó/nó là không thể




Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

dangerous

(adj)

/ˈdeɪn.dʒɚ.əs/

Nguy hiểm

storm

(n)

/stɔːrm/

Cơn bão

temperature

(n)

/ˈtem.pɚ.ə.tʃɚ/

Nhiệt độ

below

(adv)

/bɪˈloʊ/

Phía dưới

possible

quickly

(adj)

(adv)

/ˈpɑː.sə.bəl/

/ˈkwɪk.li/

Có khả năng

Nhanh chóng

pretty

(adv)

/ˈprɪt̬ .i/

Khá

Exercise 3 :

Answer:

1. If I fininsh my assignment, I could go home early.( Nếu tôi hoàn thành nhiệm vụ của

mình, tôi có thể về nhà sớm)

2. Hiro might call you tomorrow.( Hiro có lẽ sẽ gọi cho bạn vào ngày mai)

3. My teacher might/may not give us homework to do this weekend. We’ll find out on

Friday.( Giáo viên của tôi có lẽ sẽ không cho bài tập về nhà vào cuối tuần này)

4. Could that be a UFO?( Đó có thể là một vật thể không xác định ngoài vũ trụ)

5. He might get a new puppy.( Anh ấy có lẽ sẽ có một chú chó con mới)

6. We might/may not go out tonight. We haven’t decided yet.( Chúng tôi có lẽ sẽ không

ra ngoài vào tối nay)

7. They may move to another city next year.( Họ có thể rời đến một thành phố khác vào

năm tới)

8. Fatima might take a year off school to travel around the world.( Fatima có thể nghỉ

học một năm để đi du lịch vòng quanh thế giới)

9. My children may be absent from school tomorrow.( Các con của tôi có thể nghỉ học

vào ngày mai)

10. . Francisco isn’t in class today. Could he be sick? ( Francisco không có trong lớp hôm

nay. Có thể là anh ấy bị ốm?)


Structure:






Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

concert

(n)

/ˈkɑːn.sɚt/

Sự kiện

assignment

(n)

/əˈsaɪn.mənt/

Nhiệm vụ

UFO

(n)

/ˌjuː.efˈoʊ/

Vật thể không xác định

puppy

(n)

/ˈpʌp.i/

Chú chó con

decided

(adj)

/dɪˈsaɪ.dɪd/

Quyết định

city

(n)

/ˈsɪt̬ .i/

Thành phố

travel

(v)

/ˈtræv.əl/

Du lịch

around

(adv)

/əˈraʊnd/

Vòng quanh

world

(n)

/wɝːld/

Thế giới

absent

(adj)

/ˈæb.sənt/

Không có mặt ở đâu đó

class

(n)

/klæs/

Lớp học


Exercise 4 :

Answer:

( Chúng ta sử dụng could, may, might để dự doán về các khả năng trong tương lai

chẳng hạn như các bạn chưa biết được hình trên nó là hình gì thì các bạn có thể phỏng

đoán nó theo suy nghĩ của bạn. Và sau đây là một số câu trả lời gợi ý.)

1. It could be a plate. / It might be a moon. (Nó có thể là một cái đĩa. / Nó có thể là

mặt trăng)

2. It might be a pyramid. / It could be a hat. (Nó có thể là một Kim tự tháp. / Nó có

thể là một cái mũ.)

3. It may be a box. / It might be an aquarium. (Nó có thể là một chiếc hộp. / Nó có

thể là một cái bể cá.)

4. It coud be ladder. / It might be a pair of skis. (Nó có thể là một cái thang. / Nó có

thể là một đôi ván trượt.)

5. It might be a starfish. / It could be a star-shaped lantern. (Nó có thể là một con

sao biển. / Nó có thể là một chiếc đèn ông sao.)

Structure:

+) S + may/might/could + V(base) : có thể


(Word form)

Phiên âm (IPA)

Nghĩa (Meaning)

plate

(n)

/pleɪt/

Đĩa

pyramid

(n)

/ˈpɪr.ə.mɪd/

Kim tự tháp

ladder

(n)

/ˈlæd.ɚ/

Thang

star-shaped lantern

(n)

/stɑːr-ʃeɪpt lantern /

Đèn ông sao

skis

(n)

/skiːz/

Ván trượt

starfish

(n)

/ˈstɑːr.fɪʃ/

Sao biển


Exercise 5 :

Answer:

1. It may rain.( Trời có thể mưa. Vì dựa vào dấu hiệu của hiện tại " trên trời

có một vài đám mây đen" chúng ta có thể dự đoán rằng trời rất có thể sẽ

mưa.)

2. Jack might go to bed.( Jack có thể là ngủ rồi. Chúng ta phỏng đoán dựa

vào dấu hiệu "Jack cảm thấy mệt" nên vào giờ này anh ấy có thể đi ngủ rồi.)

3. I may not be on time.( Tôi không thể đến đúng giờ. Dựa vào dấu hiệu " tôi

không biết chắc lớp học của mình ở đâu mà nó thì lại bắt đầu sớm" vì vậy

"tôi" sẽ mất thời gian đi tìm lớp học của mình nên có thể sẽ không vào lớp

đúng giờ.)

4. Sarah might buy some clothes.( Sarah có lẽ sẽ mua một vài bộ quần áo.

Chúng ta phỏng đoán cô ấy có thể mua quần áo vì "cô ấy có một chút tiền

và đang đứng trước cửa hàng quần áo.)

5. They may see each other.( Họ có thể sẽ gặp nhau.Vì cả Kelly và Jenny đều

có chung chuyến đi đến Washington vào mùa hè này nên biết đâu họ có thể

sẽ gặp nhau ở đâu đó tại Washington thì sao.)

6. James might get sick.( James có lẽ là bị ốm rồi.Bởi vì ngoài trời thì lạnh mà

James thì không mặc áo khoác cho nên anh ấy có thể sẽ bị ốm vì điều đó.)

7. My brother may buy some food.( Anh trai tôi có lẽ sẽ mua một chút đồ

ăn."Tôi" đoán rằng anh trai tôi sẽ mua thức ăn là vì anh ấy cảm thấy đói.)

8. I might not go to work today.( Tôi có lẽ sẽ không đi làm hôm nay. Bởi vì

"tôi" cảm thấy trong người có chút mệt nên có lẽ là " tôi" sẽ nghỉ làm hôm

nay.)

Structure:




Exercise 6 :

Answer:

7

1



or Queen.

3. You may be shy.







3

9

2

4

8

5

6



could, can't

ANSWER KEY

Ex 1:

1. must be ( vì có dấu hiệu ở câu sau “ tôi đau đầu và cổ họng của tôi bắt đầu đau”

cho thấy khả năng khá cao là B bị ốm và câu hỏi có “are” nên câu trả lời phả có “be”)

2. must be ( vì có dâu hiệu “ tôi nghĩ đấy là chai cuối cùng rồi”, câu hỏi có “are” nên

câu trả lời phải có “be” )

3. might ( vì có dấu hiệu “ đáng để thử đấy” cho thấy cả 2 người đều rất phân vân về

việc hiệu thuốc còn mở không )

4. might ( vì có dấu hiệu “ hãy xem trong ví của tôi” cho thấy B hoàn toàn không biết

trong ví của mình còn tiền không nên phải nhờ A kiểm tra)

5. must be ( vì có dấu hiệu “ mở cửa đến 11 giờ” mà hiện tại là 9:30 nên khả năng cao

hiệu thuốc vẫn mở cửa, câu hỏi có “is” nên câu trả lời phải có “be”)

6. must not ( vì đó chỉ là một tiệm nhỏ nên rất có thể họ sẽ không có súp)

7. must ( vì có dấu hiệu “ họ có mọi thứ” nên rất có thể họ có súp)

Workband:

New Word

Word form

IPA

English meaning

Vietnamese meaning

syrup

n

/ˈsirəp/

A thick sweet liquid made

by dissolving sugar in

boiling water

si rô


Collocation: Be out of sth: hết/mất cái gì

Structure:

Ex2:

- It’s worth + sth : đáng để làm gì

- What about sth? : cái gì đấy thì sao?

1.B (diễn tả một việc gì đấy có thể xảy ra và người nói có rất ít sự chắc chắn về điều

đó- tôi nghĩ là tôi đã thấy anh ta lái một chiếc xe màu đỏ giống cái này”.

2. A (diễn tả một việc bắt buộc phải làm theo )

3. C (vì đằng trước có “ 2 cậu bé trông giống hệ nhau” cho thấy người nói rất chắc

chắn rằng 2 cậu bé này là sinh đôi)

4. C (vì đây là một câu đề nghị mang tính lịch sự)

5. A (vì người này khẳng định rằng không tin, điều đó cho thấy rằng anh ta chắc chắn

nó không đúng sự thật )

6. A (vì câu là chỉ khả năng, năng lực của một ai đó trong quá khứ)

7. B (vì câu này thể hiện một việc gì đấy có khả năng xảy ra trong quá khứ)

8. A (vì câu này thể hiện hành động bắt buộc phải thực hiện)

9. B ( câu nói mang tính chất dự đoán, không có gì chắc chắn )

10. A (đưa ra một yêu cầu có tính lịch sự ta nên dùng could hơn là dùng may vì may

thể hiện sự trang trọng hơn could, nhưng đây là một tình huống giao tiếp bình

thường nên sự trang trọng là không cần thiết)


Word band


obey v /ə'bei/

act according to what you

have been asked or ordered

to do by someone in

authority, or to behave

according to a rule, law, or

instruction

nghe lời

identical

adj

/ai'dentik/

twin n /twin/

exactly the same, or very

similar

either of two children born

to the same mother on the

same occasion

giống hệt

con sinh đôi

arabic

n

/'ærəbik/

a language spoken in

Western Asia and North

Africa

tiếng Ả-rập

drill

v

/dril/

practise something,

especially military

exercises, or to make

someone do this

diễn tập, rèn luyện

Collocations: -clean up: dọn dẹp, lau chùi

Structure: see/saw +O+ Ving: bắt gặp ai đó làm gì

Ex3:

1. have (got) to ( vì thời gian đăng kí đã được quy định sẵn, hành khách phải tuân theo)

2. must ( người nói muốn nhấn mạnh việc phải nhớ để bắt taxi để có thể đến sân bay

đúng giờ)

3. has (got) to ( diễn tả một hành động cần thiết cái là kết quả của tình huống – cô ấy

có một đứa con học ở trường mầm non)

4. have (got) to ( diễn tả sự cần thiết của hành động cái là kết quả của tình huống- để

cô ấy không bị muộn )


5. must ( nhấn mạnh vào việc cô ấy phải lái xe qua thành phố )

6. must ( người nói muốn nhấn mạnh vào việc làm mới hộ chiếu nhập cảnh)

7. must ( người nói nuốn nhấn mạnh tầm quan trọng của viêc mang theo tấm ảnh)

8. must ( vì người nói muốn nhấn mạnh sự cần thiết của việc hoàn thành tờ khai và gửi

nó đi)

9. have (got) to (vì đây là một câu đề nghị, lời mời mang tính lịch sự)

10. have (got) to ( diễn tả sự cần thiết của hành động cái là kết quả của việc “ tôi muốn

có thời gian cho những câu hỏi sau cuộc trò chuyện)

Word band


book

v

/buk/

to arrange to have a

seat, room, performer,

etc. at a particular time

in the future

đặt chỗ, đặt trước

Embassy

renew

n

v

/'embəsi/

/ri'nju:/

the group of people who

officially represent their

country in a foreign

country, or the building

they work in

to increase the period of

time that something can

be used or is in effect

Đại sứ quán

làm mới, gia hạn

Collocations: - check in: đăng kí

- make sure: bảo đảm

Structures:

- remember to V(inf): nhớ để làm gì

- try to V(inf): cố gắng làm gì

- plenty of + N( không đếm được/ số nhiều): nhiều


1. You can’t be serious.( “đó hẳn là trò đùa” = “ bạn không nghiêm túc” )

2. That’s got to be wrong (“ điều đó không thể đúng”= “ điều đó chắc chắn sai”)

3. It has got to cost less than $50( “nó không thể đắt hơn $50”= “ nó hẳn là có giá thấp

hơn $50”)

4. It can’t be after 11:00 (“ nó chắc chắn là trước 11 giờ”= “ nó không thể sau 11 giờ”)

5. It has got to be nearby(“ nó không thể ở xa” = “nó chắc chắn ở gần đây”)

6. You can’t be sick.(“bạn vẫn khỏe” = “ bạn không thể ốm được

Word band


tag

n

/tæɡ/

a small piece of paper, cloth,

or metal with information on

it, tied or stuck onto

something larger

nhãn ( hàng, giá)

joke

n

/dʒəʊk/

something, such as a funny

story or trick, that is said or

done in order to make people

laugh

trò đùa

Collocation: come on: thôi nào

Structures: - Let’s + Vinf

Ex5:

-It’s too + adj+ for sb/sth

0.being -> be (line 2) ( vì sau modal verbs là Vo)

1. be have -> have (line 3) ( vì câu này có nghĩa là “họ có thể có 1 bí mật’, vậy nên chỉ

dùng một đông từ “have” là đủ)

2. must -> might (line 4) ( vì người nói không có bất cứ bằng chứng nào về điều mà họ

kết luận nên có rất ít sự chắc chắn trong câu này)


3. mights -> might (line 4) (modal verbs không chia dù chủ ngữ là số ít hay số nhiều)

4. hafta -> have to (line 5) ( chúng ta không dùng “hafta trong văn viết”

5. to be -> be (line 7) ( vì sau modal verb là Vo)

Word band

New Word

Word form

IPA English meaning Vietnamese meaning

nearby

not far away in

adj /ˈnɪəbaɪ/ gần, không xa

distance; close

townspeople

n

/'taunz,pi:pl/

the people who live in a

particular town,

considered as a group

người thành phố,

dân thành thị

stranger

n

/'streindʤə/

someone not

known or not

familiar

người lạ

Structures:

Ex6

- S + V1 + O + that + V2 … ( relative clause)

-try to Vinf: cố gắng làm gì

1. must ( vì câu sau là dẫn chứng cho để chắc rằng điều này sẽ xaye ra trong tương

lai)

2. might ( để diễn tả điều gì có thể xảy ra trong tương lai ta sử dụng “might” )

3. may ( vì có từ “if” thể hiện đây chỉ là một dự đoán không có gì để chắc chắn rằng nó

sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai)

4. might ( câu này diễn tả/ dự đoán một viêc có thẻ xảy ra trong tương lai do có cụm

từ chỉ thời gian ở tương lai “ in the next 12 months” )

5. must ( vì “ as the economy stabilizes” là dẫn chứng cho thấy điều này chắc chắn sẽ

xảy ra ở tương lai)

6. must ( vì thiếu hụt người lao động thì mức lương chắc chắn sẽ tăng lên)


7. could( vì có “possibly” thể hiện sự không chắc chắc, chỉ mang tính chất dự đoán điều

gì đó có thể xảy ra)

8. can’t ( vì có từ “certain” thể hiện sự chắc chắn nên sử dụng từ “can’t” để biểu thị rằng

việc đó không thể xảy ra)

Word band

New Word Word form

dynamic

inflation

decelerate

stabilize

financial

adj

n

v

v

adj

IPA

/dɑɪ.ˈnæ.mɪk/

/in'fleiʃn/

/di:'seləreit/

/'steibilalz/

/fai'nænʃəl/

English meaning

characterized by constant

change, activity, or

progress.

a general increase in

prices and fall in the

purchasing value of

money.

reduce in speed

make or become unlikely

to give way or overturn.

relating to finance.

Vietnamese meaning

năng động

sự lạm phát

chậm lại

làm ổn định

thuộc về tài chính

Collocations: - create up: tạo ra

- increase to: tăng lên

- fall to: rơi xuống - decelerate to: giảm tốc độ xuống

Structures:

- because of + N = because + clause = due to + N : bởi vì

- although + clause = despite/ in spite of + N : mặc dù

Ex7:

1.T ( “he must be very talented” )

2. F (“But Kurzweil believes that there could be tiny robots called nanobots implanted

into our brains to make us think faster, and improve our memory.”)

3. T (“According to him, A.I machines will also evolve and they may cause mass

destruction to our world, and exterminate humans as happens in some science-

fiction films”)


4. F (“ But I think scientists must be very careful in developing A.I program.”)

5. T (“ They must also detect any malfunctions and prevent cyber-attacks”)

Word band

New Word Word form

futurist

n

IPA

/ˈfjuː.tʃər.ɪst/

English meaning

a person who makes

statements about what

will happen in the

future based on their

studies and knowledge

Vietnamese meaning

người theo thuyết

tương lai

nanobot

n

/ˈnæn.əʊ.bɒt/

an extremely small

robot (= a machine

controlled by a

computer that can do

things automatically)

robot rất nhỏ

implant

v

/ɪmˈplɑːnt/

put an organ, group of

cells, or device into the

body in a medical

operation

cấy dưới da (theo y

học)

exterminate

v

/ɪkˈstɜr·məˌneɪt/

kill all the animals or

people in a particular

place or of a particular

type

tiêu diệt, hủy diệt

malfunction

n

/ˌmælˈfʌŋk.ʃən/

fail to work or operate

correctly

sự cố, sự trục trặc

cyber-attack

n

/ˈsaɪ.bə.rəˌtæk/

an illegal attempt to

harm someone's

computer system or the

information on it, using

the internet

tấn công mạng

Structure: - A be more adj than B: A hơn B

- A be as adj as B: A bằng B


ANSWER - NOUNS

EXERCISE 1

Proper Nouns

Count Nouns

Common Nouns

Non-count Nouns

Katya (tên riêng 1 đồ vật) ,

New York (tên thành phố),

May, Panama, Typhoon

(tên con vật),

Thanksgiving (tên ngày lễ)

journey, world, boast,

birthday, years, miles,

things, starts, ports,

markets, pot, cat, family,

trip, sight, harbor

Giải thích: Những danh

từ trên có thể dùng được

với số đếm.

courage (danh từ trìu

tượng), equipment,

money, technology,

food, cooking, water,

news, music, reading,

loneliness (danh từ

trìu tượng)

Vocabulary

Courage=bravery (n)

Mile (n)

Equipment (n)

Technology (n)

Habor (n)

Pronounce (IPA)

/ˈkɝː.ɪdʒ/

/maɪl/

/ɪˈkwɪp.mənt/

/tekˈnɑː.lə.dʒi/

/ˈhɑːr.bɚ/

Meaning

sự dũng cảm can đảm

dặm, lý

trang thiết bị

công nghệ

bến tàu, cảng

Structure:

Decide + to V-inf : Quyết định làm gì

Want + to V-inf: Muốn làm gì

(Be) able to : Ai đó có thể làm gì

- Past Simple Tense: S + V(ed) + O

- Past continuous Tense: S+ was/were + V-ing

Collocations:

- Office/camping/kitchen equipment

- Electrical equipment


EXERCISE 2

1.Puppies Dịch cả câu: Bạn có biết rằng con chó của Jason đã có ba con chó con

xinh đẹp?

Giải thích: sau số đếm + danh từ đếm được số nhiều (Puppy=>puppies)

2.Men Dịch cả câu: "Spice Girl" là một ban nhạc toàn nữ, vì vậy không có bất kỳ

người đàn ông nào

Giải thích: động từ “were “ chia ở QKĐ=> danh từ ở dạng số nhiều (Man=>men)

3.Watches Dịch cả câu: Hơi lạ khi Victor đeo hai chiếc đồng hồ _ mỗi chiếc trên

mỗi cánh tay.

Giải thích: Sau số đếm+ danh từ đếm được số nhiều (Watch=>watches)

4.Women Dịch cả câu: Nếu phụ nữ làm những công việc giống như chồng của

họ, họ sẽ được trả lương như nhau

Giải thích: Động từ chia ở thì HTĐ => chủ ngữ số nhiều (woman=>women)

5.Teeth Dịch cả câu: Nha sĩ nói tôi phải nhổ hai chiếc răng!

Giải thích: Sau số đếm + danh từ đếm được số nhiều (Tooth=>teeth)

6.People Dịch cả câu: Có bao nhiêu người đã có mặt tại buổi diễn?

Giải thích: sau “many” + danh từ số nhiều

(Person=> people)

7.Feet Dịch cả câu: Chúng tôi đã đi bộ hang dặm, chân của chúng tôi rất đau.

Giải thích: động từ to be dạng số nhiều=> chủ ngữ số nhiều (Food=> feet)

8.Children Dịch: Cô Jenkins vừa sinh em bé. Vì vậy lúc này cô ấy có 3 đứa con.

Giải thích: sau số đếm + danh từ đếm được số nhiều

(Child=>the children)

Vocabulary

Bit (n)

Word form

N

IPA

/bɪt/

Meaning

mảnh, miếng, mẩu,

một chút

Strange (adj)

ADJ

/streɪndʒ/

xa lạ, không quen

biết, kì lạ, lạ thường

Trinh Thị Huyền Trang

Collocations

Pay a fine

Pay attention

Pay by credit card

Pay cash

Pay a visit to

somewhere

Pay your respects

Pay the bill

Meaning

Nộp tiền phạt

Chú ý

Trả bằng thẻ tín dụng

Trả bằng tiền mặt

Thăm

Kính trọng

Thanh toán chi phí

Example

- I'd rather pay a fine than

apologize.

- Vinnie, pay attention to what

you're doing!

- You may choose to pay by credit

card. instead of cash or check.

- Should I finance or pay cash for

a vehicle?

- Please pay a visit to our house

whenever you are in town.

- Pay your respects to those who

have fallen and fought for your

country

- You can pay the bill online.

Take sth out

Di chuyển thứ gì đó sang

chỗ khác

- I took out some onions from the

refrigerator.


EXERCISE 3:

1.are/were

=>Vì chủ ngữ của câu “the clothes” là một danh từ số nhiều, đây là một câu cảm

thán và không xác định rõ tại thời điểm nói là quá khứ hay hiện tại nên có thể

chia ở thì HTĐ hoặc QKĐ (do trong câu có “you bought me for my birthday”).

2.was

=>Vì chủ ngữ của câu là “the information” là danh từ ở dạng số ít nên to be phải

chia ở dạng số ít và đây là câu ở quá khứ nên phải chia ở thì QKĐ (turned out).

3.are

=> “jeans” là 1 danh từ số nhiều nên phải chia to be ở dạng số nhiều, do có dấu

hiệu thời gian “tonight” nên phải chia ở thì hiện tại.

4.takes

=> “luggage” ở dạng số ít và câu diễn tả 1 sự thật hiển nhiên là hành lí chiếm rất

nhiều chỗ (take up a lot of room) nên phải chia theo thì HTĐ.

5.looks

=> “hair” là một danh từ ở dạng số ít nên động từ look cũng phải chia ở dạng số ít

và vì là 1 câu bình thường nên chia động từ ở thì HTĐ

6.wasn’t

=> Mặc dù “news” ở dạng số nhiều nhưng ta luôn phải chia động từ sau “news” ở

dạng số ít và có “could” mang ý nghĩa ở quá khứ nên cũng phải chia to be ở dạng

quá khứ.

7.is

=> “money” là danh từ không đến được nên ta chia động từ ở dạng số ít.

8.are

=> Trong cấu trúc There+be+noun (có) thì cách chia động từ to be phụ thuộc vào

danh từ đằng sau. Vì articles ở dạng số nhiều nên phải chia be → are.

9.has had

=> J. K. Rowling là danh từ riêng chỉ 1 người nên phải chia động từ ở dạng số ít. Do

ảnh hưởng của bà đối với nền văn học thiếu nhi xảy ra từ quá khứ và vẫn còn tiếp

tục ở hiện tại, có thể kéo dài đến tương lai nên phải chia ở thì HTHT.

10.comes

=> “programme” là danh từ số ít, câu này dùng để chỉ một lịch trình, kế hoạch nên

phải chia động từ ở thì HTĐ.

Collocations:

Turn out : hóa ra là

Turn down : từ chối, vặn nhỏ loa

One good turn deserves another: ở hiền gặp lành

Take up : Chiếm, bắt đầu một sở thích

Take on : tuyển (nhân viên)/ đảm nhiệm

take back one’s word: rút lại ý kiến

take off one’s hat to somebody: thán phục ai/ đưa tiễn ai

Have an influence on STH/SB : có ảnh hưởng tới ai, cái gì


EXERCISE 4

1 - C (a wealth of experience)

Dịch nghĩa : Tôi hy vọng rằng đến khi tôi già đi, tôi có thể có được nhiều kinh nghiệm

2 - D (solution to)

Dịch nghĩa : Không ai có thể nghĩ ra một cách giải quyết vấn đề toán học

3 – E (cure for)

Dịch nghĩa : Các quan chức y tế gần đây đã thông báo rằng một phương pháp chữa

khỏi căn bệnh hiểm nghèo đã được tìm thấy.

4 – F (disadvantage of)

Dịch nghĩa : Một điều bất lợi khi sống ở thị trấn là thiếu nơi vui chơi an toàn cho trẻ

em

5 – B (have an appointment)

Dịch nghĩa : Tôi có một cuộc hẹn với bác sĩ hôm nay

6 – G (make trouble)

Dịch Nghĩa: Tôi không muốn gây rắc rối, nhưng tôi có một số đề xuất có thể giúp

mọi việc diễn ra suôn sẻ hơn

7 – A (Hit the nail on the head)

Dịch nghĩa : Tôi nghĩ rằng bạn đã đánh một cái đinh vào đầu khi nói rằng điều thiếu

sót ở công ty chúng tôi là cảm giác tự tin.

Từ vựng

Acquire

=achieve

announce

fatal disease

Smooth

Smoothly

Từ loại

V

V

N

ADJ

ADV

Phát âm

/əˈkwaɪɚ/

/əˈnaʊns/

/ˈf eɪ.t̬ əl//dɪˈziːz/

/smuːð/

/ˈsmuːð.li/

Nghĩa

Nhận được, đạt được

Thông báo

Bệnh hiểm nghèo

Suôn sẻ

một cách êm ả, một cách suôn sẻ

Collocations, idioms:

Wealth of experience: Nhiều kinh nghiệm, giàu kinh nghiệm

Come up with: tìm ra, nghĩ ra, đưa ra một ý tưởng, một câu trả lời

Cure for: Cách chữa bệnh, cách điều trị; việc chữa bệnh

Disadvantage of: Tác hại, bất lợi của

Lack of sth: Diễn đạt sự không có cái gì đó hoặc có nhưng không đạt đủ tới một

mức độ yêu cầu nào đó: There's a lack of musical instruments in this school.

(Trường này thiếu nhạc cụ - ý nói không có)

Have an appointment with sb: Có cuộc hẹn với ai

Make trouble: Gây rắc rối

Hit the nail on the head: nói điều gì đó hoàn toàn chính xác

Solution to: Giải pháp cho


EXERCISE 5

1. T

(People have different views about how governments should measure their country’s

progress)

2. F

(There are three: a high level of employment, infrastructure and public services, a

country’s standing)

3. F

(judging the progress of a modern country should be how well that country protects

the natural environment, and whether it is moving towards environmental

sustainability)

4. T

(the success of a nation could be measured by looking at the health, happiness, and

well-being of its residents)

5. T

(the economy is obviously a key marker of a country’s success, but society progress,

environment, and health criteria are equally significant)

Vocabulary Word form IPA Meaning

Authority

Measure

Fundamental

Job creation

Transport network

Education systerm

Revenue

Sustainability

Significant

N

N

ADJ

N

N

N

N

N

ADJ

Chính quyền

Biện pháp

Cơ bản, chủ yếu

Tạo việc làm

Mạng lưới giao thông vận tải

Hệ thống giáo dục

Thu nhập

Sự bền vững

Có ý nghĩa, quan trọng

Collocations:

a package/series of measures: một loạt các biện pháp

take/ use/ introduce/ implement/ institute/ employ measures: thực hiện, sử dụng

đề xuất biện pháp

to measure someone with one's eye : nhìn ai từ đầu đến chân

a preventative/precautionary measure (=something done to prevent something

bad)

a drastic measure (=an extreme measure)

a security measure (=something done to keep a place safe from danger or crime)

a temporary measure (=something done for a limited period of time to deal with a

problem)


EXERCISE 6

1. informations -> information (danh từ không đếm được)

2. United States -> the United States

3. troubles -> trouble ( danh từ không đếm được không có dạng số nhiều)

4. persons -> people ( danh từ đặc biệt)

5. culture -> cultures (Văn hóa của cả 2 nước thì phải để số nhiều)

6. factor -> factors (danh từ đếm được => several factors: nhiều yếu tố)

7. building -> buildings (danh từ đếm được chia ở dạng số nhiều theo cấu

trúc song song)


Information N /ˌɪn.fəˈmeɪ.ʃən/ Thông tin

Headquarter N /ˌhedˈkwɔː.tər/ Sở chỉ huy

Trouble N /ˈtrʌb.əl/ Khó khăn

Machinery (C1) N /məˈʃiː.nər.i/ Cơ cấu máy móc

Section N /ˈsek.ʃən/ Bộ phân, nhóm

Similarity N /ˌsɪm.ɪˈlær.ə.ti/ Sự giống nhau

Crevice N /ˈkrev.ɪs/ Kẽ nứt

Collocation:

mean/spell trouble (=mean there will be trouble)

be asking for trouble (=be silly or dangerous)

endless trouble (=a lot of trouble)

Phrases: without any/much trouble (=easily)


EXERCISE 7

1. Village

2. January

3. Jeep

4. Manager

5. Bridge

6. Passenger

7. Jokes

EXERCISE 8

Collocations

- a head-on crash (=in which the front part of two

vehicles hit each other)

- a high-speed crash

have a crash (= be involved in a crash) (=in a car)

- a crash victim (=someone injured or killed in a crash)

- a crash investigator (=someone who tries to find the

cause of a crash)


A

Countable nouns

Treat, city, countryside, sun,

door, friends, house, dogs,

forest, evening, deer, days

Uncountable nouns

Air, rain, welcome

B

Ways, meals, window ledge, saucer,

cornflakes, potatoes, vegetables,

table, jam-pot, doors, moods, child,

expression, face, shoulder, ear, bite

Breakfast, porridge, milk,

sugar, lunch, pudding, tea-time


Saucer N /ˈsɔː.sər/ Đĩa lót tách

Porridge N /ˈpɒr.ɪdʒ/ Cháo

Corn-flakes N /ˈkɔrn ˌfleɪks/ Bánh ngô

Affectionate ADJ /əˈfek.ʃən.ət/ Trìu mến

Collocation:

- a spoonful of something : 1 thìa gì đó

- cries of delight: tiếng kêu của sự vui mừng

- be accustomed to something : quen với điều gì

- Brush up against somebody/something: gặp gỡ, chạm nhẹ nhàng

- Put yourself in one’s shoes : Thử đặt mình vào vị trí của người khác

- Sleep on it: Suy nghĩ kỹ



EXERCISE 9

1. Much - đi với danh từ không đếm được là “time”.

2. Many - đi với danh từ đếm được là “points”.

3. Lots of - đi được với cả danh từ đếm được và không đếm được trong câu tích cực.

4. A lot of - đi được với cả danh từ đếm được và không đếm được.

5. A few - mang nghĩa một ít nhưng đủ dùng, đi với danh từ đếm được

6. A little - cũng mang nghĩa có một chút đủ để làm gì, đi với danh từ không đếm

được.

EXERCISE 10

1. october => October

(vì trước tên "tháng" (tên riêng) ta phải viết hoa )

2. thunders => thunder

("sấm sét" là danh từ không đếm được nên không có dạng số nhiều)

3. Many => much

(đứng trước danh từ không đếm được , ta dùng “much”)

4. brave => Brave

(Danh từ riêng, viết hoa chữ cái đầu)

5. columbus => Columbus

(Danh từ riêng, viết hoa chữ cái đầu)

6. Little => a little

(ở đây chỉ lượng "coffee" còn ít nhưng đủ dùng cho bữa sáng)

7. Jewelries => jewelry

("trang sức" là danh từ không đếm được-> không có dạng số nhiều)

8. Electricities => electricity

("điện" là danh từ không đếm được, nên không có dạng số nhiều)

9. Are => is

(vì chủ ngữ là danh từ không đếm được nên động từ ta chia ở dạng số ít)

10. A few => a little

(với danh từ không đếm được ta không dùng "a few" mà phải dùng “a little”)

11. A few waters => A little water

("nước" là danh từ không đếm được không có dạng số nhiều, mà đi với danh

từ không đếm được thì ta không thể dùng "a few", thay vào đó ta dùng "a little")

EXERCISE 11

1. many => Vì lists là danh từ đếm được ở dạng số nhiều

2. plenty of

3. millions of

4. number

5. A lot of

=> Vì plenty of something mang ý nghĩa về số lượng, đủ

hoặc nhiều thứ gì đó.

=> Vì millions không thể đi trực tiếp với 1 danh từ vì thế

phải dùng of ở giữa.

=> Vì letters là danh từ đếm được số nhiều, còn amount

chỉ đi với danh từ không đếm được.

=> Cấu trúc đầy đủ là a lot of + danh từ đếm được số

nhiều/không đếm được số ít.

6. Much => Vì mail là danh từ không đếm được

7. most

8. much

9.much

=> Vì the most chỉ sử dụng trong so sánh nhất theo cấu trúc

the most + long adjective, còn most là hầu hết, chỉ số lượng.

=> Vì much được sử dụng trong cấu trúc so sánh hơn,

không phụ thuộc vào danh từ.

=> Vì much được sử dụng trong cấu trúc so sánh

hơn, không phụ thuộc vào danh từ.

Collocations:

look for information (also seek information formal)

exchange information (=give information to each other)

a piece/bit of information (also an item of information formal)

a source of information (=someone or something that can provide

information)


ANSWER - ARTICLES

EXERCISE 1

1. T - (He was born in 1452 in Vinci, a suburb of Florence, Italy. During the years growing

up here, he developed a love for painting and began to demonstrate his artistic and

academic talents.)

2. F - (travel around the world -> he left Florence to work for Ludovico Sforza, Duke of

Milan, as a full-fledged painter and engineer)

3. F - (the only one -> he has lots of famous pictures such us: Mona Lisa, the Last Supper

of Jesus,…)

4. F - (from 1514 to 1519 -> Leonardo spent the last three years of his life in Cloux's

small mansion and died in 1519 = from 1516 to 1519)

5. T - (Leonardo da Vinci is a true Renaissance gentleman, with talents and interests

spanning the fields of art, science, and mathematics - Through his outstanding

achievements this day, they show that he is not only good at art but also in mathematics,

physics, and geography)


Renaissance

N

/ˈren.ə.sɑːns/

Thời kì Phục Hưng

Demonstrate

v

/ˈdem.ən.streɪt/

Chứng minh

Full-fledged

ADJ

/ˌfʊlˈfledʒd/

Chính thức

Anatomy

N

/əˈnæt.ə.mi/

Thuật mổ xẻ, phân tích

Technique

N

/tekˈniːk/

Kỹ thuật, phương pháp

Echo

N/V

/ˈek.əʊ/

Tiếng vang, tiếng dội

Commissioned

ADJ

/kəˈmɪʃ.ən/

Được ủy quyền

Preparatory

ADJ

/prɪˈper.ə.tɔːr.i/

Bước đầu, chuẩn bị

Mankind

N

/mænˈkaɪnd/

Loài người

Mansion

N

/ˈmæn·ʃən/

Biệt thự

Collocation:

Set up/establish/create a commission

Appoint a commission (=choose the members of a commission)

Head a commission (=be in charge of one)

A commission recommends something

A commission approves something



EXERCISE 2

1. Rita plays the violin and her sister plays the guitar.

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước một loại nhạc cụ và sau động từ “play”

Violin và guitar là nhạc cụ

2. The Sahara desert is located in Africa.

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước tên của sa mạc và không thêm mạo từ trước tên của

châu lục; Sahara: sa mạc Sahara - Africa: châu Phi

3. The deaf are the people who can’t hear anything

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước một tính từ ví dụ như: the deaf, the rich… để chỉ một

nhóm người

The deaf: những người kiếm thính - The people: nhóm người

4. There is an onion left in the fridge.

Dùng mạo từ “an” trước một danh từ số ít đếm được và bắt đầu bằng nguyên âm

Onion bắt đầu bằng một nguyên âm

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước danh từ chỉ địa điểm cụ thể – in the fridge

5. On our trip to Spain, we acrossed the Atlantic Ocean.

Không dùng mạo từ trước tên của một quốc gia (ngoại trừ các quốc gia kết thúc

bằng “s”) và dùng mạo từ “the” trước tên của đại dương

Spain: Tây Ban Nha; Atlantic Ocean: Đại Tây Dương

6. Where is the nearest shop? There is one at the end of this street.

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước các cụm từ mang nghĩa so sánh hơn, so sánh nhất

7. David played basketball and baseball at the Boy’s club last year.

Không dùng mạo từ trước tên của một môn thể thao

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước các danh từ chỉ địa điểm đã được xác định: The Boy’s

club last year.

8. The Smiths are going to Ha Long bay next summer.

Không dùng mạo từ trước tên của các vịnh: Ha Long bay

9.Maria comes from the United States. She is an American girl.

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước tên của các quốc gia kết thúc bằng đuôi “s”: the United

States

10. The boy said that the Moon is bigger than the Earth

Dùng mạo từ “the” trước những danh từ đặc biệt, được xem là duy nhất: The

Moon, The Earth

NOTES: Do not back tense when the reporting clause describe an obvious fact.

Collocations:

- located in: nằm ở, tọa lạc ở

- left in: đặt trong

- comes from: đến từ

EXERCISE 3

1-C: X Hide Park is a very large park in central London

Giải thích: Trước tên đường phố, công viên

quảng trường không dùng mạo từ

Dịch nghĩa: Công viên Hyde là công viên rộng nhất ở trung tâm LonDon

2-A: Children usually begin to go to……X….school at…the…age of six

Giải thích: Go to school(cụm cố định) , at the age of+tuổi( cụm cố định)

Dịch Nghĩa: Trẻ em thường bắt đầu đi học khi 6 tuổi

3-F: The work had to be done…X…by hand when there were no modern machines.

Giải thích: Cụm cố định: do by hand

Dịch nghĩa: Tất cả công việc phải được làm bằng tay khi không có máy móc hiện đại.

4-G: …The…Grand Hotel is in ….X…. Baker Street

Giải thích: Trước tên các khách sạn, nhà hang, quán rượu có mạo từ “the”. Trước tên

đường phố không dùng mạo từ

Dịch Nghĩa: Khách sạn Grand ở trên phố Banker

5-D: There are only…a….few mistakes in your composition, don’t make …the… same

ones any more

Giải thích: dùng “a few” với nghĩa một chút.”the same”: cụm cố định

Dịch Nghĩa: Chỉ có một vài lỗi trong bài tiểu luận của bạn thôi, đừng có tái phạm như

thế nữa.

6-E: Jason’s father bought him…the….bicycle that he had wanted for his birthday.

Giải thích: The dùng trước một danh từ được xác định bằng một mệnh đề” that he

had”

Dịch Nghĩa: Bố của Jason mua cho anh ta chiếc xe đạp mà anh ta muốn vào dịp sinh

thật.

7-B: …X…winter is usually cold, but the winter of this year is warm

Giải thích:Không dùng the trước tên các mùa trong năm khi dùng với nghĩa chung,

dùng the với tên mùa khi nó đã được xác định

Dịch Nghĩa: Mùa đông thường lạnh, nhưng mùa đông của năm nay thì ấm



Collocations: “do”

- do damage: gây hại

- do the ironing/washing/shopping…: là quần áo/giặt giũ/mua sắm

- do someone a favour: giúp ai làm gì

- do business: làm ăn, kinh doanh

- do researches: nghiên cứu

EXERCISE 4

1. The, Ø

Giải thích: page1 là danh từ đã được xác định(page 42)=>the

Khi đề cập đến các phần trong tài liệu như các báo cáo và thư trang trọng, không

dùng “the” để đề cập đến các phần cụ thể trong tài liệu đó

+ Không dung mạo từ khi số trang hoặc phần được chỉ định cụ thể.

2. Ø - Tương tự như câu 1, không dung mạo từ

3. Ø - Giải thích:Không dùng “the” trước các môn thể thao.

4. The - Giải thích: danh từ đã được xác định (nhạc của bộ phim đó)

5. a, an , the

-branch là danh từ đếm được số ít được nhắc đến lần đầu=> dùng a

-opportunity là danh từ đếm được phát âm bắt đầu là nguyên âm=> an

-branch được nhắc đến lần 2 => dùng the

6. the, the

-the1: danh từ đã được xác định (knowledge of English)

-the2: cụm từ cố định in the international trade

7. The, an

-danh từ đã được xác định=> dùng the

- trước danh từ đếm được phát âm bắt đầu là nguyên âm=> an

8. Ø

Những địa điểm công cộng như trường học, nhà thờ, nhà tù, bệnh viện,,, nếu

đến đó đúng mục đích thì không dùng the. Đến đó với mục đích khác thì dùng

the

Collocations:

Cover with/in : được bao phủ một phần

Interested in = keen on = font of = crazy about:

say mê

Be glad to + V: rất sẵn lòng khi làm gì

EXERCISE 5

1. the century – Singular countable noun; ordinal (twenty-first)

2. the United Kingdom – a country with ‘United’ in the name

3. the equator – a unique place – there is only one equator

4. the Philippines – a country with a plural name

5. the only person – Singular countable noun preceded by a unique adjective (only)

6. the recorder – Singular countable noun; this is similar to ‘she plays the recorder’.

It refers to a kind of instrument, not a particular example of that

7. the money – Uncountable noun; money is associated with the fee, so we know

which money and it becomes definite


Equator

N

/ɪˈkweɪ.tər/

Xích đạo

Portuguese

N

/ˌpɔː.tʃəˈɡiːz/

Bồ Đào Nha

Modesty

N

/ˈmɒd.ɪ.sti/

Tính khiêm tốn

Decline

V

/dɪˈklaɪn/

Từ chối, khước từ

Collocation:

* Decline

Sharp/steep decline (=by a large amount)

A long-term decline (=happening for a long time)

Stop/halt a decline (=stop it from continuing)

Reverse a decline (=make something start to improve again)

Go/fall into decline (=become less important, successful, etc)


EXERCISE 6

1 The "Sun" là danh từ số ít, chỉ sự độc nhất nên ta sử dụng "the"

trước đó.

2 ∅

Không sử dụng mạo từ trước tên của các bữa ăn.

3 the

4 the

5 ∅ / the

Dùng “the" trước "capital" (thủ đô) vì mỗi nước chỉ có một

thủ đô.

"Telephone" (điện thoại) là danh từ chỉ sự phát minh độc nhất,

nên ta sử dụng "the".

+ Ta thường không sử dụng mạo từ trước tên quốc gia, ví dụ

"I live in Vietnam".

+ Tuy nhiên, một số trường hợp đặc biệt, những quốc gia có

cấu tạo từ các bang, vùng lãnh thổ, đảo, ta sử dụng "the" trước

đó, VD: The Philippines, the United Kingdom, the United States.

6

the

Dùng "the" trước "cinema" (rạp chiếu phim) theo quy tắc "the"

dùng trước các địa điểm công cộng.

7 an

“Umbrella" là danh từ số ít đếm được và bắt đầu bằng một

nguyên âm nên ta sử dụng mạo từ "a".

8 An / ∅

9

+ "An” được sử dụng do "injured" bắt đầu là một nguyên âm và

"man” là danh từ số ít đếm được, chưa

xác định.

+ "Ø " được sử dụng do mục đích đến bệnh viện ở đây là để

chữa trị cho người đàn ông bị thương.

"Money" là danh từ không đếm được và chưa xác định nên ta

không sử dụng mạo từ ở đây.

10 ∅

Ta không sử dụng mạo từ khi đề cập đến việc nói một ngôn ngữ

"Japanese” (tiếng Nhật); nếu nói "The Japanese" thì mang nghĩa

là những người Nhật.

∅

11 The / the

Danh từ số ít "man" và "woman" đã được nhắc đến trong câu

thứ nhất, nên ta sử dụng "the" cho cả hai danh từ đó ở câu thứ

hai.



12

the / the

+ Ta sử dụng "the" trước từ chỉ số thứ tự, ví dụ the first, the

second, the third.

+ "The" đứng trước danh từ chỉ sự độc nhất "space" (vũ trụ).

13 ∅ / the

Khi ta muốn nói xem chương trình nào đó trên tivi, cụm từ

"on television" được sử dụng, nhưng xem tại rạp chiếu phim ta

lại sử dụng cụm cố định "at the cinema".

14

∅ / the

+ Không sử dụng mạo từ trước tên của các bữa ăn.

+ Sử dụng mạo từ "the" trước "sea"(biển).

+ Do danh từ "country" là danh từ số ít đếm được và chưa xác

định nên ta sử dụng mạo từ "a".

15 a / the

+ "The" sử dụng trước “capital" (thủ đô) vì mỗi quốc gia chỉ có

một thủ đô, dùng "the" trước những danh từ là duy nhất, độc

nhất

16

17

18

19

The / the

the / the

the

the

"The" được sử dụng trước danh từ chỉ sự độc nhất, the Sun

(Mặt Trời), the sky (bầu trời).

(Người ta nói rằng Robin Hood cướp của người giàu chia cho

người nghèo.)

"The" + tính từ = danh từ chỉ người ở dạng số nhiều.

The rich: người giàu.

The poor: người nghèo


The unemployed: người thất nghiệp.


The dead: người chết

20 the

Ta sử dụng "the" trước từ chỉ số thứ tự.

The last: cuối cùng.

Structure:

+ Near Future : S + am/is/are + going to + V + O

+ Present Perfect : S + have/has + V3 + O

Collocations:

+ At the end of : phía cuối của….

+ Be full of mistakes (= have a lot of mistakes)

+ Be all a mistake (= used to say that a situation happened because of a mistake)

EXERCISE 7:

1. My sister often goes to __(0)__ church by __ (0)__ bus.

+ Không sử dụng mạo từ trước "church” vì mục đích đi đến nhà thờ để cầu nguyện hoặc

làm lễ, trường hợp sử dụng "go to the church" khi ta muốn nói đi đến nhà thờ nhưng để

làm việc khác.

+ Không sử dụng mạo từ trước tên của các phương tiện giao thông, khi đứng sau giới từ

"by".

2. Mel's mother is in _(0)_ hospital, so we went to visit her last night.

(Mẹ của Mel đang nằm viện, vì vậy tối hôm qua chúng tôi đã vào viện để thăm bà ấy.)

Trong trường hợp này, mẹ của Mel nằm viện nên không sử dụng mạo từ trước danh từ

"hospital".

3. Rita is studying _(0)_English and _(0)_ Maths this semester.

Không sử dụng mạo từ trước tên của các môn học.

4. Do you know __the__ man who is waiting for the bus over there?

Dùng "the" trước "man" vì danh từ "man" đã được xác định bởi một mệnh đề quan hệ là

"who is waiting for the bus over there".

5. Please give me __(0)__ cup of __(0)__ coffee with __(0)__ cream and __(0)__ sugar.

+ “A cup" vì mạo từ "a" ở đây để định lượng (một cốc) và "cup" là danh từ đếm được.

+ Phần còn lại không sử dụng mạo từ vì "coffee, cream, sugar" là những danh từ không

đếm được và chưa được xác định trong câu.

6. __The__ big books which are on ___the___ table are for my history class.

+ Dùng " the" trước danh từ "big books" vì cụm danh từ đã được xác định bởi một mệnh đề

quan hệ ở phía sau.

+ “on the table" là một cụm từ cố định.

7. My _(0)_ car is four years old, and it still runs well.

Không sử dụng mạo từ sau tính từ sở hữu "my".

8. There are only __a__ few seats for tonight's musical.

Dùng “a” trước "few" vì "a few" là một cụm từ cố định.

9. __The__ chair that you are sitting in is broken.

Sử dụng mạo từ "the" vì "chair" (ghế ngồi) đã được xác định bởi mệnh đề quan hệ "that you

are sitting".

10. The Civil War was fought in __the__ United States between 1861 and 1865.

Sử dụng mạo từ "the” trước United States (Hợp chủng quốc Hoa Kì) vì đây là một quốc gia

được hình thành từ nhiều bang.


EXERCISE 7:

11. We went by __(0)__ train to the west of England.

Không sử dụng mạo từ trước tên của các phương tiện giao thông khi chúng đứng sau giới

từ "by”.

12. _The_ people who live in _(0)_ Scotland are called the Scots.

+ Sử dụng mạo từ "the" trước danh từ "people" vì danh từ này đã được xác định bởi một

mệnh đề quan hệ ở đằng sau.

+ Không sử dụng mạo từ trước tên đất nước "Scotland" vì "the" chỉ đứng trước tên những

đất nước có cấu tạo đặc biệt như the United States, the United Kingdom, the Philippines.

13. This house is very nice. Has it got __a__ garden?

(Ngôi nhà rất đẹp rồi. Nó có vườn không?)

+Dùng mạo từ “a” trước danh từ "garden" khi nó mang ý nghĩa là "một cái vườn".

14. There isn't __an__ airport near where I live. __The__ nearest airport is 70 miles

away.

+ Sử dụng mạo từ "an" vì "airport" bắt đầu bằng một nguyên âm và ở đây mang ý nghĩa là

"một sân bay". + Sử dụng "The" vì đứng trước tính từ có một âm tiết trong so sánh bậc

nhất "nearest".

15. Did you have __a__ nice holiday? Yes, It was __the__ best holiday I've ever had.

+ Dùng "a" vì "holiday" là danh từ số ít và chưa được đề cập đến trong câu.

+ Dùng "the" trước "best holiday" để tạo thành dạng so sánh hơn nhất.

16. Mai always plays __the__ piano whenever she has free time.

+ Dùng "the" trước tên của các loại nhạc cụ khi nó đứng sau động từ "play".

17. My daughter was born on __the__ fifth of January.

+Sử dụng "the" trước từ chỉ số thứ tự.

18. Yesterday I went to _(0)_ school by _(0)_ bus because my bike had been broken

down.

+ Không sử dụng mạo từ khi nói đi đến trường (went to school) để học, có thể sử dụng

"went to the school" khi nói đi đến trường với mục đích khác không phải để học.

+ By bus: đi bằng phương tiện gì, không sử dụng mạo từ.

19. It takes me _____an___ hour to finish my work.

+ Sử dụng mạo từ "an" vì "hour" là danh từ số ít và bắt đầu bằng một nguyên âm, do "h"

trong "hour" là âm câm, nên âm đầu tiên sẽ là "o".

20. She used to have __a__ cat and ___a___ dog but ___the___ dog died.

+ Sử dụng “a” cho "cat" and "dog" vì đây là hai danh từ số ít và được nhắc tới lần đầu tiên,

vế sau ta sử dụng "the" cho "dog" vì "dog" lúc này được, nhắc tới lần thứ hai.


EXERCISE 7

Collocation:

Go shopping : Đi mua sắm

Go for a swim/ walk/ run : đi bơi/đi bộ/ chạy bộ

Go to the station/ supermarket/ park : đi tới nhà ga/siêu thị/công viên

Rain cats and dogs: Mưa tầm tã

A friend in need is a friend indeed: hoạn nạn mới biết bạn hiền


accustomed (adj) / əˈkʌstəmd/ quen

jeans (n) /ʤiːnz/ quần jeans

luggage (n) /ˈlʌgɪʤ/ hành lí

chatter (v) /ˈtʃӕtə/ nói luyên thuyên

cease (v) /siːs/ dừng lại

window ledge (n) /ˈwɪndəʊ lɛʤ/ bệ cửa sổ

saucer (n) /ˈsɔːsə/ đĩa nhỏ đựng chén

porridge (n) /ˈpɒrɪʤ/ cháo đặc

corn-flakes (n) / kɔːn-fleɪks/ bánh bột ngô nướng


EXERCISE 8

Question 1: D. an, the, the

- Dùng mạo từ an trước danh từ số ít đếm được bắt đầu bằng nguyên âm: an island

Cấu trúc: The + N1 + of + the + N2 - the largest island of the Republic of China.

- Dùng mạo từ the trước cụm từ mang ý nghĩa so sánh nhất

Dịch nghĩa: Đài Loan là một hòn đảo. Nó là hòn đảo lớn nhất trong khu vực

Trung Quốc

Question 2: B. Ø, the

- Summer: mùa hạ. Không dùng mạo từ trước các danh từ chỉ mùa trong năm

- Trước days cần có mạo từ the vì nó được xác định là những ngày của mùa

hè

Dịch nghĩa: Trời nóng vào mùa hè và ngày cũng dài hơn

Question 3: D. a, a

- Cả will và way đều là các danh từ đếm được số ít đặc nhắc đến lần

đầu

Dịch nghĩa: Nơi nào có ý chí , nơi đó có con đường

Question 4: B. the, Ø

- The + adj: chỉ một nhóm người trong xã hội, chia động từ số nhiều

- Hardworking people: danh từ đếm được số nhiều được nhắc đến lần đầu

nên không cần có mạo từ

Dịch nghĩa: Người Việt Nam là những con người chăm chỉ

Question 5: D. the, the

- Dùng mạo từ the trước tên của các biển

Dịch nghĩa: Quê của Rose ở biển phía Nam và cha cô ấy ở biển Đen

Question 6: C. the, the

- Dùng mạo từ the trước danh từ chỉ số thứ tự: the first, the second, the third

Dịch nghĩa: Jimmy đã thử 2 lần , và bây giờ anh ta sẽ thử nó lần thứ 3


EXERCISE 9

Answer

1.C

Idiom

Behind the times

Meaning of idiom

Lỗi thời, hết thời

Meaning of sentences

Bạn tôi không bao giờ thích sử

dụng điện thoại thông minh. Cô

ấy thật lỗi thời

2.A

Give someone a

hand

Giúp ai đó một tay

Tôi muốn di chuyển cái bàn này.

Bạn có thể giúp tôi một tay

không?

3.C

In the red

Mất tiền, lỗ

Công việc kinh doanh đang trở

nên tệ trong những ngày này.

Chúng tôi đang bị thua lỗ trong

ba tháng qua

4.C

In the nick of time

Xíu nữa, một lúc nữa

Tôi đã tới hiệu thuốc một lúc. Tôi

thật sự rất cần thuốc này

5.B

Once in a while

Đôi khi, lâu lâu

Bạn đã đến rạp chiếu phim mới

chưa? Chưa, lâu lâu tôi mới xem

phim

6.C

Feeling under

the weather

Cảm thấy không

khỏe, không được

tốt

Tôi cảm thấy không được khỏe.

Tôi nghĩ rằng tôi đã bị cảm lạnh

mất rồi

7.C

Hit the nail on

the head

Đoán đúng, đánh

đúng trọng tâm

Tôi nghĩ rằng bạn đã đoán đúng

khi nói rằng thiếu sót của công ty

chúng ta là sự tự tin

8.D

Sit on the fence

Lưỡng lự

Tôi đang lưỡng lự với bạn gái khi

cô ấy đi mua sắm

9.A

Once in a blue

moon

Rất hiếm khi

Tôi từng gặp anh ấy mọi lúc

nhưng bây giờ anh ấy rất hiếm

khi ghé thăm tôi

10.B

Miss the boat

(= to miss an

opportunity)

Lỡ cơ hội

Nếu bạn lỡ cơ hội này tức là bạn

đã quá muộn để có được một cơ

hội trong công ti chúng tôi


EXERCISE 10

1. Beautiful girlfriend → a beautiful girlfriend

Beautiful girlfriend: là một danh từ bắt đầu bằng phụ âm và được nhắc tới lần đầu tiên nên

ở đây phải có mạo từ “a” đứng trước.

2. A ape → an ape

Ape là một danh từ bắt đầu bằng nguyên âm được nhắc tới lần đầu tiên nên ở đây phải có

mạo từ “an” đứng trước

3. Ape → the ape

Ape đã được nhắc tới ở câu trước vậy ở câu này ta dùng mạo từ “the” đứng trước

4. A first video game → the first video game

First video game: là một cụm danh từ có từ chỉ số thứ tự “first” phía trước cho nên ta phải

dùng mạo từ “the” đứng trước thay cho mạo từ “a”.

5. A artist → an artist

Artist is a noun that starts with a vowel sound so we use an in front of it

6. The video games → video games

Ở đây, video games là một danh từ số nhiều chỉ chung là trò chơi điện tử cho nên ta không

dùng mạo từ đứng trước

7. Story → a story

Trong câu có nghĩa là “Anh ấy sáng tạo ra một câu chuyện” cho nên “story” ở đây sẽ là danh

từ được nhắc đến lần đầu tiên vì nó vừa được sáng tạo ra. Cho nên ta thêm mạo từ “a” đứng

trước

8. Story → the story

Story is mentioned for the second time so we use "the"

9. A world → the world

“World” (thế giới) là vật thể duy nhất vậy nên ta phải dùng mạo từ “the” đứng trước thay cho

“a”

10. Most famous game → the most famous game

Examples: the best time…

“Most famous game” – trò chơi nổi tiếng nhất, là danh từ so sánh nhất cho nên ta phải thêm

mạo từ “the” đứng trước

11. “the new characters” → “ new characters”

New characters (nhiều nhân vật mới) chỉ một nhóm đối tượng không xác định cho nên ta

không dùng mạo từ đứng trước

12. “ Brave little plumber” → “the brave little plumber”

Ở đây brave little plumber chỉ Mario và được xác định bằng môt cụm từ “in a red hat and

work clothes” nên ta phải thêm mạo từ “the” đứng trước

Vocabulary

- Plumber (n) /ˈplʌmə/ : thợ sửa ống nước

- Ape (n) /eɪp/ : con vượn

- Kidnap (v) /ˈkɪd.næp/ : bắt cóc

- Chase (v) /tʃeɪs/ : bắt cóc

- rescue (v) /ˈres.kjuː/ : giải thoát

Collocations: Therausus

- come to the rescue/somebody’s rescue = to come and

rescue or help someone

- pick somebody up = to rescue someone from a

dangerous place by taking them away in a boat


EXERCISE 11

1. The - chỉ địa điểm đã xác định trong cuộc hội thoại

2. The - chỉ địa điểm đã xác định trong cuộc hội thoại

3. A - sử dụng trong câu cảm thán với “what” và đứng trước tính từ với âm đầu là phụ

âm

4. An - sử dụng trong câu cảm thán với “what” và đứng trước tính từ với âm đầu là

nguyên âm

5. A - sử dụng trong câu cảm thán với “what” và đứng trước tính từ với âm đầu là phụ

âm

EXERCISE 12

1. A - đứng trước tính từ và sự vật lần đầu được nhắc đến

2. A - mạo từ đứng trước một danh từ để xác định đó là ai hoặc cái đó là cái gì

3. The - đứng trước một thể loại, tên của một tạp chí, tiểu thuyết,…

4. A - chỉ số lượng cuốn sách

5. The - đứng trước địa điểm xác định là hiệu sách, mà trong cuộc hội thoại người

nói hướng chủ ý đến việc đọc và mua sách

6. A - sự vật được nhắc đến lần đầu ta dùng mạo từ không xác định


Adjectives

and

Adverbs

NHÓM 7


Adjectives

GRAMMAR

Editing

































Reading


































speculative thành speculated :vì đây là động từ và từ some là chủ ngữ

dramative thành dramatically: vì alter là động từ

variant common thành common variant.:trật từ tính từ trước danh từ

tough thành tougher thì ở ngữ cảnh này đang muốn nói đến sức ảnh hưởng lớn

hơn của biến thể

slow down thành slowing down vì đây là cụm danh từ

astronomic thành astronomical vì astronomic là thuộc về thiên văn và astronomical

là khám phá thiên văn testing capable thành testing capability vì đây là cụm danh

từ ghép và tính từ không đứng sau test


reading

After facing setback after setback this year, the nonprofit formed to

make sure COVID-19 vaccines reach the poorest countries of the world

may finally live up to its promise in 2022. A 14 December report shows

that after scaling back its ambitions, the COVID-19 Vaccines Global

Access (COVAX) Facility is close to meeting a revised target of 1.42 billion

doses available this year. And today, the effort got a huge boost when

the World Health Organization (WHO) gave an emergency use listing to a

vaccine that COVAX is counting on for up to 1 billion doses next year.

Despite COVAX’s recent successes and its optimistic new supply forecast,

delivering the prized shots to needy countries isn’t the last word in

achieving global vaccine equity: Many nations may still struggle to

distribute their supplies and, in some cases, overcome vaccine hesitancy.

“Supply still needs attention, but we have pivoted to delivery and

absorption as the main issues,” says Seth Berkley, CEO of Gavi, the

Vaccine Alliance. Established by WHO, Gavi, UNICEF, and the Coalition for

Epidemic Preparedness Innovations (CEPI), COVAX initially set a goal of

vaccinating 20% of the population in every country—enough to cover

health care workers and the people most at risk of developing severe

disease. To accomplish this, COVAX said it needed to have 2 billion doses

available by the end of this year. The COVAX forecasting report issued

this week shows the effort will fall far short of that with 1.38 billion dose

available by year’s end.COVAX set out to buy vaccines in bulk and then

provide them to 1.8 billion people in 92 low- and middle-income

countries at little or no cost. But after COVID-19 vaccines first became

available in December 2019, many wealthy countries ordered far more

doses than they needed, bumping COVAX—which negotiates steep

discounts—to the end of the purchasing line. COVAX also counted on the

Serum Institute of India to supply up to 1.1 billion doses, but it backed

out of the arrangement in March in order to protect India during its


1.how to achieve global vaccine equity

A.COVAX meets a revised target of 2 billion vaccines

B. Delivering the prized shots to needy countries

C. Many wealthy countries didn't order far more doses than they needed

D.Both A,B and C

2.What is the synonym of optimistic?

A.hopeful B.Doubtful C.Busy D.clear


3.Why did COVAX initially set a goal of vaccinating 20% of the population in every

country

A.It's enough to cover health care workers and the people most at risk of

developing severe disease

B.That reduces the financial burden on COVAX

C.It makes more countries provide more vaccines

D.It helps to quickly reach the global vaccine

4.What is the main topic of the passage?

A.By the end of this year, it is not possible to achieve universal vaccine equity

B.Rich countries are selfish

C.It costs a lot of money to achieve vaccine equity

D.There are many countries that backed out of the arrangement to protect their

country

1D 2A 3A 4A

1:ở chỗ COVAX initially set a goal of vaccinating 20% of the population in every

country—enough to cover health care workers and the people most at risk of

developing severe disease. To accomplish this, COVAX said it needed to have 2

billion doses available by the end of this year. và delivering the prized shots to

needy countries isn’t the last word in achieving global vaccine equity và many

wealthy countries ordered far more doses than they needed, bumping COVAX—

which negotiates steep discounts—to the end of the purchasing line

2 là ở chỗ hopeful là hi vọng

doubtful là nghi ngờ

busy là bận rộn

clear là sạch

nên là hopeful

3 ở chỗ COVAX initially set a goal of vaccinating 20% of the population in every

country—enough to cover health care workers and the people most at risk of

developing severe disease.

4 ở chỗ But after COVID-19 vaccines first became available in December 2019,

many wealthy countries ordered far more doses than they needed, bumping COVAX

—which negotiates steep discounts—to the end of the purchasing line. COVAX also

counted on the Serum Institute of India to supply up to 1.1 billion doses, but it

backed out of the arrangement in March in order to protect India during its Delta

variant surge.


find and correct

1,we suggested he go on holiday,but he didn’t agree because he had to do his

long hard deadline

2.we cleaned all the kitchen while our parents were out to dinner,

3.This is a 15-year-olds round Japanese table made of wood and that our grandma

purchased during the war

4.Last year Matt earned twice as many as his brother, who had a better position

than him

5. The woman whose red car is parked in front of the bank is a famout pop star.

6.The better you are at English, more chance you have to get a job with

international organizations.

7.: Even though they are among the smallest carnivores, weasels will attack

animals that are double their size.

8.: Today was such beautiful day that I couldn’t bring myself to complete all my

chores.

9.: One of the most importants issue is the lack of parking spaces at the local mall

near our house.

10.when comparing math and music Many individuals believe that learning

arithmetic is many better for the brain than learning music.

1.long hard chuyển thành hard long vì đây là trật tự tính từ strong một câu mà

tính từ chỉ quan điểm đứng trước độ dài

2all the kitchen chuyển thành all the kitchens vì all là tính từ chỉ danh từ số nhiều

3.15-year-olds chuyển thành 15-year-old vì lúc nào tính từ sau cunbgf cũng là sô ít

và đây là mặc định

4.twice as many as thành as twice many as vì đây là công thức so sánh bội

6.more chance thành the more chance thì đây là công thức so sánh càng càng

5.famout thành famous vì famout không tồn tại

7.double sửa thành twice. double ( bản thân đã mang nghĩa “twice the size”) ->…

that are double them.

8. such beautiful day trở thành such a beautiful day

9.importants trở thành important vì tính từ important không tồn tại

10.many better thành much better vì better không dùng many

Matching and true/false/not given question

A. what is an adjective? you can see that adjectives make nouns in paragraphs come

alive, adjectives make sentences from passages smoother. An adjective used to

describe a noun or add information to the noun,

B.The position of the adjective plays an important role in the composition of the

sentence, just changing the position of the adjective can lead to a change in the

meaning of the sentence or wrong usage of the grammar. Adjectives before nouns: are

adjectives that come before nouns that can describe noun but they must be arranged

in a certain order:Quantity>Opinion > Size > Quality > Age > Shape > Color > Participle

Forms > Origin > Material > Type > Purpose.for example: That is a beautiful tiny red

flower.the other hand,stand-alone adjectives do not need nouns: there is no standard

to remember whether an adjective can go before a noun or not, but when we read it,

we will feel embarrassed.like aware boy,alone home,..Adjectives might be after linking

verb as tobe,seem,look,...to show feeling of the noun

C.To classify adjectives, we divide them according to their usage, divide by function,

descriptive adjectives, quantitative adjectives, indicative adjectives, possessive

adjectives, interrogative adjectives. firstly, With descriptive adjectives used to describe,

we divide into many other adjective forms: adjectives indicating properties such as

expensive, rich, ...; adjectives for color as black, red, ..; adjectives for size like small, big,

tall, ..; adjectives of status such as happy, hungry, funny, ..; adjectives of shape as oval,

round, circle, ..Secondly, quantitative adjectives we answer the question “how much”,

“how many”? that's why include: word for mass:much,many,some,..; counts;

1,2,3,86,742,..or ordinal number: first, second, third,...Thirdly,directive adjectives

Adjectives describe which noun or pronoun you are talking about, used to indicate

spatial and temporal position in the interval time, They include the words: this, that,

these, those. Indicative adjectives always precede the object to which it points.

Fourthly, Possessive adjectives describe the owner of an object. Common possessive

adjectives include: my, his, her, their, your, our. If you want to omit a noun or pronoun

then you need to replace it with: mine, his, hers. Fifthly, Interrogative adjectives often

appear in questions, you might think:"how can an adjective be a question".Adjectives

of this form. is to confirm the noun to be confirmed when the number of nouns

involved is too much. The most commonly used interrogative adjectives are: which,

what, whose. These words will not be considered interrogative adjectives if they are

not followed by a noun.

D.sometimes, Adjectives can also be used for many different purposes. When after a

noun,are used to describe the quality/property of indefinite pronouns like there is

nothing interesting,or when adjectives are used in phrases describing measurement as

the road is 5 kms long or adjectives used as nouns for example the rich,the

poor,...There are many other ways to use it depending on the intended use

E.In general, adjectives are used to describe or identify nouns;depending on the

position of the adjective, the meaning of the sentence can change. There are many

types of adjectives, but they are all used to describe and add information to the noun

and There are many other ways to use it depending on the intended use


B.Vị trí của tính từ đóng vai trò quan trọng trong thành phần của câu, chỉ cần thay đổi vị trí của

Phần I-matching

1:definition of adjective in a sentence

2:adjectives have many classifications and depending on the different usage, we divide the

adjectives into respective groups.

3: summarizing, adjectives can be used in many different situations and abilities

4:position of adjectives in a sentence

5:adjevtives have sone ways to use

A

B

C

D

E

Phần III-true or false

Adjectives are words that are only used to describe and identify objects that can be listed as

descriptive words

adjectives that come before the noun and have only a single meaning

adjectives can be used as verbs in certain cases

4. adjectives can be used in many different ways

một tính từ là gì? bạn có thể thấy rằng tính từ làm cho danh từ trong đoạn văn trở

nên sống động, tính từ làm cho câu từ đoạn văn trở nên mượt mà hơn. Một tính từ

được sử dụng để mô tả danh từ hoặc thêm thông tin cho danh từ

tính từ là có thể dẫn đến thay đổi ý nghĩa của câu hoặc dùng sai ngữ pháp. Tính từ đứng

trước danh từ: là những tính từ đứng trước danh từ có thể mô tả danh từ nhưng chúng phải

được sắp xếp theo một thứ tự nhất định: Số lượng> Ý kiến> Kích thước> Chất lượng> Tuổi>

Hình dạng> Màu sắc> Hình thức tham gia> Nguồn gốc> Chất liệu> Loại> Mục đích.cho Ví dụ:

is a little red flower xinh đẹp, ngược lại, tính từ đứng riêng không cần danh từ: không có

That

chuẩn để nhớ một tính từ có thể đi trước danh từ hay không, nhưng khi đọc chúng ta sẽ

tiêu

cảm thấy lúng túng. .like boy, alone home, .. Các tính từ có thể đứng sau động từ liên kết như

tobe, dường như, nhìn, ... để thể hiện cảm giác của danh từ


C.Để phân loại tính từ, ta chia theo cách sử dụng, chia theo chức năng, tính từ miêu tả, tính từ

định lượng, tính từ chỉ định, tính từ sở hữu, tính từ nghi vấn. thứ nhất, Với tính từ miêu tả dùng

để miêu tả, chúng ta chia thành nhiều dạng tính từ khác: tính từ chỉ tính chất như đắt, giàu, ...;

tính từ chỉ màu sắc như đen, đỏ, ..; tính từ chỉ kích thước như small, big, high, ..; các tính từ chỉ

thái như vui, đói, vui, ..; tính từ chỉ hình dạng như oval, tròn, tròn, .. Thứ hai, tính từ định

trạng

chúng ta trả lời câu hỏi “bao nhiêu”, “bao nhiêu”? đó là lý do tại sao bao gồm: từ chỉ

lượng

khối lượng: nhiều, nhiều, một số, ..; số đếm; 1,2,3,86,742, .. hoặc số thứ tự: thứ nhất, thứ hai,

thứ ba, ... Thứ ba, tính từ chỉ thị Tính từ mô tả danh từ hoặc đại từ bạn đang nói đến, được sử

dụng để chỉ vị trí không gian và thời gian trong khoảng thời gian, Chúng bao gồm các từ: cái

này, cái kia, cái này, cái kia. Tính từ chỉ định luôn đứng trước đối tượng mà nó trỏ đến. Thứ tư,

Tính từ sở hữu mô tả chủ sở hữu của một đối tượng. Các tính từ sở hữu phổ biến bao gồm:

của tôi, của anh ấy, cô ấy, của họ, của bạn, của chúng tôi. Nếu bạn muốn lược bỏ một danh từ

hoặc đại từ thì bạn cần thay nó bằng: mine, his, hers. Thứ năm,Tính từ nghi vấn thường xuất

hiện trong các câu hỏi, bạn có thể nghĩ: "Làm thế nào một tính từ có thể là một câu hỏi". Tính

từ dạng này. là xác nhận danh từ cần xác nhận khi số lượng danh từ tham gia quá nhiều. Các

tính từ nghi vấn được sử dụng phổ biến nhất là: which, what, which. Những từ này sẽ không

được coi là tính từ nghi vấn nếu chúng không được theo sau bởi một danh từ.

D.Đôi khi, Tính từ cũng có thể được sử dụng cho nhiều mục đích khác nhau. Khi sau một danh

từ, được dùng để mô tả chất lượng / đặc tính của đại từ không xác định như không có gì thú

vị, hoặc khi tính từ được sử dụng trong các cụm từ mô tả đo lường như con đường dài 5 km

hoặc tính từ được sử dụng như danh từ ví dụ người giàu, người nghèo. , ... Còn nhiều cách sử

dụng khác tùy theo mục đích sử dụng

E. Nói chung, tính từ được sử dụng để mô tả hoặc xác định danh từ, tùy thuộc vào vị trí của

tính từ mà ý nghĩa của câu có thể thay đổi. Có rất nhiều loại tính từ nhưng chúng đều được

dùng để mô tả và bổ sung thông tin cho danh từ và Có nhiều cách sử dụng

1.An adjective used to describe a noun or add information to the noun

Một tính từ được sử dụng để mô tả một danh từ hoặc thêm thông tin vào danh từ,

Suy ra 1-A

2.tính từ có nhiều cách phân loại và tùy theo cách sử dụng khác nhau mà ta chia tính từ thành

các nhóm tương ứng.

Suy ra 2-C

3.tóm lại, tính từ có thể được sử dụng trong nhiều tình huống và khả năng khác nhau

Suy ra 3-E

4.vị trí của tính từ trong một câu

Suy ra 4-B

5-tính từ còn có những cách khác để sử dụng

Suy ra 5-D


Phần II-true false

1.Tính từ là những từ chỉ được sử dụng để miêu tả hoặc xác định từ mà được dùng

như tính từ mô tả (F)

Trong phần D

sometimes, Adjectives can also be used for many different purposes. When after a


nothing interesting,or when adjectives are used in phrases describing measurement

as the road is 5 kms long or adjectives used as nouns for example the rich,the


2.tính từ sử dụng trước danh từ và chỉ có một nghĩa(F)

Phần B đã đề cập chi tiết

Adjectives before nouns: are adjectives that come before nouns that can describe

noun

stand-alone adjectives do not need nouns: there is no standard to remember

whether an adjective can go before a noun or not, but when we read it, we will feel

embarrassed.like aware boy,alone home,..Adjectives might be after linking verb as

tobe,seem,look,...to show feeling of the noun

3.tính từ có thể được sử dụng như động từ trong một số trường hợp (NG)

trong bài chỉ đề cập tính từ và chưa rõ có thể sử dụng như động tù hay không hoặc

thậm chí không thể sử dụng như động từ nên ta điền là NOT GIVEN

4.tính từ có thể sử dụng rất nhiều cách (T)

trong phần D đã đề cập qua nên ý này là đúng

sometimes, Adjectives can also be used for many different purposes. When after a


nothing interesting,or when adjectives are used in phrases describing measurement

as the road is 5 kms long or adjectives used as nouns for example the rich,the



comlpete the sentences

up out back of on off

1. People are fed……… with all these traffic jams

2. There was a………. confrontation between management and unions.

3. Tom’s very laid-………. about his exams.

4. It was just a one-………….; it won’t happen again.

5. At that time, it was completely unheard-………… for girls to go to university.

6. A cut-……………… stops the kettle boiling dry

1. Up (fed-up: chán ngấy, phát ngán- Mọi người phát ngán với tất cả những

cảnh tắc đường)

2. On (head-on: trực diện, đối đầu- Đã có một cuộc đối đầu trực diện giữa quản

lý và công đoàn)

3. Back (laid-back: thoải mái- Tôm rất thoải mái về các kỳ thi của mình)

4. Off (one-off: 1 lần duy nhất- Nó chỉ là một lần duy nhẩ, nó sẽ không xảy ra

lần nào nữa)

5. Of (unheard- of: không có- Vào thời điểm đó, việc con gái vào đại học là

hoàn toàn không có)

6. Out (cut -out: cắt sẵn – Một vết cắt ngăn ấm đun sôi cạn nước)

complete the paragraph

1C 2A 3B 4D 5C 6A 7C 8B 9C 10C

1. It isn’t quite_________that he will be present at the meeting.

A. right B. exact C. certain D. formal

2. As there was a _____________ cut in the hospital, the surgeon had to call off the

operation.

A.power B. powering C. powder D. powerful

3. Could you please_________an appointment for me to see Mr. Smith?

A. manage B. arrange C. take D. have

4. The police_________her for helping the murderer to escape.

A. caught B. searched C. brought D. arrested

5. When John_________in London, he went to see the Houses of Parliament.

A. came B. reached C. arrived D. got

6. I read an interesting _________in a newspaper about farming today.

A. article B. advertisement C. composition D. explanation

7. Students are expected to _________their classes regularly.

A. assist B. frequent C. attend D. present

8. Before you sign anything important, pay careful _________to all the conditions.

A.notice B. attention C. regards D. reference

9. In the central region the dry season is long and severe, and the _________annual

rainfall is only about 70 cm.

A. refreshing B. general C. average D. greatest

10. As soon as the children were_________, their mother got them out of bed and into

the bathroom.

A. woke B. wake C. awake D. waken



Well, I would like to talk about the final football match between U23 Vietnam and

U23 Uzbekistan in Asian Football Championship in January, 2018.

You know, it is still spectacular and (1-impress)_______ although our team didn’t

win the cup for the following two reasons. Firstly because the team contributed a

(2-note)________ performance in the decisive match under extremely (3-

freeze)_________ weather. After (4-miracle)__________ victories over Iraq and Qatar,

our team was expected to create another miracle and be the champion. The team

played with all the strength and attempt they had despite the harsh weather

conditions.

Secondly, our team is the representative of patriotism and pride of (5-

nation)__________ identity. As you know, thanks to excellent team spirit, the intense

snow couldn’t prevent our boys from moving forward and fought courageously.

They tried their best to bring the (6-prestige)__________ trophy to our country.

Vietnamese people as well as other countries’ residents really appreciated their

constant effort throughout the tournament. Although we lost 1-2 to team

Uzbekistan at the last minute and couldn’t claim the championship, we have still

felt so (7-pride)___________ of our “heroes” and now they are the new-generation

idols of our country.

1.impressive:vì đây là cần sử dụng tính từ

2.notable:cần một tính từ để miêu tả danh

từ đằng sau

3.freezing:cần tính từ để miêu tả cái lạnh

4.miraculous:cần một tính từ để miêu tả

niềm vui chiến thắng

5.national:cần một tinh từ để miêu tả

quốc tịch

6.prestigious cần một tính từ để miêu tả

chỉ sự uy tín

7.proud cần một tính từ để chỉ sự tự hào


các từ có trong bài

trở nên sống động,

làm cho các câu từ các đoạn văn mượt mà

đóng một vai trò quan trọng

sử dụng sai

được sắp xếp

, tính từ chỉ thị

chỉ ra

không gian

thời gian

anh ta ointerval time,

Tính từ chỉ định

đứng trước

chủ đề

Tính từ sở hữu

bỏ sót

Tính từ nghi vấn

xác nhận

chất lượng / tài sản

đại từ không xác định

đo đạc

Định nghĩa

phân loại

các nhóm tương ứng.

tóm tắt,

come alive,

make sentences from passages smoother.

plays an important role

wrong usage

be arranged

,directive adjectives

indicate

spatial

temporal

ointerval time,

Indicative adjectives

precede

object to

Possessive adjectives

omit

Interrogative adjectives

confirm

quality/property

indefinite pronouns

measurement

definition

classifications

respective groups.

summarizing,


cảnh báo thế giới về

Biến thể SARS-CoV-2,

đầu cơ

cất cánh

thống trị

lan rộng ra ngoài biên giới của một cái gì đó

tiêu biến dần.

quỹ đạo

ước lượng

bệnh truyền nhiễm

đỉnh trước.

chậm lại

là một phần

đạt đến giới hạn của một cái gì đó

khả năng kiểm tra.

Láng giềng

Na Uy,

vấn đề trong vài tuần

quyết liệt

Địa chỉ liên lạc xã hội.

gây bệnh nhẹ hơn

trường hợp thiên văn học

dự đoán

có nghĩa là triển vọng là tồi tệ,

một nhà virus học

đi ngang qua

nhà miễn dịch học

nhà dịch tễ học

tàu lượn siêu tốc

làm việc khuya,

làm xong."

đưa ra một trường hợp khẩn cấp

cung cấp những liều tiêm

alerted the world to

SARS-CoV-2 variant,

speculative

take off

dominated

spread much beyond something's borders

petered out.

trajectory

estimated

infectious disease

previous peak.

slowing down

be in part

reach the limits of something

testing capability.

Neighboring

Norway,

a matter of weeks

drastically

social contacts.

causes milder disease

the astronomic case

projections

mean the outlook is grim,

a virologist

get across

immunologists

epidemiologists

roller coaster

late-night work,

getting done.”

gave an emergency

delivering the prized shots


After facing setback after setback Sau khi đối mặt với thất bại sau thất bại

the nonprofit formed tổ chức phi lợi nhuận được thành lập

make sure bảo đảm

live up to its promise in 2022. thực hiện đúng lời hứa của nó vào năm 2022.

scaling back its ambitions, thu nhỏ lại tham vọng của mình,

the COVID-19 Vaccines Global Access Cơ sở Tiếp cận Toàn cầu Vắc xin COVID-19

(COVAX) Facility (COVAX)

be close to meeting a revised target of gần đạt được mục tiêu sửa đổi là

the effort got a huge boost nỗ lực đã có một sự thúc đẩy rất lớn

gave an emergency đưa ra một trường hợp khẩn cấp

use listing to a vaccine sử dụng danh sách cho một loại vắc xin

counting on for up to 1 billion tính lên đến 1 tỷ

Despite COVAX’s recent successes Bất chấp những thành công gần đây của COVAX

new supply forecast, dự báo nguồn cung mới,

the last word in achieving global vaccine Lời cuối cùng để đạt được công bằng vắc xin toàn

equity: cầu:

struggle to distribute their supplies đấu tranh để phân phối nguồn cung cấp của họ

overcome vaccine hesitancy vượt qua sự do dự về vắc xin

the Coalition for Epidemic Liên minh Đổi mới Chuẩn bị sẵn sàng Dịch bệnh

Preparedness Innovations (CEPI), (CEPI),

enough to cover health care workers đủ để bao phủ cho nhân viên y tế và

and the people most at risk of những người có nguy cơ mắc bệnh nặng

developing severe disease.

nhất.

accomplish

fall far short of that

set out to buy vaccines in bulk

provide something to somebody

bumping COVAX

which negotiates steep discounts

the end of the purchasing line.

Institute of India

supply up to 1.1 billion

backed out of the arrangement


global vaccine equity

hoàn thành

thiếu xa điều đó

đặt ra để mua vắc xin với số lượng lớn

cung cấp một cái gì đó cho ai đó

va chạm COVAX

thương lượng giảm giá mạnh

cuối dòng mua.

Viện Ấn Độ

cung cấp lên đến 1,1 tỷ

lùi lại khỏi sự sắp xếp

Biến thể Delta tăng đột biến.

công bằng vắc xin toàn cầu


Trần Quang Lợi

Lê Văn Trọng

Lê Văn Trọng

Lê Văn Trọng

Lê Văn Trọng

Lê Văn Trọng

FOCUSED

PRACTICE

KEY EXERCISE 1

Answers

1.To play -> playing

2. Bringing-> to bring

3. Lending -> to lend

4. To sing -> sing/singing

Structure

Từ chỉ yêu ghét + Ving

(enjoy,fancy,hate,dete

st + Ving )

- Forget to V : quên làm

việc cần làm

-Forget Ving : Quên một

việc đã làm

Request sb to V : yêu

cầu ai làm gì

Sau hear sẽ đi cùng

V hoặc Ving

Meaning

Con gái tôi thích chơi với

những chú mèo con của

cô ấy

Bạn đã quên mang vé

vào hội trường của bạn

rồi đúng không?

Tôi đã yêu cầu anh ấy

đưa cho tôi 1 vài trăm

rupees

Tôi đã nghe thấy họ hát

5. Minding -> to mind

Tell sb to V : bảo ai

làm cái gì

Tôi đã bảo cô ấy

hãy tự lo việc của mình


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

KEY EXERCISE 2

Answer

Detail explaining

1.They decided to get married.

2. She agreed to help him.

3.He offered to carry her bag (for her).

4.They arranged to meet at 8 o’clock.

5. She refused to tell him her name /

to give him her name.

6.She promised not to tell anyone.

1. Decide + to V : Quyết định làm gì

2. Agree + to V : đồng ý làm gì

3. Offer + to V : đề nghị làm gì

4. Arrange + to V : sắp xếp làm gì

5. Refuse + to V : từ chối làm việc gì

6. Promise + to V : hứa làm việc gì


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

KEY EXERCISE 3

1-f

Đó là 1 thị trấn đẹp , nó rất đáng để dành

vài ngày sống ở đây.

2-h

Đó là 1 ý tưởng hay, nó rất đáng để xem xét.

3-d

Đứng nói ở đây chẳng được ích gì, chúng ta

phải làm mọi thứ.

4-g

Nó không quan trọng , nó không đáng để

lo lắng về nó.

5-b

Không có ích gì khi tìm kiếm anh ấy, chúng ta sẽ

không bao giờ tìm được anh ấy.

6-a

7-e

Nó thật không hay khi bạn xin lỗi tôi vì tôi không tin

là bạn sẽ xin lỗi.

Nó không đáng để tranh luận với anh ta, anh ta sẽ

không thay đổi ý kiến của anh ấy.

8-c

Khách sạn cách đây một đoạn đi bộ ngắn,

không đáng để đi taxi.


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

KEY EXERCISE 4

1- working

2-Trying

3- Doing

4-Using

5-Taking

Sau giới từ + Ving

Can’t help/stand/bear + doing sth: không thể chịu/ nhịn được

Avoid + doing sth: Tránh làm gì

Involve + doing sth: có liên quan làm gì

Detest + doing sth: ghét phải làm việc gì

6-Achieving

7-Making

8-To play

9-Telling

10-To be

Capable of doing st: có khả năng làm việc gì đó

Succeed in + doing: thành công trong việc gì

Want + to V: muốn làm gì

Enjoy doing sth: thích làm gì

Imagine st/sb to do: cho rằng ai/ cái gì làm điều gì đó


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

11-Learning

12-To

improve

13-Behaving

Sau giới từ + Ving

Theo nghĩa : để mà cải thiện

Keep on doing: tiếp tục làm điều gì

14-To

sit down

15-Come

16-Listening

17-Hoping

Beg sb to do sth: cầu xin ai làm gì

Make sb do sth: sai bảo ai làm gì

Interested in doing: thích thú với việc gì

Give up + doing: từ bỏ làm việc gì


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

KEY EXERCISE 5

Like many student, Eva is a

procrastinator. She keeps putting

off her school work. When she

studies, she often stops to go for a

walk in the park. She wants to

improve her study habits, but she

isn't sure how. Eva decided to make

a list of things she needs to do

every day. She always remembers

to make her list, but she often

forgets to read it. It’s very

frustrating. Last night Eva

remembered reading an article in

the school newspaper about a

support group for procrastinators.

She thinks being in a group is a

good idea. She likes sharing ideas

with other students.

1-F: She keeps putting off her

school work

2-T

3-T

4-T

5-F : She always remembers to make

her list, but she often forgets to read it.

6-T

7-T

8-T


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

6

EXERCISE

EXERCISE

KEY KEY

answer

1.Meeting

2.To drink

3.To step down/

Managing

4.To involve

5.To order

6.Preparing

7.(to) compare

8.Reading

9.To dominate

10.Making/ To be

11.To miss

12.Asking/ To ask

detail explaining

1.Enjoy + Ving: thích làm gì

2. Want to V: muốn làm gì

3. Decide to V: quyết định làm gì

Carry on Ving: tiếp tục làm gì

4. Begin to V: bắt đầu làm gì

5. Agree to v: đồng ý làm gì

6. Spend time Ving: danh thời gian làm gì

7. Help to V/ help Vo: giúp làm gì

8. Involve Ving: liên quan đến việc gì

9. Continue to V: tiếp tục làm gì

10. Like Ving- Prefer to V: thích làm gì

11. Afford to V: có khả năng làm gì

12. Hate Ving: ghét làm gì

Expect to V: mong đợi làm gì


FOCUSED

PRACTICE

7

EXERCISE KEY KEY

Answers

Detail explaining

1.I forgot to take my medicine this

morning.

2. I’ll never forget going up Mont

Blanc.

3. Jackie regrets saying / having

said that to Allie.

4. I regret to tell you (that) your

credit card has been cancelled by

the bank.

5. I didn’t mean to crash the car,

you know.

6. Taking that job will mean having

to do a lot of more travelling.

1. Forget + to V : quên phải làm gì.

Tôi đã quên đi lấy thuốc vào sáng nay.

2. Forget + Ving : quên đã làm gì.

Tôi sẽ không bao giờ quên đi Mont

Blanc.

3. Regret + Ving : hối hận vì đã làm gì.

Jackie hối hận vì đã nói điều đó với Alli.

4. Regret + to V : rất lấy làm tiếc khi

phải làm gì.

Tôi rất lấy làm tiếc khi phải nói với bạn

rằng thẻ tín dụng của bạn đã bị ngân

hàng hủy.

5. Mean + to V : dự định làm gì.

Tôi đã không cố ý đâm xe,bạn biết đấy.

6.Mean + Ving : có nghĩa là.

Làm công việc đó đồng nghĩa với việc

bạn phải đi nhiều hơn.


Keys Exercise 8:

Answers Detail explaining

1, managed to escape

2,Stopped to buy

V chính ở đây là “ escape” và V đi kèm là

Manage(d) thì ta dễ dàng đưa ra được

đáp án vì ta đã biết “Manage + To V ‘’ :

xoay sở cái gì đó

Tương tự như câu 1, ta cũng dễ dàng xác

định được V chính là Buy và V đi kèm là

Stop(ed) . Tuy nhiên cần lưu ý với những

động từ mà đi sau nó vừa là Ving vừa là

To V

-> Stop to V : dừng lại để làm gì

-> Stop Ving: dừng hẳn làm gì

3, Are planning to stay Tương tự 2 câu trên thì “Plan + to

V: lên kế hoạch làm gì

4, Feel like cooking Feel like Ving : thích làm gì

5,Continue making / to make

Continue Ving /To V : Tiếp tục làm gì

6, Mind asking

Mind + Ving: yêu cầu ai đó làm gì

Trần Thị Uyên

Keys

Exercise 9:

Answers

1- x

2- To be

3- Going

4 -Walking

5- To visit

6 - To play

7 -To be

8- x

9 -Wear

10 -Visit

Detail explaining

Hope To V : hy vọng làm gì

Pretend to V : giả vờ làm gì

Suggest Ving : đề nghị làm gì

Avoid Ving : tránh làm gì

Like Ving : thích làm gì

Prefer Ving / To V : thích làm gì

Seem to V : dường như làm gì

Expect to V = look forward to Ving :

mong đợi làm gì

Make V

Let O + V : cho phép ai đó làm gì /

được phép làm gì đó

Trần Thị Uyên

Keys Exercise 10:

1, Remember to meet

-> Remember meeting

2, To hear –> hearing

3, Arrange scheduling

-> arrange to schedule

4, Would you mind to send

-> would you mind sending

5, Look forward to hear

-> look forward to hearing

Answers

Detail explaining

1,Remember + Ving : nhớ đã làm gì

Remember + To V : nhớ để làm gì

2, Enjoy + Ving : thích cái gì đó

Or là trong câu này, ta thấy xuất hiện

cấu trúc song song, đằng trước từ “

and “ là 1 Ving, nên theo sau nó cũng

phải là 1 Ving

3, Arrange + To V: sắp xếp 1 cái gì đó

4, Mind/Would you mind/ Do you mind

Look forward to Ving : mong đợi điều gì

đó

Detail explaining

1, Sau "See" là 1 Vo

2, Thanks for Ving : cảm ơn vì điều gì

Trong trường hợp này , ta có thể dựa

vào giới từ “ for” để chia động từ, vì theo

quy tắc, sau giời từ + Ving

3, Would you like to V

4, Spend + time+ Ving: dành thời gian

cho việc gì đó

5, Finish to V : hoàn thành cái gì

6, Let + V : hãy làm gì đó

1, Saw you to cook -> saw you cooking

2,Thanks for invite -> Thanks for inviting

3, Would you love coming -> would you

love to come

4, Spend a day.. to look -> spend a day..

looking

5,Finished writing-> finished to write

6, Let me to know -> Let me know

Answers

Trần Thị Uyên

Keys Exercise 11:

ANSWERS AND DETAIL EXPLAINING

ANSWERS

1 To take, 2 To come, 3 Losing, 4 Trying

5 To focus, 6 Building , 7 To ignore, 8 Moving, 9,Being ,10

To get, 11 Telling ,12 Offering

1,Manage + To V : Quản lí/ xoay xở

việc gì đó

2,Tend+ to V : có khuyh hướng làm gì

3,Sau Phr verb “ End up + Ving”

4,Spend + Time + Vinh : dành thời gian

cho việc gì đó

5,Decide + ToV: quyết định làm cái gì

DETAIL EXPLAINING

6,Concentrate on + ving : Tập trung vào

việc gì đó

7,Afford + To V : có đủ khả năng làm gì

8, Consider + Ving : xem xét, cân nhắc khi

làm gì

9, Sau Pre “ on” + ving

10, Expect + to V : mong đợi làm gì

11, Mind / Don’t mind + Ving : Phiền/

Không phiền khi làm gì

12, Keep + Ving : cứ làm gì

Trần Thị Uyên

Keys Exercise 12

A

N

S

W

E

R

S

1-The next time, you're feeling ill, try

watching a comedy instead of just

doing nothing.

2-At least, thať's what some doctors

suggest doing .

3 - If you want to get better, there's

nothing like laughter.

4 - First of all, an activity you enjoy

doing takes your mind off your

illness.

5 - Time seems to pass more

quickly and you worrying about how

you feel.

1-Try To V : cố gắng làm gì

- Try Ving: thử làm gì

2- Suggest Ving : đề nghị làm gì

3-- Want to V : muốn làm gì

4- Enjoy Ving : thích làm gì

5- Seem To V : dường như làm gì

DETAIL EXPLAINING

Trần Thị Uyên

Keys Exercise 13:

ANSWERS

1 -To 2 - Going

3 - Would 4 - Rather

5 - Wrote 6 - Than

7- Had 8 - Would

9 -To have 10 -Better

11- Not to

DETAIL EXPLAINING

1, Prefer sth TO sth : thích cái gì hơn cái gì

2, Prefer Ving to Ving : thích làm cái gì hơn cái gì

3, Would prefer to V : muốn làm cái gì

4, Would rather V : diễn tả mong muốn cái gì ở hiện tại

5, Prerfer ( not ) to V: Không muốn làm gì

6, Would rather than V : Để thể hiện sự ưu tiên,

yêu thích một việc gì đó hơn một việc khác

7, Had better Vo : Phải làm gì

8, Would rather ( tương tự )

9, Prefer + to V : muốn làm gì

10, Had better V: phải làm gì

11, S1 + Would rather +S2 + (not) + Ved/cột 2 : sử dụng để giả định điều gì đó

đối lập với hiện tại hoặc mong muốn ai đó làm gì ở hiện tại hoặc tương lai

Trần Thị Uyên

Key excersie 14

Answer

Details explaining

1. Telling...

1.Suggest/recommend somebody doing something:

Gợi ý, đề xuẩt ai làm gì

2. Helping...

3. Reading...

2,3.Do/Would you mind doing something: Bạn có

phiền nếu làm gì

4. Taking...

5. Alerting...

4.Deny doing something: Phủ nhận làm cái gì

5.Regret doing something: Hối hận vì đã làm gì

Regret to do something: Lấy làm tiếc, tiếc vì chưa

làm gì


Key excersie 15

Answer

1 To invite

2 Glad

3 To hear

4 Of you

5 To help

6 Amazed

7 To make

8 Not

9 Silly

Details explaining

1.Dan và Kate rất vui khi mời tôi đến bữa tiệc của họ.

2.Tôi đã đi du lịch một thời gian dài. Bây giờ tôi rất vui khi

được trở về nhà

3.Tôi nghe nói về tai nạn của Tom. Tôi cảm thấy nhẹ

nhõm khi biết rằng anh ấy ổn.

4.Thật tuyệt khi nhớ đến ngày sinh nhật của tôi.

5.Hãy cho tôi biết nếu bạn cần bất kỳ sự giúp đỡ nào. Tôi

rất vui khi được giúp anh.

6.Tôi tưởng James khoảng 25 tuổi. Tôi đã rất ngạc nhiên

khi phát hiện ra anh ấy 40 tuổi.

7.Đó là sự thiếu suy nghĩ của hàng xóm của chúng tôi để

tạo ra rất nhiều tiếng ồn.

8.Cuộc phỏng vấn của tôi đã diễn ra tốt đẹp. Tôi thất vọng

vì không được mời làm việc.

9.Thật ngớ ngẩn khi tôi lo lắng quá nhiều về những điều

không quan trọng.


Key excersie 16

Answer

1

B. To leave

C. From leaving

2

A. To solve

B. To solve

C. In solving

Details explaining

1

B. Allow + to V : cho phép làm gì

C. Prevent to V : giả vờ làm gì

2

A. Hope to V : hy vọng làm gì

B. Fail to V : thất bại khi làm gì

C. Succeed Ving : thành công khi làm gì

3

A. Of going/about going

B. To go

C. To go

3.

A. Think of / Think about Ving: nghĩ về điều gì

B. Plan to V : lên kế hoạch làm gì

C. Would like to V : muốn làm gì

4

A. To buy

B. On buying

C. To buy

D. Of buying

4

A. Want to V : muốn làm gi

B. Insist on Ving : khăng khăng làm gì

C. Promise to V : hứa làm gì

D. Dream of buying : mơ làm gì


Key excersie 17

Answer

2. E-I opened the box to see what

was in it.

Details explaining

Tôi mở hộp ra để xem có gì trong

đó.

3. A-I moved to a new apartment

to be nearer my friends

Tôi chuyển đến một căn hộ mới để

được gần bạn bè của tôi hơn.

4. F-I couldn’t find a knife to chop

the onions.

Tôi không thể tìm thấy một con dao

để thái Hành.

5. C-I called the police to report

the accident.

Tôi đã gọi cảnh sát để báo cáo tai

nạn.

6. G-I called the hotel to find out

if they had any rooms free.

Tôi đã gọi cho khách sạn để tìm hiểu

xem họ có phòng miễn phí.

7. B-I employed an assistant to

help me with my work.

Tôi đã thuê một trợ lý để giúp tôi

với công việc của tôi.


Key excersie 18

Answer

Details explaining

1 She’s bound to pass the

exam

Bound to V : chắc chắn sẽ…

Cô ấy chắc chắn sẽ vượt qua kỳ

thi.

2 You’re / You are bound to

be tired

Bound to V : chắc chắn sẽ…

Bạn chắc chắn sẽ mệt mỏi sau

một hành trình dài như vậy

3 He’s / He is sure to forget

4 It’s / It is not likely to rain

5 There’s / There is sure to be

Be sure to V: chắc chắn sẽ...

Anh ấy chắc chắn sẽ quên bất cứ

điều gì bạn nói với anh ấy.

Be (not) likely to V: (không) có khả

năng....

Trời không có khả năng mưa.

Be sure to V: chắc chắn sẽ....

Chắc chắn sẽ có rất nhiều phương

tiện lưu thông trên đường


Key excersie 19

1.D 2.A 3.C 4.B 5.C

6.C 7.C 8.B 9.B 10.B

Key excersie 20

1.C 2.C 3.A 4.B 5.B

6.A 7.A 8.A 9.C 10.A


GERUNDS

&

INFINITIVES

Trần Thành Vinh

Infinitive of

purpose

Trần Thành Vinh

Detailed

answers

Exercise 1:

- “to take” line 2, “Most people use camera phones to take pictures…”

=> the purpose of people using camera phones is taking pictures.

- “to play” line 3, “Some people use them to play mean jokes”

=> purpose of people using them is playing mean jokes.

- “to steal” line 3, “Some people use them…to steal”

=> purpose of people using them is stealing.

- “to take” line 4, “People were using them to take secret pictures..”

=> purpose of people using them is taking a secret picture.

- “to look” line 7, “Ned often goes to bookstores to look at magazines”

=> purpose of Ned going to bookstores is looking at magazines.

- “in order not to pay” line 8, “In order not to pay for the article, he

secretly photographs…”

=> purpose of photographing is not paying for the article.

- “to read” line 9, “he goes home to read it”

=> purpose of going home is reading it.

- “in order to prevent” line 10, “..stores ban camera phones in order to

prevent digital shoplifting”

=> purpose of banning camera phones is preventing digital shoplifting

Dịch: Công nghệ mới là tuyệt vời, nhưng nó thường mang lại những vấn đề

mới. Hầu hết mọi người sử dụng điện thoại máy ảnh cho những điều tốt

đẹp, ví dụ, để chụp ảnh gia đình và bạn bè của họ. Nhưng một số người sử

dụng chúng để chơi đùa ác ý với người khác hoặc thậm chí để ăn cắp. Khi

điện thoại máy ảnh lần đầu tiên xuất hiện, một số nơi đã phải cấm sử dụng

chúng. Mọi người đã sử dụng chúng để chụp ảnh bí mật trong các câu lạc bộ

sức khỏe và những nơi riêng tư khác! Không đẹp lắm! Còn "trộm cắp kỹ

thuật số" thì sao? Đây là một ví dụ: Bạn tôi Ned (không phải tên thật của anh

ấy) thường đến các hiệu sách để xem tạp chí. Đôi khi anh ta thấy một bài báo

thú vị, nhưng anh ta không muốn mua tạp chí. Để không phải trả tiền cho

bài báo, anh ta bí mật chụp ảnh nó bằng điện thoại máy ảnh của mình. Sau

đó, anh ta về nhà để đọc nó! Ned có ăn cắp bài báo không? Các cửa hàng có

nên cấm điện thoại camera để ngăn chặn trộm cắp kỹ thuật số không?

Collocations:

1. Verb + noun

Bring problems: Gây ra những vấn đề

Take pictures: Chụp ảnh

Play jokes: Chơi khăm

Go to bookstore: Đến hiệu sách

Pohibit the use: Cấm sử dụng

Go home: Về nhà

2. Adj + noun

New technology: Công nghệ hiện đại, mới

Mean jokes: Trò chơi khăm, ác ý

Secret picture: Bức ảnh riêng tư

Digital shoplifting: Trộm cắp kĩ thuật số

Trần Thành Vinh

Structures:

S + V +…+ (in order) to infinitive : affirmative statement

In order not to infinitive, S + V +… : negative statement

Từ vựng

(Vocabulary)

Từ loại

( Word form)

Phiên âm

(IPA)

Nghĩa

(Meaning)

technology

noun

/tekˈnɑː.lə.dʒi/

Công nghệ

great

adjective

/ɡreɪt/

Tốt, tuyệt vời

problem

noun

/ˈprɑː.bləm/

Vấn đề

mean

adjective

/miːn/

Không tốt, ác ý

prohibit

verb

/prəˈhɪb.ɪt/

Cấm

secret

adjective

/ˈsiː.krət/

Bí mật

private

adjective

/ˈpraɪ.vət/

Riêng tư

digital

adjective

/ˈdɪdʒ.ə.t̬ əl/

Kỹ thuật số

shoplifting

noun

/ˈʃɑːp.lɪf.tɪŋ/

Sự ăn cắp ở cửa hàng

magazine

noun

/ˌmæɡ.əˈziːn/

Tạp chí

article

noun

/ˈɑːr.t̬ ɪ.kəl/

Bài báo

ban

verb

/bæn/

Cấm

prevent

verb

/prɪˈvent/

Ngăn chặn

Trần Thành Vinh

Exercise 2:

2. I opened the box to see what was in it.

3. I’m saving money to go to Canada.

4. I need a knife to chop these onions.

5. I’m wearing two sweaters to keep warm.

6. I phoned the police to report the accident.

- According to the task, the first thing you should do is match two

sentences with appropriate context meaning. After that, you just combine

them into a new sentence with “to”. To combine, you should know exactly

what the purpose of an action is in sentence 1 so that you can write a true

sentence.

Example: 2. I opened the box. I wanted to see what was in it. What is the

purpose of opening the box? It is “to see” what was in the box, so when

combining, a full sentence will be “ I opened the box to see what was in it”.

The others are done similarly.

Từ vựng

(Vocabulary)

Từ loại

( Word form)

Phiên âm

(IPA)

Nghĩa

(Meaning)

police

noun

/pəˈliːs/

Cảnh sát

report

verb, noun

/rɪˈpɔːrt/

Tố cáo

accident

noun

/ˈæk.sə.dənt/

Tai nạn, sự số

sweater

noun

/ˈswet̬ .ɚ/

Áo len

chop

verb

/tʃɑːp/

Cắt, chặt

Trần Thành Vinh

Structure:

S + want/ wants + to V : muốn làm gì

S + V +…+ to infinitive : affirmative statement

Collocation:

1. Verb + noun:

- Save money: tiết kiệm tiền

- Chop onions: thái hành

2. Verb + adj:

- Keep warm: giữ ấm

Exercise 3:

1. Shella went by bus to save money.

When combining two sentences, we add the purpose of the action right

after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “going by bus” is “to save

money”, so we can have the answer as above.

2. Peter has a part-time job to get some extra money.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “having a part-time job”

is “to get some extra money”, so we can have the answer as above.

3. My mother went to the post office to post some letters.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “going to the post office”

is “to post some letters”, so we can have the answer as above.

4. Mary stayed at college until 9 p.m to finish her History project.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “staying at college” is “to

finish her History project”, so we can have the answer as above.

5. Peter sent Mary an e-card to wish her “Happy birthday”.

When combining two sentences, we add the purpose of the action

right after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “sending an e-card”

is “to wish Happy birthday”, so we can have the answer as above.

6. Paul did some exercises to lose weight.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “doing exercise” is “to lose

weight”, so we can have the answer as above.

7. She’s gone to the supermarket to buy some sugar.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “going to the supermarket”

is “to buy some sugar”, so we can have the answer as above.

8. Daisy is studying hard to be a doctor.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “studying hard” is “to be a

doctor”, so we can have the answer as above.

9. They have gone to town to buy new boots.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “going to town” is “to buy

new books”, so we can have the answer as above.

10. We are on a diet to get thinner.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “being on a diet” is “to get

thinner”, so we can have the answer as above.

11. I phoned my grandparents last night to invite them to our Christmas

dinner.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “phoning my grandparents”

is “to invite them to dinner”, so we can have the answer as above.

12. My mother is organising a party to celebrate my birthday.


after the action. In this sentence, the purpose of “organising a party” is “to

celebrate my birthday”, so we can have the answer as above.

Structure:

To be on a diet: đang chế độ ăn kiêng

Get thinner: gầy hơn

S+invite sbd to do sth/sth: mời ai đó làm gì/đến đâu

Trần Thành Vinh

Trần Thành Vinh

Collocation:

1. Verb + noun:

- Save money: tiết kiệm tiền

- Post letters: gửi thư

- Send e-card: gửi thiệp điện tử

- Do exercise: tập thể dục

- Go to the supermarket: đi siêu thị

- Celebrate birthday: tổ chức sinh nhật

- Get money: kiếm tiền

- Lose weight: giảm cân

2. Adjective+ noun:

- Part-time job: nghề làm thêm, bán thời gian

Từ vựng

Từ loại

Phiên âm

Nghĩa

(Vocabulary)

( Word form)

(IPA)

(Meaning)

Part-time

adj,adv

/ˌpɑːtˈtaɪm/

Bán thời gian

Extra

adj

/ˈek.strə/

Thêm

Post office

noun

/ˈpəʊst ˌɒf.ɪs/

Bưu điện

Letter

noun

/ˈlet.ər/

Thư

College

noun

/ˈkɒl.ɪdʒ/

Đại học

Organise

verb

/ˈɔː.ɡən.aɪz/

Tổ chức

Celebrate

verb

/ˈsel.ə.breɪt/

Làm lễ kỉ niệm

Trần Thành Vinh

Exercise 4:

1. She didn’t want us to know about her problem so that she changed the subject.

“So that” is a conjunction which is used to join two clauses. ( one of them

expresses an action, the other expresses the purpose). It is used before the clause

which indicates the purpose, reason of an action.

In this sentence, the reason why she changed the subject is that she didn’t want

us to know about her problem, so “ so that” is put before the clause “she changed

the subject”.

2. John wanted Sara to come to his birthday party so that he phoned her.

The use of “ so that” is explained in sentence 1.

In this sentence, the reason why John phoned Sara is that he wanted her to come

to his birthday party, so “so that” is put before the clause “ he phoned her”

3. James works overtime so as to improve his situation.

The use of “so as to” is similar with “to”. The purpose of working overtime is to

improve his situation, so two actions are joined with “so as to”.

4. Betty took a taxi yesterday so as not to be late.

The purpose of taking a taxi is not to be late, so two actions are joined with “so as

not to”.

5. The teacher worked on his lesson plans in order to get ready.

The use of “in order to” is similar with “to” The purpose of working on his lesson

plans is to get ready, so two actions are joined with “in order to”.

6. We want the kids to sleep in peace so that we tell them stories.


In this sentence, the reason why we tell the kids stories is that we want them to

sleep in peace, so “so that” is put before the clause “ we tell stories”.

7. I don’t want my sister to take the toys so that I hid them.


In this sentence, the reason why I hid the toys is that I don’t want my sister to

take them, so “so that” is put before the clause “ I hid them”.

8. I cleaned the house in order not to live in a dirty place.

The use of “ in order not to” is similar with “so as not to”. The purpose of cleaning

the house is not to live in a dirty place, so two actions are joined with “in order not

to”

Trần Thành Vinh

Structure:

Work on lesson plans: Soạn giáo án

S + want + sbd + to v: Muốn ai đó làm gì

Collocation:

1. Verb + noun:

- take a taxi: đi xe taxi

- get ready: sẵn sàng

- tell stories: kể chuyện

- clean the house: dọn dẹp nhà cửa

2. Verb + adjective:

- work overtime: làm thêm giờ

3. Noun + noun:

- lesson plans: giáo án

Exercise 5:

1. j) 2. f) 3. g) 4. i) 5. b) 6. d) 7. a) 8. e) 9. h) 10. c)

In this exercise, you only have to match two actions with appropriate

meaning. Although one action may have many proper reasons, you

must ensure that the others do, too.

Trần Thành Vinh

Collocations:

1. Verb + noun:

- explore the moon: khám phá mặt trăng

- play computer games: chơi điện tử

- play basketball: chơi bóng rổ

- send messages: gửi tin nhắn

- cross the road: sang đường

Từ vựng

(Vocabulary)

Từ loại

( Word form)

Phiên âm

(IPA)

Nghĩa

(Meaning)

Explore

Verb

/ɪkˈsplɔːr/

Khám phá

Dictionary

Noun

/ˈdɪk.ʃən.ər.i/

Từ điển

Protect

Verb

/prəˈtekt/

Bảo vệ

Scissors

Noun

/ˈsɪz.ər/

Kéo

Spaceship

Noun

/ˈspeɪs.ʃɪp/

Tàu vũ trụ

Tablet

Noun

/ˈtæb.lət/

Máy tính bảng

Translate

Verb

/trænzˈleɪt/

Phiên dịch

Essay

Noun

/ˈes.eɪ/

Bài văn

Message

Noun

/ˈmes.ɪdʒ/

Tin nhắn

DETAIL ANSWER:

INFINITIVES WITH TOO &

ENOUGH

khánh vinh

Ex1. Complete the sentences using "enough " + the following words.

3. enough money (enough + noun) tôi thì muốn mua 1 chiếc ô tô. Nhưng mà

tiếc là tôi không có đủ tiền. Đưa ra lí do rằng hiện tại người nói không có đủ

tiền để mua ô tô.

4. enough milk (enough + noun ) bạn có đủ sữa trong cà phê của mình không

hay bạn muốn thêm chút nữa? đây là 1 câu hỏi mà người bán cà phê hỏi người

mua về việc đã có đủ sữa hay chưa, hay là cần thêm.

5. warm enough ( adjective + enough) bạn có thây ấm không. Hay để tôi mở lò

sưởi lên nhé, Người hỏi muốn biết rằng bạn của họ nêu không cảm thấy ấm

thì anh ta sẽ bật máy sưởi lên.

6. enough room (enough + noun + for pronoun ) cái ô tô này quá nhỏ rồi. Nó

sẽ không đủ chỗ cho tất cả mọi người đâu. Đưa ra lí do rằng vì chiếc xe

chỉ là chiếc xe nhỏ nên dẫn đến việc nó không đủ chỗ cho tất cả mọi người.

7. well enough ( adverb + enough + to do sth ) Steve cảm thấy không được

khỏe vào sáng nay để đi làm . Đưa ra lí do không được khỏe để đi làm .

8. enough time (enough + noun + to do sth) Tôi đã tận hưởng chuyến đi paris

của tôi nhưng mà lại chẳng đủ thời gian để làm tất cả mọi việc mà tôi muốn.

Đưa ra lí do vì thời gian không cho phép nên người viết không thể làm hết việc

mà họ muốn làm.

9. big enough ( adjective + enough) thử chiếc áo này xem. Và xem nó có đủ

rộng với mày không. Đưa ra đề nghị mặc thử chiếc áo để xem có vừa hay

không.

10. enough cups (enough + noun ) ở đây thì không đủ cốc cho tất cả mọi người

uống cà phê vào cùng 1 thời điểm. Đưa ra lí do không đủ cốc cho tất cả mọi

người uống coffe vào cùng 1 thời điểm ,

GỬI ĐẾN

2. Make one sentence from two. Complete the new sentence using "too "

or "enough".

2. This coffee is too hot to drink. ( Too + adjective ) cà phê quá là nóng để

uống. Đưa ra lí do về việc cà phê nóng nên không thể uống được ngay .

3. The piano was too heavy to move ( Too + adjective ) cái đèn piano này quá

nặng để có thể chuyển đi. Đưa ra lí do về cái piano qua nặng nên khó di

chuyển đi .

4. These apples aren't ripe enough to eat ( Adjective + enough ) những quả táo

thì nó chưa đủ chín để có thể ăn. Đưa ra lí ro là do những quả táo chưa đủ chín

để có thể ăn được.

5. The situation is too complicated to explain ( Too + adjective ) vấn đề này

quá phức tạp để có thể giải thích. Đưa ra việc rằng do vấn đế phức tạp nên khó

giải thích

6. The wall was too high to climb over ( Too + adjective ) bức tường này quá

cao để có thể trèo qua. Do lí do bởi vì bức tường quá cao nên khó có thể trèo

qua được.

Thân mến,

7. This sofa isn't enough for three people ( Enough + for + noun ) cái sofa này

thì không thể đủ chỗ cho 3 người . Do chiếc sofa nhỏ nên không đủ chỗ cho 3

người.

8. Some things are too small to see without a microscope ( Too + adjective )

một số thứ thì quá nhỏ để nhìn thấy nếu mà không dùng tới kính hiển vi. Do

có vài thứ quả nhỏ nên để có thể nhìn thấy chúng ta phải dùng kính hiển vi.

khánh vinh

khánh vinh

3, Fill in the blanks with "too" or "enough" to complete the sentences.

1. too ( Too + adjective ) bộ phim này quá là chán để tiếp tục xem nên chúng

tôi đã rời khỏi rạp phim sớm hơn dự kiến. Do bộ phim quá chán nên họ đã rời

rạp sớm.

2. enough ( Adjective + enough ) căn nhà trong góc không đủ rẻ để chúng tôi

mua. Chúng tôi sẽ tìm một cái khác. Do căn nhà không đủ rẻ nên họ đã quyết

định tìm kiếm 1 ngôi nhà khác.

3. enough ( Adjective + enough ) tôi biết Sarah rất nhiệt tình nhưng cô ấy

không đủ cao và tài năng để chơi trong đội bóng rổ của trường. Do Sarah

không có đủ chiều cao và tài năng nên không thể chơi trong đội bóng rổ của

trường.

4. too ( Too + adjective ) súp này qúa nguội để ăn rồi . Chúng ta có nên đun

nóng nên trên bếp không ? Do súp nguội để ăn, nên đã đưa ra đề nghị là đun

lại súp.

5. too ( Too + adjective ) tôi nghĩ chiếc áo phông này quá rộng để tôi có thể

mặc. Tôi muốn đưa nó cho bạn. Vì chiếc áo này quá rộng để tôi mặc nên đưa

ra ý kiến là muốn đưa cho bạn mặc.

6. enough ( Adjective + enough ) anh ấy không đủ giỏi để chơi trong ban nhạc

của trường nên giáo viên đã chọn một học sinh khác. Do anh ấy không đủ giỏi

nên anh ta không thể chơi nhạc trong ban nhạc của trường.

khánh vinh

7. too ( Too + adjective ) một số câu hỏi trong đề thi môn Toán quá khó, tôi không

trả lời được nên tôi bị điểm kém. Do 1 số câu hỏi trong đề toán quá khó nên tôi đã

bị điểm kiểm .

8. enough ( Adjective + enough ) tay đua không thể lái đủ nhanh để về nhất trong

Giải vô địch thế giới. Do trình độ tay đua nên đã không thể về nhất trong giải vô

địch thế giới.

9. too ( Too + adjective ) nhìn! Con dao này quá cùn để cắt hành. Do con dao quá

cùn nên không thể cắt hành được.

10. too ( Too + adjective ) Những chiếc túi mua sắm quá nặng đối với người phụ

nữ lớn tuổi nên bà muốn được giúp đỡ. Do chiếc túi mua sắm quá nặng so với

người phụ nữ nên bà ta cần được giúp đỡ.

11. enough ( Adjective + enough ) Toby không đủ khỏe để nâng bàn. vì vậy bạn

của anh ấy, Laura đã giúp anh ấy mang nó. Bạn của Toby, Laura đã giúp anh ta

nâng cái bàn bởi vì Toby quá nên.

12. too ( Too + adjective ) những chiếc xe này quá đắt đối với tôi để mua. Bạn có

cái nào rẻ hơn không? Tôi cần chiếc xe rẻ hơn bởi vì chiếc này quá đắt với tôi rồi,

bạn có nó chứ ?

13. too ( Too + adjective ) thời tiết lạnh quá không ra ngoài được nên hai cậu bé ở

nhà chơi cờ. Do thời tiết lạnh không thể ra ngoài nên 2 cậu bé ở nhà chơi cờ.

14. enough ( Adjective + enough ) Biển không đủ ấm để bơi vào tháng Ba ở Thổ

Nhĩ Kỳ. Do tháng 3 biển ở Thổ Nhĩ Kỳ không đủ ấm nên không thể bơi.

15. enough ( Adjective + enough ) Daniel không đủ chăm chỉ để vượt qua tất cả

các kỳ thi của mình. Do Daniel không chăm chỉ nền anh ta đã thi trượt.

khánh vinh

4. Answer the questions using "too"

1. Because they are too heavy to jump. ( Too + adjective + to do sth) tại vì

chúng quá nặng để nhảy được.

2. Because a child is too young to driver car. ( Too + adjective + to do sth) bởi

vì chúng còn quá nhỏ để lái ô tô.

3. Because it was too difficult to solve. ( Too + adjective + to do sth) vì nó quá

khó để giải quyết.

4. Because it was too hot to drink. ( Too + adjective + to do sth) vì nóng quá

không uống được,

5. Because she is too short to touch the ceiling. ( Too + adjective + to do sth)

bởi vì cô ấy quá thấp để chạm vào trần nhà.

4.1 .Answer the questions using "enough"

1. Because I'm not rich enough to buy a Ferrari. ( Adjective + enough + to do

sth ) vì tôi không có tiền để mua 1 chiếc Ferrari.

2. Because she isn't strong enough to lift 100 kilos. ( Adjective + enough + to do

sth )

bởi vì cô ấy không đủ khỏe để nâng 100 kg.

3. Because he wasn't tall enough to reach the cupboard. ( Adjective + enough +

to do sth ) vì anh ấy không đủ cao để chạm tới cái tủ.

4. Because the dress wasn't big enough for her. ( Adjective + enough + for +

pronoun ) bởi vì chiếc váy không đủ lớn cho cô ấy.

5. Because she wasn't fast enough to catch it. ( Adjective + enough + to do sth )

bởi vì cô ấy không đủ nhanh để bắt lấy nó.

khánh vinh

4.2 Rewrite the sentences using "enough"

1. The book wasn't interesting enough to read so I stopped reading it. (

Adjective + enough + to do sth ) 2 câu đã cho cùng chủ ngữ thì bỏ phần “for sb”

/ Cuốn sách đọc chán quá nên tôi đã ngừng đọc => Cuốn sách không đủ thú vị

để đọc nên tôi đã ngừng đọc.

2. I wasn't well enough to go to work so I stayed at home on Monday. ( Adverb

+ enough + to do sth ) / Tôi ốm quá không đi làm được nên thứ hai tôi ở nhà =>

Tôi không đủ sức khỏe để đi làm nên tôi ở nhà vào thứ Hai.

3. The room wasn't light enough to find my pink gloves. ( Noun + enough + to

do sth ) / Căn phòng quá tối để tìm thấy đôi găng tay màu hồng của tôi => Căn

phòng không đủ sáng để tìm thấy đôi găng tay màu hồng của tôi.

4. The horse wasn't calm enough to ride so I decided not to.( Adjective +

enough + to do sth ) / Con ngựa quá hoang dã để cưỡi nên tôi quyết định

không cưỡi => Con ngựa không đủ bình tĩnh để cưỡi nên tôi quyết định không

cưỡi.

EX 5

1.Đáp án B

Vì vế sau là we didn’t get it nên dùng cấu trúc: Too adj to V (quá …để làm gì)

2. Đáp án B

Vì vế sau là I don’t understand it at all nên dùng cấu trúc: Too adj to V (quá …để

làm gì))

3. Đáp án B

Vì ta có cấu trúc: Enough + Noun

4. Đáp án B

Vì vế sau có danh từ people là danh từ đếm được nên dùng cấu trúc : Too

many

5. Đáp án C

Vì ta dịch câu thấy câu đã cho là: nó không...để sắp xếp mọi thứ nên để câu có

nghĩa phù hợp dùng cấu trúc : Too adj to V

6.Đáp án B

Nhìn vào 3 đáp án đã cho :

A/ enough difficult ( loại vì sai cấu trúc, cấu trúc đúng là: adj + enough)

B/ too difficult

C/ too much difficult ( loại vì sai cấu trúc, bản thân too có nghĩa là quá nên

không cần từ much )

ta thấy luôn đáp án đúng là B

7. Đáp án B

Vì câu đã cho có đại từ sở hữu “theirs” ngay sau chỗ trống

!!! Cần lưu ý: Chúng ta sẽ sử dụng “enough of” khi sau nó là một đại từ sử

hữu( bao gồm các từ mine, yours, his, hers, ours, theirs).

8,Đáp án C

Vì ta dịch câu thấy câu đã cho là: anh ấy ăn ... và cảm thấy khó chịu nên để câu

có nghĩa phù hợp dùng cấu trúc : Too adj to V

9,Đáp án B

Vì ta dịch câu thấy câu đã cho là: Tôi mệt lử, tôi đã...tối qua nên để câu có nghĩa

phù hợp dùng cấu trúc (V+enough). Trong trường hợp này sleep là động từ

chính và enough là trạng từ bổ nghĩa cho nó.

10, Đáp án C

Vì ta dịch câu thấy câu đã cho là: nó...để đi bộ, tôi sẽ bắt xe buýt nên để câu

có nghĩa phù hợp dùng cấu trúc : Too adj to V

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

EX 6

answer

2, cheap enough for us to afford

vì theo cấu trúc: adj+enough+for sb+ to V

3, good enough for you to miss

vì theo cấu trúc: adj+enough+for sb+ to V

4, too late to stop

vì theo cấu trúc: too +adj+ toV

5, too old to stay


6, early enough to come

vì theo cấu trúc: adv+enough+toV

7, too slow to beat


Vocabulary Word form IPA(US) Meaning

guitar

wheelchair

access

concert

pizza

Curfew

reaction

basketball

(n)

(n)

(v)

(n)

(n)

(n)

(n)

(n)

/gɪˈtɑr/

/ˈwilˌʧɛr/

/ˈækˌsɛs/

/ˈkɑːn.sɚt/

/ˈpiːt.sə/

/ˈkɝː.fjuː/

/riˈæk.ʃən/


Đàn ghita

Xe lăn

Truy cập

Buổi biểu diễn

Bánh pi-da

Lệnh giới nghiêm

Sự phản ứng lại

Môn thể thao bóng rổ

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

Structure

• They’re playing in Hampton

Stadium next month.

=> S+tobe+Ving (prensent

progressive to talk about the future)

• Let’s go

=> Let’s +base form of verb (to

make suggestions)

Collocations

Get off (work): xong

việc

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

EX 7

answer

1. The moon is bright enough for me to read a book.

2.I have enough money to pay this bill.

3.These rubber trees are big enough for us to give milky liquid.

4.This novel is interesting enough to read.

5.This kind of rubber is good enough for us to make tires for cars.

6.We think you are strong enough to lift this table.

7.He has not enough time to finish this work.

8.My friend is well enough to work again.

9.There isn’t enough time for pupils to write this essay.

10.She doesn’t explain this exercise clearly enough for her pupils do.


bright

bill

rubber

milky

liquid

essay

novel

explain

pupil

(adj)

(n)

(n)

(adj)

(n)

(n)

(n)

(v)

(n)

/braɪt/

/bɪl/

/ˈrʌb.ɚ/

/ˈmɪl.ki/

/ˈlɪk.wɪd/

/ˈes.eɪ/

/ˈnɑː.vəl/

/ɪkˈspleɪn/

/ˈpjuː.pəl/

chiếu sáng

Hóa đơn

Cao su

Có vị sữa

Chất lỏng

Bài tiểu luận

Tiểu thuyết

Giải thích

Học sinh =student

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

EX 8

answer

2, you don’t prepare carefully enough.

vì theo cấu trúc: adv + enough

3, you talk too fast.

vì theo cấu trúc: too+ adj

4, you don’t explain the ideas slowly enough.

vì theo cấu trúc: adv +enough

5, you finish your talks too early.

vì theo cấu trúc: too + adv

6, you don’t answer the quesstion clearly enough.

vì theo cấu trúc: adv+ enough

Structures:

1, In the note of “infinitives with too

and enough”, you should remember

the following something:

• Too/ enough + adj/adv

• Enouh + N

2, (don’t/doesn’t) V+adv

3, too+adv/adj (quá làm sao/quá

như thế nào)

4, V+N (làm cái gì)

• Explain (V) the ideas (N)

• Finish (V) your talks (N)

• Answer (V) the questions (N)

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

EX 9

answer

2 .We don't have enough food.

Câu đã cho có too little food (quá ít thức ăn)

=> chuyển câu với cấu trúc: S+don’t/doesn’t +V+enough+N

3.We haven't brought enough warm clothes.

Câu đã cho có: too few warm clothes (quá ít quần áo ấm)

=> chuyển câu với cấu trúc: S+don’t/doesn’t +V+enough+O

4. They make us walk too far.

Câu đã cho có: 20 miles a day. Con số 20 miles (20dặm, 1 dặm ~1,6km) là 1 con

số lớn, mà bài cho từ “far” để viết lại câu, nên ta sẽ viết lại là: too far)

5 .We're having too many arguments.

Câu đã cho có: all the time ( lúc nào cũng )

=> chuyển câu với từ đã cho “too many” (quá nhiều) , ta phải xác định danh từ

chính (argument) trong câu để đặt sau nó, khi đó ta sẽ có cụm từ: too many

arguments nghĩa là quá nhiều cuộc tranh cãi = lúc nào cũng tranh cãi.

6 .The weather isn't good enough for this kind of exercise.

Câu đã cho có: too bad (quá xấu)

=> chuyển câu với cấu trúc: S+tobe not +adj +enough+ for sb +toV

7 .The instructors don't help us often enough.

Câu đã cho có: hardly ever (hầu như không bao giờ)

=> chuyển câu với câu trúc : S+don’t/doesn’t +V+ adv +enough+O

8 .We aren’t sleeping enough.

Câu đã cho dịch là : chúng tôi chỉ ngủ có 3 tiếng ban đêm => họ ngủ ko đủ giấc

=> viết lại câu như sau : We aren’t sleeping enough.

9 .We're carrying too much equipment.

Câu đã cho có : an amout of (một số lượng) mà bài cho “much” nên ta sẽ viết lại

thành too much (quá nhiều)

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy


tent

(n)

/tent/

Cái lều

clothes

(n)

/kloʊðz/

Trang phục

mile

(n)

/maɪl/

Dặm

argument

(n)

/ˈɑːrɡ.jə.mənt/

Trận cãi vã

All the time

(adv)

/ɔl ðə taɪm/

Lúc nào cũng ,

luôn luôn

instructor

(n)

/ɪnˈstrʌk.tɚ/

Giảng viên, người

hướng dẫn

necessary

(adj)

/ˈnes.ə.ser.i/

Cần thiết

Equipment

(n)

/ɪˈkwɪp.mənt/

Trang thiết bị

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

EX 10

The Hologram concert was awesome! Now I’m too excited for

sleeping. That Eve Durkin can really sing. My

-> to sleep

voice isn’t enough good to sing in the shower! After the

-> good enough

concert we were really hungry, but it was to late to go for

-> too

pizza. I HATE this stupid curfew! It’s too weird understand.

-> to understand

My friend Todd works and has to pay taxes, but the law

says he’s too young for staying out past 10:00 P.M! That’s

-> to stay

really crazy! Well I’d better try to get some sleep or I’ll too

tried too get up in the morning.

-> to

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy


awesome

hungry

weird

adj

adj

adj

/ˈɑː.səm/

/ˈhʌŋ.ɡri/

/wɪrd/

Tuyệt vời

đói

Kỳ lạ

Structures

Can+base form of verb

(abitlity to do anything)

Try to+ base form of verb (cố

gắng làm gì)

Try + Ving (thử làm gì)

Collocations

Pay taxes: nộp thuế

Collect / raise taxes: thu thuế

Get sleep = go to bed: đi ngủ

Hoàng Thị Hà Vy

EX 11

He wasn't tall enough to become a flight attendant.I'm afraid I'm too busy to talk

you now. The paper isn't good enough. I haven't got enough patience to be a

teacher. It's 10 pm. It's too late to the cinema.She couldn't run fast enough to

catch the bus. It's not warm enough to go out. We don't have enough chairs for

all students here.She's too busy trying to come up in our party tonight. We have

enough people to form three groups.Jim is too young to drive motorcycle. No

more workouts. That's enough for today. There isn't enough flour to make fifty

loads of bread. We were too far away to heard what he was saying. The forest is

too dark that he can't see anything. He doesn't know enough English to talk to

foreigner. There was enough food and drink for about twenty people. The tea is

too hot for me to drink. Is this box big enough for all those things?I'm too shy to

talk to him.

Hoàng Thị Hà VY

Hoàng Thị Yên


GERUNDS

AND

INFINITIVES

EX1

2. going 3. set 4. using

5. doing 6. Writing 7. getting

8. giving 9. Hearing

Structures

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Interested in + -ing: quan tâm đến

Be worth+-ind: đáng làm gì

Involve + -ing: có liên quan

Consider+ -ing:xem xét, cân nhắc

Consider sb to V: xem xét ai đó làm gì

Enjoy + -ing: niềm vui thích, sự thích thú, khoái

chí khi được làm một việc gì đó.

Finish+ -ing: kết thúc

Suggested+ -ing: gợi ý

Mind+ -ing: phiền / ngại làm gì.

Look forward to + -ing: mong đợi , mong chờ

1.

2.

3.

Collocations

Take part in = engage in = participate in : tham gia

Interested in : quan tâm đến

Get in touch with: liên lạc với


Từ vựng

(vocabulary)

overview

Từ loại

(word form)

(N)

(V)

Phiên âm

(IPA)

/ˈəʊvəvjuː/

Nghĩa

( Meaning)

một đánh giá chung về một chủ đề

đưa ra một đánh giá chung hoặc tóm

tắt về cái gì .

proposal

(N)

/prəˈpəʊzəl/

+ một kế hoạch ,đề xuất đưa ra để

những người khác xem xét hoặc

thảo luận.

+một lời đề nghị kết hôn

generally

(Adv)

/ˈʤɛnərəli/

+ Thường xuyên.

+ nói chung khi mà không liên

quan đến chi tiết.

+ rộng rãi.

specialists

(N)

(Adj)

/ˈspɛʃəlɪsts/

chuyên gia, một người tập trung

nghiên cứ vào lĩnh vực cụ thể.

sở hữu hoặc liên quan đến kiến

thức, nghiên cứu về chủ đề cụ thể.

Sort

(N)

(V)

/sɔːt/

một loại sự vật hoặc những con

người có một số điểm chung.

+ sắp xếp một cách hệ thống theo

nhóm , loại , hạng.

+giải quyết ( một vấn đề khó khăn)

Task

(N)

(V)

/tɑːsk/

nhiệm vụ, công việc cần thực hiện.

giao một phần công việc cho...

Variety

(N)

/vəˈraɪəti/

chất kượng trạng thái khác nhau,

đa dạng.


Tới: Michael

Chủ đề: Dự án xuất bản dựa trên web

Gửi Michael,

Tôi chỉ viết thư này để hỏi bạn có muốn nói về một phần trong dự án xuất bản

dựa trên web mới mà chúng tôi đang lên kế hoạch hay không.

Hiện tại, thật không đáng để đi vào tất cả các chi tiết, vì vậy tôi sẽ cung cấp cho

bạn một cái nhìn tổng quan nhanh chóng. Đề xuất cơ bản yêu cầu thiết lập

một trang web để cung cấp cho sinh viên kinh doanh một chương trình học

tập dựa trên web. Chúng tôi đang xem xét sử dụng tất cả các loại phương tiện

khác nhau - văn bản, âm thanh và video, bởi vì chúng tôi biết rằng người học

thường thích làm nhiều nhiệm vụ khác nhau. Các chuyên gia CNTT của chúng

tôi vừa viết xong. Các chương trình đặc biệt mà chúng tôi sẽ cần, vì vậy chúng

tôi gần như đã sẵn sàng để bắt đầu. Luis gợi ý mời Intouch đi cùng bạn để xem

bạn có bị can thiệp hay không và tôi nghĩ rằng bạn cũng sẽ rất tuyệt vời cho dự

án. Bạn có phiền cho tôi một chiếc nhẫn trong tuần không? Hoặc chỉ cần gửi

cho tôi một email, mọi việc sẽ dễ dàng hơn.

Tôi mong muốn được nghe từ bạn.

Lời chúc tốt nhất.

Christina.

Để làm được bài này chúng ta cần có khả năng từ vững cùng kĩ

năng dịch văn bản để tìm được từ tính hợp vào chỗ trống . Đồng thời khi

làm bài điền từ này chúng ta cũng có thể tích lũy thêm được cụm từ

trong Tiếng Anh giúp ta cải thiện hơn về các cụm từ cố định .


Ex2

2. He encouraged me to apply for the job.

Meaning: Anh ý khuyến khích tôi nộp đơn vào công việc

3. He advised me to make a formal complaint.

Meaning:Anh ấy khuyên tôi nên khiếu nại chính thức.

4. He asked me to finish the report as soon as possible .

Meaning: Anh ấy yêu cầu tôi hoàn thành bản báo cáo

càng sớm càng tốt.

5. He allowed me to leave early.

Meaning:Anh ấy cho phép tôi về sớm.

6. He warned me not to rush into a decision.

Meaning:Anh ấy cảnh báo tôi không nên vội vàng quyết

định.

1. Don’t forget to V: đừng quên làm gì

2. Remind sb to V: nhắc nhở ai làm gì

3. Encourage sb to V: kkhuyến khích ai làm gì

4. Advise sb to V:khuyên ai làm gì

5. Ask/told sb to V:bảo với ai cái gì

6. Allow/ permit sb to V:cho phép ai làm gì

7. Allow / permit + -ing: cho phép làm gì

8. Warn sb to V:cảnh báo ai làm gì

Structures

Collocations

1. Go on:tiếp tục, xảy ra,sử dụng khi khuyến khích ai

làm gì.

2. Apply for:đăng ký,nộp đơn ứng tuyển.

3. Make a complain: phàn nàn , khiếu nại.

4. Rush into: làm một cái gì đó mà không cần suy nghĩ

cẩn thận trước về nó


EX3:

Little Italy

( Oliver , Daisy and Alfie are are at Oliver and Daisy’s home. Oliver is upset, so Daisy

and Alfie decide to cheer him up)

Daisy : What’ up,Oli?

Oliver : Hm? Oh, nothing.

Alfie: Oh, come on, something’s wrong.

Oliver: No, seriously….

Daisy : Don’t tell me, you invited Amy to go to your class diner but she

decided to go with Elliot instead….

Alfie : Well, you like cooking , so lunch isn’t the problem. I know! You want to

wear your favourite T-shirt but it’s got tomato on it.

Oliver : No! Well, yes, that too – I don’t know how to clean it but, no, that’s not

the real problem . It’s ….well….. it’s Mum.

Daisy: Have you had an argument? When did she phone? Oh, I hate missing

her calls.

Oliver: She hasn’t called yet, don’t worry.

Daisy: So what’s up? Come on! Just tell us! I don’t like seeing you like this, Oli

Oliver: Well, she’s in Italy . And she promised to take me there. I was looking

forward to going. I planed to go to some real Italian restaurants to, you

know,have some real Italian food, so I could try to make some at home.And I

wanted to visit Rome and Venice and Florence and Siena and … well, she hasn’t

even remembered to phone or to send an email or anything!

Daisy: No, but she will. You know she’s always so busy. She never stops

working. Or maybe she’s had a problem. But it’ll be cool, she’ll phone.

Alfie : Do you know what you need? You need to have some fun! We can

pretend to be in Italy!

Daisy : Pretend to be there?

Alfie :Yes! Let’s do it! You wanted to practice cooking Italian food, didn’t you? So

…. Here’s a cookbook. We just need to choose a dish and then we need to buy

ingerdients.You cook, Oliver, and I know how to make great tiramisu .

Daisy,you can get some Italian music- we can eat an garden, like at a pavement

cafe .

Daisy: Alfie, you’re mad. You’re wonderful and mad, and I love doing mad

things….


Mum : Hi, guys!

Oliver : Hi, Mum!

Amy : Hi, Sopie! How’s Italy?

Mum : Oh, it didn’t stop raining all day yesterday, and today it’s foggy! It’s

impossible! I can’t see anything or go anywhere. I’ll have to come back next month.

Oh , and Oli, would you like to come too then? Gennaro Falcone, the famous

restaurant owner, has offered to teach you some of his most popular recipes. I told

him you really enjoy cooking.

Oliver : I’d love to go, Mum! Thanks!

Mum : So. What are you doing? It looks …interesting!

~~~Structures~~~

1. Decide + to V:quyết định

2. Invite sb to V:mời ai làm gì

3. Like +-ing:thích

4. Want + to V: muốn

5. Want sb to V: muốn ai đó làm gì

6. How + to V:thế nào

7. Hate/ Detest/resent +-ing:ghét

8. Promise + to V:hứa

9. To be looking forward to +-ing:mong đợi , mong chờ.

10. Plan + to V: dự định , dự kiến.

11. Try + to V:cố gắng làm gì

12. Try + -ing: thử làm gì

13. Remember + to V: nhớ làm gì như một nhiệm vụ.

14. Remember + -ing: nhớ đã làm gì ở quá khứ, gợi nhắc lại việc đã làm khi hiện tại

vô tình lãng quên.

15. Stop + to V: dừng một việc gì đó đang làm để làm việc khác.

16. Stop+-ing: ngừng, chấm dứt hoàn toàn hay thôi làm một hành động nào đó.

17. Pretend + to V: giả vờ, giả bộ hay ngụy tạo một hành động, một việc nào đó có

mục đích và muốn người khác tin rằng điều đó là sự thật.

18. Love + -ing:yêu thích

19. Would like + to V:mời ai đó làm gì

20. Offer + to V:đề nghị , mời ai làm gì.

21. Would love+ to V: muốn làm gì

22. Let’s V:gợi ý làm gì

23.Enjoy /Fancy + -ing: niềm vui thích, sự thích thú, khoái chí khi được làm một việc

gì đó.

~~~Collocations~~~

1. Cheer sb up: để làm cho một người buồn bã trở nên vui vẻ.

2. Come back: quay lại , trở lại.


Từ vựng

Từ loại

Phiên âm

Nghĩa

( vocabulary)

(word form)

(IPA)

( meaning)

favourite

(Adj)

(N)

/ˈfeɪvərɪt/

Yêu thích

một người hoặc sự vật được

một người nào đó đặc biệt nổi

tiếng hoặc đặc biệt thích

(V)

ghi lại địa chỉ của(một trang web

hoặc dữ liệu khác)để cho phép

truy cập nhanh trong tương lai

argument

(N)

/ˈɑːgjʊmənt/

Tranh luận

restaurant

(N)

/ˈrɛstrɒnts/

Nhà hàng, quán ăn

cool

(Adj)

(N)

(V)

/kuːl/

Chỗ mát mẻ, lạnh nhạt , nguội.

Khí mát , sự điềm tĩnh.

Giảm bớt cơn giận , làm nguội.

pretend

cookbook

ingerdient

tiramisu

(V)

(Adj)

(N)

(N)

(N)

/prɪˈtɛnd/

/ˈkʊkbʊk/

/Ingerdient/

/Tiramisu/

Giả vờ, làm bộ .

không thực sự là những gì nó

được biểu thị như là hiện hữu;

được sử dụng trong một trò

chơi hoặc sự lừa dối

Sách nấu ăn

Nguyên liệu

một món tráng miệng của Ý bao gồm các

lớp bánh bông lan ngâm trong cà phê và

rượu mạnh hoặc rượu mùi với sô cô la

pavement

(N)

/ˈpeɪvmənt/

bột và pho mát mascarpone.

bất kỳ khu vực, bề mặt lát đá

foggy

famous

(Adj)

(Adj)

/ˈfɒgi/

/ˈfeɪməs/

Có sương mù, mập mờ , đám

sương mù.

Nổi danh , có tiếng , có danh

recipe

(N)

/ˈrɛsɪpi/

Công thức nấu ăn, phương

thuốc .


Little Italy

(Oliver, Daisy và Alfie đang ở nhà của Oliver và Daisy. Oliver rất buồn, vì vậy Daisy và Alfie quyết

định vui lên)

Daisy: có chuyện gì vậy, Oli?

Oliver: Hm? Ồ không có gì.

Alfie: Ồ, thôi, có gì đó không ổn.

Oliver: Không, nghiêm túc….

Daisy: Đừng nói với tôi, bạn đã mời Amy đến quán ăn của lớp mình nhưng thay vào đó cô ấy

quyết định đi với Elliot….

Alfie: Chà, bạn thích nấu ăn, vậy bữa trưa không phải là vấn đề. Tôi biết! Bạn muốn mặc chiếc

áo phông yêu thích của mình nhưng nó dính cà chua.

Oliver: Không! Vâng, vâng, điều đó cũng vậy - Tôi không biết làm thế nào để làm sạch nó,

nhưng không, đó không phải là vấn đề thực sự. Nó…. Vâng… .. nó là của Mẹ.

Daisy: Bạn đã có một cuộc tranh cãi? Cô ấy điện thoại khi nào? Ồ, tôi ghét bỏ lỡ cuộc gọi của

cô ấy.

Oliver: Cô ấy vẫn chưa gọi, đừng lo lắng.

Daisy: Vậy có chuyện gì vậy? Cố lên! Chỉ cần cho chúng tôi biết! Tôi không thích nhìn thấy bạn

như thế này, Oli

Oliver: À, cô ấy đang ở Ý. Và cô ấy hứa sẽ đưa tôi đến đó. Tôi đã mong được đi. Tôi dự định đi

đến một số nhà hàng Ý thực sự, bạn biết đấy, thưởng thức một số món ăn Ý thực sự, vì vậy tôi

có thể thử làm một số ở nhà. Và tôi muốn thăm Rome và Venice và Florence và Siena và… à,

cô ấy chưa thậm chí nhớ điện thoại hoặc để gửi email hoặc bất cứ điều gì!

Daisy: Không, nhưng cô ấy sẽ. Bạn biết cô ấy luôn bận rộn. Cô ấy không bao giờ ngừng làm

việc. Hoặc có thể cô ấy gặp vấn đề. Nhưng sẽ rất tuyệt, cô ấy sẽ gọi điện thoại.

Alfie: Bạn có biết mình cần gì không? Bạn cần phải có một số niềm vui! Chúng ta có thể giả vờ

đang ở Ý!

Daisy: Giả vờ ở đó?

Alfie: Vâng! Hãy làm nó! Bạn muốn ca ngợi nấu món Ý, phải không? Vì thế …. Đây là một cuốn

sách dạy nấu ăn. Chúng ta chỉ cần chọn một món ăn và sau đó chúng ta cần mua đồ ăn sẵn.

Bạn nấu ăn, Oliver, và tôi biết cách làm bánh tiramisu tuyệt vời. Daisy, bạn có thể nghe nhạc Ý

- chúng ta có thể ăn trong một khu vườn, như ở một quán cà phê vỉa hè.

Daisy: Alfie, bạn điên rồi. Bạn thật tuyệt vời và điên rồ, và tôi thích làm những điều điên rồ….

~~~~~~~~~~~~~

Mẹ: Chào các bạn!

Oliver: Chào mẹ!

Amy: Xin chào, Sopie! Ý thế nào?

Mẹ: Ồ, hôm qua trời không ngớt mưa và hôm nay trời có sương mù! Đó là điều bất khả thi!

Tôi không thể nhìn thấy bất cứ điều gì hoặc đi bất cứ đâu. Tôi sẽ phải quay lại vào tháng tới.

Ồ, và Oli, bạn có muốn đi cùng không? Gennaro Falcone, chủ nhà hàng nổi tiếng, đã đề nghị

dạy bạn một số công thức nấu ăn phổ biến nhất của anh ấy. Tôi đã nói với anh ấy rằng bạn

thực sự thích nấu ăn.

Oliver: Con rất muốn đi, Mẹ ơi! Cảm ơn!

Mẹ: Vậy. Bạn đang làm gì đấy? Trông nó thật thú vị!


EX4

THE CHOCOLATE REVOLUTION

After reaching Europe with Columbus in 1502,

chocolate rapidly became popular as a drink

to improve

Eating

that people took improve their health. To eat

solid chocolate, however, was unpopular; it was

dark and bitter, and manufactures did not know

to mix

to make

how mix it with milk and cream making it taste

better.

The discovery of milk chocolate was made in

trying

1876 by Daniel Peter in Switzerland. After to try

unsuccessfully for eight years to mix milk and

dark chocolate. Peter began working with his

neighbour, the chemist Henri Nestlé . Nestlé

to feed

had developed a new product feeding Babies;

to make

in the process, he had discovered how make

condensed milk, which Peter tried instead of to

using

use ordinary milk. The result was an instant

success, and the two men joined forces

to manufacture

manufacturing milk chocolate for a grateful

world.


CUỘC CÁCH MẠNG SOCOLA

Sau khi đến châu Âu với Columbus vào năm 1502, sô cô la

nhanh chóng trở nên phổ biến như một thức uống mà mọi

người dùng để cải thiện sức khỏe của họ. Tuy nhiên, ăn sô cô

la đặc không được ưa chuộng; nó có màu sẫm và đắng, và các

nhà sản xuất đã không biết cách trộn nó với sữa và kem để

làm cho nó ngon hơn. Việc khám phá ra sô cô la sữa được

thực hiện vào năm 1876 bởi Daniel Peter ở Thụy Sĩ. Sau tám

năm cố gắng trộn sữa và sô cô la đen không thành công.

Peter bắt đầu làm việc với người hàng xóm của mình, nhà hóa

học Henri Nestlé. Nestlé đã phát triển một sản phẩm mới để

cho Trẻ sơ sinh ăn; Trong quá trình này, anh đã khám phá ra

cách làm sữa đặc mà Peter đã thử thay vì sử dụng sữa thông

thường. Kết quả là một thành công ngay lập tức, và hai người

đàn ông đã hợp tác để sản xuất sô cô la sữa cho thế giới .


Từ vựng

(vocabulary)

Từ loại

(word form)

Phiên âm

(IPA)

Nghĩa

( meaning)

improve

(V)

/ɪmˈpruːv/

Cải thiện, làm cho hoàn hảo,

làm cho tốt thêm, trở nên tốt

hơn

solid

(N)

/ˈsɒlɪd/

Thể chắc , chất rắn.

(Adj)

Chắc, chặt , vững vàng, cường

tráng.

dark

bitter

(N)

(Adj)

(N)

/dɑːk/

/ˈbɪtə/

Trong bóng tối , khoảng tối

tăm,tối mò.

ảm đạm, bí mật, kín, mờ ám, mù

mịt, tối om, nham hiểm.

Vị đắng, chất đắng.

(Adj)

Đắng, đồ ăn có vị đắng, nói

chuyện chua chát.

manufacture

(V)

/ˌmænjʊˈfækʧə/

+ làm (một cái gì đó) trên quy

mô lớn bằng cách sử dụng máy

móc.

+ bịa ra hoặc bịa đặt (bằng

chứng hoặc một câu chuyện)

(N)

Sự chế tạo, vật chế tạo.

mix

/mɪks/

Hỗn hợp

discover

(V)

/dɪsˈkʌvə/

tìm kiếm (cái gì đó hoặc ai đó) bất

ngờ hoặc trong quá trình tìm kiếm



Từ vựng

(vocabulary)

(vocabulary)

(word form)

Phiên âm

(IPA)

Nghĩa

( meaning)

chemist

product

(N)

(N)

/ˈkɛmɪst/

/ˈprɒdʌkt/

một chuyên gia về hóa học; một

người tham gia vào nghiên cứu

hóa học hoặc thí nghiệm.

Sản phẩm

process

(N)

/prəˈsɛs/

Sự tiến hành dự tiến

triển,phương pháp, phương sách.

(V)

thực hiện một loạt các hoạt động

cơ học hoặc hóa học trên(một cái

gì đó)để thay đổi hoặc bảo quản nó

condense

(V)

/kənˈdɛns/

Đông đặc , ngưng kết, súc tích, tụ lại.

ordinary

(Adj)

/ˈɔːdnri/

không có tính năng đặc biệt hoặc

khác biệt; thông thường

instant

(N)

(Adj)

(N)

(V)

/ˈɪnstənt/

/ʤɔɪn/

Tầm thường , sự thường.

đang xảy ra hoặc đến ngay lập tức;

cấp bách; bức xúc.

một thời điểm chính xác của thời

gian.

Tham gia , liên kết,nối liền.

join

(N)

một địa điểm hoặc một đường mà

hai hoặc nhiều thứ được kết nối

hoặc gắn chặt với nhau

force

(V)

(N)

/fɔːs/

Bắt buộc, cường đoạt,

dùng võ lực để đoạt được.

ảnh hưởng,có hiệu lực, sức

mạng, sức tác dụng thể lực.

grateful

(Adj)

/ˈgreɪtfʊl/

cảm thấy hoặc thể hiện sự đánh

giá cao của lòng tốt; biết ơn

Ex5:

1. To reduce:Với câu trúc ‘prepare to do st’ ( chuẩn bị làm gì) ta chia động từ

‘reduce’ ở dạng ‘ to infinitive’.

Meaning : Tôi e rằng mình không đủ khả năng chi trả. Bạn có sẵn sàng hiamr

giá nếu tôi trả tiền mặt không?

2. To cheat ( or cheating) : Với cấu trúc ‘ be stupid + to V/Ving’ ta chia động từ

‘cheat’ ở dạng ‘ gerund’/ ‘ infinitive’.

Meaning : Jack thật ngu ngốc khi gian lận trong kì thi. Anh ta nhất định bị bắt.

3. Knowing: Với cấu trúc ‘ verb + object+ bare infinitive or –ing ‘ ( verb: feel, hear,

notice,observe, obserhear, see, watch) , but there is sometimes a difference in

meaning. Ta chia động từ ‘ know’ ở dạng ‘ gerund’ vì anh ý chứng kiến toàn bộ sự

việc và cảm thấy tốt khi giúp giải quyết được vấn đề.

Meaning : Anh ý cảm thấy tốt khi biết rằng anh ý đã giúp giải quyết vấn đề.

4. To leave: Với cấu trúc ‘ free to V’( không bị giới hạn hoặc kiểm soát) ta chia động

từ

‘ leave’ ở dạng ‘ to infinitive’

Meaning : Đừng cảm thấy rằng bạn cần phải ở lại đến cuối hội nghị . bạn có thể

tự do rời đi bất cứ lúc nào.

5. To see: Với cấu trúc ‘ curious+ to V’ ta chia động từ ‘see’ ở dạng ‘ to infinitive’.

Meaning: Tôi đã không đến Wolverton từ khi còn là một đứa trẻ, và tôi tò mò

muốn xem nơi này thay đổi như thế nào.

6. To underestimate(or underestimating)

Meaning: bất cứ ai cô gắng leo núi sẽ thật ngu ngốc khi đánh giá thấp thnahs

thức mà họ phải đối mặt.

7. To open ( or opening)

Meaning:Mọi người nói với tôi rằng tôi thật điên rồ khi mở một cửa hàng ở khu

vực này của thành phố, nhưng nó đã rất thành công cho đến nay.

8.Talking: Với cấu trúc ‘ busy+V-ing’ ta chia động ‘ talk’ ở dạng ‘ gerund’.

Meaning: Cô ấy đã quá bận rộn nói chuyện trên điện thoại để nhận ra rằng

Dave đã vào phòng.

9.Earning: Với cấu trúc ‘ verb + object+ bare infinitive or –ing ‘ ( verb: feel, hear,

notice,observe, obserhear, see, watch) , but there is sometimes a difference

meaning.

Meaning:Cô ấy cảm thấy tội lỗi khi kiếm được nhiều tiền như vậy trong khi rất

nhiều người dân trên đất nước đang sống trong cảnh nghèo đói


10.To resign( resigning)

Meaning: Thật là khó xin việc vào lúc này, bạn rất muốn từ chức.

11.To panic.

Meaning: . Một số người sẽ hoảng sợ nếu họ ngửi thấy khói trong nhà.

12.Turning: Với cấu trúc ‘ verb + object+ bare infinitive or –ing ‘ ( verb: feel, hear,

notice,observe, obserhear, see, watch) , but there is sometimes a difference in

meaning.

Meaning:Tôi cảm thấy thật khủng khiếp khi mọi người quay lưng lại với buổi hòa

nhạc, nhưng không còn chỗ nữa.

~~~Collocations~~~

1. Be curious to V : quan tâm đến việc tìm hiểu về mọi người hoặc những thứ

xung quanh.

2. Be foolish ( of sb) to V/ V-ing: không khôn ngoan, ngu ngốc hoặc không thể hiện

sự phán xét tốt.

3. Be crazy V-ing/ To V:ngu ngốc hoặc không hợp lý.

4. Verb + object+ bare infinitive or –ing ‘ ( verb: feel, hear, notice,observe,

obserhear, see, watch) , but there is sometimes a difference in meaning.

• V+ O+ V( bare): khi chứng kiến toàn bộ sự việc .

• V+O+V-ing: khi chứng kiến một phần của sự việc.

5. Busy + V-ing: bận làm gì.

6. Prepare to do st : chuẩn bị làm gì.

7. Free to V: không bị giới hạn hoặc kiểm soát.

8. Be mad to V/ V-ing:cực kì ngớ ngẩn hoặc ngu ngốc.


Ex6:

• Decided going

• Expected being

decided to go (it is followed by an infinitive : to +base form)

expected to be (it is followed by an infinitive:to +base form)

• Remembered to meet

remembered meeting (The first she met a few of other

students at a school party. Then she remembered that she did it. Note: last year )

• Enjoyed to talk

• Promised coming

• Stop to write

enjoyed talking (it's followed by a gerund : base form + -ing)

promised to come ( it's followed by an infinitive : to +base form)

stop writing ( I don’t write anymore not I stop another activity in order

to write)

• From to be

from being ( it's a preposition that followed by a gerund)

Structures:

• Decide + to V : quyết định làm gì

• Expect + to V : mong muốn làm gì

• Remember + to V : nhớ phải làm gì

• Remember + V_ing : nhớ đã làm gì

• Enjoy + V_ing : thích làm gì

• Promise + to V : hứa làm gì

• Stop + to V : dừng để làm gì

• Stop + V_ing : dừng làm gì


Journal (n) /ˈdʒɜːnl/ Nhật ký

Quite

Problem

(adv)

(n)

/kwaɪ/

/ˈprɒblə/

Khá,không nhiều

Vấn đề

Hoàng Thị Yên

Ex2:

1.To find ( dịch nghĩa : Ông White không có tiền,vì vậy ông ấy quyết định tìm một công

việc.)

2.To finish ( dịch nghĩa : Cô giáo nhắc nhở học sinh hoàn thành bài tập đúng hạn. )

3.To complete ( dịch nghĩa : Lãnh đạo nhóm mong muốn tôi hoàn thành bài này

sớm

nhất có thể.)

4.To use ( dịch nghĩa : Cô giáo khuyến khích chúng tôi tra từ điển bất cứ khi nào chúng

tôi không chắc về nghĩa của từ.)

5.To write ( dịch nghĩa : Trước khi tôi đi học đại học , mẹ tôi nhắc tôi viết thư cho bà một

lần một tuần.)

6.To touch ( dịch nghĩa : Bà Snow đã cảnh báo bọn trẻ không được chạm vào lò nóng.)

7 To know ( dịch nghĩa : Học sinh ở góc đó giả vờ biết câu trả lời cho câu hỏi của giáo

viên.)

8.To keep ( dịch nghĩa : Người dân không được phép nuôi thú cưng ở toà nhà đó.)

9.To pass ( dịch nghĩa : Tất cả những người đăng kí đuợc yêu cầu phải thi đỗ kì thi đầu

vào )

10.To take ( dịch nghĩa : Ann khuyên chị gái của cô ấy đi máy bay thay vì lái xe đến San

Francisco .)

Colocations:

• Decide to do st : quyết định làm gì

• Remind sb to do st : nhắc nhở ai đó làm gì

• Expect sb to do st : mong đợi ai đó làm gì

• Encourage sb to do st : khuyến khích ai đó làm gì

• Warm sb not to do st : cảnh báo ai không được làm gì

• Pretend to do st : giả vờ làm gì

• To be allowed to do st : được phép làm gì

• To be required to do st : được yêu cầu làm gì

• Advise sb to do st : khuyên ai làm gì

Hoàng Thị Yên

Hoàng Thị Yên

Hoàng Thị Yên

Ex3:

1.B ( dịch nghĩa : Tôi không thể nhịn được cười câu chuyện hài hước của anh ấy.)

2.A ( dịch nghĩa : Tom đề nghị tặng Jane một chiếc vé đi xem ca kịch nhưng cô ấy đã

từ chối nó.)

3.D ( dịch nghĩa : Những công nhân đó dừng lại để uống cà phê bởi vì họ thấy mệt

mỏi với công việc mới.)

4.C ( dịch nghĩa : Anh ấy đề nghị họ giúp mình.)

5.C ( dịch nghĩa : Ông Minh khuyên gia đình tôi không nên rời Việt Nam.)

6.A ( dịch nghĩa : Tôi hi vọng gặo lại người phụ nữ đó.)

7.C ( dịch nghĩa : Cô ấy lãng phí nhiều thời gian vào việc sửa đôi giày cũ đó.)

8.D ( dịch nghĩa : Anh ấy rất hối hận vì năm trước đã lười nhác.Anh ấy đã mất việc.)

9.C ( dịch nghĩa : Cô ấy nhớ là mình đã gặp người phụ nữ đó tháng trước.)

10.C ( dịch nghĩa : David đã cố gắng hết sức để giải thích nhưng bạn gái anh ta từ

chối nghe.)

Structures:

• Can't help + V-ing: không thể nhịn được

• Offer + to V : đề nghị làm gì

• Refuse +to V: từ chối làm gì

• Stop + to V: dừng một việc này để làm việc khác

Stop + V-ing : dừng hẳn / không làm nữa

• Advise sb against + V-ing : khuyên ai không làm gì

• Advise sb + to V : khuyên ai làm gì

• Waste time + to V : lãng phí thời gian làm gì

• Regret + to V: lấy làm tiếc phải làm gì

Regret + V-ing : hối tiếc vì đã làm gì

• Remember + to V: nhớ phải làm gì

Remember +V-ing : nhớ đã làm gì

• Try one's best + to V : cố hết sức để làm gì

Ex4

2.F ( She stop to go for walk in the park in order to study not quit it)

3. T ( She’d like to be a better student = She wants to improve her study habits)

4.T ( She decided to make a list of things she needs to do every day.)

5.F( Exactly she often forgets to read her list not always reads it)

6.T ( She remembered reading about a support group )

7.T ( Being in a group is a good idea = It’s good to be in a group)

8.T( “Like”can be followed by a gerund or an infinitive)

Colocation:

• Go for a walk: đi dạo/đi bộ

• Make a list of st: lập danh sách

Hoàng Thị Yên

Ex5:

1.Reading ( dịch nghĩa : Bạn có nhớ đã đọc nó không? => Dùng remember + V_ing : nhớ đã

làm gì.)

2.To read ( Cấu trúc : S + V + too + adj/adv + to + V : Cái gì quá cho ai đó để làm gì.)

3.Collecting/To collect ( “Start” có thể được theo sau bởi to + V / V_ing mà không có sự khác

biệt về nghĩa .)

4.Meeting ( Cấu trúc : Avoid + V_ing : tránh làm gì.)

5.To study (dịch nghĩa : Tôi cố gắng hết sức học tốt Tiếng Anh để nhận được công việc tốt

hơn và cấu trúc : Try one’s best to V : cố hết sức làm gì .)

6.Jump ( dịch nghĩa : Tôi thấy một người đàn ông nhảy ra khỏi cửa sổ 5 phút trước nhưng tôi

không nhớ được mặt của anh ta.)

Structure:

• S+V+too+adj+( for sb) +to V: quá cho ai đó để làm gì

• Start to do/doing st: bắt đầu làm gì

• Avoid + V_ing : tránh làm gì

• Try + to V : cố gắng làm gì

Try + V_ing : thử làm gì

• See sb + V : thấy ai đó đã làm gì

See sb + V_ing : thấy ai đó đang làm gì

Hoàng Thị Yên

Ex 6:

1. Breaking ( dịch nghĩa : Thằng bé thừa nhận làm vỡ bình hoa cổ của tôi.)

2. Having heard – not to enter ( dịch nghĩa : Sau khi đã nghe điều kiện , tôi quyết định không

tham gia cuộc thi nữa ; cấu trúc : After / Before + V_ing .)

3. Hoping – praying ( dịch nghĩa : Họ tiếp tục hi vọng và cầu nguyện rằng mọi thứ sẽ tốt đẹp.)

4. Giving ( dịch nghĩa : Bạn có phiền giúp tôi một tay không?)

5. Having ( dịch nghĩa : Hãy tưởng tượng phải thức dạy lúc 4 giờ sáng mỗi ngày.)

6. Talking ( dịch nghĩa : Cô ấy cứ nói mãi về căn bệnh của mình cho đến khi chúng tôi rời khỏi

đó.)

Colocations:

1. Admit + V_ing : thừa nhận làm gì

2. After + having V_p2 : sau khi đã làm gì

3. Keep + V_ing : tiếp tục làm gì

4. Would you mind + V_ing : ngại làm gì

5. Imagine +V_ing : tưởng tượng làm gì

6. Go on + V_ing : chỉ sự liên tục của hành động

7. Go on + to V : chỉ sự thay đổi của hành động

Hoàng Thị Yên

THE END

GRAMMAR EBOOK K24ATC

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?